ASV Specene

SEPTEMBER 2010
Roadway Design and Construction Specifications

Summary of 2010 Revisions and Updates
SECTION 1.00 INTRODUCTION

Revised the definition of Public Improvements
SECTION 2.00 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS AND PROCEDURES

Clarified plan review schedule.
Clarified plan update process.
Revised the title used by the Parks & Open Space to Parks, Recreation & Open Space to
reflect the City’s reorganization.
Minor modifications to the general notes.
Added requirements for street plan and profiles regarding traffic control facilities,
irrigation sleeving, phasing of public improvements, and criteria for showing water and
sanitary sewer on street plans.
Clarified all retaining walls require a retaining wall permit.
Clarified the requirements for Elevation Certificates for residential and non-residential
developments.
Referenced the new “Rules and Regulations Regarding Stormwater (Quality) Discharge
for Construction Activities” for the preparation of the Erosion Control Plan.
Included requirements for Urban Centers and TODs for signing and striping plans.
Included requirements for Urban Centers and TODs for street lighting plans.
SECTION 3.00 PLAN AND DRAFTING STANDARDS
Added mylar acceptability authority and further clarified mylar acceptability standards.
Clarified mylar revision process.
SECTION 4.00 ROADWAY DESIGN AND TECHNICAL CRITERIA
Added Urban Center and TODs criteria and standards.

Added criteria regarding sidewalks and driveways.
Changed references from Section 45 to the Aurora Water Department’s new erosion
control manual, “Rules and Regulations Regarding Stormwater (Quality) Discharge for
Construction Activities”.
Modified the offsite street design criteria to reflect current AASHTO guidelines.
Modified the “Statement of Construction Observation and Materials Testing of Project
Improvements” statement to be consistent with the model certification letter handed out
by the Public Improvements Inspections.
Added criteria for solar powered street lights alternative.
SECTION 5.00 PAVEMENT DESIGN
Added Urban Center and TODs criteria for pavement design.
i
SECTION 20.00 EARTHWORK
Updated tracking mud on City streets to reflect the Aurora Water Department’s new
erosion control manual.
Added section on measurement and payment.
SECTION 22.00 STABILIZED SUBGRADE (formerly LIME STABILIZED SUBGRADE)
Modified the soluble sulfate content from less than 0.5 percent to less than 0.2 percent.
Temperature requirements have been added for finishing and curing.
Mechanically stabilized subgrade subsection has been added.
SECTION 23.00 STREET CONSTRUCTION AGGREGATES
Added Measurement and Payment section.
SECTION 24.00 HOT MIX ASPHALT PAVEMENT
Surface tolerances were changed to be in conformance with the Colorado Department of

Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, Section 1.07
Conformity to Roadway Smoothness Criteria.
Added Stone Mastic Asphalt Pavement section.
SECTION 25.00 ASPHALT PLANING
SECTION 27.00 SURFACE TREATMENTS
This section is a total rewrite.
SECTION 30.00 CONCRETE WORK
SECTION 31.00 CONCRETE PAVEMENT
Clarified the use of screeds.
SECTION 35.00 RIPRAP AND FILTER BLANKET
Updated the riprap tables to be in conformance with the current Urban Drainage and
Flood Control District’s drainage manuals.
ii
SECTION 36.00 ROAD CUTS
Clarified who needed to obtain a permit when working in the City’s right-of-way.
Modified the requirements for trench patching, roto-milling and overlay within the City’s
public streets.
Added criteria for private landscaping and irrigation within public right-of-way.
SECTION 40.00 SEEDING
SECTION 41.00 SODDING
SECTION 42.00 MEDIAN COVER MATERIAL
SECTION 43.00 CHAIN LINK FENCE
SECTION 45.00 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL ASSOCIATED WITH

CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES
This section has been deleted in its entirety and has been replaced by Aurora Water
Department’s “Rules and Regulations Regarding Stormwater (Discharge) for
Construction Activities”.
SECTION 50.00 TRAFFIC CONTROL
Updated telephone numbers.
TABLE OF CONTENTS, LIST OF TABLES, LIST OF FIGURES, LIST OF NOMOGRAPHS,

AND INDEX
Updated all of the data contained in the above references.
iii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
. Table of Contents i
. List of Tables viii
. List of Figures Xi
. List of Nomographs xi
1.00 INTRODUCTION
1.01 SCOPE 1-1
1.02 AUTHORITY 1-1
1.03 REVISIONS 1-1
1.04 REVIEW AND APPROVAL 1-1
1.05 INTERPRETATION 1-1
1.06 DEFINITIONS AND TERMS 1-2
2.00 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS AND PROCEDURES

2.01 GENERAL 2-1
2.02 DRAWING SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 2-1
2.03 CIVIL CONSTRUCTION PLAN REQUIREMENTS 2-4
2.04 STORM DRAINAGE PLANS AND REPORTS 2-13
2.05 ROADWAY PLANS 2-14
2.06 WATER DISTRIBUTION, SANITARY SEWER, AND STORM SEWER 2-18
PLANS
2.07 GRADING PLANS 2-21
2.08 COMBINING PLANS 2-26
2.09 SIGNING AND STRIPING PLANS 2-26
2.10 SURVEY CONTROL DRAWING 2-27
2.11 STREET LIGHTING PLAN 2-28
3.00 PLAN AND DRAFTING STANDARDS

3.00 ACCEPTANCE OF MYLAR SUBMITTAL 3-1
3.01 MEDIA REQUIREMENTS 3-1
3.02 DRAFTING STANDARDS 3-1
3.03 PLAN SET INDEXING 3-2
3.04 REVISIONS 3-3
4.00 ROADWAY DESIGN AND TECHNICAL CRITERIA

4.01 GENERAL 4-1
4.02 SIDEWALKS, CURB AND GUTTER, DRIVEWAYS, RAILINGS, AND 4-1
RETAINING WALLS
4.03 DRAINAGE 4-4
4.04 HORIZONTAL ALIGNMENT 4-6
4.05 VERTICAL ALIGNMENT 4-14
4.06 STREETSCAPE DESIGN AND SPECIFICATIONS 4-19
4.07 SPECIFICATION FOR FIRE LANES, PRIVATE STREETS OR DRIVES, AND 4-19
PARKING LOTS
4.08 ROADWAY SPECIFICATIONS 4-24
i
Page
4.09 STREETLIGHT POLICY 4-26
5.00 PAVEMENT DESIGN

5.00 PAVEMENT DESIGN 5-1
5.01 REPORT SUBMITTAL AND REVIEW 5-2
5.02 REPORT FORMAT 5-3
5.03 GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION 5-5
5.04 PAVEMENT DESIGN PORTION of the REPORT 5-6
5.05 SUBGRADE CHARACTERISTICS 5-6
5.06 TRAFFIC - EQUIVALENT SINGLE AXLE LOADS (ESAL) 5-8
5.07 MINIMUM PAVEMENT SECTIONS AND DEFAULT SECTIONS 5-11
5.08 PAVEMENT MATERIALS 5-12
5.09 PAVEMENT DESIGN PROCEDURE 5-13
5.10 MISCELLANEOUS 5-16
5.11 FORMS, NOMOGRAPHS, SAMPLE 5-16
6.00 RESERVED
7.00 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS

7.01 SCOPE 7-1
7.02 LICENSES 7-2
7.03 PERMITS 7-2
7.04 WORK HOURS 7-3
7.05 AUTHORITY OF THE PROJECT MANAGER 7-4
7.06 AUTHORITY OF THE PUBLIC IMPROVEMENT OBSERVER 7-4
7.07 CONSTRUCTION OBSERVATIONS 7-4
7.08 DEFECTIVE MATERIALS AND WORK 7-5
7.09 PROTESTS 7-5
7.10 INSPECTION FACILITIES 7-5
7.11 INITIAL ACCEPTANCE 7-5
7.12 WARRANTY PERIOD 7-6
8.00 THROUGH 19.00 RESERVED
20.00 EARTHWORK
20.01 SCOPE 20-1
20.02 CLEARING AND GRUBBING 20-1
20.03 TOPSOIL 20-2
20.04 WATERING 20-3
20.05 REMOVAL OF STRUCTURES AND OBSTRUCTIONS 20-4
20.06 EXCAVATION AND EMBANKMENT 20-6
20.07 RESET STRUCTURES, FENCES, AND GUARDRAIL 20-13
20.08 TRACKING MUD ON CITY STREETS 20-15
20.09 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 20-15
ii
Page
21.00 STRUCTURE EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
21.01 GENERAL 21-1
21.02 MATERIALS 21-1
21.03 CONSTRUCTION 21-1
22.00 STABILIZED SUBGRADE

22.01 DESCRIPTION 22-1
22.02 PURPOSE 22-1
22.04 EQUIPMENT 22-2
22.05 CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTALS 22-3
22.06 STABILIZED MIX DESIGN 22-3
22.07 PROCESSING MATERIALS 22-4
22.08 COMPACTION 22-7
22.09 FINISHING AND CURING 22-8
22.10 TOLERANCES 22-8
22.11 CONFORMITY WITH PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS 22-9
22.12 MEASUREMENT 22-10
22.13 TESTING AND INSPECTION 22-11
22.14 PAYMENT 22-11
22.15 CHEMICAL STABILIZATION 22-12
22.16 MECHANICALLY STABILIZED SUBGRADE 22-14
23.00 STREET CONSTRUCTION AGGREGATES

23.01 SCOPE 23-1
23.03 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS FOR BASE COURSE MATERIAL 23-2
23.04 MEASEUREMENT AND PAYMENT 23-3
24.00 HOT MIX ASPHALT PAVEMENT

24.01 DESIGN INTENT 24-1
24.03 MIX DESIGN AND PLANT PRODUCED MIXTURE REQUIREMENTS 24-6
24.04 MIXTURE DESIGN SUBMITTALS 24-8
24.06 MANUFACTURE 24-11
24.07 TACK COAT 24-12
24.08 PLACEMENT 24-13
24.09 LONGITUDINAL JOINTS 24-14
24.10 TRANSVERSE JOINTS 24-14
24.11 SEGREGATION 24-15
24.12 COMPACTION 24-16
24.13 PRODUCTION TOLERANCES 24-17
24.15 TESTING AND INSPECTION 24-23
iii
Page
24.17 STONE MASTIC ASPHALT PAVEMENT 24-25
25.00 ASPHALT PLANING

25.01 SCOPE 25-1
25.02 GENERAL 25-1
25.03 STOCKPILE OF MATERIAL 25-1
25.05 CONSTRUCTION METHODS 25-2
26.00 RESERVED
27.00 SURFACE TREATMENTS

27.01 GENERAL 27-1
27.02 SLURRY SEAL 27-7
27.03 CHIP SEAL 27-21
27.04 CAPE SEAL 27-30
27.05 HOT CHIP SEAL 27-33
27.06 CRACK SEAL 27-38
28.00 RESERVED
29.00 THERMOPLASTIC PAVEMENT MARKINGS

29.02 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES 29-1
29.03 APPLICATION 29-3
30.00 CONCRETE WORK

30.01 SCOPE 30-1
30.03 CONCRETE PROPORTIONING 30-5
30.04 MIXING CONCRETE 30-6
30.05 READY-MIXED CONCRETE 30-7
30.06 PLACING CONCRETE 30-7
30.07 FORMS 30-9
30.08 REINFORCING STEEL 30-9
30.09 JOINTS 30-10
30.10 PUMPING CONCRETE 30-11
30.11 COLD WEATHER PROTECTION 30-11
30.12 HOT WEATHER CONCRETING 30-12
30.13 CURING CONCRETE 30-12
30.14 FINISHING 30-12
30.15 MISCELLANEOUS 30-15
iv
Page
31.00 CONCRETE PAVEMENT
31.01 SCOPE 31-1
31.03 BATCHING 31-2
31.04 MEASURING AIR CONTENT 31-3
31.05 FORMS 31-3
31.06 PLACING CONCRETE 31-4
31.07 CONSOLIDATING AND FINISHING 31-6
31.08 INTEGRAL CURB 31-7
31.09 CURING 31-8
31.10 JOINTS 31-8
31.11 STRUCTURES 31-9
31.12 PROTECTION AND OPENING TO TRAFFIC 31-9
31.13 SLIP FORM PAVING 31-10
31.14 SUBGRADE PREPARATION 31-11
31.15 TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE 31-11
31.16 PAY REDUCTION FACTORS 31-13
32.00 MATERIALS TESTING

32.01 SCOPE 32-1
32.02 RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE TESTING AGENCY 32-1
32.03 TESTING 32-2
32.04 RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE CONTRACTOR OR DEVELOPER 32-8
32.05 PERSONNEL QUALIFICATIONS 32-8
33.00 FLOWABLE BACKFILL

33.01 SCOPE 33-1
33.02 MIX DESIGN 33-1
33.03 MATERIALS AND PRODUCTION 33-1
33.04 PLACEMENT 33-1
33.05 EXCESS EXCAVATION 33-2
33.06 FLASH FILL 33-2
34.00 RELATED CONSTRUCTION AND SPECIFICATIONS

34.01 UTILITY CONSTRUCTION 34-1
34.02 STORM DRAINAGE SPECIFICATIONS 34-1
34.03 MINIMUM STORM DRAINAGE PIPE SIZE 34-1
34.04 TRENCHLESS TECHNOLOGY 34-1
35.00 RIPRAP AND FILTER BLANKET

35.01 RIPRAP 35-1
35.02 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS 35-1
36.00 ROAD CUTS

36.01 SCOPE 36-1
36.02 LICENSE 36-1
v
Page
36.03 PERMITS 36-1
36.04 NOTIFICATION AND INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS 36-1
36.05 ROAD CUT DEFINITION 36-2
36.06 DISTURBED ROADWAY DEFINITION 36-2
36.07 REQUIREMENTS AND EXCEPTIONS 36-2
36.08 SMALL TRENCH CUT IN AN EXISTING ROADWAY 36-2
36.09 TRENCHES CROSSING A ROADWAY 36-3
36.10 TRENCHES WITHIN A ROADWAY 36-3
36.11 POTHOLES FOR LOCATES OR SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATIONS IN 36-5
ASPHALT PAVEMENTS
36.12 POTHOLES FOR LOCATES OR SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATIONS IN 36-5
CONCRETE PAVEMENTS
36.13 AMOUNT OF UNPAVED ROADWAY TRENCH 36-6
36.14 TRENCHLESS TECHNOLOGY – BORES AND MISSILES 36-6
36.15 TRAFFIC SIGNAL RESTORATION 36-6
36.16 TRAFFIC SIGNAGE AND PAVEMENT MARKINGS RESTORATION 36-7
36.17 PUBLIC SAFETY 36-7
36.18 MINIMUM PAVEMENT STANDARDS 36-7
36.19 SMOOTHNESS CRITERIA 36-7
36.20 WARRANTY PERIOD 36-8
36.21 LANDSCAPING AND IRRIGATION WITHIN PUBLIC RIGHT-OF-WAY 36-8
40.00 SEEDING
40.01 SCOPE 40-1
40.04 PERMISSIBLE PLANTING TIMES 40-3
40.05 MAINTENANCE 40-3
40.06 SEED GERMINATION INSPECTION 40-4
40.07 MEASRUREMENT AND PAYMENT 40-4
41.00 SODDING
41.01 SCOPE 41-1
41.03 CONSTRUCTION 41-1
41.04 GUARANTEE 41-1
41.05 INSPECTIONS 41-2
42.00 MEDIAN COVER MATERIAL

42.01 GENERAL 42-1
vi
Page
43.00 CHAIN LINK FENCE
43.01 SCOPE 43-1
43.03 WORKMANSHIP 43-2
44.00 UTILITY LOCATION GUIDELINES

44.01 GUIDELINES 44-1
50.00 TRAFFIC CONTROL

50.02 PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION 50-1
50.03 DURING CONSTRUCTION 50-1
50.04 AFTER CONSTRUCTION 50-3
50.05 TRAFFIC SIGNALS 50-3
vii
LIST OF TABLES
Page
4.1 ALIGNMENT CONTROLS 4-6
4.2 URBAN CENTERS AND TODs ALIGNMENT CONTROLS 4-7
4.3 CURB RETURN FLOWLINE RADIUS AT INTERSECTIONS 4-8
4.4 SUPERELEVATIONS FOR HORIZONTAL CURVATURE RUNOFF 4-10
LENGTH
4.5 CURB RETURN FLOW LINE RADIUS at INTERSECTIONS 4-13
4.6 ROADWAY SPECIFICATIONS 4-24
4.7 URBAN CENTERS AND TODs ROADWAY CLASSIFICATIONS 4-25
5.0 MOISTURE TREATMENT REQUIREMENTS 5-7

5.1 MINIMUM ESAL (X106) 5-9
5.1a MINIMUM ESAL (X106) (URBAN CENTERS AND TODs) 5-9
5.2A MINIMUM PAVEMENT SECTIONS 5-11
5.2B DEFAULT SECTIONS ALLOWABLE 5-11
5.3 DIFFERENT PAVING MATERIALS 5-12
5.4 STRENGTH COEFFICIENTS 5-13
AASHTO TABLE 2.4 5-14
20.06.4.02 MOISTURE TREATMENT REQUIREMENTS 20-9

20.06.8 COMPACTION AND MOISTURE FOR VARIOUS SOIL TYPES 20-12
22.03.1 PRE-APPROVED STABILIZING AGENTS 22-1

22.03.4 PRE-APPROVED SEALANTS 22-2
22.06 STABILIZATION MIX DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 22-4
22.07.4 FINAL MIXING (LIME OR LIME/FLY ASH) 22-7
22.13 SCHEDULE FOR MINIMUM MATERIALS SAMPLING AND TESTING 22-11
22.16 ACCEPTABLE ASPHALT PAVEMENT SECTIONS FOR SWELL 22-13
MITIGATION
22.16.4 GEOGRID STRUCTURAL PROPERTIES 22-16
22.16.8.1 GUIDE FOR ESTIMATING SUBGRADE SOIL STRENGHTS (FINE 22-20
GRAINED SOILS)
23.1 CLASSIFICATION TABLE FOR AGGREGATES 23-1
24.02.1.1 AGGREGATE PROPERTIES 24-2

24.02.1.2 GRADATION RANGE 24-3
24.02.1.3 MINIMUM VMA% 24-4
24.02.2.1 PROPERTIES OF PERFORMANCE GRADED BINDERS 24-5
24.03.1 SUPERPAVE MIXTURE PROPERTIES 24-7
24.04.3 MIX DESIGN VERIFICATION TOLERANCES 24-9
24.06.2.1 MIXTURE DISCHARGE TEMPERATURES 24-12
24.08 MINIMUM AIR AND SURFACE TEMPERATURES LIMITATIONS FOR 24-13
MIX PLACEMENT
24.13.2 JOB MIX FORMULA TOLERANCES 24-18
24.14.2.02 TABLE OF PRICE REDUCTION FACTORS 24-21
24.14.3 PRICE REDUCTION – THICKNESS 24-23
viii
Page
FOR ITEM 9 – HOT MIX ASPHALT PLACEMENT
24.17.1 SCHEDULE FOR MINIMUM MATERIALS SAMPLING AND TESTING 24-26
FOR STONE MASTIC ASPHALT PAVEMENTS
24.17.2 SUPERPAVE SMA MIXING AND COMPACTION TEMPERATURES 24-26
24.17.3 SUPERPAVE SMA TESTING FREQUENCY 24-27
24.17.4 MASTER RANGE TABLE FOR STONE MASTIC ASPHALT 24-28
27.02.1 SLURRY MIX TYPES AND ASSOCIATED USES 27-8

27.02.2.01.1 SLURRY SEAL EMULSION TEST REQUIREMENTS 27-8
27.02.2.01.2 SLURRY SEAL RESIDUE TEST REQUIREMENTS 27-9
27.02.2.02 AGGREGATE SPECIFICATIONS 27-9
27.02.2.02.1 SLURRY SEAL AGGREGATE GRADATION 27-10
27.02.2.02.06 REQUIRED LABORATORY REPORT INFORMATION 27-11
27.02.2.07.2.01 COMPONENT MATERIAL MIX LIMITS 27-12
27.02.2.07.2.02 TRIAL MIX CHARACTERISTICS 27-12
27.02.2.07.2.02.1 CURED TRIAL MIX EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 27-13
27.02.2.07.2.02.2 WET STRIPPING REQUIREMENTS 27-13
27.02.4 SLURRY SEAL TABLE OF PRICE REDUCTION FACTORS 27-20
27.03.2.01.1 CHIP SEAL EMULSTION TEST REQUIREMENTS 27-21
27.03.2.01.2 CHIP SEAL RESIDUE TEST REQUIREMENTS 27-22
27.03.2.02.1 CHIP SEAL AGGREGATE GRADATION 27-23
27.03.3.02 CHIP SEAL TEMPERATURE LIMITATIONS 27-24
27.03.3.05.1 CHIP SEAL MATERIAL APPLICATION RATE 27-26
27.03.4 CHIP SEAL TABLE OF PRICE REDUCTION FACTORS 27-29
27.04.1 CHIP SEAL AND SLURRY SEAL LAYERS FOR CAPE SEAL 27-30
APPLICATION
27.04.3.01 CAPE SEAL TEMPERATURE LIMITATIONS 27-31
27.04.3.04 CAPE SEAL MATERIAL APPLICATION RATES 27-32
27.05.2.03 HOT CHIP SEAL AGGREGATE GRADATION 27-34
27.05.3.01 HOT CHIP SEAL TEMPERATURE LIMITATIONS 27-34
27.05.3.04 HOT CHIP SEAL MATERIAL APPLICATION RATES 27-37
27.05.4 HOT CHIP SEAL TABLE OF PRICE REDUCTION FACTORS 27-38
30.1 FINE AGGREGATE DELETERIOUS SUBSTANCES 30-2

30.2 COARSE AGGREGATE DELETERIOUS SUBSTANCES 30-3
30.3 GRADING COARSE AGGREGATE 30-3
30.4 CLASS OF CONCRETE SPECIFICATIONS 30-5
30.5 TIME BETWEEN PLACING CONCRETE AND REMOVAL OF FORMS 30-9
30.6 MINIMUM COVER FOR REINFORCING STEEL 30-10
31.1 PROPORTIONS FOR NORMAL WEIGHT CONCRETE 31-2

31.2 SUGGESTED LOCATION OF LONGITUDINAL JOINTS 31-9
31.3 PAY FACTOR FOR DEFICIENCY IN THICKNESS 31-12
31.4 PAY FACTORS FOR AIR CONTENT AND STRENGTH 31-13

FOR EMBANKMENT
FOR AGGREGATE BASE COURSE
ix
Page
FOR BITUMINOUS PAVING MIXTURES
FOR PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE
FOR SLURRY SEAL
FOR STABILIZED SUBGRADE
32.7 CONCRETE CYLINDER BREAKS 32-7
35.1 CLASSIFICATION AND GRADATION OF ORDINARY RIPRAP 35-1

35.2 THICKNESS REQUIREMENTS FOR GRANULAR BEDDING 35-3
x
LIST OF FIGURES
Page
2.1 EXAMPLE KEY MAP 2-5
2.2 PROPERTY LINES AND EASEMENTS 2-15
4.1 REQUIRED WIDENING AT PRIVATE STREET AND LOCAL 4-9

INTERSECTIONS/CURVES
4.2 SUPERELEVATION DIAGRAM EXAMPLE 4-11
4.3 PERMISSIBLE INTERSECTION GRADE 4-14 &
4-15
4.4 PRIVATE STREET PAVEMENT WIDENING ON HORIZONTAL CURVE 4-23
LESS THAN 55' R
44.1 SIX LANE ARTERIAL UTILITY GUIDELINES 44-2

44.2 FOUR LANE ARTERIAL UTILITY GUIDELINES 44-3
LIST OF NOMOGRAPHS
SECTION
N5.1 DESIGN CHART, FLEXIBLE PAVEMENTS, ARTERIALS, ALL 5
COMMERCIAL AND INDUSTRIAL
N5.2 DESIGN CHART, FLEXIBLE PAVEMENTS, LOCAL AND 5
COLLECTOR EXCEPT COMMERCIAL AND INDUSTRIAL
FIG 3.6 CORRECTION OF MODULUS OF SUBGRADE REACTION FOR 5
POTENTIAL LOSS OF SUBGRADE SUPPORT (6)
N5.3 DESIGN CHART, RIGID PAVEMENTS, ARTERIALS, ALL 5
COMMERCIAL AND INDUSTRIAL
N5.4 DESIGN CHART, RIGID PAVEMENTS, LOCAL AND COLLECTOR 5
EXCEPT COMMERCIAL AND INDUSTRIAL
xi
1.00 INTRODUCTION
1.01 SCOPE
1.02 AUTHORITY
1.03 REVISIONS
1.04 REVIEW AND APPROVAL
1.05 INTERPRETATION
1.06 DEFINITIONS AND TERMS
SECTION 1.00 INTRODUCTION
1.01 Scope
This volume, entitled Roadway Design and Construction Specifications (Specifications) sets
forth the minimum acceptable criteria for public and private roadway facilities and parking lots
within the City of Aurora. Deviations or variances from these standards, may be considered;
however, it shall be the responsibility of the applicant to demonstrate to the satisfaction of the
City Engineer the proposed variance meets or exceeds the minimum acceptable criteria. Any
proposed waiver of a City Code provision may only be made according to the procedures set
forth in the City Code. Policies and technical criteria not specifically addressed in this document
shall follow the provisions of the latest editions, or as noted in the Specifications, of the
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials' "A Policy on Geometric
Design of Highways and Streets", and the "Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge
Construction" of the Colorado Department of Transportation.
1.02 Authority
Portions of the Aurora City Code most often consulted in this volume include; Streets,
Sidewalks, and other Public Places, Chapter 126; Traffic and Vehicles, Chapter 134; Utilities,
Chapter 138 including Storm Drainage, Article VII; and Zoning, Chapter 146.
1.03 Revisions
Revisions to these Specifications may be adopted annually and as often as needed. It is the
responsibility of the Consultant/Contractor/Developer to obtain the latest revisions from the City.
1.04 Review and Approval

City staff will review all submittals for general compliance with these Specifications. However,
approval by the City does not relieve the owner, engineer, or designer from the responsibility of
insuring that their calculations, plans, specifications, construction and as-built drawings are
correct and in compliance with these Design and Construction Specifications.
1.05 Interpretation
In the interpretation and application of the provisions of the Design and Construction
Specifications, the following shall govern:
These Specifications shall be regarded as the minimum requirements needed for the protection
of the health, safety, and welfare of the people of Aurora, and shall be liberally construed to
further such purposes.
Introduction 1-1 9.2010

Whenever these Specifications and any other law, ordinance, resolution, rule, or regulation of
any kind contain any restrictions covering any of the same subject matter, whichever standards
produce higher quality shall govern.
These Specifications shall not abrogate or annul any permits issued before their effective date;
any construction plans approved before their effective date; or any final plat documents that have
been recommended for approval by the Planning Commission prior to the effective date of these
standards.
1.06 Definitions and Terms

Wherever in these Specifications or on the submitted drawings the following terms, acronyms, or
pronouns in place of them are used, the intent and meaning shall be interpreted as follows:
1.06.1 Associations
AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials

ACI American Concrete Institute
AI Asphalt Institute
ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
AWS American Welding Society
AWWA American Water Works Association
CDOT Colorado Department of Transportation
COA City of Aurora
CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
FHWA Federal Highway Administration, Department of Transportation
MUTCD Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices
PCA Portland Cement Association
U. B. C. Uniform Building Code
UDFCD Urban Drainage and Flood Control District
1.06.2 Other Abbreviations
A.C. Asphaltic Concrete

B.F.E. Base Flood Elevation

C&G Curb and Gutter
CIP Cast Iron Pipe
COI Curb Opening Inlet
CSP Corrugated Steel Pipe
HBP Hot Bituminous Pavement
HDPE High Density Polyethylene Pipe
MH Manhole
NRCP Nonreinforced Concrete Pipe
PCC Portland Cement Concrete
PCR Point of Curb Return
PVC Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe
RCP Reinforced Concrete Pipe
R.O.W. Right-of-Way
S_ _._ _ COA Standard Detail
1.06.3 Definitions
CITY shall mean the City of Aurora, Colorado, a home rule municipal corporation of the
Counties of Adams, Arapahoe, and Douglas.
CITY CODE shall mean the duly adopted City Code of the City of Aurora, Colorado, as
amended.
CONTRACTOR shall mean a person, company, corporation or entity licensed and bonded as a
contractor in the City in accordance with the City Code.
ENGINEER shall mean the City Engineer, the Director of Aurora Water, the Director of Public
Works, or other authorized representative acting on behalf of the City.

EXPRESSIONS Wherever the words, "as directed", "as required", "as permitted", or words of
like meaning are used, it shall be understood that the direction, requirements, or permission of
the City's Project Manager is intended. Similarly, the words "approved", "acceptable",
"satisfactory" shall refer to approval by the City's Project Manager.
Whenever the words "these Specifications" are used it shall be understood that reference is made
to the City of Aurora's "Roadway Design and Construction Specifications" and "Public Utility
Improvements Rules and Regulations Regarding Standards and Specifications" including all
parts, supplements, and revisions pertaining thereto.
OBSERVER shall mean the authorized representative of the Project Manager assigned to
observe the work
PUBLIC IMPROVEMENTS shall mean any improvement the City is authorized to provide
under its charter or ordinance passed pursuant to such charter or under the constitution and laws
of this state, including, but not limited to physical facilities, whether publicly owned and
maintained or not, that are required for the benefit, welfare, or service of more than a single
property and include, but not be limited to, the construction, reconstruction, and improvement of
the following: streets and avenues, major and minor arterials, collector streets and avenues,
service and frontage roads, fire lanes, bike paths, parkways, alleys, passenger facilities,
monuments and range boxes, sanitary sewer mains, including laterals to more than a single
building service, storm sewers, inlets, concrete drain pans, underdrains, retention and detention
facilities, including necessary structures, channel facilities; street lighting, traffic signals,
medians, facilities for storm water quality Best Management Practices, water mains, hydrants
and valves, meters, tree plantings and landscaping, irrigation facilities, and repairs and
replacements thereof necessitated pursuant to the issuance of a City of Aurora building permit or
other authorization for use of the land.
DESIGNATED PRIVATE CONSTRUCTION WORK includes: private sewer systems, water

and sewer service lines to buildings, grading, drainage structures, retaining walls, parking lots,
private streets and walks, fire lanes, driveways, and associated construction.
PROJECT MANAGER The authorized representative of the City who provides overall technical
coordination and monitoring of work.
SUBCONTRACTOR Any person, company, corporation or entity licensed and bonded as a

contractor in the City in accordance with the City Code which has a direct or indirect contract
with the Contractor or other Subcontractor and furnishes and/or performs on-site labor and/or
furnishes materials used in connection with the performance of the work.

SURETY shall mean the entity which bonds and guarantees the Contractor's satisfactory
performance of the work as described in these specifications. (Bonded)
TESTING AGENCY Any individual or other person or entity which is qualified and licensed to
perform the required sampling, analysis, testing, and professional recommendation service.
TRAFFIC ENGINEER shall mean the Traffic Engineer of the City.

2.00 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS AND PROCEDURES
2.01 GENERAL
2.02 DRAWING SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
2.03 CIVIL CONSTRUCTION PLAN REQUIREMENTS
2.04 STORM DRAINAGE PLANS AND REPORTS
2.05 ROADWAY PLANS
2.06 WATER DISTRIBUTION, SANITARY SEWER, AND STORM SEWER PLANS
2.07 GRADING PLANS
2.08 COMBINING PLANS
2.09 SIGNING AND STRIPING PLANS
2.10 SURVEY CONTROL DRAWING
2.11 STREET LIGHTING PLAN
SECTION 2.00 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS AND PROCEDURES
2.01 General
The procedures outlined herein apply to consulting engineers and developers seeking approval of
civil construction plans and reports. Observing these guidelines will assist in timely review.
Building permits will not be issued until all related civil construction plans are approved. Before
the civil construction plans will be accepted for review the consulting engineer must call 303-
739-7300 to schedule a pre-submittal meeting with the Engineering Control staff. A review fee
must be paid prior to the Civil Plans being accepted. Prior to the pre-submittal meeting the
consultant may obtain a copy of the pre-submittal checklist from the Engineering Control staff to
make sure their submittal is complete.
2.02 Drawing Submittal Procedures

2.02.1 Minimum Requirements for Approval In addition to the subdivision plat
and/or site plan, adequate detail drawings of all necessary public improvements and
of any private construction work not already covered by City specifications shall be
submitted for review and approval. For City projects where the City specifications
do not cover the work, specifications shall be submitted for review and approval.
Approvals will be required for the entire water distribution system (including fire
protection facilities), sanitary sewer, storm drainage system (including drainage
reports, erosion control plans and reports, storm water quality plans), pavement
design reports, grading plans, and roadway design, before issuance of a permit for
any phase of development will be approved by the Public Works Department and
the Water Department. The only exception is when the Erosion and Sediment
Control Plans and Report are approved; a Stormwater Quality Permit may be
obtained to begin grading operations prior to the remaining civil plans being
approved. However, should the approval of the final grading and/or drainage plan
necessitate changes to the Erosion and Sediment and Control Plan, the developer is
responsible for those changes to the plans and the necessary changes in the field.
2.02.2 Submittals Submit one legible print (either blueline or blackline) of each sheet
for the first submittal, unless otherwise requested, and one for each subsequent
submittal and one copy of each report to the Engineering Services Division, City of
Aurora Public Works Department, Room 3218, for review. See Section 5.00
PAVEMENT DESIGN for pavement design submittal requirements and for limits
of concrete paving required for arterial roadways. For concrete paving on City
streets a jointing plan must be submitted. See “Rules and Regulations Regarding
Submittal Requirements and Procedures 2-1 9.2010

Stormwater (Quality) Discharge for Construction Activities” for erosion and
sediment control plans and reports and storm water quality plans submittal
requirements.
Developers are cautioned that information submitted to the Building Division or

other departments is not automatically forwarded to the Engineering Services
Division. Separate submittals are required for civil construction plans and building
plans.
2.02.3 Review Priority The civil construction drawing submittals shall be reviewed
in accordance with a schedule established when the plans are submitted. This
schedule is based on the number of plans in the submittal package. Each project
will receive no more than three reviews. The first review is being the longest, the
second not as long and the third review the shortest. The third review is the review
for approval. The City is committed to meeting the review schedule established for
a project, thereby, a development project is relatively assured of a known time
frame for plan approval. Please note the schedule assumes a time frame for the
consultant to respond to comments. It is the responsibility of the developer to
confirm with their consultant for their time required to respond to the City’s
comments.
As each civil plan set is submitted it is placed into the City’s queue of civil plans to
be reviewed. In a sense it is a “first come, first served” process with the time of
review schedule added to the process. Package submittals include plans as defined
in Section 2.02.1 MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR APPROVAL. Piecemeal
submittals are those which are missing one or more of the items listed in Section
2.02.1 MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR APPROVAL. Additional engineering
information beyond those items described herein may be required as needed.
2.02.4 Review Time The time required for the review process will be based on the
number of sheets submitted. A letter will be mailed detailing the anticipated review
time for all projects that will receive Certificate of Occupancies. See the
“Development Handbook” distributed by the Office of Development Assistance for
the model review schedule.
2.02.5 Returned Plans and Reports The check prints/report along with the City
routing slip/checklist will be returned to the Consultant or his local representative
with any comments and necessary revisions noted on the plans and/or the reports.
The Consultant or his local representative will be notified when the submittal is

ready to be picked up. It is strongly recommended Consultants use the routing
slip/checklist as an aid for compliance to these specifications.
2.02.6 Resubmittals
2.02.6.01 After making all the revisions requested on the original plans/report the
Consultant may resubmit according to the instructions checked at the bottom of
the City routing slip. Plans with unaddressed comments may be subject to
additional review fees if the plans cannot be approved with the third submittal.
2.02.6.02 All previous check prints/reports and the City routing slip/checklist must
accompany each resubmittal for further review and/or approval.
2.02.6.03 When indicated on the City routing slip, the Consultant shall submit mylar
originals of the original plans and a revised copy of the drainage report for
approval. (See Section 3.0 for mylar requirements.) Once the plans and reports
are approved, they will become the property of the City and remain on file in
the office of the City Engineer. These approved plans cannot be modified
without written permission of the Engineer of Record. One complete set of
prints of the approved construction plans will be returned to the Consulting
Engineer, who will be notified when they are ready to be picked up.
2.02.6.04 Approvals The length of time for approvals typically ranges from five to ten
working days depending on the number of sheets in the plan set. Extremely
large plan sets are likely to take longer than ten working days. Right-of-ways
and easement dedications by separate document and license agreements must be
executed prior to the Civil Plan approval.
2.02.6.05 Time Between Submittals The City’s overall schedule for plan approval is
set up for the consultant to turn the plans around in one business week.
However, if the consultant decides to take more time to pick up the review
comments, that is their prerogative. The consultant and the developer need to
be aware this will affect the time to approve the civil plans. A word of caution:
should the time between submittals exceed a year this will be cause for stopping
the review process and requiring the review process to start over, including new
review fees.
2.02.7 Review Status The current status of plans and reports in the review
process can be obtained by calling the Engineering Services routing desk, 303-739-

7312. Please limit calls to those absolutely necessary, however, as excessive phone
calls only serve to lengthen the time required to review plans.
2.02.8 Updating Expired, Approved Civil Plans Once a set of civil plans are
approved they are valid for one year from the date they are approved. If no permits
or main extension agreements are executed within that one year, the civil plans
approval will expire. It is possible to extend the approval of a set of civil plans for
one more year on a case by case basis. To do this, the engineer of record must write
a letter to the Associate City Engineer requesting the plans be updated. The letter
must include the six-digit plan approval number. Once this letter is received the
plans will be reviewed against the current set of criteria to see if the plans need to
be brought up to date to those criteria. If not, then, the plans may be approved for
one more year. This may be done only once.
2.03 Civil Construction Plan Requirements

2.03.1 GeneralAll civil construction plans and drainage reports shall be prepared by, or
under the direct supervision of, a Professional Engineer, licensed in the State of
Colorado, and shall be reviewed for the minimum requirements set forth herein and
in the City Code. The submitter should be aware that whenever unusual or serious
problems are anticipated in conjunction with a proposed development, additional
information and analysis beyond the minimum requirements of these specifications
will be required.
The City is not responsible for the accuracy or adequacy of the design, dimensions
and elevations on the plans (which shall be confirmed and correlated at the job site).
The City, through the approval of the development plan or drainage report, assumes
no responsibility for the completeness and/or accuracy of the development plan or
drainage report.
2.03.2 Vicinity Map Minimum scale is 1" = 2000' showing the location and
name of all arterial roadways within one mile of the proposed development and all
other roadways in the vicinity of the proposed development. The project area shall
be indicated by shading. This map is required on the cover sheet or first sheet of all
submittals. The map is also required in all drainage reports.
2.03.3 Key Map Minimum scale is 1" = 500' showing the location and name of all
roadways within and adjacent to the proposed development, all non-existing future
roadways and the City plat page(s) on which the development can be found. The
plat page information may be obtained from Engineering Services, Room 3218, at

the Aurora Municipal Center. This map should be oriented with the north arrow
pointing to the top of the drawing.
This map shall appear in the upper right-hand corner on every sheet showing
proposed roadway, water distribution, sanitary sewer, storm drainage, or grading
improvements, with the roadway or area to which the design pertains shaded as
shown on the following example. If the proposed improvements are shown on a
single plan sheet, no key map is required.
Figure 2.1
2.03.4 Civil Construction Plans and Detail Sheets All civil construction
plans and detail sheets shall conform to the following criteria and show the
following information. Additional specific requirements are discussed later in these
specifications.
2.03.4.01 Title Block A title block is required on every report, plan sheet and cover sheet
submitted. The subdivision name and filing number; site plan name and its City
file number (if applicable); the type of improvement; name of
Developer/Owner, name of contact, address (including zip code), telephone

number of the Development/Owner contact, the name of the Consultant; name
of contact, address (including zip code) and telephone number of contact; and
sheet number (consecutive, beginning with the cover sheet) shall be included in
the title block. If the plans or reports do not relate to a specific subdivision, the
name of the street or channel, as well as the limits of the project, shall be clearly
indicated. The title block shall be located in the extreme lower right-hand
corner of each sheet. See Section 5.01 for title information needed on
Pavement Design Reports.
2.03.4.02 Approval Block A signature block is required on every sheet and cover
sheet of the development plans, the first page of every drainage report, and the
first page of every pavement design report submitted for review and approval.
Water distribution plans require the signatures of the City Engineer, Water
Department, and Fire Department. Sanitary sewer, storm drainage plans,
drainage reports, and erosion and sediment control plans and reports require the
signatures of the City Engineer and the Water Department. Overlot or area
grading plans require the City Engineer's signature, and if access is proposed
onto the public right of way without an approved site plan, the Traffic
Engineer's signature also is required. The City Engineer's signature is required
on all Roadway Plans and on all pavement design reports. Traffic construction
control plans, signing and striping plans, and street light plans, require the City
Engineer's signature. Traffic Signal Plans require the Traffic Engineer’s
signature. The height of the approval block should be adjusted according to the
number of signatures required. The addition of an "Approved for Curb and
Gutter Only" and "Approved for Street Permits" block is required on public
Roadway Plans only. The addition of an "Approved for Paving Parking Lot"
block is required on any plans showing parking lot or private roadway
construction.

TYPE PLAN SIGNATURES REQUIRED
Water distribution and water system report City Engineer
Water Department
Fire Department
Sanitary sewer system and City Engineer
Sanitary sewer report Water Department
Storm drainage system and City Engineer
drainage report Water Department
Roadway and grading City Engineer
Roadway modifying existing or new raised median City Engineer
construction within the public R.O.W.
Access proposed onto the public R.O.W. without City Engineer
an approved site plan Traffic Engineer
Erosion and sediment control plan and report City Engineer
Water Department
Traffic construction control City Engineer
Signing and striping plan City Engineer
Pavement design report City Engineer
All plans on a case-by-case basis Parks, Recreation and Open Space
Traffic Signal Plans Traffic Engineer
Street Light Plan Traffic Engineer

The approval block shall be located in the lower right-hand corner of the sheet just
above the title block only. THE APPROVAL BLOCK SHALL INCLUDE ONLY

THOSE SIGNATURES NEEDED ON EACH SHEET. An example approval
block is provided above.
2.03.4.03 Scale The minimum scales are listed below. Larger scales may be
required where necessary to clearly show details. Use a standard engineering
scale. All plan drawings shall have the proper bar scale legibly shown on the
plan sheet.
All plan and profile plans

Horizontal 1" = 50'
Vertical 1" = 5'
Master drainage plans may use scales as large as 1” = 200’, 1” = 100’ or

less is preferred.
Preliminary, and final drainage plans; overall utility plans (single family
detached 1" = 50'; multifamily and commercial 1" = 30' min.).
Master and preliminary drainage plans may use scales as large as 1" =
500' for off-site drainage basins.
If multiple sheets are used for the drainage study then one large-scale
drawing must be a part of the plans to show the whole project. This
allows relating the individual sheets to the entire project.
2.03.4.04 North Arrow North shall point towards either the top or the right-hand
margin of the sheet only.
2.03.4.05 Date of Plan The original date of the plan and any subsequent revision.
2.03.4.06 Seal and Signature The seal and signature of the Professional Engineer,
licensed in the state of Colorado, under whose supervision the plans were
prepared is required. Locate and date the seal and signature next to the City of
Aurora Approval Block. The mylars shall bear the seal and signature, legibly.
It is preferred the seal be an electronic seal affixed to the mylar with an original
signature. “Wet stamping” mylars usually become smudged or “bleed” so they
are illegible. The original signature shall be done with black ink.
2.03.4.07 Benchmark The benchmark number, description and elevation shall be

placed on each sheet showing any form of vertical design, including elevations
based on City datum. Call Aurora Surveying at 303-326-8015 for city

benchmark information or access the City’s web page at
http://www.auroragov.org (go to the Public Works Department link and select
the Vertical Control link).
Example: Benchmark No. ___ chiseled square, " ", at back of walk,
southeast corner of Montview Blvd. and Galena St. Elevation
5338.19. Looped to C.O.A. Benchmark. #F-11, chiseled square, "
", concrete based of signal light actuator pole, southeast corner of
Montview Blvd. and Havana St. City of Aurora Datum = 5334.03.
Projects shall be prepared using the NAVD 1988 vertical datum and the
NAD 83 / 92 HARN horizontal control system (see Section 2.10).
2.03.4.08 Underground Utilities The type, size, location, and the number of all
underground utilities shall be shown. Field verified elevations and locations are
required on all development plans for existing underground utilities which will
potentially affect the proposed design or construction. It will be the
responsibility of the Contractor to verify the existence and location of all
existing underground utilities along his route of work prior to commencing any
construction.
2.03.4.09 Private Improvements Private improvements such as roadways, sidewalks,

driveways, utilities, etc., shall be clearly shown and labeled as such on each
sheet of the development plans. See required notes in Section 2.03.5.
When a request is made for the City to assume maintenance of any private
improvement, it shall be the responsibility of the person(s) making the request
to prove the private improvement was in fact constructed in accordance with the
applicable Roadway Design and Construction Specifications in effect at the
time of original construction of the private improvement. The City will review
these requests under normal review procedures. Private improvements built
according to City specifications and standards may be accepted at the City's
discretion. Private improvements not constructed in accordance with the
applicable Design and Construction Standards and Specifications will not be
accepted for maintenance by the City.
2.03.4.10 Copyright Notes Copyright notes shall not be placed on the mylars or any
reports submitted for approval. The City must be able to make copies of the

approved plans and reports at any time without written authorization from the
plan’s author.
2.03.5 Required Notes These notes shall appear on the cover sheet. If a cover
sheet has not been used, they shall be put on every sheet of the submittal.
2.03.5.01 City of Aurora plan review is only for general conformance with City of Aurora
design criteria and the City Code. The City is not responsible for the accuracy
and adequacy of the design, dimensions, and elevations which shall be
confirmed and correlated at the job site. The City of Aurora, through the
approval of this document, assumes no responsibility for the completeness
and/or accuracy of this document.
2.03.5.02 All roadway construction shall conform to City of Aurora "Roadway Design
and Construction Specifications," latest revision.
2.03.5.03 All water distribution, sanitary sewer, and storm drainage construction shall
conform to City of Aurora "Public Utility Improvements Rules and Regulations
Regarding Standards and Specifications," latest revision
2.03.5.04 All materials and workmanship shall be subject to inspection by the City. The
City reserves the right to accept or reject any materials and workmanship that
does not conform to the City standards and specifications.
2.03.5.05 The Contractor shall notify the City Public Improvement Inspections Division,
303-739-7420, 24 hours prior to the beginning of construction.
2.03.5.06 Location of existing utilities shall be verified by the Contractor prior to actual
construction. For information, contact Utility Notification Center of Colorado,
1-800-922-1987 or 811.
2.03.5.07 The Contractor shall have one signed copy of the plans (approved by the City of
Aurora), one copy of the appropriate standards and specifications at the job site
at all times, and a copy of any permits and extension agreements needed at the
job site at all times.
2.03.5.08 It is the Consultant's responsibility to accurately show existing conditions, both

on-site, and off-site, on the construction plans. Any modifications needed due
to conflicts, omissions, or changed conditions either on-site or off-site, which
arise in the field, will be entirely the Developer's responsibility. The cost to

rectify any adverse situation to meet the City standards and specifications and
the City Code shall be borne solely by the Developer.
2.03.5.09 The owner/developer must obtain the written permission of the adjacent
property owner(s) prior to any off-site grading or construction.
2.03.5.10 Concrete shall not be placed until the forms have been inspected and a pour slip
issued. Pour slips will not be issued unless the Contractor has, at the job site, a
copy of the approved plans bearing the signature of the City Engineer and with
the "Approved for Curb and Gutter Only" block initialed by the City Engineer's
representative.
2.03.5.11 Paving shall not start until a soil report and pavement design is approved by the
City Engineer and subgrade compaction tests taken by the developer’s geotech
are approved by Public Improvements Inspections.
2.03.5.12 Standard City of Aurora curb ramps shall be constructed at all curb returns, at
all "T" intersections and at all curbside kiosks or clusters, unless otherwise
modified by these plans.
2.03.5.13 All stationing is based on centerline of roadways unless otherwise noted.
2.03.5.14 All elevations are (indicate top

of curb or flow line) unless otherwise noted.
2.03.5.15 The City of Aurora shall not be liable for the maintenance of
. (Insert name of specific private
improvement.) These facilities may not meet City standards and shall remain in
private maintenance in perpetuity.
2.03.5.16 The contractor/developer is responsible for contacting CDOT to ensure that all
work on or adjacent to state highways or CDOT R.O.W. meets CDOT
requirements.
2.03.5.17 The streetlight installation cost is funded by the developer/owner. Coordinate the
streetlight locations and installation with the Public Works Department 303-739-
7300.
2.03.5.18 The Owner/Contractor must obtain a C.D.P.H.E. storm water discharge permit
from the Colorado Department of Public Health and Environment, if required.

2.03.5.19 The Owner/Contractor is responsible for coordinating with the Army Corp of
Engineers for wetland mitigation or work within the Waters of the U.S., if
required. It is the responsibility of the Owner/Contractor to inform the City of
Aurora of the Army Corp of Engineer’s requirements. City approval of the
construction plans is subject to the Owner/Contractor obtaining a 404 permit, if
applicable.
2.03.6 Where applicable label adjacent subdivision names and their City of Aurora Civil
Plan approval numbers.
2.03.7 Details The plans shall include adequate details of special structures not covered
by City of Aurora Standard Details. Do not include City Standard Details in the
plans, but reference them by detail number, only.
2.04 Storm Drainage Plans and Reports

In accordance with the requirements set forth in Chapter 2.00, the City of Aurora "Storm
Drainage Design and Technical Criteria" manual, and "Public Utility Improvements Rules and
Regulations Regarding Standards and Specifications," the following information shall be shown
on all storm drainage plans or included in all drainage reports submitted for approval.
2.04.1 Master Drainage Study A Master Drainage Study Plan and Report is
required prior to approval of any planned community zoned district or site plan in
excess of 80 acres or any phased commercial/industrial development in excess of 10
acres. The study shall be coordinated with all applicable drainage master plans and
prepared according to the City of Aurora "Storm Drainage Design and Technical
Criteria" manual.
2.04.2 Preliminary Drainage Plan and Report A Preliminary Drainage Plan

and Report must be approved prior to approval of any subdivision plat or site plan.
The Preliminary Drainage Plan and Report must be approved by the City Engineer
and the Water Department prior to Planning Commission action. The Preliminary
Drainage Plan and Report shall be prepared according to the City of Aurora "Storm
Drainage Design and Technical Criteria" manual.
2.04.3 Final Drainage Plan and Report The Final Drainage Plan and Report
shall be a detailed study and analysis of the proposed development. It shall include
detailed calculations for all runoff, as well as for all drainage structures, of facilities
within the proposed development. The Final Drainage Plan and Report must be
approved by the City Engineer and the Water Department prior to the issuance of

any building permits within the proposed development and prior to the subdivision
plat approval. The Final Drainage Plan and Report must be submitted for review
and approval with the construction plans for the entire development and will be
reviewed concurrently with said construction plans. The report shall be typed on 8-
1/2" x 11" paper. All reports shall be bound with either three-ring binder or plastic
comb binding. Reports bound with stitching, thermal bindings, glued bindings or
perfect bindings will not be accepted. Plans and calculations comprising the Final
Drainage Plan and Report shall be prepared in accordance with the City of Aurora
"Storm Drainage Design and Technical Criteria" manual.
2.04.4 Title of Storm Drainage Plan and Report All drawings and reports
shall include in the title the subdivision name, subdivision filing number, and the lot
and block number where applicable.
2.04.5 Channel Plans and Profiles Where streams or channels are Urban
Drainage and Flood Control District (UDFCD) maintenance eligible the following
note shall be added. “The UDFCD shall be contacted for a channel pre-
construction meeting and to establish routine inspection for required elements of
the channel, i.e., toe protection, grade control structures, etc.
2.05 Roadway Plans

In addition to the requirements set forth in Section 2.03 CIVIL CONSTRUCTION PLAN
REQUIREMENTS, the following information shall be shown on all plans submitted for review
and approval of roadways, fire lanes, private streets or drives, and parking lots.
For residential developments only, private street designs shall be completed to the same degree
of detail as the design of public local streets. A private street is a privately owned street,
roadway, or way providing through access to and from the public street system or providing
access to an area of parking spaces. The street width, sidewalks, tree lawn, and other features
shall be the same for private streets as the requirements for the equivalent public street. Parking
lot driveways or internal circulation driveways with perpendicular parking for multifamily,
commercial, or industrial sites shall not be required to conform to standards for private streets.
2.05.1 Plan The plan view shall include, but not be limited to, the following.
2.05.1.01 Show property and/or R.O.W. lines, easements and/or tracts. Type and
dimension of easement or tract shall be clearly labeled. R.O.W. and street
widths shall be dimensioned. Label lot and blocks. Show sidewalks.

2.05.1.02 Survey lines and stations shall be based on centerline stationing only. Use
continuous stationing for each street. Stationing shall be equated to and from
flow line stationing at bubbles, horizontal radius curves, and other departures
from normal roadway cross sections, i.e., the pavement cross slope is not 2%,
and at least 200' from all intersections. Stationing shall be equated to flow line
stationing at cul-de-sacs. Also, if the roadway is horizontally curved, whenever
the grade is less than 1%, separate flow line profiles are required as the basis for
design.
2.05.1.03 Show roadways and roadway names. Label the roadway classification.
2.05.1.04 Show existing and proposed utilities and structures, including, but not limited
to: water valves, fire hydrants, sanitary sewer manholes, storm drainage
facilities (i.e., inlets, manholes, etc.), telephone, gas, electric, ditches or swales,
curbs and gutters, pavement limits, bridges or culverts, guardrails, etc.
2.05.1.05 Station and critical elevation (flow line, invert of pipe, etc.) of all utility or
drainage appurtenances, existing and proposed

2.05.1.06 Flow direction arrows, particularly at intersections
2.05.1.07 Match lines and associated sheet numbers.
2.05.1.08 Station and elevation of all curb return PCRs; horizontal P.C.s P.T.s, P.C.C.s,
etc.; high or low point of all vertical curves, existing and proposed
2.05.1.09 Curb returns radii, existing and proposed
2.05.1.10 Mid-block curb ramp locations at "T" intersections including centerline

stationing and flow line elevation at the center of the ramp
2.05.1.11 Complete horizontal curve data (R, , L, PC Sta.)
2.05.1.12 Centerline stations of all non-single family residential driveways and all
intersecting roadways
2.05.1.13 Survey line ties to section corners or quarter corners, if not already
accomplished on the plat.
2.05.1.14 Show typical roadway cross- section for all roadways, existing and/or proposed,
within and adjacent to the proposed development. These cross sections shall
appear on the cover sheet, or on the first sheet of the submittal showing the
roadway design. They shall indicate type of roadway(s); profile grade design
point (centerline, flow line, top of curb, lip of gutter, etc.); roadway width,
R.O.W.; type of curb, gutter, and walk; pavement cross slope, etc.
2.05.1.15 Basis of plan view and profile elevations shall be the same, i.e., flow line and
flow line, top of curb and top of curb, etc.
2.05.1.16 Show all permanent asphalt patching a minimum of 24” wide.
2.05.1.17 Where the widening of an existing street occurs, provide existing spot
elevations along the edge of the existing pavement, at the centerline of the
existing roadway/crown line and the existing lip of pan or flow line of the
existing curb and gutter at a maximum of 50-foot stations. This allows for the
checking of proposed pavement cross-slopes.
2.05.1.18 Show range boxes. Locations are determined by the plat.

2.05.1.19 See Section 5.00 for limits of concrete paving required for arterial-arterial
intersections. If three “legs” of an intersection are arterials and the fourth “leg”
is a collector all four “legs” shall be concrete per Section 5.00. For concrete
paving on City Streets a jointing plan must be submitted.
2.05.1.20 Show traffic control boxes and conduit at intersections where future warrants
for traffic signals are likely to be met. See the site plan or contextual site plan
for locations.
2.05.1.21 Show irrigation control sleeving locations for medians where required.
2.05.1.22 Show any proposed construction phasing. It must be coordinated with any main
extension agreements associated with the utilities as well as any planning
documents.
2.05.2 Profile The profile shall include, but not be limited to the following.
2.05.2.01 Show original ground (dashed) and each design grade (heavy, solid). Both
grades shall be plainly labeled.
2.05.2.02 For 6" vertical curb and gutter, or mountable curb and gutter, all design
elevations shall be top of curb, lip of gutter, or flow line (preferred). For
combination curb, gutter, and walk, all design elevations shall be back of walk,
or lip of gutter, or flow line (preferred). The basis for as-built information shall
be the same as the design (both flow line or both top of curb, etc.) when
possible.
2.05.2.03 Stationing shall be continuous for the entire portion of the roadway shown in the
plan view, with the centerline station of all non-single family residential
driveways and all intersecting roadways clearly labeled.
2.05.2.04 Show all existing curbs, gutters, sidewalks, and asphalt grades at center line and
edge of asphalt adjacent to the proposed design. Basis for existing grades shall
be as-built elevations or survey data at the intervals not to exceed 50' for a
minimum of 100'. Previously approved designs are not an acceptable means of
establishing existing grades.
2.05.2.05 Existing utilities. See Section 2.03.4.08, UNDERGROUND UTILITIES.

2.05.2.06 Station and elevation of all P.C.R.s, horizontal P.C.s, P.T.s, P.C.C.s, etc.,
existing and proposed (optional).
2.05.2.07 Station and elevation of all vertical grade breaks, existing (as-built) and
proposed. The use of grade breaks with proposed construction is discouraged.
Where street widening occurs with curb and gutter, multiple grade breaks to
match the existing profile is not acceptable. Utilize asphalt overlays to best fit a
curb line profile and to provide a smooth transition back to the existing
pavement.
2.05.2.08 Distance and slope (percentage) between grade breaks and VPI's.
2.05.2.09 Show vertical curves, when necessary, with VPI, VPC, and VPT, high or low
point (if applicable) stations and elevations. All vertical curves shall be labeled
with length of curve in feet (L) and K (= L/A) where A = algebraic difference in
grades in percent. See Table 4.1. All vertical curves shall be symmetrical.
2.05.2.10 Curb return profiles may be required at certain curb returns. If curb return
profiles are required, the Consultant will be informed at the time of the initial
review and instructions furnished.
2.05.2.11 Separate flow line (or top of curb) profiles are required as the basis for design at
"bubbles," cul-de-sacs, horizontal curves when the vertical grade is less than
1%, any departure from normal roadway cross sections, i.e., the pavement cross
slope is not 2%, and for at least 200' from all intersections.
2.05.2.12 Water or sanitary sewer line profiles shall not be placed on street plan and
profile sheets.
2.06 Water Distribution, Sanitary Sewer, and Storm Sewer Plans

In addition to the requirements set forth in Section 2.03, CIVIL CONSTRUCTION PLAN
REQUIREMENTS, the following information shall be shown on all Water Distribution, Sanitary
Sewer and Storm Sewer plans submitted for review and approval.
2.06.1 Overall Utility Plan An overall utility plan of the proposed development,
including all off-site construction areas shall be submitted for review and approval,
and shall include, but not be limited to, the following.
dimension of easement or tract shall be clearly labeled existing and proposed for

both on-site and off-site. Property lines and R.O.W. lines shall be dimensioned.
Label lot, blocks and tracts.
2.06.1.02 Roadways and roadway names
2.06.1.03 Existing water distribution facilities including, but not limited to, size and
location, valves, fire hydrants, blow offs, pressure zones, etc.
2.06.1.04 Existing sanitary sewer facilities including, but not limited to, size, slope,
location, hydraulic capacity, and all pertinent information regarding which trunk
lines will ultimately receive the wastewater collected by the proposed system
2.06.1.05 Existing storm sewer facilities including, but not limited to, size, slope, pipe
type, location, and inlet size.
2.06.1.06 Proposed construction including manholes (with a rim elevation), valve boxes,
fire hydrants (with a bottom of bottom flange elevation that is 2" – 6" above
final finished grade), water meters (with rim elevation on the meter pit), mains,
service lines (including line lengths and sizes), inlets and appurtenances shall be
shown and clearly labeled.
2.06.1.07 Proposed outfall point(s) for wastewater from the development
2.06.1.08 Fixture unit table and meter sizing table in accordance with the “Public Utility
Improvements Rules & Regulations Regarding Standards & Specifications.”
2.06.1.09 For commercial, industrial, or multi-family projects show dimensioned striping

for all handicap-parking stalls.
2.06.1.10 Show any proposed phasing of utilities. This phasing of construction must be
coordinated with the main extension agreements executed through the Water
Department.
2.06.2 Plan and Profile A Plan and Profile is required on water mains larger than
12" in diameter, all public and private storm sewer and sanitary sewer mains, and
for laterals when there is interference with other utilities. The Plan view shall
include, but not be limited to, the following.
dimension of easement or tract shall be clearly labeled. Property lines and
R.O.W. lines shall be dimensioned. Label lot, blocks and tracts.

2.06.2.02 Roadways and roadway names
2.06.2.03 Existing utilities and structures including, but not limited to: water valves, fire
hydrants, sanitary sewer manholes, storm drainage facilities, telephone, gas,
electric, ditches or swales, curbs and gutters, cross pans, pavement limits,
bridges or culverts, guardrails, etc.
2.06.2.04 All water mains, storm sewer, sanitary sewer laterals, mains, or trunk lines shall
be tied to the centerline of the City R.O.W., to the centerline of a City easement,
to government land corners, or to government landlines.
2.06.2.05 Flow direction arrows at sanitary and storm sewer manholes
2.06.2.06 Match lines and sheet numbers
2.06.3 Profile The profile shall include, but not be limited to, the following.
2.06.3.01 Show original ground (dashed) at each design grade (heavy, solid). Both grades
shall be plainly labeled, existing and proposed.
2.06.3.02 All design elevations shall be invert of pipe. Top of pipe is acceptable for
existing utilities.
2.06.3.03 Stationing shall be continuous for the entire length of the utility. Centerline and
offsets of roadway shall be the basis for stationing whenever possible.
2.06.3.04 Existing and proposed utilities, particularly where crossed, with as-built or
proposed elevations and stations and clearance between utilities (See Section
2.03.4.08, UNDERGROUND UTILITIES.)
2.06.3.05 Station and elevation of grade breaks, existing (as-built) and proposed.
2.06.3.06 Distance and grade or slope between grade breaks
2.06.3.07 Show size, type, and structural class of pipe, including ASTM or AWWA
specifications on all proposed utility construction.
2.06.3.08 Indicate bedding classification to be used.
2.06.3.09 Show storm sewer design flows. For storm sewers designed for 100-year flow,
show and label the 100-year HGL. For storm sewers designed for 2-year flow,
show and label the 2-year HGL.

2.06.4 Details The plans shall include adequate details of special structures not covered
by City Standard Details. Structural calculations shall be provided for the special
structures. The structural calculations must be approved prior to the civil plans
approval. The structural calculations must be submitted as a part of the civil plans
submittal. Do not include in the plans City Standard Details but reference them by
detail number.
2.07 Grading Plans

In addition to the requirements set forth in Section 2.03, CIVIL CONSTRUCTION PLAN
REQUIREMENTS, the following information shall be shown on all grading plans submitted for
review and approval. The grading plan is the key document for construction of surface
improvements. The grading plan must be consistent with any approved site plan and landscape
plan. Grading plans are required for all types of development.
2.07.1 Final Grading Plan (for Commercial, Industrial, and Multifamily Sites)
The plan shall include, but not be limited to, the following.
dimension of easements or tract shall be clearly labeled. Include Lot and Block
numbers.
2.07.1.02 Show existing contours (dashed) at a contour interval of two feet or less,
proposed contours (solid) at a contour interval of two feet or less. Contour
elevations shall be labeled and proposed contours shall be tied into existing
contours. Existing grades are normally expected to extend at least 50 feet
beyond property line and beyond flow line of any street adjoining the site.
2.07.1.03 Show building footprints and finished floor or top of foundation elevation of all
structures. Plans for residential construction shall show finish floor elevations
and the basement/walkout/garden level finish floor elevation and type of
foundation, i.e., walkout, garden level, crawl space, or full basement.
2.07.1.04 Identify curb and gutter type (spill or catch). On private property, provide a
detail of any curb and gutter that is not an Aurora Standard Detail.
2.07.1.05 Indicate spot elevations at all angle points on curb and gutter. Flow direction
arrows may be used to prescribe grading details of paved or landscaped surfaces
in lieu of additional spot elevations provided the plan clearly communicates the
required grading without ambiguity.

2.07.1.06 Minimum 0.50% slope on all concrete surfaces, minimum 1% slope on all
asphalt surfaces, minimum 2% slope on all grass-lined swales and landscape
areas.
2.07.1.07 Show and label other surface drainage facilities and appurtenances, such as
sidewalk chases, overflow weirs, rip rap placement, etc. The grading plan shall
show all surface improvements visible at the surface or affecting drainage of the
site.
2.07.1.08 Maximum slopes shall be 3:1 unless approved by Public Works and Planning
Departments. The maximum landscaped grades within public right-of-ways
shall be 4:1 unless otherwise approved by Public Works.
2.07.1.09 Show and label all retaining walls, top of wall and bottom of wall elevations.
Where walls exceed 30-inches in height pedestrian hand rails shall be installed
within pedestrian areas. See Section 4.02.7 for more information.
2.07.1.10 An Elevation Certificate shall be required for any non-residential parcel

hydraulically connected, touching or including a floodplain in the
predevelopment or post development condition, where a non-residential
building site with a proposed lowest floor elevation (including basement, crawl
space or enclosure floor) that is not shown on the plan as being greater than two
feet higher than the base flood elevation. The current Elevation Certificate form
established by FEMA shall be used. The Elevation Certificate shall be stamped
and signed by an Engineer or Surveyor licensed in the State of Colorado. The
Elevation Certificate shall be submitted to the Engineering Division for review
and concurrence prior to issuance of a Certificate of Occupancy. The
Elevation Certificate shall demonstrate the lowest floor elevation is greater than
one-foot above the base flood elevation. The Grading Plan shall note by a
prominent asterisk (or other appropriate method) each lot or building site for
which an Elevation Certificate shall be provided. The following note shall be
added to each sheet of the plans that indicate an Elevation Certificate is
required:
No Certificate of Occupancy shall be issued until an Elevation Certificate

has been submitted to and approved by the Engineering Division. The
Developer/Contractor is encouraged to verify the adequacy of lot grades
and the elevation of concrete forms prior to pouring a foundation. It is

recommended the Elevation Certificate be submitted at least a week in
advance of a request for a Certificate of Occupancy.
2.07.1.11 Nonresidential construction on fill in or near Special Flood Hazard Areas

(SFHAs) shall adhere to the requirements outlined in the Federal Emergency
Management Agency National Flood Insurance Program’s Technical Bulletin
10-01, “Ensuring That Structures Built on Fill in or Near Special Flood Hazard
Areas are Reasonably Safe From Flooding” (TB 10-01). Basement walls shall
be designed for hydrostatic pressures to at least one foot above the BFE
elevation, or, if no BFE elevations are available to at least two feet above the
adjacent grade.
2.07.1.11.01 To avoid certification required in the technical bulletin ensure the lowest
floor elevation (basement or crawl space) is at least two feet above the
BFE.
2.07.1.11.02 Another approach to avoid the required certification would be to not allow
any basement or crawl space. If a crawl space is used, then openings in
the foundation walls shall be required to allow for the equalization of
hydrostatic pressure on the foundation walls during flood events (see
National Flood Insurance Program’s Technical Bulletin 1, “Openings in
Foundation Walls”).
2.07.1.12 When nonresidential construction takes place on fill in or near SFHAs with
basements or crawl spaces, then a Colorado licensed professional engineer or
architect must certify the structure(s) is(are) reasonably safe from flooding,
according to the criteria described in the TB 10-01.
2.07.2 Area Grading In addition to the above requirements, the following information
shall be shown on single-family detached area grading plans. An area grading plan
is required for any plan proposing construction of one or more residential lots.
2.07.2.01 Spot elevations at all lot corners and flow direction arrows showing side and
rear-lot swales and off-site or cross-lot drainage shall be included. At a
minimum, spot elevations shall be shown at rear yard high points, ridgelines,
and other locations necessary to define the grading and runoff flow path.
2.07.2.02 Existing and proposed spot elevations shall be shown at all lot corners.
2.07.2.03 No more than two lots may drain through any one lot.

2.07.2.04 For single family only, a building footprint envelope consistent with zoning
standards may be used where the actual footprint is not known.
2.07.2.05 FHA lot grading designation (Type A, Type B, etc.), walkouts (W.O.), and
garden levels (G.L.), shall be shown on each lot.
2.07.2.06 For any residential lot in or adjacent to a regulated flood plain, provide the base
flood elevation (B.F.E.) appropriate for any proposed structure, lowest lot
elevation shall be one foot above B.F.E., lowest floor including basement or
crawl space shall be two feet above B.F.E., or any other grade requirement
related to the flood plain regulations.
2.07.2.07 Show finished floor elevation(s) including lowest finished floor for walkouts
and garden levels.
2.07.2.08 Show all retaining walls.
2.07.2.09 Show all inlets and fire hydrants on the streets so driveways will not be placed
on top of the inlets or fire hydrants.
2.07.2.10 Where developments have relatively steep street grades the area grading plans
shall identify those lots with potential side yard retaining walls. The side yard
retaining walls shall be a minimum of two-feet from the side lot line to the face
of the retaining wall. This will minimize the need to change area grading plans
when plot plans are submitted for approval.
2.07.2.11 Where developments have relatively steep backyard slopes the area grading
plan shall identify those lots with potential rear yard retaining walls. The
retaining walls shall not inhibit drainage runoff from the lot or from offsite lots.
Where possible the retaining walls shall not be placed within the rear utility
easements. This will minimize the need to change the area grading plans when
plot plans are submitted for approval.
2.07.2.12 An Elevation Certificate shall be required for any residential lot or parcel
hydraulically connected, touching, or including a floodplain in the
predevelopment or post development condition where a residential structure
with a proposed lowest floor elevation (including basement, crawl space or
enclosure floor) is not shown on the plan as being greater than four-feet higher
than the base flood elevation. If the proposed residential structure is placed on
an area of fill within the predevelopment condition’s floodplain, an Elevation

Certificate shall be required. The current Elevation Certificate form established
by FEMA shall be used. The Elevation Certificate shall be completed by an
Engineer or Surveyor licensed in the State of Colorado. The Elevation
Certificate shall be submitted to the Engineering Division for review and
concurrence prior to issuance of a Certificate of Occupancy. The Elevation
Certificate shall demonstrate the lowest point on the lot or parcel is one-foot or
higher above the base flood elevation and the lowest floor is two-feet or higher
than the base flood elevation. The Area Grading Plan shall note by a prominent
asterisk (or other appropriate method) each lot or residential building site for
which an Elevation Certificate shall be provided.
The following note shall be added to each sheet of the plans that indicate an
Elevation Certificate is required:
No Certificate of Occupancy shall be issued until an Elevation Certificate

has been submitted to and approved by the Engineering Division. The
Developer/Contractor is encouraged to verify the adequacy of lot grades
and the elevation of concrete forms prior to pouring a foundation. It is
recommended the Elevation Certificate be submitted at least a week in
advance of a request for a Certificate of Occupancy.
2.07.2.13 Residential construction on fill in or near Special Flood Hazard Areas (SFHAs)
shall adhere to the requirements outlined in the Federal Emergency
Management Agency National Flood Insurance Program’s Technical Bulletin
10-01, “Ensuring That Structures Built on Fill in or Near Special Flood Hazard
Areas are Reasonably Safe From Flooding”. Basement walls shall be designed
for hydrostatic pressures to at least one foot above the BFE elevation, or, if no
BFE elevations are available to at least two feet above the adjacent grade.
2.07.2.13.01 To avoid certification required in the technical bulletin, ensure the lowest
floor elevation (basement or crawl space) is at least four feet above the
BFE.
2.07.2.13.02 Another approach to avoid the required certification would be to not allow
any basement or crawl space. If a crawl space is used, then openings in
the foundation walls shall be required to allow for the equalization of
hydrostatic pressure on the foundation walls during flood events (see
National Flood Insurance Program’s Technical Bulletin 1, “Openings in
Foundation Walls”).

2.07.2.14 When residential construction takes place on fill in or near SFHAs with
basements or crawl spaces, then a Colorado licensed professional engineer or
architect must certify the structure(s) is(are) reasonably safe from flooding,
according to the criteria described in the TB 10-01.
2.07.3 Erosion Control/Overlot Grading In most cases the erosion control plan will
be combined with the overlot grading plan. However, they may be submitted
separately. If an erosion control and overlot grading plan is submitted separately
from the rest of the civil construction package in order to obtain a storm water
quality permit, only the erosion control plan is approved. The final grading plan is
approved when the final drainage study is approved. Refer to the ”Rules and
Regulations Regarding Stormwater (Quality) Discharge for Construction Activities”
for storm water quality control plan, and erosion and sediment control plan
requirements.
2.08 Combining Plans

The plans described above may be combined, at the discretion of the consulting engineer,
provided they are clear and adequately communicate the required information. The Public
Works Engineering Control Division plans review staff shall make the final determination for
approval or disapproval for the clarity and adequacy. Combining water line and/or sanitary
sewer line information with other plans will not be allowed.
2.09 Signing and Striping Plans
2.09.1 Signing and striping plans (interim and final, if necessary) shall be submitted for all
four-lane, six-lane roadways, two-lane collectors and any other streets designed to
accommodate striped bike lanes. See the Aurora Bicycle Facility Design
Guidelines adopted July 2008. Signing and striping plans shall include, but not be
limited to, all appropriate and applicable regulatory, warning, and guide signs and
striping materials in accordance with current City standards. Said plans shall also
include street name signs to current City standards on ALL public and private
streets as appropriate and applicable.
2.09.2 For TOD and Urban Centers signing and striping plans shall be submitted showing
the striping for the parking and other striping requirements such as the Fire
Department’s truck set-up areas, bike lanes, etc.
2.09.2.01 Bike lanes shall extend through curb extensions at TOD and Urban Centers
intersections up to the cross-walks, if provided, in accordance with MUTCD

standards. The bike lane width shall be five-feet, not including the gutter pan
width.
2.10 Survey Control Drawing
2.10.1 A survey control drawing shall be included in the civil plan submittal and shall
contain the following:
2.10.1.01 Title of the control drawing, location identification, project name and the entity
performing the work.
2.10.1.02 North arrow and scale with bar scale.
2.10.1.03 Legend.
2.10.1.04 Use the City of Aurora GIS Horizontal Control System; Colorado State Plane
Coordinates, Central Zone, in NAD 83 / 92 HARN.
2.10.1.05 Include a note explaining the transformation from the Grid State Plane
Coordinates to the Project (ground) State Plane Coordinates with the Grid
Factor, also known as the Combined Factor (sea level factor and the scale factor
combined) shown to eight decimal places.
2.10.1.06 The coordinates shall be in US Survey feet to the hundredth of a foot.
2.10.1.07 Any Public Land Survey System corner that was occupied and has been
remonumented must be noted and a monument record must be filed with the
State.
2.10.1.08 A tabular listing of the Public Land Survey System corners used, showing both
the Grid State Plane Coordinates and the modified Project (ground) State Plane
Coordinates. The tabular listing shall also show the Project (ground) State
Plane Coordinates for the control points and the found property pins, noting the
point numbers, northings, eastings, elevations and descriptions.
2.10.1.09 Use the City of Aurora Vertical Control datum based on the NAVD 1988. List
the bench marks used, their I.D. (name), complete description and elevation.
2.10.1.10 The right-of-way shall be shown with adjoining subdivision names. The limits
of the right-of-way shall be used to establish the street centerline stationing for
plan and profiles.

2.10.1.11 The survey control shall be tied to key points on the construction plan in order
to be able to coordinate between the construction plans and the control plan.
2.10.2 A sample of a survey control drawing may be obtained from the Technical Services
Section Supervisor, 303-739-7314.
2.10.3 The Survey Control Drawing shall be signed and sealed by the Professional Land
Surveyor, licensed in the State of Colorado, under whose supervision the drawing
was prepared.
2.11 Street Lighting Plan

In addition to the requirements set forth in Section 2.03, Civil Construction Plan Requirements, a
Street Lighting Plan is required and the following information shall be shown on all Street
Lighting Plans submitted for review and approval for all public streets.
2.11.1 Final Street Lighting Plan The plan shall include the following:
2.11.1.01 Show property and/or R.O.W. lines, easements and/or tracts. All streets shall be
labeled. Type and dimension of easements or tract shall be clearly labeled.
Include Lot and Block numbers and adjoining subdivision names.
2.11.1.02 Show building footprints for all structures, if known. If unknown, show set
back lines.
2.11.1.03 Identify curb, gutter and sidewalks, private driveways, fire hydrants, and inlet
locations.
2.11.1.04 Show any existing street lights and label as existing.
2.11.1.05 Show any proposed trees or landscaping installations in the R.O.W. that may
have future impacts to street light placement.
2.11.1.06 The street light plan may include the minimum amount of information required
in 2.11.1.01 through 2.11.1.05 and a scale of 1 inch equals 100 feet is
recommended to minimize the number of plan sheets submitted. An overall
development site plan that meets the scaling and fits on one plan sheet is
acceptable for the Street Lighting Plan submittal.
2.11.1.07 Show all street light luminaire and pole locations on the plan with a symbol
using an “ SL-4”. Provide type of luminaire and pole description in legend (e.g.
“ SL-4” indicates 250 watt, HPS Archetype style luminaire mounted on a 33’-6”
steel pole, mocha brown color).

2.11.2 Street Lighting Design and Placement Requirements
The City of Aurora requires at least one street light at every public street intersection. Major
street intersections may need two or four street lights. See Standard Detail TE-18.1 and TE-18.2.
2.11.2.01 Street Intersection Recommendations: The following criteria apply to

suburban, urban centers and transit oriented developments. The following
configurations are considered arterials or collector streets.
Four street lights are required, one at each corner for the following intersections:
1. 6-Lane at 6-Lane Intersections
Two street lights are recommended, one at each near right approach on minor
street intersections:
1. 6-Lane at 4-Lane (unsignalized)
2. 6-Lane at 4-Lane
3. 6-Lane at 2-Lane
4. Couplet at any other street
One street light is recommended at each intersection:
1. 4-Lane Collector at Collector
2. 4-Lane Collector at Local
3. 2-Lane at 2-Lane
2.11.2.02 Midblock Street Lights or “infill” Recommendations:
1. Recommend at 160 to 180 feet intervals on 6-Lane Arterials,

Boulevards, and Multiway Boulevards.
2. Recommend at 180 to 220 feet intervals on 4-Lane Arterials and 4-Lane
Main Streets.
3. Recommend at 250 to 300 feet intervals on all Collectors, 2-Lane Main
Streets, and Couplets.
4. Recommend at 250 to 350 feet intervals on all Locals, Neighborhood
Streets, and Residential Parkways.
5. Pedestrian lighting recommended at 50 to 80 feet intervals

Midblock interval spacing may vary depending on utilities located both below
and above ground, driveways locations, landscaping (tree canopy conflicts) and
street lengths, widths and alignments. Areas with high levels of nighttime
pedestrian activity are also a consideration and may require a modified spacing
interval by the Public Works Department (e.g. RTD bus stops, hospitals, major
shopping areas, sport complexes, transit oriented developments (TOD) and
urban centers, etc.). Pedestrian lighting needs shall be determined by Public
Works and Planning departments based on level of nighttime pedestrian
activity.
2.11.2.03 Luminaire and Pole Selection
There are many street light luminaires and pole styles that are acceptable for
installation. Luminaires are typically equipped with high pressure sodium
lamps. Wattages vary from 50, 70, 100, 150 on residential streets, and 100, 150,
200 and 250 watts on collector streets, and 250 or 400 watts on arterial streets.
Coordinate selection and application of available luminaires and wattages with
the Public Works Department-Traffic Services (303-739-7300), and the
Planning Department (303-739-7250). Areas with high levels of nighttime
pedestrian activity (e.g. Transit Oriented Development or Urban Centers) are
also a consideration and may require an increased lamp wattage or decreased
spacing by the Public Works Department. See Standard TE-18.3.
2.11.2.04 Pole or Luminaire Mounting Height
Pole or luminaire mounting heights vary from 10 feet to 24 feet on residential

streets; 19 feet to 33 feet on collector streets, couplets, and main streets; and 28
feet to 40 feet on arterials, boulevards and multiway boulevards. Mounting
heights for pedestrian lighting shall be 10 feet to 15 feet. Coordinate selection
and application of luminaire mounting heights and available pole styles with the
Public Works Department (303-739-7333).
2.11.2.05 City Approval of Street Lighting Equipment
Selected street lighting luminaire, type of lamp and wattage, mounting height
and pole type, and the selected luminaire and pole color for installation on all
public streets or city right-of-ways shall require pre-approval from the City of
Aurora Public Works Department. Street and pedestrian lighting equipment
(i.e. luminaires, poles, fixtures, color, etc.) shall meet Xcel Energy standards.

Note: The typical City standard is as follows:
Street Type Symbol Description
Local, Neighborhood, Residential SL-1 100 watt, HPS grey post top on 23’ grey
Parkway fiberglass pole
Collector, 2-Lane Main Street SL-2 100 watt, HPS grey post top on 23’ grey
fiberglass pole
Collector (4), 4-Lane Main Street, SL-3 250 watt, HPS archetype on 33’-6” steel
Couplet pole (mocha brown) *
Arterial, Boulevard, Multiway SL-4 250 watt, HPS archetype on 33’-6” steel
Boulevard pole (mocha brown) *
Collector (4) indicates 4-Lane Collector Roadway

3.00 PLAN AND DRAFTING STANDARDS
3.00 ACCEPTANCE OF MYLAR SUBMITTALS

3.01 MEDIA REQUIREMENTS
3.02 DRAFTING STANDARDS
3.03 PLAN SET INDEXING
3.04 REVISIONS
SECTION 3.00 PLAN AND DRAFTING STANDARDS
3.00 Acceptance of Mylar Submittals

The Technical Services Supervisor has the authority to determine the acceptability of all
plans submitted for signature. Acceptability will be based on scanability, media, and drafting
standards as outlined below.
3.01 Media requirements

Archival quality media is required. All plans submitted for approval shall be submitted on
polyester film, mylar, or photo positive film. The image on film or mylar originals submitted
for approval shall not streak, smear, rub or chip off under normal use over time. All media
shall be from 3.0 to 5.5 mil double matte. The size of the plans shall be either 24” X 36” or
22”X 34”. Each sheet shall have a two-inch margin on the left edge and a one-half-inch
(minimum) margin on all other sides.
Care shall be taken to prevent oils and dirt from contaminating the surface of the media prior
to printing or plotting. In the event of contamination, the media shall be cleaned as
recommended by the manufacturer.
Plans that indicate the ink or toner has or is flaked, or is easily smeared during normal
handling will be rejected at submittal. Professional seals applied to the plans shall be legible
and the ink shall be dry and non-smearing. Electronic seals are preferred. Signatures on the
plans shall be applied with an indelible marker. Mylars whose scanned images have illegible
Professional Seals or signatures will be rejected.
3.02 Drafting Standards

The following shall apply to all plans submitted for approval.
3.02.1 Text
Minimum lettering size shall be 0.08” high (can only be used to annotate
existing features on the plans). Otherwise, minimum text height shall be .10”.
Where text is less than .14” high, text shall be all capitals.
All text shall be black.
Drafting Standards 3-1 9.2010

Recommended fonts are “Arial”, “Romans”, “Simplex”, or “Leroy”.
Pen weights shall not exceed the pen weights recommended for the text heights
in the chart below:
Text Height (in.) Pen Weight (in.)
.08 .008
.10 .010
.12 .010
.14 .014
.175 .018
.20 .024
3.02.2 Line work
Minimum line thickness shall be .006”.

All line work shall be black.
3.02.3 Color and Shading
Color shall not be allowed on plans.

Solid hatches shall be shaded no more than 30%, nor less than 12%.
Solid hatches shall not obscure text or line work.
3.02.4 Photography Used In Plans
Photographic images added to plans require 40% or less, 80-line screen.

Use of photographic images requires written approval by Technical Services
Supervisor prior to submitting Mylars for approval.
3.03 Plan Set Indexing

Engineering’s policy for indexing plans is to index them by subdivision name and filing
number. The subdivision name and filing number shall be clearly shown in the Title Block on
each page of the plans.
It is the intent of the Engineering Division to provide the same Engineering Drawing number
for all civil construction plans associated with a development. Frequently the set of full
construction plans is broken into several sets for review and approval. Ultimately, the plans
will be approved and filed together for records purposes. Each submittal shall include a
cover sheet with a sheet index on it. The full construction plans shall also have a sheet index
on a cover sheet that includes all sheets in the set, irregardless of whether or not they were
submitted together or in smaller sets.

All sheets in the plan set will be numbered consecutively from the cover sheet (sheet 1) to the
last sheet (usually the final drainage and grading plans). If the consultant prefers a sheet
designation different than the numerical system the City requires, those numbers may also be
shown in a separate column of the index.
3.04 Revisions
There are two methods of revising approved plan sheets.
Submit a new sheet to replace the first. Such revisions go through the same review
and approval process a new submittal would go through, usually including the current
review fee per sheet.
Edit the approved sheet. Before the edits are allowed, a stamped and signed
Revision Authorization form and a check print showing the edits must be submitted
to the Engineer of the day. The request is usually handled immediately if the original
mylars are stored onsite. If the mylars are not stored on site, the consultant will be
contacted when they have been retrieved from archive. Changes require neat lettering
and line work. Use of an ultra fine line permanent marker is allowed, however,
drafting pen and ink is preferred. Hand lettering shall be done using a lettering guide
that enables straight uniform lettering between 1/10 and 1/8 inch high. The
consultant shall provide any drafting equipment and supplies required to make the
revisions.
The City has a policy to record and maintain large format documents as digital images and
allows for destruction of original drawings after 5 years, depending on the progress of the
development as determined by the certificate of occupancies within the development.
For sheets approved prior to the five year period, the only method for revising them may be
to submit new sheets.

4.00 ROADWAY DESIGN AND TECHNICAL CRITERIA
4.01 GENERAL
4.02 SIDEWALKS, CURB AND GUTTER, DRIVEWAYS, RAILINGS, AND
RETAINING WALLS
4.03 DRAINAGE
4.04 HORIZONTAL ALIGNMENT
4.05 VERTICAL ALIGNMENT
4.06 STREETSCAPE DESIGN AND SPECIFICATIONS
4.07 SPECIFICATION FOR FIRE LANES, PRIVATE STREETS OR DRIVES,
AND PARKING LOTS
4.08 ROADWAY SPECIFICATIONS
4.09 STREET LIGHT POLICY
SECTION 4.00 ROADWAY DESIGN AND TECHNICAL CRITERIA
4.01 General
This section sets forth the minimum design and technical criteria and specifications to be used in
the preparation of all roadway plans, including private streets, drives, parking lots, and fire lanes.
4.02 Sidewalks, Curb and Gutter, Driveways, Railings, and

Retaining Walls
4.02.1 Typical Roadway Sections Typical roadway sections are specified by the
City Code. These are summarized in Section 4.08 and shown in standard details
S1.1, et seq. All public roadways shall be constructed according to typical roadway
sections S1.1 to S1.18 unless specifically modified by action of the City Engineer.
4.02.2 Curb and Gutter Mountable curb and gutter shall be used on all local Type 1
and 2 streets. All other streets, including those within the Urban Centers and TODs,
shall use 6" vertical curb and gutter.
4.02.3 Curb Ramps Americans with Disabilities Act requires curb ramps be installed at
all pedestrian crosswalks for all new construction or reconstruction of curb and
sidewalk. Curb ramps shall be shown at all curb returns, "T" intersections, at
residential mail kiosks or clustered mailboxes, mid-block pedestrian crossing within
Urban Centers or TOD’s and any other location of public necessity. Curb ramps
must be shown (located) on the drawings. Curb ramp types shall be called out on
the drawings by the specific standard detail S9.1, et seq. Mid-block pedestrian
crossings within Urban Centers or TOD’s shall not be used on multiple lane
roadways.
4.02.4 Curb Cuts for Driveways Flared curb cuts, Standard Detail S7.4, are not
permitted for commercial/industrial or residential driveways where traffic
movements would be substantial. When the number of parking spaces exceeds 20,
curb returns are required. Inlets and cross pans are required as noted in Section
4.03, DRAINAGE. See Section 6.53, Storm Drainage Design & Technical Criteria
manual for exceptions when storm sewer is available.
4.02.5 Guardrails The design, location, and necessity of guardrails for bridge and
roadway situations, as well as design of the same, shall be in accordance with
AASHTO's, "Roadside Design Guide," latest edition.
Roadway Design and Technical Criteria 4-1 9.2010

4.02.6 Pedestrian/Bicycle Railings Railings will be required at and continuous along
vertical separations of 30" or greater or on slopes greater than or equal to 3:1. See
standard details S18.1 to S18.4.
4.02.7 Retaining Walls The design of retaining walls, wing walls, and miscellaneous
structures that are unattached and not considered part of a building shall be
submitted with the Civil Construction Plans to the Engineering Services Division.
Details are required on all retaining walls at bridges and structures and shall be
included on the drainage or grading drawings. Retaining walls and miscellaneous
structures wing walls higher than four feet from grade or adjacent to easements,
public right-of-way or fire lanes that intrude on a line projected at 3:1 (H: V) slope
from the easement line, right-of-way line or edge of fire lane shall be designed,
signed, sealed, and dated by an engineer licensed in the State of Colorado before
review by the Public Works Engineering Division. The design for walls that are
attached to and part of a building or the building is structurally dependent upon shall
be submitted to the Building Inspection Division for review. CDOT standard
details for wing walls and head walls are acceptable for use without additional
structural analysis as long as the site conditions do not exceed CDOT’s design
assumptions. Concrete, poured-in-place retaining walls shall be designed and
submitted along with the first submittal of the civil construction drawings for the
development.
Terraced retaining walls with a total vertical height greater than four feet shall be
designed, signed, sealed, and dated by an engineer licensed in the State of Colorado
before review by the Public Works Engineering Division. If the horizontal distance
between the terraced walls is less than twice the height of the lower wall (even if the
individual walls are less than four feet high) then:
The entire terraced wall height shall be considered to act as one wall and
shall be designed as one wall, or
Each terrace of the wall can be designed individually as long as such design
is accompanied by a global stability analysis that is performed on the entire
terraced wall height.
Retaining walls used to support a roadway, driveway, or structure shall be designed,

and the plans sealed, signed and dated by an engineer licensed in the State of
Colorado. Guardrails and/or pedestrian railings shall be included with the design.

Retaining walls along sidewalks or trails, wing walls and head walls exceeding 30-
inches in height require railings. Retaining walls along bicycle trails require railings.
A retaining wall permit shall be obtained from the City’s permit center prior to
constructing any retaining walls.
When retaining walls are not cast-in-place retaining walls, the walls are greater than
four feet in height, and/or there are terraced retaining walls where the horizontal
distance between the walls is less than twice the height of the lower wall (even if
the individual walls are less than four feet in height), then the contractor must
submit structural calculations (and details as needed on 24” x 36” drawings) to the
City for review and approval prior to pulling a permit to construct those walls.
4.02.8 Sidewalks Sidewalks associated with streets shall have a cross-slope of two
percent down toward the street. Other walks’ cross-slope shall have a preferred
cross-slope of two percent, but, may on a case-by-case basis range between two-
percent to five-percent. There shall be a minimum two-foot recovery zone along
sidewalks before there is a significant change of slope.
4.02.9 Driveways Residential driveways abutting paved public rights-of-ways shall be

surfaced with concrete, asphalt, or brick or stone pavers.
4.02.9.1 The maximum permissible grade for single family residential driveways is 14
percent. Where grades are in excess of ten percent there shall be an
accompanying pedestrian walk from the street sidewalk to the main entry with
steps to keep the walk below ten percent. Those portions of driveways
supplying required parking shall not exceed eight percent slope per City Code
(Section 146-1509(B)3.)
4.02.9.2 The subgrade shall be compacted to the same requirements as the local streets.
See Section 5.
4.02.9.3 Brick and/or stone pavers shall be at least four-inches thick. The brick and/or
stone pavers shall be laid within a containment system that will not allow
movement from the anticipated wheel loads. This may be in the form of
concrete border edging, mortared brick and/or stone pavers, etc.
4.02.9.4 See City Code Section 146-1512 regarding other requirements for construction
and maintenance.

4.02.9.5 For those areas of the City still with unpaved streets other surfacing material
allowed are recycled asphalt roto-millings or granular road base (Type 2A per
Section 23 or equivalent).
4.02.9.6 Relative to single family residences the off-street parking spaces, pads and
driveways shall be kept a minimum of three feet from any property line, unless
otherwise approved in writing by the City of Aurora Public Works Department
and Zoning Division. The addition to existing driveways located adjacent to
side property lines shall not impede drainage.
4.02.9.7 A driveway permit is required for all single family residential driveways, pads
or parking spaces, except for new single family home construction or where
the existing driveways, pads or parking spaces are being replaced with the
same material and where the material type, location, size and slope does not
change.
4.03 Drainage
4.03.1 Design Standards The drainage system for all private site development, as well
as all public rights-of-way, shall be designed in accordance with City of Aurora,
"Storm Drainage Design and Technical Criteria Manual," latest edition. This
publication may be purchased in the Technical Services Section, Room 3218, in the
Aurora Municipal Center. A final drainage report shall be submitted with all civil
construction plans submitted for review and shall be considered part of the civil
construction plans. The major function of a roadway is the safe conveyance of
traffic. Drainage is a secondary function of a roadway, and the safe conveyance of
traffic shall at all times take precedence over drainage.
4.03.2 Cross Pans Cross pans shall be constructed in accordance with the standard
details. Cross pans are not allowed across collector or arterial roadways, nor are
they allowed on roadways with storm sewer systems.
The use of cross pans on roadways where the street grade exceeds 4.5% at the cross
pan or in new construction of local streets will be considered only after all other
alternatives have been exhausted.
4.03.3 Inlets Inlets shall be located to intercept flow at the point curb capacity for a
minor storm (major storm in Urban Centers and TOD’s) is exceeded as indicated on
an approved drainage plan. Inlets also shall be located due to nuisance drainage,

icing, or other conditions. Refer to Figures 2, 3, 4A, and 4B in the City of Aurora
"Storm Drainage Design & Technical Criteria Manual" for inlet and curb capacity,
respectively. Inlets shall also be installed to intercept cross-pavement flows at point
of transition in superelevation. See 4.04.4.06. Due to the presence of curb ramps,
inlets are not allowed in the curb return but will be located at the tangent points of
the curb returns (including Urban Centers and TOD’s). Inlets shall also be located
within the parallel and diagonal parking areas of Urban Centers and TOD’s. Top,
back of curb elevation, station at the centerline of the inlet, and station offset shall
be shown on the plans.
At a street intersection where two streets slope down to the intersection an inlet
shall be placed on the through street’s uphill point of curb return and on the
intersecting street’s uphill point of curb return.
All inlets within the public right-of-way, or to be maintained by the City, shall be
the curb opening Type R modified, constructed in accordance with the standard
details S12.1 et seq. The following note shall apply to all inlets in a sump condition
located within the public right-of-way:
"Contractor shall maintain a minimum of 0.5% grade at flow line into

inlet."
This note shall appear on all applicable street construction plans.
4.03.4 Minimum Pipe Diameter The minimum pipe diameter allowed within the
public R.O.W. or to be maintained by the City of Aurora is 18".
4.03.5 Temporary Erosion Control In addition to the requirements identified in the

City of Aurora ”Rules and Regulations Regarding Stormwater (Quality) Discharge
for Construction Activities”, latest edition, temporary erosion control is required at
the ends of all roadways not completed due to the project phasing, subdivision
boundaries, etc. Prevention of erosion at the roadway terminus shall be by methods
approved by the City Engineer and the Aurora Water Department, and shall be the
responsibility of the Developer.
4.03.6 Sidewalk Chases Storm water from concentrated points of discharge from a
minor storm event shall not be allowed to flow over sidewalks, but shall drain to the
roadway by the use of chase sections. Chase sections shall not be located within a

curb cut, driveway, curb ramp or curb return. Station, width, and invert elevations
of sidewalk chases shall be shown on the plans. Sidewalk chase sections shall be
constructed in accordance with standard details S3.1 et seq.
4.04 Horizontal Alignment

4.04.1 Design Speed Design speed shall be as shown in Table 4.1.
4.04.2 Horizontal Curves The minimum centerline radius for horizontal curves shall
be as shown in Table 4.1. Variances from the requirements of Table 4.1 for local
streets only will be considered on a case-by-case basis.
Table 4.1
Alignment Controls
K FACTOR VCL VCL
DESIGN MAXIMUM MIN MIN MIN.
SPEED GRADE CREST SAG LENGTH LENGTH SSD RADIUS
MPH CREST SAG
ARTERIALS 50 6% 160 75 120' 80' 450' 955'
LOW DENSITY 45 *6% 120 65 90' 70' 375' 745'
RURAL
COLLECTOR 4- 45 *5% 120 65 90' 70' 375' 745'
LANE
COLLECTOR 2- 35 *5% 50 50 50' 50' 250' 425'
LANE
LOCAL TYPE I 30 *5% 30 40 50' 50' 200' 250'
LOCAL TYPE 2 25 *5% 20 30 50' 50' 150' 150'
LOCAL TYPE 3 35 *5% 50 35 50' 50' 250' 375'
* 8% may be allowed by the City Engineer where an alternate access route, at 6% or less, exists.
Local Type 2 streets at cul-de-sacs shall use Local Type 2 criteria except minimum radius may be reduced to 100'

Table 4.2
Urban Centers and TOD’s Alignment Controls

K FACTOR VCL VCL
DESIGN MAXIMUM MIN MIN MIN.
SPEED GRADE CREST SAG LENGTH LENGTH SSD RADIUS
MPH CREST SAG
Boulevard 50 6% 160 75 120' 80' 450' 955'
4 or 6 Lanes
Multiway Boulevard - 50* 5% 160 75 120' 80’ 450’ 955’
4 or 6 Through Lanes
Main Street 2 Lanes 35 5% 50 50 50' 50' 250' 375’
with Median / Center 30 5% 30 40 50’ 50’ 200’ 250’
Turn Lane
Main Street - Median 40 5% 70 70 70' 70' 325' 575'
4 Lanes 35 5% 50 50 50’ 50’ 250’ 425’
Main Street - 2 Lanes 30 5% 30 40 50’ 50’ 200’ 250’
with Parallel Parking
Main Street – 2 Lanes 30 5% 30 40 50’ 50’ 200’ 250’
with Diagonal Parking
One Way Couplet 35 5% 50 50 50’ 50’ 250’ 425’
2 Lanes 30 5% 30 40 50’ 50’ 200’ 250’
Local Urban 30 5% 30 40 50' 50' 200' 250'
2 Lanes
Residential Parkway 30 5% 30 40 50' 50' 200’ 250’
2 Lanes
Neighborhood 30 5% 30 40 50' 50' 200’ 250’
2-Lanes
*The posted speed limit for the access road for the Multiway Boulevard will be 25.
4.04.3 Intersections
4.04.3.01 Turning Radius All roadways shall intersect at right angles. For the
minimum allowable intersection turning radius on cross streets intersecting
arterial streets, see standard detail S2.4.
4.04.3.02 Curb Return Radius Minimum curb return radii shall be as shown in
Table 4.3.

Table 4.3
Curb Return Flow line Radius at Intersections
Local Collector Arterial
Driveway 15 20 25
20 or less spaces*
Driveway 15 20 25
21 or more spaces
Alleys** -- -- --
Local or private street 15 20 25
Collector -- 20 25
Low Density Rural 20 20 25
Arterials -- -- 25
* Curb cuts may be used in lieu of curb returns if the requirements of Section 4.02.4 are satisfied.**
Alleys shall be constructed with curb cuts per Std. Detail S7.4.
4.04.3.03 Pavement Widening for Short Radii All curves in local and private
streets with radii from 55' to 250' shall be designed using Figure 4.1 to
increase pavement width. Centerline radii less than 33' shall not be permitted.
For radii between 33' and 55' see Figure 4.4. Additional right-of-way may be
required for curve widening.

Figure 4.1
Required Widening at Private Street and Local Intersections/Curves
Notes
1. No pavement widening required for radius greater than 250'.

2. Transitions and other criteria described in 4.07.11 References: "A Policy On Geometric
Design Of Highways And Streets," AASHTO 1990 Edition and City of Aurora standard fire
truck dimensions.
3. Private street and local intersection 90° ± 5°.
4. Curve widening should occur on the inside of the curve whenever possible.
4.04.3.04 Entry Islands At private streets and Type I local streets intersecting with
arterial streets, there shall be a raised median placed on the roadway or drive
as detailed on standard details S14.1 and S14.2.
4.04.4 Superelevation Superelevation may be required for arterial roadways and

selected collector roadways (usually four-lane collector roadways). Horizontal

curve radius and superelevation shall be in accordance with the recommendations of
AASHTO, 1990 Edition and Table 4.4.
Superelevation shall not be used on local roadways. The following procedure is an

outline for the correct application of superelevation. Runout lengths are not used in
the design of superelevations.
Table 4.4
Superelevations for Horizontal Curvature Runoff Length

Arterials, Boulevards, Multi-way Boulevards and Selected Collector Streets
L
D R e 2-lane 4-lane 6-lane
1°00' 5730' NC 0 0 0
1°30' 3820' RC 150 225 300
2°00' 2865' .023 150 225 300
2°30 2292' .026 150 225 300
3°00' 1910' .028 150 225 300
3°30' 1637' .030 150 225 300
4°00' 1432' .033 150 225 300
5°00' 1146' .036 150 225 300
6°00' 955' .040 150 225 300
(max)
LOW DENSITY RURAL ROADWAYS and 4-LANE COLLECTORS
1080' NC 0 -- --
820' .02 150 225 --
770' .03 150 225 --
745' .04 150 225 --
D = Degree of Curve L = Minimum Length of Superelevation Runoff
R = Radius of Curve NC = Normal Crown Section
e = Rate of superelevation RC = Reverse Crown
Adapted from Table III-8, "A Policy On Geometric Design Of Highways And Streets," The American
Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials, 1990 edition.
4.04.4.01 Establish horizontal centerline radius, degree of curvature and centerline

design grade. The method of attaining superelevations shall be rotation about
the centerline design profile.
4.04.4.02 See Table 4.3 to determine rate of superelevation and length of superelevation
runoff required for the degree of curvature. On arterials and collectors, the 6-
lane, 4-lane, and 2-lane column shall be used respectively.

4.04.4.03 Use the information obtained from Table 4.3 to construct a "super diagram."
See Figure 4.2. Intervals at which pavement cross slopes are shown shall not
exceed 25 feet. The exterior curb elevation and centerline or median curb
elevations shall also be shown.
FIGURE 4.2
SUPERELEVATION DIAGRAM EXAMPLE
2/3L 1/3L
ET
BT PC
OUTSIDE
CURB FLOWLINE
PROFILE GRADE
CURB FLOWLINE GRADE
0.02 L 0.02 L
0.02 + e 0.02 + e INSIDE
CURB FLOWLINE
. 0 2 '/ T
. 0 2 '/ F
T FT . 0 2 '/ F e
NC F T 0.0'/FT RC
. 0 2 '/
BT BEGINNING OF TRANSITION
SUPERELEVATION DIAGRAM
ET ENDING OF TRANSITION
NC NORM AL CROWN SECTION

e = M AXIM UM RATE OF SUPERELEVATION IN FEET
(PER FOOT OF WIDTH) FOR THE GIVEN
PC POINT OF CURVATURE
DEGREE OF CURVE AND DESIGN SPEED.
RC REM OVE ADVERSE CROWN, SUPERELEVATE
AT NORM AL CROWN SLOPE
4.04.4.04 The superelevation runoff shall be about the horizontal P.C. or P.T. of the
curve at a two-thirds to one-third (2/3-1/3) ratio, with approximately two-
thirds (2/3) of the total length required for the superelevated runoff being
achieved prior to the P.C. or after the P.T. of the curve.
4.04.4.05 As part of the construction plans, submit 3-line profiles and super diagrams of
the centerline and both outside curb profile elevations shall be radial to the

centerline. Scale for a 3-line profile is 1" = 50' or larger horizontally, 1" = 1'
vertically.
4.04.4.06 Station, elevation, and rate of superelevation shall be shown on the plan at
each transition point. Special consideration shall be given to potential icing
problems when superelevation runoff occurs near sump conditions. Storm
sewer inlets shall be placed at or near points where the pavement cross-slope
is flat to capture nuisance flows before these flows will cross the pavement.
4.04.4.07 Where there are reverse curves requiring superelevation a tangent length
between the curves shall be provided. Its length shall accommodate the runoff
lengths of both superelevations.
4.04.5 Railroad Crossings All railroad crossings on arterial streets shall be approved
“rubberized” crossings for vehicular and pedestrian traffic.
4.04.6 Barricades Whenever roadways terminate due to project phasing, subdivision

boundaries, etc., barricades are required. A note shall be placed on the plans
directing the Contractor to construct permanent Type III and/or Type IV barricades
(as specified in MUTCD) across the roadway terminus.
4.04.7 Median Turn Bay When ½ of an arterial street with a raised median is
constructed, the construction shall include required turn bays on the half being
constructed. The turn bays’ curb and gutter shall be constructed through the solid
concrete nose.
4.04.8 Urban Centers and TOD’s Intersection and Mid-Block Approach

Design Matrix Table 4.5 provides information regarding intersection and mid-
block design criteria. All markings (pavement striping) and signing relative to
cross-walks shall be in conformance with the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control
Devices. Also reference Article 126-36.5 of the City Code for additional
information.

Table 4.5
Curb Return Flow Line Radius at Intersections
Main Street – Four Lanes with Median
Main Street – Two Lanes with Parallel
Main Street – Two Lanes with Parallel

Median/Center Turn Lane (Mid-Block)
Residential Parkway – Two Lanes

Residential Parkway – Two Lanes
Multi-way Boulevard – Four or Six
Neighborhood/Local Urban – Two

One-Way Couplet – Two Lanes
Boulevard – Four or Six Lanes
Main Street – Two Lanes with

Diagonal Parking (Mid-Block)
Median/Center Turn Lane
Parking (Mid-Block)
Diagonal Parking
Through Lanes
(Mid-Block)
Parking
Lanes
Curb No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Partial
Extensions (Access
street
only)
Corner 25’ 20’ 20’ 20’ 20’ 20’ 20’ 20’ 20’ 20’ 20’ 20’ 20’
Radii
1 1 1 1
Exclusive Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No Yes No No No
Left Turn (Thru
Lanes street
Allowed only)
Exclusive Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No
Right Turn
Lanes
Allowed
Standard Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
2
Markings
High No No No No Yes No Yes No Yes No No Yes No
Visibility
3
Markings
Colored No No Yes No No No No No No No No No No
Paving
Pavers No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes
Pedestrian Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes NA NA NA NA NA Yes Yes NA
Refuge
Islands
1
When intersects with boulevards or existing major arterials.
2
This marking shall only be used when non standard pavement or pavement color is used within the cross
walk and when traffic signals are present.
3
This marking shall only be used when standard pavement and color are used and when traffic signals
are present.

4.05 Vertical Alignment
Design controls for vertical alignment are shown in Table 4.1 Section 4.04.
4.05.1 Permissible Roadway Grades Designers are encouraged to avoid grades that
are less than 0.8% to minimize maintenance and icing problems. The minimum
allowable grade for any roadway or alley is 0.5%. The maximum allowable grade
for any roadway is shown in Table 4.1. The maximum grade for an alley is subject
to the approval of the City Engineer.
4.05.2 Permissible Grades Approaching Intersections The maximum approach

grade at intersections shall be 3% for the distances shown in the table in Figure 4.3.
At intersecting arterials, the maximum permissible grade shall be 2% for 200' either
side of the flow line of the intersecting street. Private driveway, parking lot drive,
and fire lane grades, other than single family residential, may be 4% maximum
when sloping down toward the public street and up to 6% maximum when sloping
up toward the public street. The maximum slope for single family driveways is
14%. In all cases where driveways are steeper than 10%, there shall be an
accompanying pedestrian walk to the main entry with steps as needed to allow a
maximum slope of 10% on the walk.
Figure 4.3
Permissible Intersection Grade
See the table on the next page for the continuation of this figure.

Figure 4.3 (Continued)
Required Minimum Length of Approach Grade at Intersections
MAIN STREET TWO LANES

MAIN STREET TWO LANES
MULTI-WAY BOULEVARD
RESIDENTIAL PARKWAY
ARTERIAL, BOULEVARD
MAIN STREET FOUR
ONE WAY COUPLET

LANES w/ MEDIAN
NEIGHBORHOOD
LOCAL URBAN
COLLECTOR
w/ MEDIAN
LOCAL
*
Private Driveways 65' 65' 75' -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

and Streets
Local 95' 100' 125' 125’ 100’ 100’ -- -- -- -- --
Collector -- 120' 200' 200’ 120’ 120’ -- -- -- -- --
Low Density Rural -- 120' 200' -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
Arterial, Boulevard -- -- 200' 200’ 200’ -- -- -- -- -- --
(2.0%) (2.0%) (2.0%)
Multi-way Boulevard -- -- 200’ 200’ -- -- -- -- -- -- --
(2.0%) (2.0%)
Main Street Two -- 120’ 200’ 200’ 120’ 120’ -- -- -- -- --
Lanes w/ Median
Main Street Four -- 120’ 200’ 200’ -- 120’ -- -- -- -- --
Lanes w/ Median
Main Street Two -- -- -- 125’ 100’ 100’ 95’ 95’ 95’ 95’ 95’
Lanes
One Way Couplet -- -- 125’ 125’ 120’ 120’ 95’ 95’ -- 95’ --
Local Urban -- -- 125’ 125’ 100’ 100’ 95’ 95’ 95’ 95’ 95’
Residential Parkway -- -- 125’ 125’ 100’ 100’ -- -- -- -- --
Neighborhood == == 125’ 125’ 100’ 100’ 95’ 95’ 95’ 95’ 95’
* This figure and table refer to 4.05.2.
4.05.3 Changing Grades Continuous grade changes or "roller-coastering" shall not be

permitted. The use of grade breaks, in lieu of vertical curves, is not encouraged.
However, if a grade break is necessary and the algebraic differences in grade (A)
does not exceed 0.4%; the grade break will be permitted, except at intersections
where algebraic differences in grade of 0.8% will be permitted to facilitate the
warping of the side street to meet the through street.

4.05.4 Cross Slopes Except at intersections, or where superelevation is required, new
roadways shall be level from top of curb to top of curb with a 2% crown as
measured from centerline to lip of curb, or lip of median curb to lip of outside curb
on roadways with raised center islands. Parabolic or curve crowns are not allowed.
The cross slope of a street intersecting a street of higher classification shall be
warped to match the grade on the higher classification street. In no case shall the
pavement cross slope at intersections exceed the grade of the through street.
Maximum pavement cross slope is 4% at intersections, as measured across the
PCR’s of the intersecting street. The rate of change in pavement cross slope to
match the through street shall not exceed 1% every 25 feet horizontally on a local
roadway, 1% every 37.5 feet horizontally on a collector roadway, or 1% every 56.5
feet horizontally on arterial roadways. Separate flow line profiles shall be shown
until a standard cross section is obtained. Do not show a centerline profile within
the area that the separate flow line profiles are shown. See Section 4.05.6 for
through street grade precedents. Quarter crowning may be accepted on a case-by-
case basis with approval from the City Engineer.
4.05.5 Vertical Curves All vertical curves shall be symmetrical. Vertical curves shall
meet the design criteria found in Table 4.1. The minimum grade within a sag
(sump) vertical curve is 0.50%. All vertical curves shall be labeled, in the profile,
with length of curve (L) and K (=L/A), High/Low Pts., PI, P.V.C. and P.V.T.
stations and elevations.
Requirements of the above policy are established by the City Code, the source of the
above policy is, "A Policy On Geometric Design Of Highways And Streets," The
American Association of State Highway Officials, 1990 edition.
4.05.6 Intersections In addition to the requirements set forth in Sections 4.04.3 and
4.05.4, the following criteria shall apply at intersections.
4.05.6.01 The grade of the "through" street shall take precedence at intersections. At
intersections of roadways with the same classification, the more important
roadway, as determined by the Traffic Engineer, shall have this precedence.
See Section 4.05.4.
4.05.6.02 Key factors determining the elevation of the curb return on the side street and
the amount of warp needed on a side street transitioning to a through street
are:

4.05.6.02.1 For permissible approach grade, see Section 4.05.2.
4.05.6.02.2 For pavement cross slope at the P.C.R.'s on the side street and
permissible warp in pavement cross slope, see Section 4.05.4.
4.05.6.02.3 Vertical curve criteria, per Section 4.05.5
4.05.6.02.4 Vertical controls, per Section 4.05.7
4.05.6.03 The elevation at the P.C.R. on the through street is set by the grade of the
through street in conjunction with pavement cross slope.
In retrofit situations, pavement cross slopes (from the existing crown or edge
of existing asphalt to the lip of gutter) between 1% and 4% may be approved.
Where existing streets are widened the cross slope requirements of above
apply. Cross slope grade breaks must provide a safe driving condition. The
plan or profile of the street shall include existing spot elevations located at the
existing curb and gutter lip, crown line (centerline) and the existing edge of
asphalt at a maximum of 50-foot spacing. This provides data for verification
of existing/proposed cross slopes.
4.05.6.04 Carrying the crown of the side street into the through street is not permitted.
4.05.6.05 Tipping an inlet for the benefit of drainage is not permitted.
4.05.6.06 At an arterial-arterial; boulevard-boulevard; multi-way boulevard-multi-way

boulevard intersections, a more detailed drawing of the entire intersection's
drivability shall be submitted. See Section 4.05.4 for rates of pavement warp
allowed.
Pavement cross slopes in the plan view shall be shown until a normal cross
section is obtained on each side of the intersection, in addition to standard
requirements of a roadway plan. Also show spot elevations in the intersection,
on the plan view, on a 15-foot grid. Show this information on separate plan
sheets at minimum scales of 1"=20' horizontally.
4.05.7 Curb Returns Minimum grade around curb returns, when turning water, shall be
1.27%. Label high point elevation and distance from P.C.R. Label station and
elevation of upstream flow line intersection when a cross pan is required.

Maximum fall around a curb return generally equals steepest grade ( 2%) coming
into or out of a return multiplied by the length of the return, plus .2 of a foot.
4.05.8 Connection with Existing Roadways Connections with existing roadways

shall be smooth transitions. If the algebraic difference in grade (A) exceeds 0.40%
a vertical curve shall be used to transition the grade following the criteria in Section
4.05.5. Show the existing centerline and/or flow line elevations for 200-feet at 50-
foot maximum intervals, unless conditions warrant additional information.
The following note shall appear on all street construction plans where the proposed
design is matching an existing street along an existing edge of asphalt:
"Cores showing adequacy of pavement in accordance with an approved

soils report and pavement design are required prior to issuance of street
permits. If the developer cannot prove adequacy he shall be responsible for
the removal of existing pavement and replacement with the properly
designed pavement. A minimum of 24-feet of pavement or one-half of the
street section, whichever is less, is the required replacement. Any
construction beyond centerline of the street in order to match existing
grades and to make a safe, drivable surface will also be the developer's
responsibility."
4.05.9 Offsite Design and Construction The design grade and existing ground of all
roadways that dead end due to project phasing, subdivision boundaries, etc., shall be
continued in the proposed plan and profile for at least 500 feet or to its intersection
with an arterial roadway. This limit shall be extended to 1,000 feet when arterial
roadways are being designed. If the roadway adjacent to the proposed development
is not fully improved, the developer is responsible for the design and construction of
an asphalt transition beyond the project phasing, subdivision boundaries, etc., of
City approved thickness and a 4' wide Type 2 (Table 23.1) aggregate base shoulder
for the safe conveyance of traffic from the improved section to the existing
roadway. The following formula shall be applied to the taper or lane change
necessary for this transition:
L = WS
Where:
L = length of transition in feet
W = width of offset in feet

S = speed limit or 85th percentile speed (whichever is
greater) for speeds greater than 40 mph.
L = WS2/60
Where:
L = length of transition in feet
W = width of offset in feet
S = speed limit or 85th percentile speed (whichever is
greater) for speeds less than or equal to 40 mph.
For temporary transitions, 15:1 may be used as approved by the City Engineer.
The Traffic Engineer should be consulted for any unusual transition conditions.
Grade breaks within the transition greater than 1% are not allowed when matching
existing dirt or gravel streets.
The cost of pavement transitions shall be borne by the Developer.
4.06 Streetscape Design and Specifications

Contact Planning, Design, and Construction Division of the Parks, Recreation and Open Space
Department, 303-739-7160.
4.07 Specification for Fire Lanes, Private Streets or Drives, and

Parking Lots
4.07.1 General This section provides design and construction requirements, in addition
to those listed elsewhere in this document, and specifically address private streets,
driveways, parking lots, and fire lanes.
4.07.2 Pavement Design Soils and pavement design reports are required for fire lanes,
private streets or drives, and parking lots per Section 5.00 PAVEMENT DESIGN.
All reports must be approved by the City Engineer before a paving permit will be
issued.
4.07.3 Drainage Report Preliminary and final drainage reports are required. See
Section 2.04, STORM DRAINAGE PLANS AND REPORTS.
4.07.4 Pavement Cross Slopes All asphalt surfaces shall have a minimum grade of
1.00%. If grades are less than 1.00%, the pavement shall be concrete. Inverted
crowns used for driveways, fire lanes, or parking lots shall have a swale "V" design

with 1.00% minimum positive slope along the flow line. Drainage pans shall
continue to an inlet or other acceptable outfall and will not drain to an asphalt
surface. If the pan slope is between 0.5% and 1.0%, a concrete drainage pan shall
be installed. The pan shall have a minimum width of 4 feet, and shall be a
minimum 6" thick in parking lot areas, a minimum of 10" thick in fire lanes, and
driveways. The center depression of the pan shall be 1/4" per foot of pan width
(total) minimum. Where bituminous paving adjoins the pan, paving must be 1/8" to
3/8" higher than the elevation of the lip of pan. Reinforcing shall be that as required
by standard detail S4.1. If drainage is appropriately provided and the perpendicular
parking spaces and adjoining private street form a continuous crowned section, the
pans may be omitted. Handicap parking spaces and access aisles shall be level with
surface slopes not exceeding 1:50 (2%) in all directions.
4.07.5 Transitions Transitions in street width shall be smooth and shall not pose a
hazard to traffic (refer to Section 4.05.9, OFFSITE DESIGN AND
CONSTRUCTION). Transitions shall not encroach on the limits of the existing
street width. Horizontal alignment and pavement widening in curves shall conform
to Section 4.04, HORIZONTAL ALIGNMENT.
4.07.6 Curbs Vertical or mountable curb and gutter shall border all private streets.
Refer to City approved site plan.
4.07.7 Parking Area and Parking Lots Island noses for landscaping, utility access,
or pedestrian access may be located within areas of perpendicular parking stalls but
no island may project within 18 feet of centerline of street. Curb radii shall be a
minimum 18" except locations allowing drive-through access.
4.07.7.01 Handicap Parking Handicap parking shall be provided within TODs and
Urban Centers streets with diagonal parking. There shall be two universal
spaces per each side of the street, per block, where there is diagonal parking.
One of the universal spaces shall be van accessible.
4.07.7.02 The resultant grade in any direction within handicap parking shall not exceed
two percent.
4.07.8 ADA Ramps Wheelchair access shall be provided along designated pedestrian
paths from each area of parking to adjacent buildings and connecting sidewalks.
Ramps shall have a minimum width of 48", a maximum slope of 1 vertical on 12

horizontal, approach areas, and turning areas as provided for in the Uniform Federal
Accessibility Standards.
4.07.9 Permissible Grades The maximum permissible longitudinal grade for fire
lanes is 10%. The maximum transverse grade for a fire lane is four percent with a
resultant maximum slope of ten percent.
4.07.10 Construction Observation/Materials Testing of Projects To assure the

quality of construction, a Licensed Professional Engineer (Consultant) shall provide
construction observation and materials testing services for all projects falling under
the category of private streets, driveways, fire lanes, parking lots, utilities, and other
civil works. This Consultant shall be knowledgeable in civil works construction,
street and roadway construction, paving techniques, material sampling and testing,
and shall be familiar with the City standards and specifications and the design of the
project. Construction observers and materials testing technicians shall be under the
direct supervision of the Consultant. Periodic construction observation and
materials testing services shall be performed daily when significant work is in
progress. These services shall be sufficient in scope to determine the quality and
adequacy of the construction. The Consultant shall insure compliance with City
standards and specifications.
Before a certificate of occupancy can be issued the consultant shall prepare a written
statement and shall submit it to the Public Improvement Inspections Division in the
following format.
STATEMENT OF CONSTRUCTION OBSERVATION

AND MATERIALS TESTING OF PROJECT IMPROVEMENTS
(Name of Project)
Our firm was retained to provide construction observation and materials testing services for the above named
project. Services were performed daily during the construction of (list type of construction: asphalt parking lot;
concrete parking lot; curb and gutter; walks; private streets; drives; fire lanes; etc.). Testing was performed for (list
type of testing: concrete and/or asphalt paving subgrade; soils subgrade moisture/density control; base course
gradation, moisture/density; asphalt thickness, compaction and laboratory analysis (extraction, gradation, and
Marshall value unit weight); concrete slump, air and strength; etc.) Copies of observation logs and materials testing
reports are available upon request. It is our professional opinion that the level of testing services and construction
observation performed and testing results were adequate to show construction was in substantial compliance with
the City of Aurora standards and specifications.
Company Name (Printed Name) P.E.

Address (Seal Over Name and date)

4.07.11 Pavement Widening at Curves on Private and Public Local Streets At
an intersection of two private or public local streets with a centerline radius from 33'
to 55' Figure 4.4 shall be used. The width of pavement around horizontal curves
shall be widened in accordance with Section 4.04.3.03 PAVEMENT WIDENING
FOR SHORT RADII. Pavement widening transitions should generally occur over a
roadway length of between 100 feet and 200 feet before the points of curvature and
tangency. The adequacy of the geometric design will be based on the ability of the
designed section to envelope a template based on the coincident passage of a fire
truck and standard passenger car at a speed of 10 mph in accordance with AASHTO
procedures. The geometric design may be based on a variety of methods including,
but not limited to, (1) three point curves, (2) spiral curves, or (3) straight-line
transitions.

Figure 4.4

4.08 Roadway Specifications
Following is a summary of the minimum roadway construction requirements contained in Article
126-36 of the Aurora City Code (see standard detail S1.1 et seq.).
Table 4.6
Roadway Specifications
Minimum Minimum Landscaping Type of Sidewalk, Curb,
Roadway Type Dedicated Roadway Strip/Tree and Gutter
Right-of- Width Flow Lawn
Way Width line to Flow
line
Local Type I 64' 34' 8' Mountable curb, gutter, and
5' detached walk
Local Type II 60' 30' 8' Mountable curb, gutter, and
5' detached walk
Local Type II Alternate 44' 30' None Mountable curb, gutter, and
5' attached walk
Local Type III 68' 40' 8 6" vertical curb and gutter,
and 5' detached walk
Four Lane Collector 84' 56' 8' 6" vertical curb and gutter,
Two Lane Collector 74' 46' 8' 6" vertical curb and gutter,
Two Lane Collector 62' 34' 8' 6" vertical curb and gutter,
Alternate and 5' detached walk
Low Density Rural 60' 24' None 4' gravel shoulder each side
Six Lane Arterial 144' 102'(2-38' 10' off street 6" vertical curb and gutter
roadways; and 10' detached walk
26' min.
raised
median)
Four Lane Arterial 114' 76' (2-31' 10' 6" vertical curb and gutter,
Raised Median roadways; and 8' detached walk
14' min.
raised
median)
Four Lane Arterial 114' 76' 10' 6" vertical curb and gutter,
Painted Median and 8' detached walk
Residential Alley 16' 16' N/A
Local Commercial and 20' 20' N/A
Industrial Alleys
Fire Lanes Commercial N/A 23' N/A
Fire Lanes Residential N/A 23' N/A
Private streets or drives see Section 2.05 Roadway Plans

Table 4.7
Urban Centers and TOD’s Roadway Specifications
Minimum Minimum Landscaping Type of Sidewalk, Curb,
Roadway Type Dedicated Roadway Strip/Tree and Gutter
Right-of- Width Flow Lawn
Way line to Flow
Width line
Boulevard 146’ 106' (2-39’ 9.5' 6" vertical curb and gutter
roadways; 28’ and 10' detached walk
min. raised
median)
Multi-way Boulevard w/ 166' 132’ (2-7’ NA 6” vertical curb and gutter
parallel parking parking lanes; 2- and 16’ attached walk
16’ local lanes; (hardscape)
2-26’ thru lanes;
2-9’ min. & 1-16’
min. raised
median)
Multi-way Boulevard w/ 182’ 148’ (2-16’ NA 6” vertical curb and gutter
diagonal parking parking lanes; 2- and 16’ attached walk
16’ local lanes; (hardscape)
2-26’ thru lanes;
2-9’ min. & 1-16’
min. raised
median)
Main Street – 4 Lanes 118' 84’ (2-35’ NA 6” vertical curb and gutter
w/ Median / Center roadways; 16’ and 16’ attached walk
Turn Lane min. raised (hardscape)
median)
Main Street – 2 Lanes 96’ 62’ (2-24’ NA 6” vertical curb and gutter
w/ Median / Center roadways; 16’ and 16’ attached walk
Turn Lane min. raised (hardscape)
median)
Main Street – 2 Lanes 78’ 46' NA 6” vertical curb and gutter
w/ Parallel Parking and 16’ attached walk
(hardscape)
Main Street – 2 Lanes 90’ 58’ NA 6” vertical curb and gutter
w/ Diagonal Parking and 16’ attached walk
(hardscape)
One Way Couplet 73’ 41’ NA 6” vertical curb and gutter
and 16’ attached walk
(hardscape)
Local Urban – 2 Lanes 66’ 34’ NA 6” vertical curb and gutter
and 16’ attached walk
(hardscape)
Residential Parkway – 104’ 76' (2-24' 7.5’ 6" vertical curb and gutter,
2 Lanes roadways; 28' and 6' detached walk
min. raised
median)
Neighborhood – 2 62’ 34’ 7.5’ 6" vertical curb and gutter,
Lanes and 6' detached walk
Alleys 20' 20' NA NA
Fire Lanes NA 23' NA NA

4.09 Street light Policy
4.09.1 General Street lighting shall be installed with underground electric service on all
"newly developed" dedicated public streets in the City. All property owners
abutting these streets shall, at their sole expense, pay the cost of these installations.
The installation of street lighting facilities, or the deposit of sufficient funds to
insure the installation, will be required as a prerequisite to the issuance of
certificates of occupancy for any structure constructed along said streets.
4.09.2 Property Owner's Responsibility The property owner or land developer shall
contact the Public Works Department, Engineering Services Division (303-739-
7300) to initiate the street light design for any new development during the plan
review process. The property owner or developer shall provide a copy of the
proposed site plan and/or civil plan which will be used for the proposed street light
design. The plan will be returned to the developer for inclusion of any required
street lights.
4.09.3 City of Aurora Responsibility The City will provide Xcel Energy with a
design plan for the required number, style, and placement of the street lights. Xcel
Energy will provide a cost estimate to the City for installing the street lights. The
City will initiate the process to install the street lights after payment is received
from the property owner. Approximately 120 days are required by Xcel Energy to
provide the City with a distribution design and cost estimate for installing the
required street lights. The City will provide a quote letter to the property owner or
land developer stating his street light cost requirements and payment due date.
4.09.4 Street light Installation Procedure Xcel Energy may schedule the street light
installations when the new underground electrical distribution for the new
development is being installed. This scheduling will be coordinated by the Xcel
Energy representative and the property owner or developer. The property owner or
developer is cautioned that any damage occurring to the street lights or the street
light underground distribution due to his construction operations will be billed to
him.
4.09.5 Solar Powered Street Lights The property owner or land developer may
propose the installation of solar powered street lights. The property owner or land
developer should contact Public Works Department, Engineering Services Division

at the start of the land development process to discuss the availability and use of
solar powered street lights.

5.00 PAVEMENT DESIGN
5.01 REPORT SUBMITTAL AND REVIEW
5.02 REPORT FORMAT
5.03 GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION
5.04 PAVEMENT DESIGN PORTION OF THE REPORT
5.05 SUBGRADE CHARACTERISTICS
5.06 TRAFFIC EQUIVALENT SINGLE AXLE LOADS (ESAL)
5.07 MINIMUM PAVEMENT SECTIONS AND DEFAULT SECTIONS
5.08 PAVEMENT MATERIALS
5.09 PAVEMENT DESIGN PROCEDURE
5.10 MISCELLANEOUS
5.11 FORMS, NOMOGRAPHS, SAMPLE
SECTION 5.00 pavement design
5.00 Pavement Design
5.00.1 General The "AASHTO Guide for Design of Pavement Structures," 1993
(AASHTO Guide) and "Development of Pavement Design Concepts" for
Metropolitan Government Pavement Engineers Council are the basis for this design
specification.
5.00.2 Scope Work within public right-of-way as well as all sites subject to traffic
and/or parking, not excepted below, require a geotechnical investigation and
pavement design report (hereafter called “geotechnical and pavement design report”
or “report”).
The geotechnical and pavement design report for parking areas of 3,500 square feet
or less may be waived for the following types of businesses:
Day care centers
Low volume commercial, non-industrial businesses (doctor, dentist, beauty

parlor, etc.)
Areas where truck traffic will be prohibited
If the geotechnical and pavement design report is waived, the pavement section for
these parking areas shall be 5" hot bituminous pavement, unless a greater thickness is
required by the City Engineer.
5.00.3 The provisions of Section 5.00.2 do not apply to high-volume parking lots such as
convenience stores, fast food restaurants, drive-in banks, and similar establishments.
5.00.4 Residential or commercial sites less than or equal to 2.5 acres, or parking areas less
than or equal to 2.0 acres, may be eligible for the default pavement section in Table
5.2b in lieu of an approved Geotechnical and Pavement Design Report, if the
property owner wishes. This waiver does not apply to industrial lots or public
roadways. To obtain approval of a default section, the property owner must complete
and sign a default letter form indicating his selection of default paving sections listed
in the table attached to the form. An approved site plan must be available for staff to
verify site eligibility. If it is verified that the site meets the requirements of the
Pavement Design 5-1 9.2010

default section, the approved pavement section shall be as listed in Table 5.2b, or
equivalent.
5.00.5 Transit oriented developments (TOD’s) and urban centers have different pavement
requirements. These types of developments are defined in Article 126-36.5 of the
City Code. TOD’s and urban centers are set up to contain three context zones:
Edge, Transition and Core.
Edge Zones may use flexible pavement utilizing the modified ESAL values shown in
Table 5.1a located in Section 5.06.1. Concrete pavements may also be used in this
zone. See Section 5.08.3 for required uses of concrete pavements.
Core and Transition Zones are required to use concrete pavement utilizing the
modified ESAL values shown in Table 5.1a located in Section 5.06.1.
Additive overlays will not be allowed. Rotomilling will be required to the depth of
overlay proposed.
5.00.6 Definitions
W18 - 18 Kip Equivalent Single Axle Loads for the design period (20 years) in the
design lane. (ESAL)
MR - Effective Roadbed Soil Resilient Modulus as correlated from Hveem

Stabilometer (R-Value) AASHTO Test Method T 190 for soil groups classified as A-
1, A-2-5, A-2-7, A-3, A-4, and A-5, or Unconfined Compressive Strength Test
(remold), UCC, AASHTO Test Method T 208 for soil groups classified as A-6, A-7,
A-2-4, and A-2-6. In the event that Unconfined Compressive Strength tests results
for A-2-4 and A-2-6 soils are not reproducible, R-value testing shall be performed.
K - Effective Modulus of Subgrade Reaction. MR is input and adjustments made for

the effects of subbase, rigid foundation near the surface, and potential loss of support
due to erosion, as applicable.
5.01 Report Submittal and Review

5.01.1 Initially at least two copies of the Geotechnical and Pavement Design Report (three
reports if the submitter wants one copy returned) must be submitted to Engineering
Services. Each copy of the report shall have the original stamp and signature of, and
be dated by a Colorado registered Professional Engineer competent in the field of

Geotechnical Engineering (herein called “Geotech”). See the general checklist at the
end of the section for assistance in preparing a report.
5.01.2 A Geotechnical and Pavement Design Report go through a review and approval
process. The report must be submitted in person to the Engineering Services counter
personnel in Room 3218 of the City of Aurora Municipal Center, 15151 E. Alameda
Parkway, Aurora, CO 80012, phone (303) 739-7312. The report shall not be mailed
to Engineering Services' personnel, Public Works' personnel, the Director of Public
Works, the City Engineer, or to the City of Aurora Materials Lab.
5.01.3 Satisfactory reports will be approved and signed by the City Engineer. Approval is
for one year only. Approved pavement design sections from the approved report will
be transferred onto the previously approved civil plans by the City Reviewing
Engineer. This must be done before a paving permit can be obtained. A paving
permit is required before paving construction is allowed. If a paving permit is needed
after the one-year approval period, the Geotech must submit a letter referencing the
original report, containing the City of Aurora approved drawing number from the
original report, and stating that the recommendations in the original report remain
valid and continue to comply with the current City of Aurora criteria at that time.
5.01.4 Contingent upon previously approved civil plans, the review will be generally
completed within two weeks for the first review, and within five (5) working days for
any subsequent review. The submitter will be notified by phone if the submittal is
not approved. Unsatisfactory reports, with appropriate comments, will be made
available for pick up. Also, the submitter will be notified by phone if the submittal is
approved and if there is a report to pick up (if three reports were submitted, one
approved report will be available for pick up).
5.02 Report Format
5.02.1 General The report shall be typed on 8 ½″ x 11″ paper and properly bound with
durable covers. DO NOT HARD BIND: all pages should be easily taken apart and
reassembled for copying and scanning purposes.
As a minimum, the report shall contain the following information and in the order
enumerated: a title page with the City approval block; a vicinity map; the
geotechnical investigation portion of the report (see 5.03); the pavement design

portion of the report (see 5.04); an original stamp and signature of the Geotech
responsible for the report.
5.02.2 Title Page with City Approval Block The title page can be on the front cover or
must be the very first page of the report. A sample of the title page is included in
Section 5.11. The following information shall be shown on the title page:
Title of the report: Geotechnical and Pavement Design Report
Subdivision Name and Filing Number. Also, include the Lot and Block
numbers if the report does not apply to the entire filing. If the report does not
relate to a specific subdivision, the name of the proposed development shall be
listed.
City of Aurora Engineering Drawing Number of approved civil plans.
Name of Consultant, full address (including zip code), telephone number, and
fax number of the Consultant; name of contact person.
Name of the owner, full address (including zip code), telephone number, fax
number; name of contact person.
A 2″ to 2 ½″ blank space for the City reviewing engineer’s comments.
A City approval block, in the dimensions shown on the Sample Title Page.
5.02.3 Vicinity Map The vicinity map shall follow the title page. Minimum scale is 1″ =
2000′ showing the location and name of all arterial roadways within one mile of the
proposed development and all other roadways in the vicinity of the proposed
development. The project area shall be indicated by shading. The appropriate
portion of the city map, published by the City, is preferred for this vicinity map.
These city maps are available in Room 3218 at the City of Aurora Municipal Center.
The map can also be printed from the City website (auroragov.org – eServices – GIS
Mapping).
5.02.4 Seal and Signature The geotechnical and pavement design report shall be
stamped, signed, and dated by a Geotech licensed as a Professional Engineer in the
State of Colorado. The original stamp and signature of the Geotech must be on each
copy submitted; photocopies are not acceptable.

The original seal, signature and date shall be affixed on the title or signature page of
the report.
5.03 Geotechnical Investigation

The geotechnical investigation portion of the report shall contain the following minimum
information:
If the streets have not been cut to rough construction grade at the time of the borings, a map
with location and depth of test holes located to within 5' horizontally and 1' vertically, as
located by a Professional Land Surveyor registered in the State of Colorado is required. If
the streets are at rough construction grade at the time of the borings, a scaled drawing with
the boring locations, within 5' horizontally, is required.
Ground water elevations, if encountered
Drill logs with subgrade elevations
Grading analysis curves, AASHTO T 27 (each sample of A-1 to A-4 soils)
Atterberg limits, AASHTO T 89 and T 90 (each soil type in each boring)
Soil classification, AASHTO M 145 and ASTM D 2487
Moisture-density curves
Natural Moisture/Density, AASHTO T 265 and T 204 (each drive sample)
Percent passing No. 200, AASHTO T 11 (each soil type in each boring)
Sulfate Tests, AASHTO T 290 (1 test per 1,000' of A-6 and A-7 soils)
Swell Tests, ASTM D 4546 at 200 psf (except soil types A-1 to A-4) One test per five
borings or fraction thereof
Effective Resilient Modulus of Roadbed Soils, MR, for design of flexible pavements and
Effective Modulus of Subgrade Reaction, K, for design of rigid pavements
Depth from finished subgrade of bore hole or test pit shall be four-foot minimum, with
every fourth one (minimum of one) at nine feet.
All borings shall be sampled using a "California" style thin-wall type of sampler AASHTO
T 206
Boring logs shall include boring number, number of blows per foot, moisture conditions,
free water, and anomalous conditions
A map showing location or limits of different soil types
In addition, the Geotech shall investigate and recommend solutions to problems of:
Swell potential of cohesive soils

Frost heave in silty soils
Potential ground water problems
Presence of sulfates
Any other matter that may adversely affect the design and life of the pavement.
Soil samples shall be taken based on the proposed subgrade elevation. All borings shall be taken
at 250' maximum intervals along local and collector streets, private streets, and fire lanes and 200'
maximum along arterials. One boring shall be made for each 15,000 square feet of parking lot. A
minimum of one boring is required in all parking lots. If more than one soil type is encountered in
the boring, they shall be logged and tested separately. The pavement shall be designed for the soil
exhibiting the lowest subgrade support values.
5.04 Pavement Design Portion of the Report

5.04.1 Flexible Pavement The report shall include the following minimum information.
Design nomograph showing the line connecting MR-ESAL-SN

Map showing location of each different pavement section and soil type
Design calculations for each pavement section
Swell potential discussion
Discussion of any unusual design or construction problems or requirements
Related information indicated in Section 5.03
5.04.2 Rigid Pavement The report shall contain the following information.
Design nomographs showing the lines connecting ESAL, slab thickness, and K-
Effective Modulus of Subgrade Reaction
Map showing locations of each different pavement section and soil types
Design calculations for each pavement section.
Swell potential discussion
Related information indicated in Section 5.03
5.05 Subgrade Characteristics

5.05.1 Swell Potential All soil groups, excluding A-1 through A-4, shall be tested to
determine swell or settlement potential. Tests shall be run on the "California Spoon"

samples in accordance with ASTM D 4546 at a surcharge of 200 psf. The swell tests
shall be plotted and the percent swell/settlement and swell pressure (psf) shall be
determined and reported. Test results which are suspected of being too high or too
low for the soil type shall not be considered in the design of the pavement, but shall
be reported. Any deletion of data shall be justified in the report.
As a minimum, the report shall stipulate the following: the required depth of
moisture treatment of the subgrade shall be determined by the highest percentage of
swell as recorded as a whole number as indicated in Table 5.0 below:
Moisture treatment shall achieve a moisture content and compaction as specified in

Section 20.06.8 COMPACTION.
Soils with >5% swell shall also require swell mitigation per Section 22.00,
STABILIZED SUBGRADE, in addition to moisture treatment.
Table 5.0
Moisture Treatment Requirements
Depth of Moisture Depth of Chemical
Swell Potential *
Treatment Stabilization
< 3% swell moisture treat to a depth of 1' ---
Moisture treat to depth of 2.5' or ---

> 3% < 5% swell Stabilization treat to a
Moisture treat to a depth of 1.5'
depth of 1'
Stabilization treat to a
> 5% swell Moisture treat to a depth of 1.5'
depth of 1'
* Indicated highest percentage of swell as recorded to the nearest whole number
NOTE: From the top of finished grade, moisture treatment shall not go deeper than 30"
without written direction from the engineer.
5.05.2 Resilient Modulus
5.05.2.01 For soil types, A-1, A-3, A-2-5, A-2-7, A-4, and A-5 Resilient Modulus, MR
shall be determined by R-Value conversion. R-Value shall be determined in
accordance with AASHTO T 190. The following formula based on Colorado
Department of Transportation, "Roadway Design Manual" shall be utilized to
convert Hveem "R" to MR.
MR = (.75) 10Z; where Z = 0.0142R + 3.4098

5.05.2.02 For soil types A-2-4 and A-2-6: MR = 1.67 qu
For soil type A-6: MR = 1.61 qu
For soil type A-7-6: MR = 2.35 qu
For Claystone: MR = 1.26 qu
Where qu = Unconfined Compressive Strength (remolded) in psf, AASHTO T

208; and where MR is in psi
The above values may be multiplied by a coefficient of 1.33, if one of the

following applies: a subdrain system is provided; subgrade permeability is
greater than 1,000 ft. per year; it is a Low Density Rural roadway section with
drainage ditches; or the subgrade is gneiss or granite in nature.
Remarks - Note unusual conditions or other data that would be considered

necessary to properly interpret the results.
5.05.2.03 Effective Modulus of Subgrade Reaction For rigid pavement design,

laboratory soil resilient Modulus MUST be converted to Modulus of Subgrade
Reaction based on the formula: k = MR/19.4 or Figure 3.3 or 3.4 of the
AASHTO Guide. Figure 3.6 of the AASHTO Guide must also be applied with
LS = 2.5 to obtain the Effective Modulus of Subgrade Reaction, k, before
entering this value into the appropriate rigid pavement design nomograph,
N-5.3 or N-5.4, or computer program.
5.06 Traffic - Equivalent Single Axle Loads (ESAL)

5.06.1 ESAL is defined as total number of equivalent 18,000 lb. single axle load
applications for the design lane during a 20-year design period. The design period for
pavements within the Core and Transition Zones of TOD’s and Urban Centers is 30-
years. Calculated ESALs must be equal to or greater than the Minimum ESALs
listed in Tables 5.1 and 5.1A below. The City Engineer may increase the minimum
ESAL at any location, if in his opinion traffic conditions warrant.

Table 5.1
6
Minimum ESAL (X10 )*
Single-Family Multifamily Commercial and Industrial
Residential Residential Business
Arterials 2.2 2.2 3 4
4-Lane Collector 1.5 1.5 2.2 2.2
2-Lane Collector 0.2 0.2 0.4 1.1
Low Density Rural 0.07 -- -- --
Local Street 0.06 0.07 0.2 0.7
Private Street or Drive 0.06 0.07 0.2 0.7
Fire Lane -- 0.07 0.2 0.2
Parking, Cars Only 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04
Parking, All Other 0.04 0.04 0.07 0.07
* To deviate to less than the minimum indicated ESAL an axle-load analysis must be
approved by the City Engineer.
Table 5.1a
6
Minimum ESAL (X10 )* (Urban Centers and TODs)
Single- Commercial
Family Multifamily and
Inside TOD Residential Residential Business Industrial
Edge Zone
Boulevard - 6 Lanes 3.3 3.3 4.5 --
Multiway Boulevard; Median/Center Turn Lane - 4-Lane 2.25 2.25 3.3 --
Main Street; Median/Center Turn Lane - 4-Lane 2.25 2.25 3.3 --
Main Street; Median/Center Turn Lane - 2-Lane 0.3 0.3 0.6 --
Couplet - 2 Lanes 0.3 0.3 0.6 --
Transition Zone --
Main Street; Median/Center Turn Lane - 4-Lane -- 2.25 3.3 --
Main Street; Median/Center Turn Lane - 2-Lane -- 0.3 0.6 --
Main Street; Parallel Parking - 2-Lane -- 0.3 0.6 --
Main Street; Angled Parking - 2-Lane -- 0.3 0.6 --
Couplet - 2 Lanes -- 0.3 0.6 --
Local Urban - 2 Lanes -- 0.3 0.6 --
Residential Parkway - 2 Lanes -- 0.3 0.6 --
Neighborhood - 2 Lanes -- --
**Core Zone - Concrete Only --
Main Street; Parallel Parking - 2-Lane -- 0.3 0.45 --
Main Street; Angled Parking - 2-Lane -- 0.3 0.45 --
Local Urban - 2 Lanes -- 0.3 0.45 --
Residential Parkway - 2 Lanes -- 0.3 0.45 --
*To deviate to less than the minimum indicated ESAL an axle-load analysis must be approved by the City Engineer.
**Rigid ESALs Used in the Core Zone

5.06.2 Roadway zoning classifications are based on the projected land use of the areas
served by the subject segment of roadway. Residential roadways service only areas
with a minimum of 80% residential zoned property. Commercial and Industrial
classifications service areas with 20% or more of the land to be used as Commercial
or Industrial. If less than 80% of the area served is residential, the Classification will
be either Commercial or Industrial. If any of the non-residential area served is
Industrial, the classification will be Industrial. If none of the non-residential area
served is Industrial, the Classification will be Commercial. Any classification with a
calculated ESAL of 1.4 X 106 or more will be considered to be an arterial.
Pavement design traffic studies are a method of determining 20-year design ESALs
(30-year design ESALs within Core Zones of TOD’s and Urban Centers). ESAL
calculations in traffic studies shall be based on the AASHTO "Guide for Design of
Pavement Structures," latest edition. The traffic study, when required, shall be
submitted with the pavement design and subject to review and acceptance.
Parking Areas For parking areas, traffic loads from Table 5.1 may be assumed.
Residential If a traffic study for a residential roadway is not available, traffic loads
can be determined using Equation 2:
ESAL20 = 62,000 + 80 R Equation 2

Where R = number of residential density units serviced by the street
Commercial For roadways where any individual commercial site is 10 acres or

more, traffic loading shall be determined by an approved traffic study only. For
commercial roadways with sites less than 10 acres, traffic loading can be calculated
using Equation 3:
ESAL20 = 62,000 + 80 R + 260,000 CA Equation 3

Where: CA = Commercial Acres serviced by the street
Industrial For roadways where any individual industrial site is 10 acres or more,
traffic loading shall be determined by an approved traffic study only. The City may
require a traffic study for any industrial roadway. For industrial roadways with sites
less than 10 acres, traffic can be calculated using equation 4:
ESAL20 = 260,000 CA + 400,000 IA Equation 4
Where: IA = Industrial Acres serviced by the street.

5.07 Minimum Pavement Sections and Default Sections
If the calculated pavement sections, outside of TOD and Urban Center developments, indicate
thinner sections than the Minimum Pavement Sections listed in Table 5.2a below, the Minimum
Pavement Sections shall govern. The City Engineer may increase the minimum pavement section
at any location if, in his opinion, conditions warrant. All asphalt roadways will be paved with a
minimum of two (2) lifts, regardless of minimal thickness.
Table 5.2a
MINIMUM PAVEMENT SECTIONS
6
ESAL (X10 ) Full Depth Asphalt PCC AC and Aggregate Base
> 1.8 7-1/2" 7-1/2" N/A
0.5 - 1.8 6-1/2" 6-1/2" N/A
0.2 - 0.5 5-1/2" 5-1/2" 3-1/2" AC + 7" Aggregate Base
Less than 0.2 5" 5" 3" AC + 6" Aggregate Base
Parking Areas only 5" 5" 3" AC + 6" Aggregate Base
50' ea. Side of RTD Bus Stop* 10" 9"
*This extra depth pavement is to be placed in the outside lane only. The City reserves the right to review
location and length of the bus stop with RTD and change the size and location of the extra-depth pavement.
Default pavement sections are listed in Table 5.2b. These default sections are allowed only for
parking lots, private drives or fire lanes located in non-TOD and non Urban Center developments.
A Default Letter must be approved prior to using the default sections (See Section 5.11.1).
Table 5.2b
DEFAULT SECTIONS ALLOWABLE
Parking Lots Private Drives and Fire Lanes
Auto Parking Only Single Family Drives Multifamily Fire Lanes Business/Commercial Fire Lanes
P1 P4 P7 P11
5.5" A.C. 5.5" A.C. 6.5" A.C. 7.5" A.C.
P2 P5 P8 P12
3" A.C. 3" A.C. 5" A.C. 6" A.C.
+8" A.B.C. +8" A.B.C. + 6" A.B.C. + 6" A.B.C.
P9 P13
4" A.C. 5" A.C.
+ 8.5" A.B.C. + 8.5" A.B.C.
P3 P6 P10 P14
5.5" Concrete 5.5" Concrete 5.5" Concrete 7" Concrete
Note: The P in default Sections P1 through P14 stands for pavement. It is a "shorthand" way of
identifying exactly which of the 14 default sections is being specified. Use the P number and the
description under each P number when using the default letter (see Section 5.11.1).

5.08 Pavement Materials
5.08.1 Asphalt Cement Concrete (AC) shall be plant mix hot bituminous pavement (also
referred to as HBP). Use of other than AC, PCC, or gravel base requires submittal of
appropriate test data for approval. Materials and construction shall comply with
Section 24.00, HOT MIX ASPHALT, Section 31.00, CONCRETE PAVEMENT, or
Section 23, STREET CONSTRUCTION AGGREGATES.
5.08.2 Alternate paving materials will be allowed at the discretion of the City Engineer as
follows.
Both sides of the street must be of the same material.
Minimum lengths for any one type of pavement material shall be as specified in
Table 5.3 below.
5.08.3 Arterial/arterial, boulevard/boulevard, multi-way boulevard/multi-way boulevard

intersections shall be PCC beginning 250' behind each PCR and extending through
the entire intersection.
Table 5.3
DIFFERENT PAVING MATERIALS
STREET TYPE MINIMUM LENGTH
Arterial, Boulevard, Multi-way Boulevard 1/4 mile
Collector, Main Street – 4 and 2 Lane w/ Median, one block, if longer than 500'
Residential Parkway
Local access, Main Street – 2 Lane, One Way one block, if longer than 300'
Couplet, Local Urban, Neighborhood
Cul-de-sac* 300'
Parking Lot no restrictions
*Must be same material as intersecting street if less than 300' long.
5.08.4 Alternate paving materials are (see Section 5.00.5 for requirements regarding TOD
and Urban Center developments):
Asphaltic Cement Concrete (AC) for surface course

Portland Cement Concrete (PCC) for surface course
Aggregate base courses plus AC or PCC
Chemically treated or stabilized subgrade plus AC or PCC
Other material as approved by the City Engineer

5.09 Pavement Design Procedure
5.09.1 Flexible Pavement
Determine the street classification, zoning, and ESAL.

Chose Nomograph N5.1 or N5.2 depending on street classification.
Using MR and ESAL, determine SN.
Using the strength coefficients from Table 5.4, calculate the thickness of the
various pavement layers by the following formula. Keep in mind the Minimum
Pavement Sections (Table 5.2) govern when thinner sections are indicated.
SN = a1(D1) + a2(D2) + . . . +an(Dn)
a1, a2 = strength coefficients
D1, D2, = thickness of pavement layers
Table 5.4
STRENGTH COEFFICIENTS
COMPONENTS COEFFICIENT (a)
Hot Bituminous Pavement 0.40
Existing Bituminous Pavement 0.30
Aggregate Base Course 0.12
Treated Subgrade* *0.12
* In accordance with Section 22
In TOD and Urban Centers where there is a flexible pavement section greater than 9
inches warranted, a composite section of flexible pavement shall be used. Following
the AASHTO guide section 3.1.4, a drainage coefficient for base and subbase layers
shall be used in conjunction with the Current COA calculation. The current COA
Calculation is as follows:
SN = a1D1+a2D2+a3D3…
Where:
SN = Structural Number, ax = Strength coefficients (COA Table 5.4) and Dx =
Thickness
The modified Calculation used in the TOD Zones uses a drainage coefficient for the
base and subbase layers.
SN = a1D1+a2D2m2+a3D3m3…
Where:

SN = Structural Number, ax = Strength coefficients (COA Table 5.4), mx =
Drainage coefficient and Dx = Thickness
Drainage Coefficients are from AASHTO Table 2.4 and are presented below.
AASHTO Table 2.4
Recommended mx Values for modifying Structural Layer Coefficients of

Untreated Base and Subbase Materials in Flexible Pavements
Percent of Time Pavement Structure is exposed to

Moisture Levels Approaching Saturation
Less than Greater

Quality of Drainage 1% 1 -5% 5 - 25% than 25%
Excellent 1.40 - 1.35 1.35 - 1.30 1.30 - 1.20 1.20
Good 1.35 - 1.25 1.25 - 1.15 1.15 - 1.00 1.00
Fair 1.25 - 1.15 1.15 - 1.05 1.00 - 0.80 0.80
Poor 1.15 - 1.05 1.05 - 0.80 0.80 - 0.60 0.60
Very Poor 1.05 - 0.95 0.95 - 0.75 0.75 - 0.40 0.40
An analysis of the drainage quality shall be conducted on a case by case basis and a
determination of the quality will be presented in the soils report for the flexible
pavement section.
5.09.2 Rigid Pavement (Portland Cement Concrete, PCC)
Determine ESAL for the 20-year design period (30-year for TOD / Urban
Centers’ Core and Transition Zones).
Determine effective K-value of subgrade soils.
Use Nomograph in Figure N5.3 or N5.4 depending on street classification.
Submit a jointing plan conforming to S19.1, et seq. See Section 2.05.1.19.

5.09.3 Alternatives to the use of the above-mentioned nomographs may be presented for
approval as follows: computer printouts that present results in accordance with the
equations shown on the respective nomographs and the AASHTO Guide will be
allowed for review. The printout must reiterate all design parameters. The report
must justify to the satisfaction of the City Engineer any deviation from the design
parameters specified herein.
5.09.4 Factors for Design of Pavement Structures Utilizing 1993 AASHTO "Guide for
Design of Pavement Structures" (AASHTO Guide).
5.09.4.01 Reliability (R)
95% for arterials, boulevards, multi-way boulevards, all fire lanes, all
commercial and industrial roadways
90% for local roadways, main streets (2- lane, 2 and 4-lanes with medians), one
way couplet streets, local urban streets, neighborhood streets, residential
parkways and collector roadways and parking lots other than commercial and
industrial. Except local roadways and private drives where the area to be served
by the roadway is 90% or more developed, R = 85% may be used (this does not
include the TOD and Urban Center street sections).
5.09.4.02 Overall Standard Deviation (So)
.45 for flexible pavements

.35 for rigid pavements
5.09.4.03 Design Serviceability Loss
Flexible Rigid
2.2 2.5 Local roadways, main street (2- lane, 2 and 4-lanes with
medians), one way couplet streets, local urban streets,
neighborhood streets, residential parkways and collector
roadways, other than commercial and industrial, private
drives, and parking lots
1.7 2.0 Arterials, boulevard, multi-way boulevard, fire lanes, all
commercial and industrial roadways
5.09.4.04 Concrete Elastic Modulus (Ec)
3.6 x 106 psi

5.09.4.05 Mean Concrete Modulus of Rupture (S'c)
600 psi
5.09.4.06 Load Transfer Coefficient (J)
If monolithic or tied curb and gutter are placed on both sides of the pavement
use 3.6, otherwise use 4.2.
5.09.4.07 Drainage Coefficient (Cd)
1.0
5.09.4.08 Loss of Support (LS)
2.5 for use in Figure 3.6 of the AASHTO Guide to correct the Effective
Modulus of Subgrade Reaction, K, for Potential Loss of Support.
5.10 Miscellaneous
5.10.1 Field Copies It is to the submitter's benefit to provide the Contractor with an
approved copy of the Pavement Design Report to reduce confusion and delays in the
field.
5.10.2 Jointing Details Pavement Design Report submittals for Rigid Pavement
alternates shall include an approved jointing detail. See standard details S19.1 et seq.
and Section 31.10.
5.11 Forms, Nomographs, Sample

5.11.1 Default Letter This letter is required to be signed by the owner of the property.
Fill in the blanks to show the name of the subdivision, filing number, lot, and block,
as well as street address. Indicate the alternates selected from among the applicable
alternates shown in table 5.2b. This table is also shown on the page “Default
Sections for Fire Lanes and Private Drives” following the “Default Letter” page.
Include the P number of the alternates selected as well as the description of the
alternate. The P stands for pavement.
5.11.2 Request For Alternate Pavement Thickness This request letter is required
to be signed by the owner of the property. Show the name of the subdivision, filing
number, lot, and block, as well as street address. This form provides a format for the

actual letter and may have to be modified to some extent in most cases to
accommodate the individual project. Any waiver of design criteria will be considered
for private drives and parking lots only. Public streets and fire lanes will not be
eligible for waivers of the design criteria contained in these specifications.
5.11.3 Nomograph N-5.1 Flexible Pavement Design Chart for Arterials and all
Commercial and Industrial sites.
5.11.4 Nomograph N-5.2 Flexible Pavement Design Chart for Local and Collector
Streets except Commercial and Industrial sites.
5.11.5 Nomograph N-5.3 Rigid Pavement Design Chart for Arterials and all
Commercial and Industrial sites.
5.11.6 Nomograph N-5.4 Rigid Pavement Design Chart for Local and Collector Streets
except Commercial and Industrial sites.
5.11.7 Sample of the Title page and Approval Block The preparer of the report
must follow the format indicated on this sample. Geotechnical and Pavement Design
Reports submitted with incomplete information on the title page shall not be
accepted.

DEFAULT LETTER
(Date)
City Engineer
City of Aurora, Public Works Department
15151 E. Alameda Parkway, Ste. 3200
Aurora, CO 80012
Subject: Request for Default Pavement Section for Parking lot and Private Drive(s) or Fire lanes(s)
Name of Development:
Subdivision, lot, and block:

Street Location:
Dear Sir:
The subject residential or commercial site has 2.5 Acres or less, or a parking area less than or equal to 2.0
Acres. As owner of the property, I hereby request to be allowed to use the Default Pavement Sections in
accordance with Section 5.00.4 of the "City of Aurora Roadway Design and Construction
Specifications."
Our selected alternates from the attached table are:

Auto Parking only P (1)
Private Drives or Fire lanes P (1)
We understand this Default Pavement Section may require greater maintenance or earlier reconstruction
than a designed pavement. We agree that the City of Aurora accepts no responsibility or liability for the
use of the Default Pavement Section.
(Reviewing Engineer)
Sincerely,
Date
(property owner's signature) (City Engineer)
(typed or printed name) Date
Notes: (1) P stands for pavement. See Table 5.2b or see the page following this “Default Letter” page.
(2) For concrete section: A jointing plan per S19.1 - S19.4 must be submitted for review prior
to paving.
DEFAULT SECTIONS FOR FIRE LANES AND PRIVATE DRIVES:
Assumptions and Recommendations

R-value = 30, Mr = 5,000, k = 15
Reliability = 90
Initial Serviceability = 4.2 (A.C.), 4.5 (CONC)
Terminal Serviceability = 2.0
Alternative Sections Allowable
Parking Lots Private Drives and Fire Lanes

Auto Parking only Single Family Drives Multifamily Fire Lanes Business/Commercial
Fire Lanes
P1 P4 P7 P11
5.5" A.C. 5.5" A.C. 6.5" A.C. 7.5" A.C.
P2 P5 P8 P12
3" A.C. + 8" 3" A.C. + 8" 5" A.C. + 6" 6" A.C. + 6"
A.B.C. A.B.C. A.B.C. A.B.C.
P9 P13
4" A.C. + 8.5" 5" A.C. + 8.5"
A.B.C. A.B.C.
P3 P6 P10 P14
5.5" Conc. 5.5" Conc. 5.5" Conc. 7" Conc.
Note: The P stands for pavement.
REQUEST FOR ALTERNATE PAVEMENT THICKNESS
_____________________
(Date)
City Engineer
City of Aurora, Public Works Department
15151 E. Alameda Parkway, Ste. 3200
Aurora, CO 80012
Subject: ____________________________________________________________
(Project or Subdivision Name)
Dear Sir:
requests that the following pavement sections be approved for the

(Company/Property Owner)
above-referenced project: .
(Zoning/Use) (Name)
Subdivision, lot, block:
All new asphalt paving to be full depth asphalt (or ______________ asphalt and
(thickness) (thickness)
____________________ base course), per
(thickness)
(Geotechnical Firm)
Report # dated .
As Owner of this Property, is aware that

this pavement design does not meet the criteria established by the City of Aurora for this application.
The attached soils report references the characteristics of the soil and recommends the above section.
In addition, shall hold the City of Aurora harmless for the

performance and maintenance of this design.
Sincerely,
(Authorized Signature) Date (Reviewing Engineer) Date
(Type Authorized Signatory’s Name) (City Engineer) Date
(Company/Owner)
(NOTE: leave 1 ½” – 2” space from top of page to report title)
SAMPLE OF TITLE PAGE AND APPROVAL BLOCK
Geotechnical and Pavement Design Report

Subdivision Name, Filing No. ____, Lot ____, Block ____
Aurora Engineering Drawing Number (EDN): __________
Prepared By:
Firm/Consultant’s Name
Full Address, Including Zip Code
Phone: _____________ Fax: _________________
Contact Name: ___________________________
Prepared For:
Owner’s Name
Full Address, Including Zip Code
Phone: _____________ Fax: _________________
Contact Name: ___________________________
2” – 2 ½” (Leave space for Reviewing Engineer’s comments)
Approved For One Year From This Date
0.7”
1.0”
City Engineer Date

7.01 SCOPE
7.02 LICENSES
7.03 PERMITS
7.04 WORK HOURS
7.05 AUTHORITY OF THE PROJECT MANAGER
7.06 AUTHORITY OF THE PUBLIC IMPROVEMENT OBSERVER
7.07 CONSTRUCTION OBSERVATIONS
7.08 DEFECTIVE MATERIALS AND WORK
7.09 PROTESTS
7.10 INSPECTION FACILITIES
7.11 INITIAL ACCEPTANCE
7.12 WARRANTY PERIOD
SECTION 7.00 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
7.01 Scope
This section specifies the requirements for permits, licenses, and construction observation
required for public improvement construction work and designated private construction work.
Requirements stated in this section shall be supplemented by, and be in compliance with, any
additional requirements or conditions required by City Codes, specifications, or administrative
requirements.
City Offices
Aurora Municipal Center
15151 East Alameda Parkway.
Aurora, Colorado 80012
City Contacts Room Phone
Building – Permits, Licenses and Certificates 2400 303-739-7420
Cashier's Office 1300 303-739-7091
Contractor Business Licenses 1100 303-739-7057
Dry Utility Inspections - Utility Company Permits 2400 303-739-7420
Public Improvements Permits, Fees and Inspections 2400 303-739-7420
Life Safety Inspection 2400 303-739-7420
Traffic Services 3200 303-739-7333
Water and Sewers - Extension Agreements 3600 303-739-7375
13636 East Ellsworth Ave., Aurora, Colorado 80012
City Contacts Phone
Survey 303-326-8015
Construction Requirements 7-1 9.2010

15750 East 32nd Ave., Aurora, Colorado 80011
City Contacts Phone
Materials Testing Laboratory 303-326-8270
7.02 Licenses
7.02.1 Any company, contractor, or firm engaging in construction work of public
improvements shall have a contractor's license. Said license shall be applicable to
the type of work being performed such as:
Right-of-Way - Concrete
Right-of-Way - Asphalt
Right-of-Way - Trenching (Utility Construction)
Right-of-Way - Earthwork.
Permits and licenses for public utility companies shall be required unless otherwise
indicated in their franchise agreement. Utility company contractors shall comply
with the applicable licensing and bonding requirements. Contractors Licenses shall
be obtained from the Building Division.
7.02.2 Public improvement construction work shall be supervised by an individual who

has a Supervisor Certificate which is applicable to the type of work being
performed. Supervisor Certificates shall be obtained from the Building Division.
7.02.3 Contractors engaging in the maintenance or construction of private water and sewer
lines shall have either a Class D5 Excavators License (Drain Layers and Caisson
Drillers License) or a Class A Plumbers License. Such licenses are valid only for
work on private property and can be obtained from the Building Division.
7.02.4 A Contractor Business License is required and shall be obtained from the Business
Licensing Division on the first floor of the Aurora Municipal Center.
7.03 Permits
7.03.1 Permits are required for the following.
Any public improvement construction or any other work in the public right
of way
The grading fill or excavation of any property

The construction or repair of any private utilities including storm drainage,
sanitary sewer, water service lines, and fire suppression lines
The construction and paving of private streets and parking lots.
7.03.2 Permits shall be obtained before any work is authorized or allowed. Permits will be
issued only to a contractor actually performing the work and licensed and bonded
for the type of work. For City contracts, permits may be issued to a general
contractor only when such contractor and his subcontractors are in compliance with
licensing and bonding requirements.
7.03.3 Permits are issued only after:
the Public Works Engineering Division has approved the plans for the
specific improvements to be constructed
the Water Department has issued an Extension Agreement to the property
owner for the proposed public utilities
all applicable fees have been paid.
Permits for roadway and parking lot paving are issued after pavement design
reports are submitted to and approved by the Public Works Engineering Division.
Additionally, paving permits require prior acceptance or approval of any newly-
constructed utilities which are under the proposed paving. This acceptance or
approval requires the submittal and approval of the applicable utility compaction
test reports. Compaction test reports are to be submitted to the City Materials
Testing Laboratory.
7.03.4 A complete set of approved drawings, specifications, and a valid permit shall be on
the job site and available to the construction observer at all times.
7.04 Work Hours

7.04.1 Work between sundown and sunrise may be authorized by the Project Manager if
adequate lighting is available and noise will not disturb nearby residents or
businesses. (Section 94-107 of City Code.)
7.04.2 When Public Improvement Observers or other City personnel are required to work
overtime or on legal holidays (New Year's Day, Martin Luther King, Jr. Day,
Presidents’ Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Veterans’ Day,
Thanksgiving Day, and Christmas Day), it shall be at the Contractor's expense.
Public Improvement Observers normally work an eight-hour day from 7:30 a.m. to

4:00 p.m. Monday through Friday. Other days or hours will be considered overtime
and will be at the Contractor's expense. A minimum charge of four hours will be
charged for any overtime work requested and performed on weekends and legal
holidays. The Contractor's payment for all overtime work shall be made by check
to the City of Aurora.
7.05 Authority of the Project Manager

The Project Manager is designated by the City Manager to exercise all authority on behalf of the
City to ascertain that all construction of facilities is equal to or better than the minimum
construction requirements set forth in the project specifications. The Project Manager shall be
represented by a Public Improvement Observer who will observe work performed under a permit
issued for construction, including all materials to be incorporated in the work, excavation,
bedding, backfill, and all construction methods and practices. The Project Manager shall have
the sole authority to issue, in writing, deviations from the provisions of the project specifications
or changes to previously-approved drawings.
7.06 Authority of the Public Improvement Observer

Public Improvement Observers are assigned by the Project Manager to assist the Contractor in
complying with the approved project specifications. Observers have the authority to reject
inferior materials or defective workmanship and to suspend work not in accordance with the City
"Roadway Design and Construction Specifications" until such time as corrections are made and
approved. The Public Improvement Observers are not authorized to alter any provisions or to
issue instructions contrary to the project specifications, or to make any changes to approved
drawings.
7.07 Construction Observations

7.07.1 The Contractor shall obtain the Observer's approval of any material before
placement and before beginning any work.
7.07.2 The Contractor shall call for observation giving 24-hours minimum notice.
Observation may be requested from the Public Improvements Permits Office at
303-739-7420. For utility company observation, please call Public Works
Department at 303-739-7420.
7.07.3 In the event that any of the work or material fails to meet any of the requirements of
the specifications, written notice of the rejection shall be given to the Contractor,
and work shall be halted until corrective action is taken.

7.07.4 Periodic construction observation is only an aid to the Contractor and in no way
reflects any responsibility on the part of the City for quality or quantity control, and
in no way implies acceptance of the work, or any part thereof, by the City.
7.08 Defective Materials and Work

Whenever materials and/or work are found to be defective, the Contractor, at his expense, shall
promptly remove such defective materials and construction from the job site and replace all
defective portions to the satisfaction of the Project Manager. In the event the Contractor fails to
remove defective items from the job site within ten days of written notice, the Project Manager
may arrange for such removal at the expense of the Contractor. Work performed or covered
without observation is subject to rejection.
7.09 Protests
If the Contractor considers any work demanded of him by the Observer to be outside the
requirements of the approved specifications, he will immediately ask for a written decision or
instruction and shall proceed to perform the work to conform with the Observer's ruling. If the
Contractor considers such instructions unsatisfactory, he will, within 24 hours after their receipt,
file a written protest with the Project Manager stating his objections and the reasons therefore.
Unless protests or objections are made in the manner specified and within the time limits stated
herein, the Contractor hereby waives all grounds for protests.
7.10 Inspection Facilities

The Contractor shall furnish all reasonable facilities and shall assist the Observer as necessary
for the proper inspection of materials to be used and workmanship involved in the construction.
7.11 Initial Acceptance

When the final clean-up has been performed, the Contractor will notify the Observer that all
work has been completed and schedule an inspection. The observer will perform all necessary
inspections and notify the Contractor of any noted defects. Until the NOTICE OF INITIAL
ACCEPTANCE is issued, the Project Manager may direct that the newly-constructed public
improvements shall be barricaded to prevent public use of the improvements.
The NOTICE OF INITIAL ACCEPTANCE OR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETENESS which

begins the warranty period will be issued when the following items are completed.
7.11.1 All major work elements have been accepted by the Observer.

7.11.2 A "Release and Indemnification" statement has been delivered to the Public
Improvements Permits Office.
7.11.3 Compaction and Materials Testing Reports, in compliance with the applicable
specifications and the requirements of Section 32.00, MATERIALS TESTING,
have been delivered to and approved by the City's Materials Testing Laboratory.
7.12 Warranty Period

The warranty period is for one year from the date of initial acceptance or substantial completion
unless otherwise specified or mutually agreed upon in writing.

20.00 EARTHWORK
20.01 SCOPE
20.02 CLEARING AND GRUBBING
20.03 TOPSOIL
20.04 WATERING
20.05 REMOVAL OF STRUCTURES AND OBSTRUCTIONS
20.06 EXCAVATION AND EMBANKMENT
20.07 RESET STRUCTURES, FENCES, AND GUARDRAIL
20.08 TRACKING MUD ON CITY STREETS
20.09 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
SECTION 20.00 EARTHWORK
20.01 Scope
The intent of this section is to specify materials, methods, and standards to be used in the
construction of embankments or excavations for roads, drainage channels, structures, or other
purposes as indicated on the drawings or contract documents. The work shall include
excavation, embankment, grading, compaction, clearing and grubbing, removal of topsoil, trees,
stumps, vegetation, removal and/or resetting of minor obstructions, subgrade preparation, and
any other work incidental for the construction of excavations and embankments. All
workmanship and materials shall be in accordance with the requirements of these specifications,
and in conformity with the lines, grades, quantities, and the typical cross section shown on the
plans or as directed by the Project Manager. When used in these specifications, AASHTO shall
refer to the American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials, ASTM shall
refer to the American Society for Testing and Materials, and CDOT shall refer to the Colorado
Department of Transportation.
20.02 Clearing and Grubbing

20.02.1 General This work shall consist of clearing, grubbing, removing, and disposing
of all vegetation and debris within the limits of project and such other areas as may
be indicated on the plans or required by the work, except such objects as are
designated to remain or are to be removed in accordance with other sections of these
specifications. This work shall also include the preservation from injury or
defacement of all vegetation and objects designated to remain.
20.02.2 Construction The Project Manager will establish construction lines and
designate all trees, shrubs, plants, and other objects to remain. The Contractor shall
preserve all objects designated to remain.
All surface objects and all trees, stumps, roots, and other protruding obstructions
not designated to remain shall be cleared and/or grubbed, including mowing, as
required, except non-perishable solid objects which will be a minimum of 2' below
subgrade. Perishable objects shall be removed to a depth of 3' below the existing
ground or subgrade, whichever is lower.
Except in areas to be excavated, stump holes and other holes from which
obstructions are removed, shall be backfilled with suitable materials and compacted
Earthwork 20-1 9.2010

in accordance with these specifications. Materials and debris shall be disposed of in
a manner acceptable to the Project Manager. Burning will not be permitted.
The Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements for obtaining suitable
disposal locations. If disposal is to be at other than established dump sites, the
Project Manager may require the Contractor to furnish, in writing, permission from
the property owner on whose property the materials and debris are placed. Branches
on trees or shrubs shall be removed as directed. Branches of trees extending over
the roadbed shall be trimmed to give a clear height of 20' above the roadbed surface.
All trimming shall be done by skilled workmen and in accordance with good tree
surgery practices.
The Contractor shall scalp areas where excavation or embankment is to be made,

except that mowed sod need not be removed where the embankment to be
constructed is 4' or more in height below subgrade elevation. Scalping shall include
the removal of materials such as brush, roots, sod, grass, residue of agricultural
crops, sawdust, and other vegetable matter from the surface of the ground.
Hedges shall be pulled or grubbed in such a manner as to assure complete and

permanent removal. Scattered hedge or shrubs not classified as hedge shall be
removed as specified for hedge. Sod not required to be removed shall be thoroughly
disked before construction of embankment.
20.03 Topsoil
20.03.1 General This work shall consist of excavating suitable topsoil from stockpiles,
approved pits, or from the natural groundcover on designated portions of the
project. It shall include the placing of topsoil upon constructed cut and fill slopes
after grading operations are completed. All work shall be in accordance with these
specifications and in reasonably close conformity with the lines and thickness
shown on the plans or as directed.
20.03.2 Materials Topsoil shall consist of loose, friable loam reasonably free of
admixtures of subsoil, refuse, stumps, roots, rocks, brush, weeds, or other material
which would be detrimental to the proper development of vegetative growth.
20.03.3 Construction Materials selected for topsoil and lying within the limits of the
project shall be excavated and stockpiled along the project at locations designated.
Excavated topsoil shall be placed directly upon constructed cut and fill slopes

without the use of stockpiles whenever conditions and the progress of construction
will permit.
Topsoil shall not be placed until the areas to be covered have been properly
prepared and grading operations in the area have been completed.
Topsoil shall be placed and spread at locations and to the thickness shown on the
plans and shall be keyed to the underlying materials by the use of harrows, rollers,
or other equipment suitable for the purpose.
Water shall be applied to the topsoil at the locations and in the amounts designated.
Water shall be applied in a fine spray by nozzles or spray bars in such manner that it
will not wash or erode the topsoil areas.
20.04 Watering
20.04.1 General This work shall consist of wetting, water for landscaping, and the
application of dust palliatives to soils and aggregates in accordance with these
specifications and in conformity with the plans.
20.04.2 Materials All water used shall be free of any mineral salts or contaminating
material which might result in expansion of materials after placement. In case the
water source proposed for use by the Contractor is not of known quality and
chemical content, samples of the water shall be submitted for tests and shall be
approved prior to use. When water is to be metered for measurement, the
Contractor shall use an approved metering device.
20.04.3 Construction
20.04.3.01 Wetting Sprinkling equipment shall be of a type which insures uniform and
controlled distribution of water without ponding or washing. Water added
during finishing operations shall be uniformly applied by spraying across the
full width of the course by means of controllable pressures and spray bars or
nozzles.
20.04.3.02 Dust Palliative The Contractor shall be required to furnish and apply a dust
palliative on portions of the project and on haul roads at the locations and in
the amounts as may be called for on the plans or as directed. Dust palliative
may consist of water or a dilution of water and emulsified asphalt, or other
approved substance. Dust palliative shall be of the type and proportions called

for on the plans, or as directed. Spreading of water or water mixture shall be
done with acceptable sprinkling equipment.
20.04.3.03 Landscaping The Contractor will be required to furnish water for seeding,
mulching, planting, transplanting, sodding, soil sterilization, and any other
landscaping work, when called for on the plans or when designated.
20.05 Removal of Structures and Obstructions

20.05.1 General This work shall consist of the removal, wholly or in part, and
satisfactory disposal of all foundations, fences, signs, structures, sidewalk, curbing,
old pavements, traffic signal materials, abandoned pipelines, and any other
obstructions which are not designated or permitted to remain, except for the
obstructions to be removed and disposed of under other items in the contract. It
shall also include the salvaging of designated materials and backfilling the resulting
trenches, holes, and pits.
When the proposal does not include pay items for removal of structures and
obstructions as set out in this section, such work shall be performed under Section
20.06, EXCAVATION AND EMBANKMENT. This work shall also include
sawing or cutting concrete or asphalt in reasonably close conformity with the
dimensions and details on the plans or as directed, to create planes of weakness in
order to facilitate controlled breaking for removal.
20.05.2 Construction The Contractor shall raze, remove, and dispose of all foundations,
signs, structures, fences, old pavements, abandoned pipelines, traffic signal
materials, and other obstructions, any portion of which are within the project limits
except utilities and those for which other provisions have been made for removal.
Traffic signals and related materials shall include all attachment hardware and other
included materials such as, but not limited to, mast arms and span wire.
Concrete adhering to sign posts shall be removed. Pedestals and bases shall be
removed to 1' below the surrounding ground or subgrade.
Where portions of structures are to be removed, the remaining portions shall be

prepared to fit new construction. The work shall be done in accordance with plan
details, and in such manner that materials to be left in place shall be protected from
damage. All damage to portions of structure to remain in place shall be repaired by
the Contractor at his expense. Reinforcing steel projecting from the remaining

structure shall be cleaned and aligned to provide bond with new extension. Dowels
as required by plans are to be securely grouted with approved grout. Removal of
sign panel shall include all work necessary to remove the panel and its attachment
hardware from the existing installation.
Where culverts or sewers are to be left in place and plugged, the ends shall be filled
with Class III concrete. Culvert and sewer ends are to be sufficiently filled to
prevent future settlement of embankments.
Materials used in detour structures for the project, which are supplied by the
Contractor, shall be considered to be the property of the Contractor. After the
detour is abandoned, he shall completely remove the detour structure and shall
dispose of materials as specified.
20.05.3 Removal of Bridges, Culverts, and Other Drainage Structures Bridges,

culverts, and other drainage structures in use by traffic shall not be removed until
satisfactory arrangements have been made to accommodate traffic.
Unless otherwise directed, the substructures of existing structures shall be removed

down to 1' below natural stream bottom or ground surface. Where such portions of
existing structures lie wholly or in part within the limits for a new structure, they
shall be removed as necessary to accommodate the construction of the proposed
structure. Steel, precast concrete, and wood bridges as specified, shall be carefully
dismantled without unnecessary damage. Steel members to be salvaged shall be
match marked with waterproof paint.
20.05.4 Removal of Pipe Unless otherwise provided, all pipe shall be carefully removed,
cleaned, and every precaution taken to avoid breaking or damaging the pipe. Pipes
to be relaid shall be removed and stored when necessary so that there will be no loss
or damage before relaying.
In removing manholes, catch basins, and inlets, any live sewers connected with
them shall be properly reconnected, and satisfactory bypass service shall be
maintained during such operations.
20.05.5 Removal of Pavements, Sidewalks, Curbs, Etc. Portland cement concrete

(PCC) or asphaltic concrete that is to remain shall be cut in a straight, true line with
a vertical face. PCC or asphaltic concrete may be cut with a cutting wheel, saw, or

broken to the directed point of removal. The Contractor shall be responsible for the
cost of removal and replacement of all excess breaks.
If the Contractor cannot maintain a straight, true break line by other means, the
Project Manager shall order sawing.
The sawing shall be done carefully, and all damages to PCC or asphaltic concrete to
remain in place, due to Contractor's operations, shall be repaired by the Contractor
at his expense. The minimum depth of saw cut in concrete shall be 2".
20.05.6 Salvage All salvageable material shown on the plans shall be removed, without
unnecessary damage, in sections or pieces which may be readily transported, and
shall be stored by the Contractor in locations designated by the Project Manager.
The Contractor shall be required to replace any materials lost from storage or
damaged by negligence or by use of improper methods.
20.05.7 Disposal The Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements for obtaining
suitable disposal locations and the cost involved shall be included in the work. If
disposal is to be at other than established dump sites, the Project Manager may
require the Contractor to furnish written permission from the property owner on
whose property the materials are placed. Broken concrete or asphalt shall not be
disposed in the City except as provided in Section 20.06.6 when approved by the
Project Manager.
20.05.8 Backfill Except in areas to be excavated, all cavities left by structure removal
shall be backfilled with suitable material and compacted in accordance with these
specifications. Jetting or ponding will not be allowed.
20.06 Excavation and Embankment

20.06.1 General This work shall consist of excavation, disposal, shaping, or compaction
of all material encountered within the limits of the work including excavation for
ditches and channels, and not being removed under some other item, necessary for
the construction of the project in accordance with the specifications and in
reasonably close conformity with the lines, grades, and typical cross sections shown
on the plans or as staked by the Project Manager.
20.06.2 Excavation All excavation will be classified as rock excavation, unclassified

excavation, or borrow, as hereafter described.

20.06.2.01 Rock Excavation Rock excavation shall consist of igneous, metamorphic,
and sedimentary rock which cannot be excavated without blasting and all
boulders or other detached stones each having a volume of 2 cubic yards or
more, as determined by physical or visual measurements.
20.06.2.02 Unclassified Excavation Unclassified excavation shall consist of the

excavation of all materials of whatever character is required for the work,
obtained within the right-of-way, or designated sites close to the project area,
including surface boulders and excavation for ditches and channels.
20.06.2.03 Borrow Borrow shall consist of approved material obtained from outside
the right-of-way, required for the construction of embankment or other
portions of the work.
20.06.3 Embankment Material Embankment material shall consist of approved

material acquired from excavations, hauled and placed in embankments in
reasonably close conformity with the line, grades, thickness, and typical cross
sections shown on the plans or established.
The type of relative compaction required shall be as called for on the plans or as
designed.
When the source of embankment materials is not designated on the plans, approval
of the source will be contingent on the material having a resistance value of at least
15 or as shown on the plans when tested by the Hveem Stabilometer, and a
maximum dry density of not less than 95 pounds per cubic foot.
20.06.4 Construction
20.06.4.01 General The excavation and embankments shall be finished to reasonably

smooth and uniform surfaces. Variation from the subgrade plan shall not be
more than 0.08' for soil, nor more than 0.50' for rock. Materials shall not be
wasted without permission of the Project Manager. Excavation operations
shall be conducted so that material outside of the limits of slopes will not be
disturbed. Prior to beginning grading operations in any area, all necessary
clearing and grubbing and topsoil in that area shall have been performed in
accordance with Section 20.02, CLEARING AND GRUBBING, and
SECTION 20.03, TOPSOIL.

The Contractor shall notify the Project Manager with sufficient time before
beginning excavation so that the necessary cross sections may be taken. The
Contractor shall not excavate beyond the dimensions and elevations
established, and material shall not be removed prior to the staking and cross
sectioning of the site.
When the Contractor's excavating operations encounter remains of prehistoric

people's dwelling sites or artifacts of historical or archaeological significance,
the operations shall be temporarily discontinued. The Project Manager will
contact archaeological authorities to determine the disposition thereof. When
directed, the Contractor shall excavate the site in such manner as to preserve
the artifacts encountered and shall remove them for delivery to the custody of
the proper state authorities. Such excavation will be considered and paid for
as extra work.
The Contractor shall at all times take precautions for the protection of
culverts, irrigation crossings, mail boxes, driveway approaches, valve boxes,
manholes, survey monuments, underground or overhead utility lines, and all
other public or private installations that may be encountered during
construction. The Contractor shall be responsible for the repair of any
installations damaged due to his work. Manholes and valve boxes shall be
observed by the Project Manager for displacements and introduction of foreign
matter. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to correct any displacement
and to remove any foreign matter resulting from his work.
20.06.4.02 Minimizing Swell Potential For all soil groups, excluding A-1 through
A-4, the required depth of moisture treatment of the subgrade shall be
determined by the highest percentage of swell (ASTM D 4546 at a surcharge
of 200 lbs/s.f.) as indicated in the table below.

Table 20.06.4.02
Moisture Treatment Requirements
Depth of Moisture Depth of Chemical
Swell Potential *
Treatment Stabilization
< 3% swell moisture treat to a depth of 1' ---
moisture treat to a depth of 2.5' or ---

> 3% < 5% swell Stabilization treat to a
moisture treat to a depth of 1.5'
depth of 1'
Stabilization treat to a
> 5% swell moisture treat to a depth of 1.5'
depth of 1'
* Indicated highest percentage of swell as recorded to the nearest whole number.
NOTE: From the top of finished grade, moisture treatment shall not go deeper than 30"
without written direction from the engineer.
Moisture treatment shall achieve a moisture content in accordance with Table 20.2
Compaction and Moisture for Various Soil Types.
Soils with >5% swell shall also require swell mitigation per Section 22, STABILIZED
SUBGRADE, in addition to moisture treatment.
20.06.5 Excavation
20.06.5.01 Rock Unless otherwise specified, rock shall be excavated to a minimum

depth of 3' below subgrade within the limits of the roadbed and the excavation
backfilled with material designated on the plans or approved.
2.06.5.02 Unclassified Where material encountered within the limits of the work is
considered unsuitable by the Project Manager, such material shall be
excavated as directed by the Project Manager and replaced with suitable
material. All excess or unsuitable excavated material, including rock and
boulders, that cannot be used in embankments may be placed on the fill-side
slopes in a satisfactory manner or otherwise disposed of as approved by the
Project Manager.
Wherever shown on the plans or considered necessary, intercepting ditches

shall be made above the top of cut slopes and carried to outlets near the ends
of the cuts. In order to blend the intersection of cut slopes with the slope of
the adjacent natural ground surfaces in a uniform manner, the tops of all cut
slopes shall be flattened and rounded.
Excess quantities of excavation not necessary for the construction of the

embankments, unless otherwise specified on the plans or in the special

provisions, shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be disposed
of as specified in Section 20.05.7. The Project Manager may allow disposal
by widening and flattening fill slopes, if right-of-way conditions permit and if
no damage results.
20.06.5.03 Borrow Borrow material should not be placed until after the excavation has
been placed in the fill. If the Contractor places more borrow than is required
and thereby causes a waste of excavation, the amount of such waste will be
deducted from the borrow volume. Borrow areas shall be finished so that
water will not collect or stand therein, unless otherwise specified. The Project
Manager shall be notified 14 days in advance of opening any material sources
to allow time for testing.
20.06.6 Embankment Embankment construction shall consist of constructing roadway

embankments, including preparation of the areas upon which they are to be placed;
the construction of dikes; the placing and compacting of approved material within
project areas where unsuitable material has been removed; and the placing and
compacting of embankment material in holes, pits, and other depressions within the
project area. Only approved materials shall be used in the construction of
embankment and backfills.
Free-running water shall be drained from the material before the material is placed.
Rocks, broken concrete, or other solid materials more than 6" in greatest dimension
shall not be placed in embankment areas less than 1' deep measured from the
subgrade. Materials less than 150 pounds may be placed in fills over 1' deep
provided there remains 1' minimum cover measured from the subgrade, with the
approval of the Project Manager.
If embankment can be deposited on one side only of abutments, wingwalls, piers, or

culvert headwalls, care shall be taken that the area immediately adjacent to the
structure is not compacted to the extent that it will cause overturning of or excessive
pressure against the structure. The fill adjacent to the end bent of a bridge or to a
box culvert shall not be placed higher than the bottom of the back wall of the bent
or floor slab of the box until the superstructure is in place. When embankment is to
be placed on both sides of a concrete wall or box-type structure, operations shall be
so conducted that the embankment is always at approximately the same elevation on
both sides of the structure.

Roadway embankment of earth material shall be placed in horizontal layers not
exceeding 8" (loose measurement) and shall be compacted as specified before the
next layer is placed. Effective spreading equipment shall be used on each lift to
obtain uniform thickness prior to compacting. As the compaction of each layer
progresses, continuous leveling and manipulating will be required to assure uniform
density. Water shall be uniformly added or removed if necessary, in order to obtain
the required density.
Placing of occasional boulders of sizes larger than the maximum layer thickness
may be authorized by the Project Manager. Each layer shall be leveled and
smoothed with suitable leveling equipment and by distribution of spalls and finer
fragments of earth.
Cross hauling or other action as appropriate will be ordered when necessary to

insure that the best available material is placed in critical areas of embankments,
including the top 2' of all embankments.
Frozen materials shall not be used in the construction of embankments.
During the construction of the roadway, the roadbed shall be maintained in such
condition that it will be well drained at all times.
20.06.7 Benching Embankment material that is to be placed and compacted adjacent to

existing embankment or existing slopes steeper than 5:1 shall be continuously
benched as the new embankment material is placed up in layers. Each bench shall
be keyed a minimum of 3' into the existing ground and shall begin at the
intersection of existing ground and the vertical sides of the previous cut. The
configuration of the benches shall be as shown on the plans or at least 4' in height.
Materials from the benching shall be compacted with the embankment material.
Placement of embankment materials shall begin at the low point of slopes.
Materials which have been loosened shall be recompacted with the embankment
materials.
Any deviation of grade tolerances in excess of 0.08' in cross section and 0.08' in 16'
measured longitudinally shall be corrected by loosening, adding or removing the
material, reshaping, moisture conditioning, and re-compacting. Deviations in
excess of this tolerance shall be corrected by the Contractor, at the Contractor's
expense, in a manner satisfactory to the Project Manager.

20.06.8 Compaction All material in embankments shall be compacted to the specified
relative compaction. The moisture content of the soil at the time of compaction
shall be as specified.
Within the areas indicated on the plans and to the designated depth below subgrade,
for the full width of roadway in all cut sections, earth shall be thoroughly scarified
and the moisture content increased or reduced, as necessary, to bring the moisture to
the content specified. This scarified layer shall then be compacted to the relative
compaction specified. The remainder of the area up to subgrade elevation shall be
constructed of suitable material placed at the moisture content specified and
compacted to the percent relative compaction specified. Maximum dry density of
all soil types encountered or to be used will be determined in accordance with
AASHTO T99 or AASHTO T180. The percent of relative compaction and
moisture content shall be as shown in the following table for the various classes of
soil and type of compaction.
Table 20.06.8
COMPACTION AND MOISTURE FOR VARIOUS SOIL TYPES
Soil Classification AASHTO T99 AASHTO T180 Minimum Moisture
(AASHTO M 145) Minimum Relative Relative Compaction % of
Compaction (Percent) (Percent) Optimum
A-6 & A-7 95 -- 0, +2
A-1 through A-5 -- 95 -2, +2
Base or subbase shall not be placed upon the subgrade or any previously-placed
layer of the pavement section until compaction tests are taken and approved by the
Project Manager. Testing shall include, but not be limited to, trenches for water,
sanitary, storm, telephone, gas, electric, and around manholes, valve boxes, and
inlets. If the subgrade or base does not have the specified density and moisture
content at the time of placing the next pavement layer, the Project Manager shall
require scarifying, wetting or drying, and re-rolling. If the specified compaction
cannot be obtained, a new pavement design shall be determined and approved by
the City Engineer. The compaction requirements of this section shall apply under
curb and sidewalk.
If more than 24 hours has elapsed between the time compaction tests are taken and
the time the next layer in the pavement section is placed, the area shall be retested.

Additional testing will not be required if a prime coat is applied within the 24-hour
period, provided the prime coat is in good condition and not over two weeks old.
Compaction tests shall be taken under the direct supervision of a Geotechnical

Engineer. The Geotechnical Engineer shall take sufficient compaction tests to
assure himself that the street is ready for surfacing, as the case may be, and shall so
state on his compaction report. Compaction testing exposed to the elements will
only be valid for a 24-hour period without protection from the elements and will
require retesting. Compaction reports shall be signed and sealed and dated by the
Geotechnical Engineer.
20.06.9 Proof Rolling Proof rolling with a heavy rubber-tired roller will be required as
designated on plans or when ordered. Proof rolling shall be done after specified
compaction has been obtained. Areas found to be weak and those areas which fail a
proof roll shall be ripped, scarified, wetted or dried if necessary, and re-compacted
to the requirements for density and moisture at the Contractor's expense. The proof
roller shall be a pneumatic-tired vehicle with tire pressure of at least 100 psi capable
of applying ground loads of not less than 18,000 pounds per axle, provided by the
Contractor. Complete coverage of the proof roller will be required. Rollers shall be
operated between two and six miles per hour.
20.07 Reset Structures, Fences, and Guardrail

20.07.1 General This item shall consist of removing, relaying, resetting, or adjusting
structures, fences, guardrail, signs, pipe, end sections, traffic signals, and related
materials. All designated items shall be carefully removed and every precaution
taken to avoid damage. Coordinate relocation of permanent traffic devices with the
Traffic Division. The Contractor will be required to replace or repair any material
damaged due to his operations at his own expense. The work shall include the
backfilling of any resulting trenches, holes, or pits.
20.07.2 Construction Pipe to be relaid and structures to be reset shall be thoroughly

cleaned. Removal sites shall be neatly backfilled with suitable material and
compacted in accordance with these specifications.
Materials in good condition from removed structures or fences may be used in the
rebuilding operations. All removed material not reused shall be salvaged or
disposed of as directed by the Project Manager.

Where fences are to be rebuilt or reset, it will be the Contractor's responsibility to
supply and install any new materials required to restore the fence to acceptable
condition. Unless otherwise stated in the Special Conditions, the Contractor may
reuse any existing material that is salvageable. The quality of construction of the
reset fence shall equal or exceed that of the existing fence.
Unserviceable material from structures shall be replaced with new material of

dimensions similar to those used in building the original structure. Replacement
parts and new materials, including concrete footings, necessary to restore these
structures to service at new locations, shall be provided and installed by the
Contractor as part of this item.
All new materials and replacement parts shall be of similar quality to those used in
the original structure or as specified. Gates designated or noted on plans to be reset
shall be removed and restored for service at the new locations indicated.
Mailboxes complete with supporting structures are to be removed and temporarily

reset at points near their original location to be easily accessible for mail delivery
service. Immediately upon completion of surfacing operations, the boxes shall
again be reset to a height of 42" to 48" at the locations designated. A supporting
structure may contain one or more mailboxes.
Resetting of all traffic control signs and traffic signaling devices will conform to
Section 50.00 and be coordinated with the Traffic Services Division.
Adjusting structures shall include, but not be limited to, manhole rings and covers,
inlet gratings and frames, water valve boxes, water meters, gate posts, and other
structures and facilities. Construction operations shall include any raising,
lowering, moving, removing masonry or concrete, adding brickwork, masonry or
concrete, and resetting grates, frames or rings and covers to fit the new construction.
At no time shall manholes and valve boxes be covered up or buried. Valve boxes
and manholes are to be maintained fully accessible at all times for emergency and
maintenance operations by City personnel. Work on water services shall be subject
to observation and testing by the owners. Damage to any fire hydrant or any part of
the system due to Contractor's operations shall be repaired at the Contractor's
expense.

20.08 Tracking Mud on City Streets
Pursuant to Sections 138-440 and 138-442 of the Aurora Municipal Code, the Stormwater
Permittee shall locate, install, and maintain all erosion control and water quality BMPs as
indicated in the approved Erosion and Sediment Control Plan. The Stormwater Permittee shall
take appropriate preventive measures to prevent dirt and mud from being tracked or deposited
onto paved sections via multiple BMPs. All sediment, mud, and construction debris that may be
tracked, deposited, or accumulated on paved sections, in the flowlines, private property, and/or
public rights-of-way of the City as a result of the construction project shall be cleaned up. Daily
clean up will be required on all paved sections which have mud tracked on them due to
construction.
20.09 Measurement and Payment

20.09.1 Clearing and Grubbing Measurement will be by one or more of the following
alternate methods as specified in the contract documents: per acre basis or lump
sum basis. When the contract document contains a clearing and grubbing item on a
lump-sum basis, measurement of the area will not be made. When measurement is
specified on a per-acre basis, the work to be paid for will be the number of acres and
fractions thereof acceptably cleared and grubbed, including scalping and hedge
removal, within the limits shown on the plans or staked by the Project Manager.
The contract price per acre or lump sum shall be full compensation for furnishing
all labor and equipment necessary to complete the work.
Exclusion When the contract document does not contain an item for clearing and
grubbing, the work will not be paid for directly but shall be considered as a
subsidiary obligation of the Contractor and the price included in the price of
excavation or borrow.
20.09.2 Topsoil Topsoil shall not be measured and paid for separately but shall be
considered as a subsidiary obligation of the Contractor and the price included in the
price for the excavation or borrow.
20.09.3 Watering Water for wetting shall not be measured and paid for separately but
shall be considered as a subsidiary obligation of the Contractor and the price
included in the price for excavation or borrow.

Water for landscaping and water used to dilute emulsified asphalt, asphalt
rejuvenating agent, or soil sterilant shall not be measured and paid for separately but
shall be included in the price for the item being bid.
Water for dust palliative, when included in the contract document, shall be
measured by the M Gal. (1,000 gallons) and shall be paid for at the contract price
per M Gal. The contract price per M Gal. shall be full compensation for all labor,
materials, and equipment necessary for the application of dust palliative.
Exclusion When the contract does not contain an item for dust palliative, the work
will not be paid for directly but shall be considered as a subsidiary obligation of the
Contractor and the price included in the price of excavation, embankment, or
borrow.
20.09.4 Removal of Structure and Obstructions When the contract stipulates that
payment will be made for removal of obstructions on a lump-sum basis, the pay
item, removal of obstructions, will include all stipulated structures and obstructions
encountered within the right-of-way in accordance with the provisions of this
section. Where the contract stipulates that payment will be made for the removal of
specific items on a unit basis, measurement will be made by the unit stipulated. The
accepted quantities will be paid for at the contract unit price for each of the pay
items listed below that appear in the contract document. Payment shall be full
compensation for removing, hauling, and disposal of such items, excavation, and
subsequent backfill. The price shall also include salvage of materials removed,
their custody, preservation, storage and disposal when called for in the plans,
special provisions, or contract documents.
Payment will be made under:
Pay Item Pay Unit

Removal of Structures Lump Sum
and Obstructions
Removal of (specified item) Each, Linear Feet, Square Yards
Plug (specified type) Each
Exclusion When the contract does not contain an estimated quantity or lump-sum
item for removal or structures and obstructions, the work will not be paid for
directly but shall be considered as a subsidiary obligation of the Contractor and the
price included in the price of excavation, or borrow.

Sawing concrete or asphalt, when ordered under Section 7.05, shall not be measured
or paid for.
The adjustment and/or resetting of water valves, street signs, traffic signs, or mail
boxes shall not be measured or paid for directly but shall be considered as a
subsidiary obligation of the Contractor and the price included in the price of
excavation or borrow.
Backfill shall not be paid for separately but shall be included in the work.
20.09.5 Excavation and Borrow Measurement of excavation and borrow shall be on a

cubic yard basis. Excavations shall be measured in its final position after
compaction. All volumes shall be based on neat lines on the cross section.
No allowances shall be made for shrinkage, swell, subsidence due to compaction of

the existing ground, or any other losses. The Project Manager will not adjust the
earthwork quantities specified in the contract unless a change in the cross section is
ordered by the Project Manager. The accepted quantities shall be paid for at the
contract price per cubic yard.
The contract price per cubic yard shall include full compensation for all labor,
materials, and equipment necessary to complete the work.
Exclusions Separate measurement and payment will not be made for topsoil,
compaction, applying water, scarifying, subgrade compaction, or any other
operation necessary to complete the work or to achieve specified densities.
Placing and compacting embankment shall not be measured and paid for directly,
but the work shall be considered as a subsidiary obligation of the Contractor and the
price included in the price of excavation and borrow. Proof rolling, when required,
shall not be measured and paid for.
20.09.6 Reset Structures, Fences, and Guardrails The quantity to be measured

when items are reset or adjusted on an "each" basis shall have the actual number of
those items restored for service at the new location, completed and accepted.
The quantity to be measured where items are reset or adjusted on a "linear foot"
basis shall be the actual number of linear feet of the items completed and accepted,
and measured end to end. The quantity to be measured for "re-lay pipe" shall be the

number of linear feet of re-laid pipe measured end to end, in place, competed and
accepted.
Resetting of structures, fences, guardrail, signs, and related materials shall include
all work necessary to remove the items from their existing location to the new
location, and shall include all mounting hardware, footings, and all other work
necessary to complete the reset item.
The accepted quantities, measured as provided in the foregoing, will be paid for at
the contract price per each or per lineal foot as indicated in the proposal. The
contract price shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, and
equipment necessary to complete the work.
Exclusions Concrete footings, if required, will not be paid for separately but shall
be included in the work. Adjustment and/or resetting of water valves, mail boxes,
etc. shall not be measured or paid for directly but shall be considered as a subsidiary
obligation of the Contractor and the price included in the price of excavation or
borrow.
Backfill shall not be paid for separately but shall be included in the work.
Except as otherwise indicated on the plans or in the special conditions, collars and
connecting devices will not be measured and paid for separately but shall be
included in the work.

21.00 STRUCTURE EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
21.01 GENERAL
21.02 MATERIALS
21.03 CONSTRUCTION
SECTION 21.00 STRUCTURE EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
21.01 General
This work shall consist of the excavation and disposal of excess material so developed, backfill,
and filter material required for the construction of major structures, all in accordance with these
specifications and in reasonably close conformity with the lines, grades, and typical cross section
shown on the plans or established. All excavation and backfill for structures below the designed
slope or subgrade line as shown on the plans shall be included under this item. Unless otherwise
specified, structure excavation shall include all pumping, bailing, draining, sheeting, bracing, and
incidentals required for proper execution of the work.
21.02 Materials
Structure backfill shall be composed of materials from excavations, borrow pits, or other sources.
Type of material shall be COA Type 4 (structural) per Table 23.1 or as specified on the plans. The
material installed in place will be tested for acceptance. Filter material shall be as shown on the
plans or as designated. The material installed in place will be tested for acceptance.
21.03 Construction
21.03.1 Structure Excavation and Backfill Poor foundation material shall be removed,
as directed by the Project Manager, below the normal designated elevation and paid
for as structure excavation. Suitable surplus excavated material shall be used in the
construction of embankments, and all unsuitable material shall be wasted. Material
removed below designed elevation shall be replaced with approved material.
Where rock, hardpan, or other unyielding material is encountered, it shall be removed

below the designed grade for a minimum depth of 12". The extra-depth excavation
shall be backfilled with approved material.
Backfilling shall consist of placing materials in horizontal, uniform layers brought up

uniformly on all sides of the structure. The thickness of each layer of backfill shall
not exceed 6" before compacting to the required density. Structure backfill shall be
compacted to the density specified in Section 20.06, EARTHWORK, or as shown on
the plans.
The excessive use of water during backfilling operations will not be permitted.
Compaction equipment or methods that produce horizontal or vertical earth

pressures, which may cause excessive displacement or may damage structures, shall
not be used.
Structure Excavation and Backfill 21-1 9.2010

Backfill material shall not be deposited against the back of concrete abutments,
concrete retaining walls, or the outside walls of cast-in-place concrete structures until
the concrete has developed a strength of not less that 2500 pounds per square inch in
compression.
Unless otherwise indicated in the plans or directed, all sheeting and bracing used in
making structure excavation shall be removed by the Contractor prior to backfilling.
21.03.2 Filter Material Filter material shall be placed behind bridge abutments, wing
walls, and retaining walls as shown on the plans. When shown on the plans, wall-
drain outlets shall be backed with sacked filter material.
Filter material shall be placed in horizontal layers along with and by the same
methods specified for structure backfill.

Measurement of structural excavation, backfill, and filter material shall be on a cubic-yard basis.
Structural excavation shall be measured in its original position. Backfill and filter material shall
be measured in its final position after compaction. Unless otherwise indicated on the plans,
quantities will be computed to neat line cross sections, 18 inches outside and parallel to the outline
of the structure. No allowance shall be made for shrinkage, swell, subsidence due to compaction
of the existing ground, or any other losses.
Quantities for backfill and filter material shall be the calculated volume of material lying within
the prism shown on the plans, from which will be deducted the volume occupied by the structure.
Acceptable quantities of structure excavation, structure backfill, or filter material shall be paid for
at the contract price per cubic yard. The contract price per cubic yard shall include full
compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to complete the work.
Compaction, haul, water, and all other work necessary to complete the above items shall not be
measured and paid for separately but shall be included in the structural excavation or backfill unit
price.
Exclusions When the contract does not contain an item for structure excavation, structure
backfill, or filter material, the work will not be paid for directly but shall be considered as a
subsidiary obligation of the Contractor.
Structure excavation and structure backfill will not be paid for directly for minor structures such as
inlets, manholes, pipes, culverts, headwalls, vaults, etc., but shall be considered as a subsidiary
obligation of the Contractor.
Structure Excavation and Backfill 21-2 9.2010

22.00 STABILIZED SUBGRADE
22.01 DESCRIPTION
22.02 PURPOSE
22.03 MATERIALS
22.04 EQUIPMENT
22.05 CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTALS
22.06 STABILIZED MIX DESIGN
22.07 PROCESSING MATERIALS
22.08 COMPACTION
22.09 FINISHING AND CURING
22.10 TOLERANCES
22.11 CONFORMITY WITH PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
22.12 MEASUREMENT
22.13 TESTING AND INSPECTION
22.14 PAYMENT
22.15 CHEMICAL STABILIZATION
22.16 MECHANICALLY STABILIZED SUBGRADE
SECTION 22.00 STABILIZED SUBGRADE
22.01 Description
This work consists of the Contractor constructing one or more courses of a mixture of subgrade
soil, approved stabilizing agent and water in substantial conformity with the design line, grades,
thicknesses, and typical cross sections shown on the approved plans and the approved pavement
thickness design.
22.02 Purpose
The purpose of the work shall be to provide a structural section on which paving materials can be
placed and to meet design specifications, while at the same time, protecting the underlying
moisture conditioned subgrade soils.
22.03 Materials
22.03.1 Stabilizing Agents The pre-approved stabilizing agents are listed in Table
22.03.1 below. Various combinations of these materials may also be used, subject
to a suitable mix design. Other agents may be used with prior written approval of
the Project Manager. However, in the event that stabilized subgrade is used for the
purpose of swell mitigation, either lime or a combination of lime and fly ash should
be used as a stabilizing agent. Additional swell mitigation options are outlined in
Table 22.13.
Table 22.03.1
PRE-APPROVED STABILIZING AGENTS
Agents Must conform to requirements of
Lime ASTM C 977, C110
Fly Ash (C and F) ASTM C 618
Cement Kiln Dust ASTM D 5050
Portland Cement ASTM C 114
High-calcium quicklime shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 977 and rate
of slaking test shall produce a temperature rise of 20°C in 30 seconds and 35°C in 3
minutes per ASTM C110. Dolomitic quicklime, magnesia quicklime with
magnesium oxide contents in excess of 4 percent or carbonated hydrated lime, shall
not be used.
Stabilized Subgrade 22-1 9.2010

Fly ash may consist of Class C or Class F. Class F fly ash shall only be allowed in
conjunction with lime or other stabilizing agents.
All stabilizing agents shall come from the same source as used in the design. If the
source is changed, a new design must be submitted for the Project Manager's
approval. Each lot of stabilizing agent furnished shall have the supplier's certificate
of compliance.
22.03.2 Water Water used for mixing or curing shall be from a potable source. Non-
potable water shall be tested in accordance with and meet the requirements of
AASHTO T 26.
22.03.3 Subgrade The subgrade to be stabilized shall be free of roots, sod, weeds,
wood, construction debris, ice, snow, or other frozen materials, deleterious matter,
and stones larger than 3 inches. Material in the stabilized zone shall have a soluble
sulfate content of less than 0.2 percent. If the subgrade soils have a soluble sulfate
content exceeding 0.2 percent, the mix design shall be addressed to the specific
methodology used to prevent adverse sulfate reactions.
22.03.4 Sealant Emulsified asphalt is the only pre-approved sealant; no other sealant
may be utilized without prior written approval of the Project Manager. Emulsified
asphalt used for a bituminous seal shall conform to requirements in Table 22.03.4
below.
Table 22.03.4
PRE-APPROVED SEALANTS
Sealant Type Requirements
Emulsified Asphalt SS-1 ASTM D 977
Emulsified Asphalt SS-1h ASTM D 977
Emulsified Asphalt CSS-1 ASTM D 2397
Emulsified Asphalt CSS-1h ASTM D 2397
22.04 Equipment
All equipment shall be subject to approval by the Project Manager. All equipment and
machinery shall be kept in good working order, free of leaks and properly muffled.
22.04.1 Dry Application Equipment Equipment for spreading dry stabilizing agent
shall be of an approved screw-type spreader box, mixer, or other semi enclosed
equipment which is equipped with a metering device. Spreading of stabilizing
agents by aggregate spreaders or motor-graders will not be allowed.

22.04.2 Slurry Application Equipment A distributor or truck applicator shall be
used and be capable of continuous agitation to keep the slurry mixture uniform.
The applicator shall be capable of uniformly metering the stabilizing agent during
application.
22.04.3 Mixing Equipment Mixing equipment shall be of sufficient size to adequately

mix the stabilizing agent into the soil and to pulverize the mixture according to the
requirements of 22.07. The size of the mixer shall be adequate to mix and pulverize
the mixture to a minimum depth of 12 inches in a single pass. Blades, discs, and
similar equipment are not allowed without prior written approval of the Project
Manager.
22.04.4 Compaction Equipment Compaction equipment shall be in good working

order and of sufficient size and effective force to achieve the required compactive
effort as prescribed in 22.08.
22.05 Construction Submittals

At least 15 days prior to commencing stabilization work, the Contractor shall furnish the
following information to the Project Manager:
1. The source and supplier of stabilizing agent and certifications, including purity of
stabilizing agent, from the manufacturer's testing Project Manager indicating that
the stabilizing agent meets the appropriate requirements.
2. Description of the proposed construction equipment, construction methods,
expected production rates and planned sequence of construction.
3. A mix design giving the percentage of stabilizing agent, source of the agent,
properties and any special considerations.
4. Water Soluble Sulfate test results.
For each day's work, the Contractor shall furnish the following information to Project Manager
by the following day:
A. Certified truck weight tickets of stabilizing agent, delivered or used at the site.
B. A summary of the amount of stabilizing agent used each day, areas stabilized and
first mixed, areas second mixed and compacted, and areas with curing completed.
22.06 Stabilized Mix Design

Mix designs shall be performed under the supervision of and signed by a Professional Engineer
registered in the State of Colorado. Laboratory agencies shall meet the requirements of ASTM,
D 3740, ASTM D 3666, D 1077, and ASTM E 329 where applicable.

Mix design shall comply with the following requirements in Table 22.06 below:
Table 22.06
STABILIZATION MIX DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
Minimum Maximum Maximum Minimum Unconfined

pH Plasticity Index Swell Potential Compressive Strength
Stabilization Agent
(%) (%) (psi)
Note 1 & 2 Note 3 Note 4 Note 5
Lime 12.3 10 1.0 160
Fly Ash N/A 10 1.0 160
Cement Kiln Dust N/A 10 1.0 160
Portland Cement N/A 10 1.0 160
Lime-Fly Ash 12.3 10 1.0 160
Note:
1. When lime is used, the pH should be no less than 12.3 as measured after completion of initial mixing with
stabilizing agent and at ambient temperature.
2. Testing of pH is to be done in accordance with Eades-Grim pH test method (ASTM C 977 APPENDIX).
3. Plasticity Index is to be less than 10, per AASHTO T 89 and T 90 unless a greater value is acceptable by
the ENGINEER. When lime is used, the Plasticity Index shall be reported from the initial to final
construction to all interested parties and shall not be used for acceptance purposes.
4. Swell Potential to be less than 1.0 percent at 200 psf, ASTM D 4546, after treatment.
5. Minimum of 160 psi (MR > 34,800 psi, where MR = 10,000+124qU) in five (5) days of moist curing at
100oF (38oC). Testing is in accordance with ASTM D 1633 Method A for pozzolanic agents and ASTM D
5102 Procedure B for Hydrated Lime.
6. The design stabilizing agent percentage shall be increased by 0.5 percent to account for waste, inert
materials, and construction variability.
22.07 Processing Materials

It is the primary requirement of this specification to secure a completed subgrade structural
section containing a uniform stabilized mixture. The mixture is to have a uniform density and
moisture content, free from loose or segregated areas, well bound for its full depth, well cured,
and with a surface suitable for placing subsequent courses.
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to regulate the sequence of his work, to use the
proper amount of stabilizing agent, maintain the work, and rework the courses, as necessary, to
meet the requirements.
22.07.1 Application The subgrade shall not be treated when the ambient air temperature
falls below freezing or the subgrade material is below 40°F, or when weather
predictions suggest that subgrade material temperature may fall below 40°F within
24 hours, unless prior written approval of the Project Manager has been issued.
Prior to beginning any treatment, the subgrade shall also be constructed and
finished to a smooth and uniform surface that is in conformity to the grade and
typical section specified. Variation from the subgrade plan elevation specified shall
not be more than 0.08 ft. The in-place density shall be at least 95% of maximum

dry density as determined by ASTM D 698, Standard Proctor Density, and within 0
to 3% of optimum moisture content.
Stabilizing agent shall be applied at the minimum rate specified by the mix design
for the depth of stabilized subgrade shown on the plans. The rate shall be
determined from a design using the on-site soils and shall meet the requirements
found in 22.06. Rate of application shall be verified using area/quantity
calculations or testing of stabilized subgrade. Stabilizing agent shall be spread only
on that area where the first mixing operations can be completed during the same
working day. Lime slurry shall not be left exposed to the air for more than four
hours without initial mixing.
The Project Manager or Geotech reserves the right to require variation of the rate of
application of stabilizing agent from the mix design application rates during the
progress of construction as necessary to maintain the desired characteristics of the
stabilized subgrade.
Stabilizing agent shall be applied using the following methods:
22.07.1.01 Slurry Placement The distribution of stabilizing agent shall be attained

by successive applications over a measured section of subgrade until the
proper amount of agent has been spread. The amount spread shall be the
amount required for mixing to the specified depth, which will result in the
percentage determined in the design. When quicklime is used in place of
hydrated lime the amount of quicklime used will be determined by the
certified lime purity for each load supplied as follows:
Quicklime delivered X % purity * 1.32 = A
Quicklime delivered *X % inert material = B
A + B = total hydrated lime available
22.07.1.02 Dry Placement (used for Fly Ash, cement kiln dust, and Portland cement)
The amount of stabilizing agent spread shall be the amount required for
mixing to the specified depth, which will result in the percentage specified by
the design.
The stabilizing agent shall be distributed in such a manner that scattering by

wind will be minimal. Agents shall not be applied when wind conditions, in

the opinion of the Project Manager, are detrimental to a proper application.
The blended material shall be sprinkled or watered until moisture content is as
specified in subgrade stabilization design.
After spreading of stabilizing agent and during mixing, water shall be added
to hydrate the agent and to reduce dusting. The combination of stabilizing
agent, soil and water shall be called the mixture.
22.07.1.03 High Sulfate Treatment Where sulfates are over 0.2 percent the Geotech
must address the method of treatment.
Note: When a double treatment of lime is required, the first 50 percent of

the agent shall be placed, moisture treated and allowed to mellow or cure for
up to three weeks, as determined by the Geotech. The last half of the lime
shall then be applied.
22.07.2 Mixing No stabilization shall take place when precipitation may cause damage
to the subgrade, as determined by the Project Manager. Mixing shall be continuous.
The full depth of the treated subgrade material shall be mixed with an approved
mixing machine to the specified depth below the bottom of the pavement structure
and/or curb. The mixing machine shall make a sufficient number of passes to
adequately achieve 100 percent of the material passing the one-inch sieve and 60
percent passing the 1/4-inch sieve. Water shall be added to the subgrade during
mixing to provide a moisture content of at least 3 percent above the optimum
moisture of the mixture or as specified in subgrade stabilization design.
Mixing and remixing will be performed, as necessary, to assist the stabilizing agent-
soil reaction and produce a homogeneous mixture. Mixing and remixing shall
continue until the combination of stabilizing agent and subgrade material is free of
streaks or pockets of stabilizing agent.
22.07.3 Mellowing (Lime or Lime/Fly Ash Only) The water content of the subgrade
mixture shall be maintained at a moisture content above the optimum moisture
content for a minimum of two days and until the PI meets the required subgrade
stabilization design criteria. Remixing will be done as necessary to assist the
reaction, as determined by the Project Manager. Application of moisture shall be
performed as necessary during the mellowing period; the material shall maintain a
moisture content of at least 3 percent above the optimum moisture content. The
stabilized material shall not be subjected to traffic. If during the mellowing period

the material is not in a semi-loose state, the chemical reaction process may slow
down and, therefore, require additional time and/or mixing as determined by the
Project Manager or Geotech.
22.07.4 Final Mixing (Lime or Lime/Fly Ash Only) Final mixing of the treated
subgrade shall not occur if the temperature of the soil to be stabilized is below
40°F. The treated subgrade shall be maintained at a temperature of 40°F or above
until the treated material has been compacted.
The material shall be uniformly mixed by an approved method to meet the

following requirements when tested dry by laboratory sieves:
Table 22.07.4
Sieve Size Minimum Percent Passing
1-inch sieve 100
No. 4 sieve 60
22.08 Compaction
Compaction of the mixture, for the full depth of the stabilized subgrade shown on the plans, shall
begin as soon as practical after final mixing. Stabilized subgrade with cementitious stabilization
agent shall be completed within 90 minutes of the time cementitious stabilization agent or water
is applied. The field density of the compacted mixture shall be at least 95 percent of the
maximum dry density of laboratory specimens prepared from samples taken from the treated
subgrade material immediately prior to compacting. The specimens shall be compacted and
tested in accordance with ASTM D 698 or ASTM D 558, as specified in subgrade stabilization
design. The in-place field density shall be determined in accordance with ASTM D 1556,
ASTM D 2167 or ASTM D 2922. The moisture content of the mixture shall be between 0 to 3
percent above the optimum moisture content. The optimum moisture content shall be
determined in accordance with ASTM D 698 or ASTM D 558, as specified in subgrade
stabilization design.
Initial compaction shall be done by means of a sheep foot or segmented wheel roller. Final
compaction shall be by means of a smooth wheel or pneumatic tired roller. Areas inaccessible to
a mechanical roller shall be compacted to the required density by other means suitable to the
Geotech or Project Manager.
All irregularities, depressions, or weak spots which develop, as determined by the Project
Manager, shall be corrected immediately by scarifying the areas affected, adding or removing

materials as required, and reshaping and recompacting by moisture conditioning and rolling.
Adding additional stabilized material to an initial cured section, resulting in lamination and
potential slip plane, is not allowed. The surface of the course shall be maintained in a smooth
condition, free from undulations and ruts, until other work is placed thereon or the work is
accepted. Should the material, due to any reason or cause, lose the required stability, density,
and finish before the next course or pavement is placed, it shall be corrected and refinished at the
sole expense of the Contractor, as directed by the ENGINEER.
22.09 Finishing and Curing

After the final layer of stabilized subgrade has been compacted, the shape of the surface shall be
maintained by blading. The surface shall be smooth and conform to the required lines, sections,
and grades, in accordance with the plans and thoroughly cured, or to within a minimum of 0.1
foot above the finished subgrade elevation to allow for trimming to final grade prior to
placement of surface coarse. The completed section shall then be finished by rolling with
suitable pneumatic tired equipment with sufficiently light effort to prevent hairline cracking.
Curing may be accomplished by periodic water application to maintain moisture content

preventing sloughing or cracking in the surface of the stabilized subgrade to a depth no greater
than 0.1 foot, or by the utilization of a bituminous seal. When bituminous seal (Section 22.02.4)
is utilized, the minimum application will be at the rate of 0.12 gallons per square yard, as
directed by the Geotech and approved by the Project Manager.
The completed section shall be maintained at a temperature of 40°F or above until the treated
material has been cured for a minimum of five days before further courses are added or any
traffic is permitted, unless otherwise permitted by the Project Manager. The moisture cured
duration may be reduced if a non-yielding surface is obtained to support construction traffic and
either the next layer of stabilized soils are placed or the pavement layer is constructed, as
approved by the Project Manager.
If the surface of the finished layer is above the approved plan elevation tolerance specified in this
section, the excess material shall be trimmed, removed, and disposed of. Any low areas will be
replaced with the subsequent surface courses. No loose material shall be left in place after
trimming. After trimming the stabilized subgrade surface shall be rolled again with a steel wheel
or pneumatic tired roller to seal the surface.
22.10 Tolerances
22.10.1 Thickness Stabilized zone thickness shall be verified by the use of
phenolphthalein and shall be performed at intervals of approximately every 500 feet

in each lane. When the measurement of the thickness is deficient by more than 1
inch from the plan thickness, two additional locations shall be measured randomly
within the deficient area and used in determining the average thickness. When the
average thickness is deficient by more than 1 inch, the entire area shall be
reprocessed to meet the design parameters or the roadway design section must be
re-evaluated (Section 22.11).
22.10.2 Grade Prior to placement of surface course, any deviation in excess of 1/2 inch
in cross-section and 1/2 inch in 10 feet measured longitudinally shall be corrected.
Variations in excess of this tolerance shall be corrected by the Contractor, at the
Contractor's expense, in a manner satisfactory to the Project Manager. Thickness
requirements shall be met in areas corrected for grade.
22.10.3 Strength The stabilized subgrade must develop a laboratory compressive

strength of at least 160 psi at 5 days. Samples shall be molded from stabilized soil
within 1.5 hours of final mixing with the material compacted per ASTM D 558 or
ASTM D 698, as specified in subgrade stabilization design, at the field moisture
content.
22.10.4 Stabilizing Agent Percentage The percentage of stabilizing agent placed in

the mixture shall be determined by the appropriate AASHTO chemical
determination and/or by calculation of stabilizing agent used for the volume of
subgrade material stabilized. When the test result is deficient by more than 1
percent, the entire area shall be re-treated at the Contractor's expense.
22.11 Conformity with Plans and Specifications

When thickness and/or strength criteria fail to meet design parameters, even after all possible
attempts have been made to correct said deviations, remediation will be required as listed in
Table 22.11. Evaluation of the roadway pavement section will be made by the Geotech with
written approval of Project Manager. The pavement structural section shall be adjusted to
compensate for any deficiency in the stabilized subgrade thickness and strength, at the
Contractor's expense. Placement of subsequent surface course will not occur until the stabilized
subgrade has been accepted in writing by both the Geotech and the Project Manager.

Table 22.11
Deficiency Remediation
< 25 % of design thickness Evaluate Roadway design section
> 25 % of design thickness remove and replace
< 25% of required strength Evaluate Roadway design section
> 25% of required strength remove and replace
22.12 Measurement
22.12.1 The area of stabilized subgrade shall be measured by the plan quantities completed,
in place, and accepted. No separate measurement of depth or area, except as
required for thickness testing shall be performed.
22.12.2 The quantity of stabilizing agent accepted and used shall be measured by the ton of
fly ash, Portland cement, cement kiln dust, or hydrated lime used (or the calculated
dry hydrated lime content of the lime slurry).

22.13 Testing and Inspection
Testing and inspection shall be performed in accordance with Table 22.13
TABLE 22.13
SCHEDULE FOR MINIMUM MATERIALS SAMPLING AND TESTING
Test Type Test Standard Minimum Frequency of Tests

Sampling AASHTO T 87 per 1,000 square yards
Sample Preparation ASTM D 3551
Maximum Dry Density and ASTM D 698 (Lime) As directed by Project Manager
Optimum Moisture Content ASTM D558 (Cement) (minimum one per soil type)
ASTM D 1556 ASTM D 2167 One test for each
In Place Soil Density
ASTM D 2922 200 lane feet
In Place Moisture Content ASTM D 2216 ASTM D 3017 (not less than one test per day)
ASTM C 110
PH One test per 1,000 square yards
ASTM C 977 APPENDIX
ASTM D 4546
Swell As directed by Project Manager
Method B
One set of four cylinders per 1,000
Unconfined Compressive
ASTM D 5102 (Procedure B) square yards. Sealed and moist cured at
Strength (Lime)
100° F for 5 days.
One set of four cylinders per 1,000
Compressive Strength
ASTM D 1633 (Method A) square yards. Sealed and moist cured at
Cementitious Agents
100°F for 5 days.
Atterberg Limits AASHTO T 89 & T 90 One test per 1,000 square yards
Thickness As directed by Project Manager One test every 500 feet per lane
AASHTO T 232
Percentage of Agent One test per 1,000 square yards
see Section 22.10.4
22.14 Payment
Payment shall be made at the contract unit price per square yard based upon plan quantities for
the stabilization. Stabilizing agent shall be paid for by the ton. The price shall be full
compensation for furnishing all material and for all preparation of the subgrade material removed
and replaced, proof rolling of secondary grade, delivering, placing, mixing, and compacting
these materials, all labor, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary to complete this item,
including curing. Stabilized subgrade found deficient in thickness shall be removed and

replaced. Or at the option of the Project Manager, the pavement structural section shall be
adjusted to compensate for any deficiency in the stabilized subgrade thickness and strength at the
Contractor's expense as noted in Section 22.11.
Item Description Payment
22.1 Processing of Stabilized Subgrade $/yd2
22.2 Stabilizing agent $ / Ton
22.15 Chemical Stabilization

Chemical stabilization shall not be used to eliminate or control frost.

TABLE 22.16
ACCEPTABLE ASPHALT PAVEMENT SECTIONS FOR SWELL MITIGATION
Swell Mitigation
Over-excavation & Replacement 12" Treated Subgrade  12" Treated Subgrade  Type 2 or 2A Aggregate Base
for Soils Greater
with Non-Expansive Soils Composite Section (“d”) (“d”) Course (ABC) Composite Section
Than 5%
Replacement with any A-2 to A-6 soil
All sections are designed for
group with less than 2% swell, LL < 30,
ORIGINAL soil conditions and include
PI< 15, MR >5000 or R-Value > 30 or qU Report includes treated (lime,
Report does NOT include a 12" ABC section for mitigation (“a”),
> 3000 psf. lime/fly ash) subgrade as part of
treated (lime, lime/fly ash) except locals; see below.
the pavement section design.
subgrade as part of the
Over-excavation shall be a minimum of Where the treated material has a
pavement section design. Requires minimum 12" depth
Mitigation Details 3 feet below bottom of pavement compressive strength > 160 psi,
Not to be considered as part subgrade moisture treatment and
section. pH > 12.3, PI > 10, and a swell
of pavement structure. compaction (below ABC) of a minimum
percentage < 1.0
However, PI <= 10 and swell 12".
PE certified inspection reports verifying
<= 1.0% is still required.
over-excavation procedure, compaction
Requires the use of a geo-fabric
and moisture content required for
between native material and ABC
acceptance.
Composite section, consisting of

Minimum requirements
HMAP and treated subgrade
All Locals
soil, designed for original soil
4" HMAP and 15" ABC or, 5" HMAP
conditions, including a HMAP
and 12" ABC.
section, which shall be a Full depth section designed
Use full-depth or composite section Collectors
Pavement Section minimum: for ORIGINAL soil
designed for select fill soil conditions. 6 6" HMAP and 12" ABC section per
ESAL(X10 ) Thickness conditions.
original soil conditions.
> 1.8 7-1/2"
Arterial
0.5-1.8 6-1/2"
7" HMAP and 12" ABC section per
< 0.5 4”
original soil conditions.
Required if imported soils are more

permeable than existing soil by one Required if mitigation measure Required if mitigation
Trench Drains ("b," order of magnitude or more and does not extend to back of measure does not extend to
Required.
"c") mitigation measure does not extend to sidewalk, curb and gutter back of sidewalk, curb and
back of sidewalk, curb and gutter section. gutter section.
section.
"a" – The pavement design must incorporate the minimum sections defined in the "Pavement Section" above. If desired, substitutions of 3" ABC for 1" HMAP may be done for
sections exceeding the minimum depths defined above.
"b" – Trench drains are required parallel to all arterials and collectors, unless the road is certified by a Geotechnical Engineer to be free of failure potential from swelling soils and
landscape irrigation.
"c" – Do not install trench drains if curb and gutter are not tied to the roadway, i.e., shoulders with roadside ditches.
"d" – Treated subgrade shall be constructed only when soil temperature is > 40°F and ambient temperature is > 40°F.
 Moisture treatment per Section 5.03 is required
Stabilized Subgrade 22-13 6/2010

22.16 MECHANICALLY STABILIZED SUBGRADE
22.16.1 DESCRIPTION Item includes mechanically stabilized subgrade of base/subbase course
and/or subgrade improvement in the construction of paved or unpaved roadways. Design
details for geogrid reinforcement, such as geogrid type, fill thickness, pavement cross-section
and associated details, shall be as shown on the contract drawings. The work consists of:
22.16.1.1 Purpose The purpose of the work shall be to provide a stabilized paving platform
section on which paving materials can be placed. This item shall not be used to retain
moisture in the subgrade, unless retaining moisture in the section can be assured. This
specification shall be used for a construction platform and not as a means of mitigating
swell.
22.16.2 MATERIALS
22.16.2.1 Definitions
A. Mechanically Reinforced – Placement of a geogrid immediately over a soft subgrade

soil in order to improve the bearing capacity and mitigate deformation of the subgrade
soil. The goal of this application may be to reduce deeper excavation requirements,
improve construction efficiency, reduce the amount of aggregate subbase/base
material required, provide a stiff working platform for pavement construction, or a
combination of the above.
B. Geogrid – A biaxial polymeric grid formed by a regular network of integrally

connected tensile elements with apertures of sufficient size to allow interlocking with
surrounding soil, rock, or earth to function primarily as reinforcement.
C. Multi-Layer Geogrid – A geogrid product consisting of multiple layers of grid which

are not integrally connected throughout.
D. Extruded Geogrid – A geogrid product formed by extrusion of a polypropylene or

polypropylene/polyethylene copolymer sheet followed by its perforation with a precise
arrangement of holes and subsequent stretching, or drawing, into the finished product.
E. Woven Geogrid – A geogrid product formed by weaving discrete strips of polymer into
a network. These geogrids usually require a protective coating to protect the polymer
from pre-mature degradation.
F. Minimum Average Roll Value (MARV) – Value based on testing and determined in
accordance with ASTM D4759-92.
G. True Initial Modulus in Use – The ratio of tensile strength to corresponding zero
strain. The tensile strength is measured via ASTM D6637 at a strain rate of 10 percent
per minute. Values shown are MARVs. For multi-layer geogrid products, rib tensile

testing shall be performed on the multi-layer configurations, as prescribed by ASTM
D6637.
H. Junction Strength – Breaking tensile strength of junctions when tested in accordance

with GRI-GG2 as modified by AASHTO Standard Specification for Highway Bridges,
1997 Interim, using a single rib having the greater of three junctions or a minimum of
eight-inch machine direction sample and tested at a strain rate of ten percent per
minute based on this gauge length. Values shown are MARVs. For multi-layer
geogrid products, junction strength testing shall be performed across junctions from
each layer of grid individually, and the results shall not be assumed as additive from
single layers to multiple layers.
I. Flexural Stiffness (also known as Flexural Rigidity) – Resistance to bending force

measured via ASTM D1388-96, Option A, using specimen dimensions of 864
millimeters in length by one aperture in width. Values shown are MARVs. For multi-
layer geogrid products, flexural stiffness testing shall be performed directly on the
multi-layer configuration without using any connecting elements other than those used
continuously throughout the actual product. The results shall not be assumed as
additive from testing performed on a single layer of the multi-layer product.
J. Aperture Stability Modulus (also known as Torsional Rigidity or Torsional Stiffness)

– Resistance to in-plane rotational movement measured by applying a 20 kg-cm (2.0
m-N) moment to the central junction of a 9-inch by 9-inch specimen restrained at its
perimeter. Values shown are MARVs. For multi-layer geogrid products, torsional
stiffness testing shall be performed on each layer of grid individually and results shall
not be assumed as additive from single layers to multiple layers.
K. Granular Fill Material – The preferred gradation for base reinforcement application is
well-graded crushed aggregate fill with a maximum particle size (100 percent passing)
of 1-1/2 inches and less than ten percent fines (passing the #200 sieve). Recycled
concrete may be used only with polypropylene geogrids in accordance with FHWA
2001.
22.16.3 MANUFACTURERS All manufacturers will be considered provided they meet the
submittal process as per Item 22.16.6 and per Table 22.16.4.
22.16.4 GEOGRID MATERIAL PROPERTIES Structural Soil Reinforcement Geogrid – The

geogrid shall be integrally formed and deployed as a single layer having the following
characteristics according to Table 22.16.4 (ALL VALUES ARE MINUMUM AVERAGE
ROLL VALUES UNLESS A RANGE OR CHARCTERISTIC IS INDICTED):

TABLE 22.16.4 – GEOGRID STRUCTURAL PROPERTIES
Property Test Method Units Type 1 Type 2

Aperture Stability
Modulus at 20 cm-kg Kinney (2001) m-N/deg 0.32 0.65
(2.0 m-N)
Rectangular or Rectangular or
Rib Shape Observation N/A
Square Square
Rib Thickness Callipered In 0.03 0.05
Nominal Aperture Size I.D. Callipered In 1.0 to 1.5 1.0 to 1.5
1
Junction Strength GRI-GG2-2000 ratio NOTE 1 NOTE 1
Flexural Rigidity ASTM D1388-96 2 Mg-cm 250,000 750,000
Minimum Tensile
Strength @ 2% Strain:
- MD3 ASTM D6637-01 4
Lb/ft 280 410
- CMD3 Lb/ft 450 620

Minimum Tensile
Strength @ 5% Strain:
ASTM D6637-01 4
- MD3 Lb/ft 580 810
3
- CMD Lb/ft 920 1,340
A. NOTES:
B. 1. The ratio of Junction Strength/Ultimate Tensile Strength must meet or exceed 75%.
C. 2. Resistance to bending force measured via ASTM D-5732-95, using specimens of width two ribs wide, with
transverse ribs cut flush with exterior edges of longitudinal ribs (as a “ladder”), and of length sufficiently long
to enable measurement of the overhang dimension.
D. 3. MD = machine direction (along roll length); CMD = cross-machine direction (across roll width).
E. 4. True resistance to elongation when initially subjected to a load determined in accordance with ASTM
D6637 without deforming test materials under load before measuring such resistance or employing “secant” or
“offset” tangent methods of measurement so as to overstate tensile properties.
Geotextile materials shall not be considered as an alternative to geogrid materials for subgrade
improvement or base/subbase reinforcement applications. A geotextile may be used in the
cross-section to provide separation, filtration or drainage. However, no structural contribution
shall be attributed to the geotextile.

22.16.5 EXECUTION
22.16.5.1 Examination The Contractor shall check the geogrid upon delivery to verify the proper
material has been received. The geogrid shall be inspected by the Contractor to be free of
flaws or damage occurring during manufacturing, shipping, or handling.
22.16.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
22.16.6.1 Storage and Protection
22.16.6.1.1 Prevent excessive mud, wet concrete, epoxy, or other deleterious materials from
coming in contact with and affixing to the geogrid materials.
22.16.6.1.2 Store at temperatures above minus 20 degrees F (minus 29 degrees C).
22.16.6.1.3 Rolled materials may be laid flat or stood on end.
22.16.6.1.4 Geogrid materials should not be left directly exposed to sunlight for a period longer
than the period recommended by the manufacturer (as per ASTMD D4355).
22.16.6.2 Preparation The subgrade soil elevation shall be prepared at the proper elevation and
alignment as directed by the Engineer or as indicated on the construction drawings.
22.16.6.3 Installation
22.16.6.3.1 The geogrid shall be installed in accordance with the installation guidelines provided
by the manufacturer or as directed by the Engineer.
22.16.6.3.2 The geogrid may be temporarily secured in place with ties, staples, pins, sand bags,
or backfill as required by fill properties, fill placement procedures, or weather
conditions, or as directed by the Engineer.
22.16.6.4 Granular Fill
22.16.6.4.1 Compaction – Standard compaction methods may be used unless the soils are very
soft. In these cases, static, instead of vibratory compaction, is prudent, particularly
over silty subgrades. Compaction is then achieved using a light roller. Keeping fill
moisture content near optimum will make compaction more efficient. Water spray
is most effective with sand fill. Compact aggregate fill to project specifications,
after it has been graded smooth and before it is subject to accumulated traffic.

22.16.6.4.2 Vehicle Operation Over Geogrids – A minimum loose fill thickness of six-inches is
required prior to operation of tracked vehicles over the geogrid. Turning of tracked
vehicles should be kept to a minimum to prevent tracks from displacing the fill and
damaging the geogrid. When underlying substrate is trafficable with minimal
rutting, rubber-tired equipment may pass over the geogrid reinforcement at slow
speeds (less than 10 mph) when integrally-formed geogrids are used. This shall not
be allowed with coated geogrids and sharp turning movements shall be avoided.
22.16.6.5 Inspection
22.16.6.5.1 The Project Manager or Project Manager’s representative may randomly inspect
geogrid before, during, and after (using test pits) installation.
22.16.6.5.2 Any damaged or defective geogrid (i.e., frayed coating, separated junctions,
separated layers, tears, etc) will be repaired/replaced in accordance with Item
22.16.6.6.
22.16.6.6 Repairs
22.16.6.1 Any roll of geogrid damaged before, during, and after installation shall be replaced
by the CONTRACTOR at no additional cost to the Project.
22.16.6.2 Proper replacement shall consist of replacing the affected area adding three-feet
(one-meter) of geogrid to either side of the affected area.
22.16.7 SUBMITTALS
22.16.7.1 Submittal Procedure – 15 days prior to bid letting
22.16.7.1.1 Submit geogrid product sample approximately four-inches by seven-inches, or

larger, three days prior to installation.
22.16.7.1.2 Submit geogrid product data sheet, certification, and/or independent full scale
laboratory testing from the manufacturer indicating the geogrid product supplied
meets the requirements of Table 22.16.4.
22.16.7.1.3 Submit manufacturer’s installation instructions and general recommendations.
22.16.7.1.4 A list of five comparable projects that are similar in terms of size and application,
within the State of Colorado where the results of using the specific geogrid material
can be verified after a minimum of one year of service life.

22.16.7.1.5 Additional information as requested by the Engineer to fully evaluate the product.
22.16.7.2 Quality Assurance Pre-Construction Conference – Prior to the installation of the

geogrid, the Contractor shall arrange a meeting at the site with the geogrid material
supplier and, where applicable, the geogrid installer. The Project Manager and the
Engineer shall be notified at least three days in advance of the time of the meeting. A
representative of the geogrid supplier shall be available on an “as needed” basis during
construction.
22.16.8 CONSTRUCTION PLATFORM DESIGN Construction platform design shall be performed

under supervision of and signed and sealed by a professional geotechnical engineer licensed in
the State of Colorado. The recommended procedure shall be derived by the Giroud-Han
Method (ASCE, August 2004).
Appropriate partial safety factors shall be applied to results obtained using geogrids having
properties or characteristics outside the range of rigorous model validation (Giroud and Han,
2004). This method has been endorsed by numerous departments of transportation and
government agencies, such as the Federal Highway Administration and the Army Corps of
Engineers.
For general guidance purposes only, Table 16.7.8.1 and 22.16.8.2 present a guide for estimating
subgrade soil strength and minimum construction platform recommendations based on a range
of subgrade strengths, respectively. A piping ratio analysis (D15fill/D85subgrade) shall be
performed to determine the need of a separation fabric. If the piping ratio is less than five, then
no separation fabric is required. If the piping ratio is greater than or equal to five, then a
separation fabric is required below the geogrid. Final determination of the construction
platform shall be approved by the Engineer.

TABLE 22.16.8.1
Guide for Estimating Subgrade Soil Strengths (Fine Grained Soils)
Estimate Consistency by: Tested By: Correlates to:

Dynamic Cone
Standard Penetrometer Shear Strength Cu
Penetration (mm/blow) R-
Feel Equipment/Visual CBR
Test SC, Value
(blows/ft) SM, CL CH (kPa) (tsf)
SP
Very Man standing sinks >
<2 - - - <12 <0.125 - <0.4
Soft 3”
Man walking sinks =
Soft 2-4 - - - 12-24 0.125-0.25 <0.36 0.4-0.8
2-3”
Man walking sinks =
Medium 4-8 - >66 - 24-48 0.25-0.50 0.36-2.5 0.8-1.6
1”
Pickup truck ruts =
Stiff 8-15 >100 66-46 - 48-96 0.50-1.0 2.5-6.8 1.6-3.2
½-1”
Very Loaded dump truck
15-30 100-56 46-33 >109 96-193 1.0-2.0 6.8-15.5 3.2-6.4
Stiff ruts = 1-3”
Insignificant rutting
Hard >30 56-27 33-23 109-54 >193 >2.0 >15.5 >6.4
by loaded dump truck
References: After Portland Cement Association, E.I. DuPont Literature and McCarthy, David F., “Essentials of Soil
Mechanics and Foundations”, 1977, and Tensar 1998, Webster, Personal Communication 2001, “DCP vs. CBR
Correlations”. And AASHTO, “1993 Guide for Design of Pavement Structures,” Van Till et. Al. NCHRP 128.
TABLE 22.16.8.2
Recommended Aggregate Fill Thickness

Feel / CBR Value with Geogrid Mechanical Reinforcement
Soil Strength 1 CBR Aggregate Fill Thickness (in.) 2
Type 1 Type 2
Feel approx. Geogrid 3 Geogrid 3 Unreinforced
34" 52"
Very Soft < 0.4 37"
Soft 0.6 30" 26" 42"
Medium 1.2 20" 16" 29"
Stiff 2.5 14" 9" 22"
Very Stiff 4 12" 6" 20"
Notes:
1. Soil Strength is based in Table 22.16.7.1. The soil strength used is general
for these purposes.
2. Results of aggregate fill thickness were derived using the published
Giroud-Han (2004) Methodology. Average values for fill thickness are used. Aggregate fill was
assumed to have a minimum R-value of 30.
3. Type 1 and Type 2 geogrid structural properties used were a
minimum as derived from Table 22.16.4

22.16.9 Payment Payment shall be made at the contract unit price per square yard based upon plan
quantities for the stabilization. The price shall be full compensation for furnishing all material
and for all preparation of the subgrade, delivering, installation, and incidentals necessary to
complete this item. Paving platform found deficient shall be removed and replaced. At the
option of the Project Manager the pavement structural section shall be adjusted to compensate
for any deficiency in the paving platform thickness and strength at the Contractor’s expense as
noted in Item 22.16.5.6. Granular fill will be paid for at the contract unit price per ton. Unit
price will be held constant regardless of deviation from actual quantities.
Item Description Payment

22.3 Geogrid $/yd2
22.4 Separation fabric $/yd2
22.5 Granular fill $/ton

23.00 STREET CONSTRUCTION AGGREGATES
23.01 SCOPE
23.02 MATERIALS
23.03 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS FOR BASE COURSE MATERIAL
SECTION 23.00 STREET CONSTRUCTION AGGREGATES
23.01 Scope
This specification specifies materials and methods to be used for the construction of aggregate
bases and subbases for streets, parking lots, walks, drainways, and other work requiring the use
of aggregates. The work covered shall include general requirements that are applicable to
aggregate base course. All workmanship and materials shall be in accordance with the
specifications, and in conformity with the lines, grades, depths, quantity requirements, and the
typical cross section shown on the plans, or as directed by the Project Manager.
23.02 Materials
Aggregates shall be crushed stone, crushed slag, crushed gravel, or natural gravel which
conforms to the requirements of AASHTO M 147 as herein supplemented. Aggregate shall meet
the grading requirements specified below. The type used shall be specified on the plans or
special provisions. The maximum liquid limit (LL) shall be as shown in Table 23.1.
Table 23.1
CLASSIFICATION TABLE FOR AGGREGATES
Type 1 Type 2 Type 2A Type 3 Type 4
(Course-Graded) (Normal) (Normal) (Non-Permeable) (Structural)
Use subbase Base base as specified as specified
Sieve Percentage by Weight Passing Square Mesh Sieve
6" 100 -- -- -- --
2" 95-100 -- -- 100 100
1 1/2" -- -- 100 -- --
1" -- 100 90-100 -- --
3/4" -- -- 60-90 -- --
3/8" 40-85 50-85 45-75 -- --
No. 4 30-60 35-65 30-60 75-100 30-100
No. 10 -- 25-50 20-50 -- --
No. 40 -- 15-30 10-30 60 MAX. 60 MAX.
No. 200* 3-15 3-15 3-12 15-40 5-20
LL (max.) 35 25 25 35 35
* Percent passing No. 200 determined by Wash Test (ASTM C 117).

Fraction passing No. 200 shall not be greater than 2/3 of the fraction passing No. 40.
Street Construction Aggregates 23-1 9.2010

For Type 2 and 2A aggregate base course, the plasticity index (PI) shall not exceed 15 when the
aggregate is tested in accordance with AASHTO T 89 and T 90, respectively. The liquid limit of
the Type 2 and 2A material shall not exceed 30. The R value, AASHTO T 96, is a minimum of
78 at 300 psi with less than 10 point difference between 100 psi and 300 psi exudation. Los
Angeles abrasion shall not exceed 45%.
At least two weeks in advance of the beginning of placing any aggregates, the Contractor shall
submit suitable samples of the proposed material to an approved Materials Testing Laboratory
for tests to determine the compliance with the requirements of this specification. The results of
all tests shall be submitted to the Project Manager for approval prior to the placement of any
aggregate material. Tests shall be at the Contractor's expense.
Under certain conditions, the Project Manager may allow the substitution of Type 1 aggregate for
Type 2 or Type 2A aggregate. The Project Manager will consider the substitution if the liquid
limit of the Type 1 material does not exceed 30, the R Value, AASHTO T 96, is a minimum of
78, at least 300 psi with less than a 10 point difference between 100 psi and 300 psi exudation
pressure. The depth is at least 2 times the maximum size of the coarse aggregate. If Type 1
material is used, it shall be overlaid with a minimum of 4" of Type 2 or Type 2A material.
23.03 Construction Requirements for Base Course Material

23.03.1 Placing The base course material shall be placed on the previously prepared
subgrade at the locations and in the proper quantities to conform to the typical cross
sections as shown on the plans and as directed by the Project Manager. The
material shall be placed without segregation. Any segregated areas shall be
removed and replaced with uniformly graded material at the Contractor's expense.
Blue tops shall be used on all new construction.
The base material may be placed in lifts of up to 6", providing that after
compaction, uniform density is obtained throughout the entire depth of the lift. If
the required depth exceeds 6", it shall be placed in two or more lifts of
approximately equal thickness. If uniform density cannot be obtained by 6" lifts,
the maximum lift shall not exceed 4" in final thickness.
23.03.2 Compaction Rolling will be continued until the base material has been
compacted to not less than 95% of maximum density as determined by AASHTO T
180, Method D (Modified Proctor). Water shall be uniformly applied as necessary
during compaction to obtain moisture content within 1% of optimum and to aid in

consolidation. The surface of each layer shall be maintained during the compaction
operations in such a manner that a uniform texture is produced and the aggregates
are firmly keyed.
The finished base course surface shall be smooth and free of ruts and irregularities
and true to grade and crowned as shown on the plans or as directed by the Project
Manager. The final surface shall be finished with a smoothness tolerance of 1/4"
measured vertically from the surface to a ten-foot straightedge laid parallel to the
survey line or 3/8" perpendicular to the survey line. The Project Manager shall
make allowance for rounding at the crown line. The base course shall be
maintained in this condition by watering, drying, rolling, or blading, as necessary or
as the Project Manager may direct, until the surfacing is placed.
In-place field density determination shall be made in accordance with AASHTO T

191 or T 205. The use of AASHTO T 224 to correct for oversize particles may be
required. The use of a nuclear density gage will be allowed when correlated with
one of the above test methods.

23.04.1 Aggregate Base Course Aggregate base course shall be measured by the
square yard of the types and to the compacted depths called for on the plans. Water,
when used for placing and compacting aggregate base, will not be measured or paid
for separately, but shall be included in the work.
Accepted quantities of aggregate base course of the dimensions and types specified
shall be paid for at the contract price per square yard, complete, in place, or as
specified in the contract documents.

24.00 HOT MIX ASPHALT PAVEMENT
24.01 DESIGN INTENT
24.02 MATERIALS
24.03 MIX DESIGN AND PLANT PRODUCED MIXTURE REQUIREMENTS
24.04 MIXTURE DESIGN SUBMITTALS
24.05 EQUIPMENT
24.06 MANUFACTURE
24.07 TACK COAT
24.08 PLACEMENT
24.09 LONGITUDINAL JOINTS
24.10 TRANSVERSE JOINTS
24.11 SEGREGATION
24.12 COMPACTION
24.13 PRODUCTION TOLERANCES
24.14 CONFORMITY WITH PLANS AND SPECIFICATION
24.15 TESTING AND INSPECTION
24.17 STONE MASTIC ASPHALT PAVEMENT
SECTION 24.00 HOT MIX ASPHALT PAVEMENT
24.01 Design Intent

These specifications include general requirements applicable to all types of plant mixed hot
mix asphalt pavements (HMAP). This work consists of one or more courses of asphalt
mixture constructed on a prepared foundation in accordance with specifications. The design
intent is to provide pavement with adequate thickness and quality to provide a serviceable life
of 20 years. It is also the intent to provide construction in accordance with these
specifications with a high standard of practice. This item shall include all labor, equipment,
and materials to manufacture, place and compact asphalt cement concrete for pavement
purposes.
TEST PROCEDURE DEFINITIONS

ASTM American Society for Testing & Materials
AASHTO American Association of State Highway & Transportation Officials
24.02 Materials
The hot mix asphalt shall be composed of a mixture of aggregate, filler, hydrated lime and
asphalt cement. Some mixes may require polymer modified asphalt cement. Some mixes
may allow up to 25% reclaimed asphalt pavement (RAP).
24.02.1 Aggregate Aggregates for HMAP shall be of uniform quality, composed of

clean, hard, durable particles of crushed stone, crushed gravel, or crushed slag.
Excess of fine material shall be wasted before crushing. The material shall not
contain clay balls, vegetable matter, or other deleterious substances and shall
meet the following requirements.
Hot Mix Asphalt Pavement 24-1 9.2010

TABLE 24.02.1.1- AGGREGATE PROPERTIES
Coarse: Fine:
Aggregate Test Property
Retained on #4 Passing the #4
Fine Aggregate Angularity, AASHTO T 304 Method A

Traffic Level 1 & 2 40% Min.
Traffic Level 3 to 5 45% Min
Two Fractured Faces, ASTM D-5821

Top and Middle Lifts 80% Min. .
Bottom Lifts 70% Min
LA Abrasion, AASHTO T 96 45% Max.
Flat and Elongated (Ratio 5:1) %, AASHTO M 283 10% Max.
Adherent Coating (Dry Sieving) ASTM D 5711 0.5% Max.
Sand Equivalent. AASHTO-T 176 45% Min.
Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement material (RAP) shall be used only where

specifically allowed and shall be of uniform quality and gradation with a
maximum size no greater than the nominal aggregate size of the mix. Reclaimed
Asphalt Pavement (RAP) is allowed in hot mix asphalt (HMA) up to a maximum
of 25 percent for all lifts other than the top lift, provided all specifications for
HMA are met. Fine Aggregate Angularity requirements shall apply only to the
virgin fraction of the fine aggregate. The RAP shall not contain clay balls,
vegetable matter, or other deleterious substances. Mixtures with RAP shall not
be used in the top lift of any asphalt pavement.
The Contractor shall supply a Performance Graded Binder which meets the
AASHTO MP-1 specifications for one temperature grade lower for both the high
and low end than that specified in the Contract if RAP content is greater than 15
percent. For example, if the Contract originally specified a PG 64-22, the
Contractor shall supply a binder meeting the AASHTO MP-1 specifications for a
PG 58-28
The HMAP gradation for the Proposed Design Job Mix gradation shall be
wholly within the control point gradation range set forth in the following Table
24.2.1.2. The allowable job mix gradation for production shall be the design job
mix gradation with the tolerances of section 24.13.2 applied, provided that when

the tolerances are applied, the gradation remains within the control point
gradation range set forth in Table 24.2.1.2. The Proposed Design Job Mix and
the final allowable job mix gradation for production shall report all sieve sizes
listed in Table 24.2.1.2.
TABLE 24.02.1.2 – GRADATION RANGE

(Percent by Weight Passing Square Mesh Sieves, AASHTO T 11 & T 27)
Mixture
SX (1/2" nominal) S (3/4" nominal) SG (1" nominal)
Grading
Sieve Control Restricted Control Restricted Control Restricted
Size Points Zone* Points Zone Points Zone
11/2" 100
1" 100 90-100
3/4" 100 90-100 @
1/2" 90-100 @ @
3/8" @ @ @
#4 @ @ @ 39.5
#8 28-58 39.1 23-49 34.6 19-45 26.8-30.8
#16 @ 25.6-31.6 @ 22.3-28.3 @ 18.1-24.1
#30 @ 19.1-23.1 @ 16.7-20.7 @ 13.6-17.6
#50 @ 15.5 @ 13.7 @ 11.4
#200** 2.0-8.0 2.0-7.0 1.0-7.0
* The restricted zone is a guideline only. It is recommended that mix design gradations go above
the restricted zone boundaries, on the "fine" side.
** These limits shall include the weight of lime at 1.0%.
@ These sieve sizes used only to determine the final allowable Job Mix Formula (JMF) in
accordance with 24.13.
Voids in Mineral Aggregate (VMA) shall be based on tests of the Bulk Specific
Gravity of the Compacted Mix (AASHTO T-166) and Aggregate (T 84 & T 85),
and calculated according to AASHTO PP 19. All mixes shall meet the minimum
VMA specified in Table 24.2.1.3, below.

TABLE 24.02.1.3 MINIMUM VMA, %
Nominal Maximum* Air Voids ++

3.5% 4.0% 4.5%
1" 12.5 13.0 13.5
¾" 13.5 14.0 14.5
½" 14.5 15.0 15.5
* Nominal Maximum Particle Size is defined as one sieve size larger than the first sieve to retain
more than 10%, but shall not exceed the 100% passing size. The Nominal Maximum Particle
Size can vary during mix production even when the 100% passing size is constant.
++ Minimum VMA criteria apply to the mix design only. The minimum VMA criteria shall be
linearly interpolated based on actual air voids. See Section 24.13 for tolerances.
24.02.2 Performance Graded Asphalt Binders – (Asphalt Cements) The

Contractor shall provide to the Project Manager acceptable 'Certifications of
Compliance' of each applicable asphalt cement grade from the supplier. Upon
non-conformance with the specifications, the asphalt cement may be rejected as
directed by the Project Manager. When production begins, the Contractor shall,
upon request, provide to the Project Manager a one-quart can of each specified
asphalt cement. Additionally, when requested, the Contractor shall provide the
refinery test results that pertain to the asphalt binders used during production.
Asphalt Cement binder shall meet the requirements of the Superpave

Performance-Graded Binders (PG) as presented in Table 24.2.2.1 below.

TABLE 24.02.2.1 – PROPERTIES OF PERFORMANCE GRADED BINDERS
Property PG 58-28 PG 64-22 PG 76-28

Traffic Level: Recommended Usage 1 and 2 2 through 5 3 through 5
Flash Point Temperature, °C, AASHTO T
230 Min. 230 Min. 230 Min.
48
Viscosity at 135°C, Pas, ASTM D 4402 3 Max. 3 Max. 3 Max.
Dynamic Shear, Temperature °C,
where C*/Sin δ @ 10 rad/sec. ≥ 1.00 Kpa, 58°C 64°C 76°C
AASHTO TP 5
Rolling Thin Film Oven Residue Properties, AASHTO T 240
Mass Loss, %, AASHTO T 240 1.00 Max. 1.00 Max. 1.00 Max.
where G*/Sin δ @ 10 rad/sec. ≥ 2.20 Kpa. 58°C 64°C 76°C
AASHTO TP 5
Elastic Recovery 25°C, % Min.* N/A N/A 50 Min.
Pressure Aging Vessel Residue Properties, Aging Temperature 100°C AASHTO PP1

where G*/Sin δ @ 10rad/sec. ≤ 5,000 Kpa, 19°C 25°C 28°C
AASHT AASHTOO TP 5
Creep Stiffness, @ 60 sec.
-18°C -12°C -18°C
Test Temperature in °C, AASHTO TP 1
S, Mpa, AASHTO TP 1 300 Max. 300 Max. 300 Max.
m-value, AASHTO TP 1 0.300 Min. 0.300 Min. 0.300 Min.
**Direct Tension Temperature in °C, @ 1.0
mm/min., Where Failure Strain >1.0%, -18°C -12°C -18°C
AASHTAASHTO TP 3
* Elastic Recovery by Task Force 31, Appendix B Method
** Direct tension measurements are required when needed to show conformance to AASHTO
MP.1

24.02.3 Additives – Hydrated Lime Lime shall be added at the rate of 1% by dry
weight of the aggregate and shall be included in the amount of material passing the
No. 200 sieve. Hydrated lime for aggregate pretreatment shall conform to the
requirements of ASTM C 207, Type N. In addition, the residue retained on a 200-
mesh sieve shall not exceed .8% when determined in accordance with ASTM C
110. Drying of the test residue in an atmosphere free from carbon dioxide will not
be required.
24.02.4 Tack Coat The emulsified asphalt, for Tack Coat shall be CSS-1h or SS-1h
and conform to AASHTO M208 or M140, respectively.
24.03 Mix Design and Plant Produced Mixture Requirements

The mix design materials shall be those listed in Section 24.2 and used for the project. No
substitutions are allowed during production.
The Project Manager shall indicate on MGPEC Form #9 the project specific criteria concerning
mix design method, traffic level, asphalt cement type, mixture grading, and maximum amount of
RAP allowed. This information shall be provided on MGPEC Form #9, 'Requirements for Hot
Mix Asphalt Pavement (HMAP)'.
Grading SG (1-inch nominal aggregate) shall only be designed using the 150mm Superpave
molds. Hveem Stability and Lottmans are not required for Grading SG mixtures. Grading S and
SX shall be designed using 100mm Superpave molds when using the Superpave design method.
24.03.1 Superpave Mixture Design Method The Contractor shall submit a Proposed
Design Job Mix for each mixture required by the Contract. The design shall be
determined using AASHTO T 312 for the Superpave Method of Mixture Design.
Guidance is provided in "Superpave Level 1 Mix Design" SP-2 published by the
Asphalt Institute. Mix designs shall meet the following requirements of Table
24.3.1:

TABLE 24.03.1 SUPERPAVE MIXTURE PROPERTIES
Traffic Level 0 1&2&3 4&5

Traffic Loading, Total 18 Non 1) <300,000
kip ESALs Over Design Vehicular 2) 300,000 to <1.0 Million 4) 3.0 to 10.0 Million
Life (Usually 20 Years) Or Paths 3) 1.0 to <3.0 Million 5) > 10.0 Million
Initial gyrations, Ninitial
6 7 8
(For Information Only)
Ninitial Air Voids,
>8.5 >9.5 >11.0
(For Information Only)
Design gyrations, Ndesign
(Air Void: 3.5% to 4.5%) 50 75 100
(See Notes 1, 2)
Hveem Stability
AASHTO T 246
N/A 28 Min. 30 Min.
(Grading S & SX only)
(See Notes 1, 2)
Voids Filled with Asphalt,
70-80 65-78 65-75
MS-2
Design Air Voids, % (See
3.0 to 5.0 3.0 to 5.0
Notes 1, 2), MS-2
Lottman, Tensile Strength
Ratio, % Retained, 80 Min. 80 Min. 80 Min.
AASHTO T 283, Method B
Lottman, AASHTO T 283
30 Min. 30 Min. 30 Min.
Dry Tensile Strength, psi
Minimum VMA criteria apply to the mix design only (Table 24.2.1.3). The
VMA % AASHTO PP 19
minimum VMA criteria shall be linearly interpolated based on actual air
(See Notes 1, 2)
voids.
Note 1: Maximum Theoretical Specific Gravity of mix by AASHTO T 209.
Note 2: Refer to Section 24.13 for production tolerances.

24.04 Mixture Design Submittals
24.04.1 General Requirements The Contractor shall submit all mixture designs,
Certificates of Compliance, and laboratory data to the Project Manager for approval
at least seven calendar days before construction is to begin. The mix design
(Proposed Design Job Mix) must be approved by the Project Manager prior to the
start of construction.
Mixture designs shall be performed in a materials laboratory under the direct

supervision of and shall be stamped and signed by a Professional Engineer licensed
in Colorado and practicing in this field. In addition, the Contractor shall submit, as
part of the mixture design, laboratory data documents to verify the following:
1. Source of materials.
2. Gradation, specific gravity, source and description of individual aggregates
and the final blend.
3. Aggregate physical properties.
4. Source and Grade of Performance Graded Binder.
5. Proposed Design Job Mix: aggregate and additive blending, final gradation
shown on 0.45 power graph, optimum asphalt content.
6. Mixing and compaction temperatures used.
7. Mixture properties determined at a minimum of four asphalt contents and
interpolated at optimum and graphs showing mixture properties versus
asphalt content.
The Project Manager reserves the right to verify the Contractor's mix design for
each hot asphalt pavement grading utilizing materials actually produced and
stockpiled. If requested, the Contractor shall provide a sufficient quantity of each
aggregate, mineral filler, RAP, and additive for the required laboratory tests, if
required by the Project Manager. The Project Manager may request a Certificate of
Conformance or Certificate of Compliance at any time on any material used.
24.04.2 Change in Source or Grade Should a change in the source of Lime occur, or
more than one temperature grade change on either the high or low end of
Performance Graded Asphalt Binders (Asphalt Cements) occur, a one point
verification test (at optimum asphalt content) of the mix must be performed to
verify that the applicable criteria shown on Table 24.2.1.3 (VMA), is met. If this
testing shows noncompliance, a new Design Job Mix shall be established and
approved by the Project Manager before the new Performance Graded Asphalt

Binders or Lime source is used. Any change in aggregate type or source will
require a new mix design. The one point verification test may be performed on lab
mixed samples or on plant mixed samples.
24.04.3 Mix Production Verification Production verification shall occur prior to the
start of the project. The production verification shall be performed by LABCAT
Level C certified technicians to verify the volumetric properties of the mix. If the
mix has been produced for another project within the last 90 days, data from that
project can be submitted for this verification. Volumetric properties of the mix
verification testing shall be within the following tolerances compared to the
Proposed Design Job Mix. The mix verification test reports shall be submitted to
the Project Manager prior to mix placement.
TABLE 24.04.3 MIX DESIGN VERIFICATION TOLERANCES
Air Voids 3.0 – 5.0

VMA +/- 1.2%
Asphalt Cement Content +/-0.3%
Stability Applicable minimum
The tolerances in this table are for mix design verification

only. See Section 24.13 for production tolerances.
24.04.4 The Project Manager may require a pre-paving meeting of all parties involved in
supply, haul, lay down inspection, quality control and quality acceptance of HMAP.
Areas of responsibility and contact names and numbers should be shared
24.05 Equipment
24.05.1 Mixing Plant The mixing plant shall be capable of producing a uniform material,
have adequate capacity, and be maintained in good mechanical condition.
Defective parts shall be replaced or repaired immediately if they adversely affect
the proper functioning of the plant or plant units, or adversely affect the quality of
the HMAP.
Dust, smoke, or other contaminants shall be controlled at the plant site to meet all
air quality requirements in the "Colorado Air Quality Control Act," Title 25, Article
7, CRS and regulations promulgated there under.
Acceptable safety equipment, approved by the Project Manager, shall be provided

by the Contractor to accommodate sampling and testing.

24.05.2 Hauling Equipment Trucks used for hauling HMAP material shall have tight,
clean, smooth beds thinly coated with a minimum amount of paraffin oil, lime
solution, or other approved release agent. Petroleum distillates such as kerosene or
fuel oil will not be permitted. Each truck shall be equipped with a cover of canvas
or other suitable material used to protect the mixture from the weather and
excessive temperature loss or cooled layers of mix in the truck.
24.05.3 Bituminous Pavers Self-propelled pavers shall be provided for full lane width
paving, and shall be equipped with a screed assembly, heated if necessary, capable
of spreading and finishing the HMAP material in full lane widths applicable to the
typical section and thicknesses shown in the Contract. Pavers used for shoulders,
patching and similar construction, not requiring fine grade control, shall be capable
of spreading and finishing courses of HMAP material in widths shown in the
Contract.
The paver shall have an automatic distribution system that will place and spread the
mixture uniformly in front of the screed.
The paver shall be capable of operating at forward speeds consistent with uniform
and continuous laying of the mixture. Stop and go operations of the paver shall be
avoided. The screed or strike-off assembly shall produce the specified finished
surface without tearing, shoving, or gouging the mixture. Self-propelled pavers
shall be equipped with automatic screed controls with sensors capable of sensing
grade from an outside reference line, and maintaining the screed at the specified
longitudinal grade and transverse slope. The sensor shall be constructed to operate
from either or both sides of the paver and shall be capable of working with the
following devices when they are required for the situation:
(1) Ski-type device at least 30 feet in length.

(2) Short ski or short shoe.
(3) Adequate length of control line and stakes, if no other type of geometric
control is present.
The controls shall be capable of maintaining the screed at the specified transverse
slope within plus or minus 0.1 percent. Automatic mode should be used where
possible. If the automatic controls fail or malfunction, the equipment may be
operated manually for the remainder of the normal working day, provided specified
results are obtained.

If the Contractor fails to obtain and maintain the specified surface tolerances, the
paving operations shall be suspended until satisfactory corrections, repairs, or
equipment replacements are made.
Placement of HMAP on a waterproofed bridge deck shall be accomplished with

equipment that will not damage the membrane or protective covering.
24.06 Manufacture
24.06.1 Preparation of Aggregates Heating and drying of the aggregates shall be
accomplished without damaging the aggregate. Hydrated lime shall be added to
achieve complete and uniform coating of the aggregate, in accordance with one of
the following methods:
a) Lime Slurry Added to Aggregate: The hydrated lime shall be added to the
aggregate in the form of slurry and then thoroughly mixed in an approved
pug mill. The slurry shall contain a minimum of 70 percent water by weight.
b) Dry Lime Added to Wet Aggregate: The dry hydrated lime shall be added to
wet aggregate (a minimum of three percent above saturated surface dry) and
then thoroughly mixed in an approved pug mill.
The lime-aggregate mixture may be fed directly into the hot plant after mixing or it
may be stockpiled for not more than 90 days before introduction into the plant for
mixing with the asphalt cement. The hydrated lime may be added to different sized
aggregates and stockpiled by adding 75 percent of the lime to the aggregate passing
the No.4 sieve and 25 percent to the aggregate retained on the No. 4 sieve.
24.06.2 Mixing The dried aggregates and asphalt cement shall be combined in the mixer in
the quantities required to meet the design job mix. The materials shall be mixed
until the aggregate is completely and uniformly coated, and the asphalt cement is
uniformly distributed throughout the aggregate. Baghouse fines shall be fed back to
the mixing plant in a uniform and continuous manner to maintain uniformity in the
mixture. The Baghouse fines, feeder, auger, and related equipment, shall be in
good working condition and operated in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendation. If the Project Manager determines that non-uniform operation of
the equipment is detrimental to the mixture, it may suspend all paving operations
until the Contractor takes appropriate action.
The minimum temperature of the mixture when discharged from the mixer shall be
as shown in the following table:

TABLE 24.06.2.1- MIXTURE DISCHARGE TEMPERATURES
Asphalt Minimum Discharge Maximum Discharge
Grade Temperature Temperature
PG 58-28 275°F 305°F
PG 64-22 290°F 320°F
PG 76-28 320°F 350°F
HMAP mix shall be produced at the lowest temperature within the specified
temperature range that produces a workable mix and provides for uniform coating
of aggregates (95 percent minimum in accordance with AASHTO T 195), and that
allows the required compaction to be achieved.
HMAP mix may be stored provided that any and all characteristics of the mixture
are not altered by such storage. If storing or holding of the mixture causes
segregation, excessive heat loss, or adversely affects the quality of the finished
product, corrective action shall be taken. Unsuitable mixture shall be disposed of at
the Contractor's expense.
When placing hot bituminous mixture over bridge decks covered by waterproofing
membrane, the minimum temperature of the mixture, when rolling operations begin,
shall be 250°F. The job mix temperature may be increased up to 30°F to obtain this
temperature.
24.06.3Hauling Each truck shall use covers to protect the mix during transport in cold
weather, dust storms or if precipitation is imminent. The Project Manager can
reject any mix which shows an excess or deficiency of asphalt cement, damage due
to burning or overheating, an improper gradation, or thermal segregation with cold
areas 30°F below the minimum discharge temperature.
24.07 Tack Coat

Prior to placement of HMAP, a tack coat shall be applied to all existing concrete and asphalt
surfaces. The material shall be in accordance with 24.2.4. The emulsified asphalt shall be
diluted 1:1 with water and applied at 0.10 ± 0.01 gallons per square yard of diluted material. The
Project Manager may direct other application rates to match the age of condition of the surface.
The surface to receive the tack coat shall be dry and cleaned by sweeping, or another approved
method, until dust, debris, and foreign matter are removed. The tack coat shall then be applied
uniformly by squeegee, brooms, or distributor. Prior to paving, all water must have evaporated
from the tack coat. Contaminated areas shall be cleaned and tack coat shall be reapplied.

24.08 Placement
Hot mix asphalt shall be placed only on approved, properly constructed surfaces that are free
from loose material, water, frost, snow or ice. The hot mix asphalt and tack coat shall be placed
in accordance with the temperature limitations of Table 24.8 and only when weather conditions
permit the pavement to be properly placed and finished as determined by the Project Manager.
Placement temperature as stated shall be increased by 5°F for each 10 miles per hour wind
velocity to a maximum increased minimum placement temperature of 70°F.
TABLE 24.08 MINIMUM AIR AND SURFACE TEMPERATURES

LIMITATIONS FOR MIX PLACEMENT
Compaction Layer Thickness Top Layer of Pavement* Lower Layers*
PG 58-28 PG 76-28 PG 58-28

PG 76-28
PG 64-22 PG 64-22
<2 inches
60°F 75°F N/A N/A
(not recommended)
2 inches to <3
50°F 65°F 40°F 50°F
inches
3 inches
or more 50°F 50°F 40°F 40°F
SG mix only
* Air temperature is taken in the shade. Surface temperature is taken on the

subgrade or base. The Project Manager may not waive the above temperature
limitations for PG 76-28.
The mixture shall not be placed at a temperature lower than 245°F for mixes containing PG 58-
28 or PG 64-22 asphalt, and 290°F for mixes containing polymer modified asphalt. Mix which
is too cold or damaged by weather will be rejected.
The mixture shall be laid upon an approved surface, spread and struck off to obtain the required
grade and elevation after compaction. The minimum lift thickness shall be at least three times
(preferably four times) the nominal particle size. The mixture should be placed approximately
25 percent thicker than the existing surrounding mat thickness to account for compaction.
Raking is discouraged and will not be allowed except to correct major problems of grade and
elevation. Casting or raking that causes any segregation will not be permitted.
On areas where the use of mechanical spreading and finishing equipment is impracticable, the
mixture shall be carefully dumped, spread, raked, screeded, and luted by hand tools to the
required compacted thickness plus 25 percent. Carefully move or minimally work the HMAP

mix with the use of rakes, lutes, or shovels to avoid segregation. Mixtures made with modified
asphalt cement require more rapid completion of handwork areas than for normal mixtures.
Hauling and placement sequences shall be coordinated so that the paver is in constant motion.
Excessive starting and stopping shall not be allowed. A construction joint shall be placed any
time the paver stops, and the screed drops enough to cause a surface dip in violation of section
24.13.1, Surface Tolerances; or the mat temperature falls below that allowed in section 24.12,
Compaction. Bituminous pavers shall be used to distribute the mixture either over the entire
width or over such partial width as may be practicable. Echelon paving will be permitted.
24.09 Longitudinal Joints

The longitudinal joints in both a new pavement and an overlay pavement layer shall offset the
joint in the layer immediately below by a minimum of 6 inches. The joints in any pavement
layer shall not fall in a wheel track or path. The joints in the top layer of new pavement, not built
on top of an existing pavement, shall be located on lane lines, or as shown on the plans.
Longitudinal joints shall be minimized, where feasible, with wide paving pulls or echelon
paving. Joints shall not cross any centerline, lane line, or edge line unless approved by the
Project Manager. The Contractor shall submit, prior to paving, a joint plan and pavement
marking plan showing locations and the methods to establish a field control line. The Project
Manager must approve such plans prior to paving. The Contractor shall use a continuous string
line to delineate longitudinal joints during paving as shown on the joint plan. All string lines
shall be removed at the end of each day's paving.
The free edge of the paved pass shall be laid as straight as possible, to the satisfaction of the
Project Manager. This joint, if cold, shall be tack coated prior to placement of adjacent paving.
The new compacted mat shall overlap the previously placed mat no more than 1.5 inches.
Excess overlap or thickness shall not be raked or cast onto the new mat, but shall be wasted by
pulling back and removing. The hot edge shall be blocked or bumped in a smooth line consistent
with the previous longitudinal edge. Minor raking will only be allowed to correct major grade
problems or provide mix around manholes and meter covers. The longitudinal joint shall be
rolled from the hot side and overlap the joint by approximately 6 inches on the cold side.
24.10 Transverse Joints

The Contractor shall submit, prior to paving, a joint plan showing locations and the methods to
be used to construct transverse joints. The Project Manager must approve such plans prior to
paving.

In areas where the use of mechanical spreading and finishing equipment is impracticable, the
mixture shall be carefully dumped, spread, raked, screeded, and luted by hand tools to meet the
elevation of the adjacent pavement. Placing of the HMAP shall be continuous with a minimum
of transverse joints, and rollers shall not pass over the unprotected end of a freshly laid mixture.
Transverse joints shall be formed by cutting back on the previous run to expose the full depth of
the course. Tack coat material shall be applied to contact surfaces of all joints just before
additional mixture is placed against the previously compacted material.
The end of transverse joints shall be located so they will be constructed with a full head of mix in
front of the screed. When butt joints are constructed, runoff boards shall be used to support the
roller on the downstream side of the joint. All tapered sections, rounded edges and segregated
areas shall be removed to achieve a vertical face at the butt joint before paving is restarted.
When a tapered joint is required for traffic access, the ramp shall be removed back to a full depth
from the segregated section before paving is restarted.
When restarting paving operations, the paver screed shall be placed on the starter block on the
completed side of the transverse joint. The starter block should be approximately 25% of the
thickness of the existing completed mat, so that adequate grade and compaction can be achieved
on starting the paving operation. The screed should be nulled (angle removed) when on starting
blocks and an up angle of attack set. Proper head of mix should be introduced into the paver
prior to starting. The new compacted (downstream) side of the joint may be up to 3/16 inches
higher than the old (upstream) side. Raking of this joint shall not be allowed except to correct
major grade problems. The surface tolerance at the transverse joint must be verified with a 10-
foot straight edge before the paver is more than 100 feet from the joint. If the surface tolerance
is not within the 3/16”, the contractor shall make corrections before proceeding.
24.11 Segregation
The asphalt mixture shall be transported and placed on the roadway without segregation. All
segregated areas shall be removed immediately and replaced with specification material before
the initial rolling. If more than 50 square feet of segregated pavement is removed and replaced
in any continuous 500 linear feet of paver width lay down, operations shall be discontinued until
the source of the segregation has been determined and corrected.
The Project Manager will visually determine areas that are segregated, and may also use density
and gradation measures to help in this determination. The Project Manager will visually
determine the extent of the segregation. The Contractor will not be allowed additional
compensation for correction of segregated areas.

24.12 Compaction
The temperature of the mixture immediately behind the screed shall be at least 245°F for PG 58-
28 or PG 64-22 binder and 290°F for PG 76-28 binder. The breakdown compaction shall be
completed before the mixture temperature drops 20°F.
The HMAP shall be compacted by rolling. The number, weight, and type of rollers furnished
shall be sufficient to obtain the required density and surface texture while the mixture is in a
workable condition. Compaction shall begin immediately after the mixture is placed and be
continued until the required density is obtained. Final compaction shall be obtained using steel
wheel rollers.
If the required density is not achieved and the surface temperature falls below 185°F, or there is
obvious surface distress or breakage, no further compaction effort will be permitted unless
approved by the Project Manager. Price Reduction criteria in Section 24.14 shall still apply
in such cases. The criteria for mixtures containing PG 76-28 asphalt cements shall be 235°F.
These minimum compaction temperatures may be adjusted according to the asphalt cement
supplier recommendations. Adjusted minimum compaction temperatures must be shown on the
approved mix design or on other asphalt cement supplier documents, to be available on the job
site. Pavement operations shall be suspended when density requirements are not met, and the
problem shall be resolved prior to continuing paving operations.
All roller marks shall be removed with the finish rolling. Use of vibratory rollers with the
vibrator on will not be permitted on bridge decks.
The Contractor shall establish a rolling pattern or procedure during the beginning of paving
operations, which will achieve the required compaction and surface tolerances. This procedure
may be re-evaluated by the Contractor and Project Manager throughout the paving operations.
All HMAP paving shall be compacted to 94.0 ± 2 percent of Maximum Theoretical (Rice)
Density, (AASHTO T 209: Maximum Specific Gravity of Bituminous Paving Mixtures). The
average (mean) of the 3 most recent production AASHTO T 209 Rice values shall be used in
calculating Relative Compaction according to AASHTO T 166.
The Contractor shall core the pavement, as required by the Project Manager, for field density
tests in accordance with AASHTO T 230, Method B), or for field calibration of nuclear density
equipment in accordance with the ASTM D 2950. At a minimum, cores for nuclear density
equipment calibration shall be taken at the beginning of placement of each pavement layer or
change of mixture materials or gradation. Untested areas during placement will also require
cores to be taken to verify compaction.

Along forms, curbs, headers, walls, and all other places not accessible to the rollers, the mixture
shall be thoroughly compacted with mechanical tampers.
Any mixture that becomes loose and broken, mixed with dirt, or is in any way defective, shall be
immediately removed and replaced with fresh hot mixture and compacted to conform to the
surrounding area.
24.13 Production Tolerances

24.13.1 Surface Tolerances The variation between any two contacts with the surface
shall not exceed 3/16 inch in 10 feet for full lane width paving. For patching
surface tolerances the variation shall not exceed ½ inch in 10 feet. All humps or
depressions exceeding the specified tolerance shall be corrected by removing
defective work and replacing it with new material or by overlaying (patching) as
directed by the Project Manager. The final pavement surface shall not vary from
the specified cross section by more than 1 inch at any point. Irregularities
exceeding the specified tolerance shall be corrected at the Contractor's expense.
Transverse measurements for variations shall exclude breaks in the crown sections.
Roadway smoothness testing will not be measured and paid for separately, but shall
be included in the work.
The final surface pavement adjacent to concrete gutter shall be finished from 1/8
inch to 3/8 inches above the lip of the gutter into which it drains. Any surface
pavement that is above the lip more than 3/8 inch shall be removed and replaced to
the specified height. Any pavement surface that is below the lip of the gutter shall
be corrected as directed by the Project Manager. This provision does not apply to
"tipped" or standard median gutter but does apply to median "catch" gutters used on
superelevated roadways.
Before the surface course is placed, the Contractor shall adjust all manholes, valve
boxes, and survey range boxes to within 1/8 inch and ½ inch below finish grade of
the asphalt surface. The Contractor shall notify the Project Manager of the timing
of adjustments to all manholes and valve boxes so he may observe. The Contractor
shall remove any foreign matter introduced into all manholes and valve boxes
during construction. It shall also be the Contractor's responsibility to insure proper
compaction around all manholes and valve boxes after they have been raised. At no
time shall manholes and valve boxes be covered up or buried. Valve boxes and
manholes are to be maintained fully accessible at all times for emergency and
maintenance operation by City personnel. The cost of adjusting valve boxes,

manholes, and survey range boxes shall be included in the work, unless otherwise
specified in the Special Conditions or Proposal. The Contractor shall be responsible
for any cost incurred by the City to provide access to the covered manholes or valve
boxes. Valve boxes, manholes, and survey range boxes shall be clean when work is
completed. Manhole rings shall be adjusted to match the slope of the roadway.
24.13.2 Job Mix Formula Tolerances Production test results that deviate from the
design job mix by more than shown in the following table are subject to Section
24.14:
TABLE 24.13.2 – JOB MIX FORMULA TOLERANCES 1
Item
Passing No. 3/8" and Larger 1 6%
Passing No. 4 and No.8 5%
Passing No. 30 to No. 50 4%
Passing No. 200 2 2%
Air Voids *
VMA 1.2%
Hveem Stability See footnote #3
Asphalt Content 0. 3%
Asphalt Content, Mixes with >10% RAP 0.4%
1. When the tolerances are applied to the job mix formula, the gradation may not fall
outside the control point gradation range set forth in Table 24.2.1.2.
2. There is 1.0 percent tolerance for the maximum sieve size.
3. Hveem Stability must meet the minimum value specified in table 24.3.2.
* Allowable air void range is 3% minimum to 5% maximum.
When disagreements concerning determination of specification compliance occur,

only valid tests from both the Project Manager and Contractor will be considered.
The Project Manager shall determine validity. Generally, valid tests are those in
which sampling and testing have been performed according to referenced
procedures and the results are within stated precision statements. When
disagreements occur with asphalt content and gradation tests results, solvent
extracted aggregate testing shall take precedence over burn off oven-extracted
aggregate, which shall take precedence over cold feed belt testing.

24.14 Conformity with Plans and Specification
24.14.1 General All work performed and all materials furnished shall conform to the
lines, grades, cross sections, dimensions, and material requirements, including
tolerances, shown in the contract.
For those items of work where working tolerances are not specified, the Contractor
shall perform the work in a manner consistent with reasonable and customary
manufacturing and construction practices.
When the Project Manager finds that the materials furnished, the work performed,
or the finished product does not conform with the contract, but that reasonably
acceptable work has been produced, the Project Manager shall determine the extent
of the work to be accepted and remain in place. Cost reduction, when allowed, shall
be accomplished by adjusting pay quantities as indicated herein and applying
contract unit prices to the reduced quantities. If the work is to be accepted, the
Project Manager shall:
A. Document the basis for acceptance by "Cure Notice" which may provide for
an appropriate adjustment in the payment quantity for such work or
materials not otherwise provided for in this section.
B. Notify the Contractor in writing that the payment may be adjusted in
accordance with this section when "P" is 25 or less, or require appropriate
remediation being performed.
C. In lieu of cost (quantity) adjustment, permit correction or replacement of the
finished product provided the correction or replacement does not adversely
affect the work or the Project Manager.
When the Project Manager determines that the material furnished, work performed,
or the finished product is not in conformity with the contract and has resulted in
inferior or unsatisfactory product, the finished product or materials shall be
removed and replaced or otherwise corrected by, and at the expense of, the
Contractor.
Materials shall be sampled and tested by a qualified testing laboratory in

accordance with the sampling, testing schedules, and procedures contained in the
Section 32.00 Materials Testing. The approximate maximum quantity represented
by each sample shall be as set forth in the testing schedule. An additional number
of samples, in relation to the quantity of materials represented, may be selected and
tested at the Project Manager discretion. The quantity represented by five
consecutive random samples shall constitute a lot, whenever production schedules

and material continuity permits. When it is necessary to represent short production
runs, significant material changes, or other unusual characteristics of the work, the
Project Manager may establish a lot consisting of the quantity represented by any
number of consecutive random samples from one to seven inclusive. Testing
results that are determined to have sampling or testing errors, as determined by the
Project Manager, shall not be used.
24.14.2 Cost Reduction Formula Materials or work shall only be evaluated for price
adjustment when deviations from specifications occur on any of the individual tests
for the lot. The several individual test values shall be averaged and the percentage
of cost (quantity) reduction for the lot shall be determined by applicable formula.
This shall apply only when a cost reduction factor for the element is listed in Table
24.14.1.
24.14.2.01 When the Lot is Represented by Three Through Seven Tests The
formula in (a) and (b) below shall be used.
a) P = (Xn + āR - Tu) * F
Shall be used if a maximum limit only is specified or; when the average of
the several test values is above the midpoint of the specification band or
above the job-mix formula value.
b) P = (TL + aR - Xn) * F
Shall be used if the minimum limit only is specified or; when the average
of the several test values is below the midpoint of the specification band or
below the job-mix formula value.
24.14.2.02 When the Lot is Represented by Fewer Than Three Tests. The
materials shall be evaluated for cost (quantity) reduction by the following
procedure: Lots represented by two tests shall be divided into two separate
lots represented by one test each, as determined by the Project Manager. Each
lot that deviates from the specifications shall be cost adjusted by one of the
following formulae.
a) P = 0.76 * (To -Tu) * F

When a maximum limit only is specified or the test value is above the
maximum specified limit.
b) P = 0.76 * (TL -To) * F

When a minimum limit only is specified or the test value is below the
minimum specified limit.

Where:
P is the percentage of reduction in payment quantity.
Xn is the average of the several test values from samples taken from the
lot, with "n" indicating the number of values.
a Is a variable factor to be used if "n" changes according to the
following:
when "n" is "a" equals

3 0.45
4 0.38
5 0.33
6 0.30
7 or greater 0.28
R is the difference between the highest and lowest values in the group of
several test results from the lot.
Tu is the upper or maximum tolerance limit permitted by the
specifications.
TL is the lower or minimum tolerance limit permitted by the
specifications.
To is the test value of the test that deviates from the specifications.
F is the cost reduction factor to be applied for each element as shown in
the following table:
TABLE 24.14.2.02
TABLE OF PRICE REDUCTION FACTORS
ELEMENT FACTOR "F"

100 percent size sieve 1
1/2 inch sieve and larger 1
3/8 inch sieve, #4, #8, #30 sieves
3
No. 50
No. 200 sieve 6
Density of Hot Mix Asphalt 8
Asphaltic Cement Binder content
20
(all asphalt-aggregate mixtures)
Total air voids 30
Voids in mineral aggregate 20
Stability 5

If "P" is less than ten or a negative quantity, the material shall be accepted as
being in conformity. In cases where one or more elements show a positive
"P" value, such positive values shall be added and the resulting sum shall be
used to determine whether the material is in conformity. If the total "P" value
is between 10 and 25, the Project Manager may require correction or may
accept the material at a reduced cost. If "P" is greater than 25, the Project
Manager may:
1) Require complete removal and replacement with specification material

at no additional cost to the City;
2) Require corrective action to bring the material into conformity at no
additional cost to the City;
3) Where finished product is found to be capable of performing the
intended purpose and the value of the finished product is not affected,
permit the Contractor to leave the material in place with an appropriate
cost adjustment to be based on the Project Manager evaluation but not
less than that which would have occurred had an adjustment been
made where "P" = 25.
If asphaltic cement content, aggregate sieve analysis, or compaction deviates

from the specification requirements and the total "P" is three or greater, the
reduction shall apply to the contract cost (quantity) multiplied by 0.60 for
aggregate base course and Hot Bituminous Pavement mixtures.
The Contractor shall not have the option of accepting a cost reduction in lieu
of intentionally producing material not meeting specification. Continued
production of non-specification material shall not be permitted. Material that
is defective as identified by visual inspection shall be isolated and rejected
without regard to sampling sequence or location within a lot.
24.14.3 Cost Reduction for Thickness Deficiencies: If the cores indicate a

thickness deficiency, additional cores will be taken by the Contractor to be given to
the Project Manager so that price reductions can be determined per Lot. A Lot
encompasses 250 linear lane feet or the quantity between tests, and a price
reduction shall be determined at the unit cost of the HMAP. The following chart is
for new construction only. It is not to be used for overlays.

TABLE 24.14.3 – PRICE REDUCTION – THICKNESS*
% Price Remove &

0% 10% 20% > 30% > 40%
Reduction Replace
Thickness 0– 0.51" – 0.76" – > 1.01" – > 1.26" –

>1.51" or greater
Deficiency 0.50" 0.75" 1.00" 1.25" 1.50"
* Price reductions are not applicable to developer projects, as a financial deterrent, but may
be used as a determination for acceptance.
24.15 Testing and Inspection

If any materials furnished or work performed by the Contractor fails to fulfill the specification
requirements, such deficiencies shall be reported to the Project Manager and the Contractor
immediately. Preliminary written field reports of all tests taken and observation results shall be
given to the Contractor or Developer immediately after they are performed. Field reports shall
be forwarded to the Project Manager no later than 1 week following the testing.
Reports of all tests taken, including failing tests, shall be reported to the Project Manager,
to the Developer and to the Contractor no later than one week following the sampling.
Density test results will be reported to the inspector/observer at the time the testing occurs
as well as a written copy.
Testing of Hot Mix Asphalt Pavement shall be performed in accordance with Table 9.15. The
tests shall be performed under the general supervision of and signed by a Professional Engineer
registered in the State of Colorado. Laboratories shall be inspected by either AASHTO or
accredited A2LA or equivalent in the elements listed on Table 24.15. Technicians taking
samples and conducting compaction tests must have a LABCAT Level A certification or
equivalent. Technicians conducting tests of asphalt content and gradation must have a LABCAT
Level B certification or equivalent. Technicians performing voids testing must have a LABCAT
Level C certification or equivalent.

TABLE 24.15
FOR ITEM 9- HOT MIX ASPHALT PAVEMENT
Test Standard Minimum Frequency

AASHTO T168, ASTM D 979 and Every 1000 tons or one test for
Sampling
ASTM D3665 each day for less than 1000 tons
AASHTO T 166, T 238, T 230 One test for each 250 linear feet
Density
per lane
One test for each 1000 linear feet
Thickness (Core) ASTM D3549
per Lane, 2 minimum
AASHTO T 166 Every 1000 tons or one test for
Air Voids & VMA
AASHTO T 166& AASHTO PP 19 each day for less than 1000 tons
AASHTO T 27, T 11 Every 1000 tons or one test for

Gradation
each day for less than 1000 tons
Hveem/Marshall Stability Every 1000 tons or one test for

AASHTO T 246
As Applicable each day for less than 1000 tons
AASHTO T 164 or
or other methods agreed upon Every 1000 tons or one test for
Asphalt (AC) Content
between Project Manager and the each day for less than 1000 tons
Contractor
Maximum Theoretical AASHTO T 209 Every 1000 tons or one test for
Specific Gravity (Rice) each day for less than 1000 tons
Lottman Stripping, TSR & AASHTO T 283 As requested by the Project

Dry Density , Method B Manager
Inspectors shall be responsible for checking temperatures of mix in the truck and on pavement,
segregation, rolling patterns and other construction means and methods that affect the
performance of the pavement system. The Contractor shall provide assistance in sampling and
testing at all facilities and at the job site.

24.16.1 Plant Mix Bituminous Pavement Plant mix bituminous pavement shall be
measured by the square yard at the compacted depths specified on the plans or as
directed by the Project Manager. Accepted quantities of hot bituminous pavement
shall be paid for at the contract price per square yard of the type, grading, and
thickness specified, complete and in place according to Section 24.14 Conformity
with Plans and Specification. The contract price per square yard shall include full
compensation for all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to complete the
work. If the final pavement surface varies from the theoretical cross section by

more than specified tolerances, 25% of the payment due for the entire pavement
width and for the full depth of the pavement and base shall be withheld until
corrections are made.
24.16.2 Tack Coat Emulsified asphalts and liquid asphalts shall be measured by the
gallon. Emulsions will be measured prior to the addition of water. Blotter material
shall be measured by the ton.
Emulsified asphalt and liquid asphalt shall be paid for at the contact price per
gallon. Blotter material shall be paid for at the contract price per ton. Blotter
material required because the Contractor placed bituminous material in excess of
the rate specified by the Project Manager shall be at the Contractor's expense. The
contract price per gallon for emulsified asphalt or liquid asphalt and the contract
price per ton for blotter material shall include full compensation for all labor,
24.17 STONE MASTIC ASPHALT PAVEMENT

This work includes placing a Stone Mastic Asphalt (SMA) pavement as directed.
Mixture design and field control testing of SMA shall be performed using the Superpave
(AASHTO T- 269, 100 Gyrations) and a portion of Marshall Method (AASHTO T245, 50
Blow).
A minimum of two weeks prior to the proposed use of any Stone Mastic Asphalt pavement on
the project, a pre-paving conference will be conducted. At that time, the contractor shall submit
to the Project Manager, a mix design meeting the appropriate specification requirements for one
of the following:
The Superpave SMA mix design shall conform to the requirements of Table 24.16:

TABLE 24.17.1
FOR STONE MASTIC ASPHALT PAVEMENT
Property Test Method Value for SMA

Air Voids, percent at: N(design) AASHTO T- 269 3.0 – 4.0
Lab compaction (Revolutions) N(Design) AASHTO T- 312, 100
Accelerated Moisture Susceptibility, tensile strength Ratio, AASHTO T- 283,

70
(Lottman), minimum Method B
AASHTO T- 283,
Minimum Dry Split Tensile Strength, psi (kPa) 30
Method B
AASHTO T245,
Stability, Marshall Compactor 1400 lbs., min.
50 Blows
Grade of Asphalt Cement PG 76-28
Voids in the Mineral Aggregate (VMA) %, minimum AASHTO T-166 17
Note: The formula for VMA can be developed as follows based on the weight volume relationship. It
is recommended that the bulk specific gravity of aggregate be used for calculating VMA.
VMA = {{VT - VAgg (bulk)}/VT }*100
TABLE 24.17.2
SUPERPAVE SMA MIXING AND COMPACTION TEMPERATURES
Superpave Binder Laboratory Mixing Temperature, Laboratory Compaction Temperature,

Grade °C (°F) °C (°F)
PG 58-28 154 (310) 138 (280)

PG 64-22 163 (325) 149 (300)
PG 76-28 163 (325) 149 (300)
A minimum of one percent hydrated lime by weight of the combined aggregate shall be added to
the aggregate for all Stone Mastic Asphalt.
The SMA mix design must be approved by the Project Manager before any pavement is placed
on the project. In addition, the Contractor shall provide field control testing during production of
the SMA mix and for the demonstration control strip. The Contractor shall perform the
following tests and provide the results to the Project Manager during production:

TABLE 24.17.3
SUPERPAVE TESTING FREQUENCY
SUPERPAVE MIX PROPERTY FREQUENCY

Every 1000 tons or one test for each day
Maximum Theoretical Specific Gravity (Rice)
for less than 1000 tons
% Voids in the total mix @ N(design)
VMA (% Voids in the Mineral Aggregate) @ N(design)
Lottman, AASHTO T-283 1/5000 tons or fraction thereof
Dry Tensile Strength, AASHTO T-283 1/5000 tons or fraction thereof
Stability, Marshall Compactor
% AC & Aggregate Gradation Every 1000 tons or one test for each day
ASTM D-6302 (Ignition) for less than 1000 tons
The mineral filler for SMA shall be stored in a separate silo and added automatically in the
correct proportion. The mineral filler addition equipment shall be electronically or mechanically
interlocked to the aggregate feed sensors so that the proper amount of mineral filler is added
whenever SMA is produced.
The SMA mineral filler shall be added at the same point the asphalt cement is added to the
aggregate.
Tack coat between the existing pavement and Stone Mastic Asphalt pavement shall be placed at
a rate between 0.14 and 0.23 liters per square meter (0.03 and 0.05 gallons per square yard).
Before proceeding with SMA placement, the Contractor shall demonstrate the ability to produce
and place a satisfactory mix. The actual work may proceed when a full lane width demonstration
control strip, having a minimum length of 1000 feet has been successfully placed. The
Contractor shall determine properties (VMA, Voids, in-place density, and Marshall Stability) of
the project produced mix that is used in the demonstration control strip and provide the results to
the Engineer. No other SMA production or placement will be allowed until densities are
determined. If the material in the demonstration control strip is not in close conformity with the
specifications, the demonstration control strip will be removed and replaced at the Contractors
expense. The Project Manager will designate the location of the control strip.
Stone Mastic Asphalt (SMA) will be measured by the Ton of work completed and accepted.
Mix design, furnishing, hauling, preparing, and placing all materials, including aggregates,
asphalt cement, limestone dust, hydrated lime, tack coat, and approved demonstration control

strip; labor, equipment tools, setting of lines and guides where specified, and all other work
necessary to complete the item will not be paid for separately but shall be included in the work.
Table 24.17.4
Master Range Table for Stone Matrix Asphalt
Percent by Weight Passing Square Mesh Sieves
4.75 mm (#4) 9.5 mm (3/8”) 12.5 mm (1/2”) 19.0 mm (3/4”)

Sieve Size
nominal nominal nominal nominal
25 mm (1”) 100
19.0 mm (3/4”) 100 90-100
12.5 mm (1/2”) 100 100 90-100 50-88
9.5 mm (3/8”) 100 90-100 50-80 25-60
4.75 mm (#4) 90-100 26-60 20-35 20-28
2.36 mm (#8) 28-65 20-28 16-24 16-24
1.18mm (#16) 22-36
600 μm (#30) 18-28 12-18 12-18 12-18
300 μm (#50) 15-22 12-15
150 μm (#100) 10-15
75 μm (#200) 12-15 8-12 8-11 8-11

25.00 ASPHALT PLANING
25.01 SCOPE
25.02 GENERAL
25.03 STOCKPILE OF MATERIAL
25.04 EQUIPMENT
25.05 CONSTRUCTION METHODS
SECTION 25.00 ASPHALT PLANING
25.01 Scope
This specification specifies equipment and methods to be used for the cold planing of existing
pavement surfaces to the specified depth and the removal and disposal of the planed material.
25.02 General
The Contractor shall provide a planed and finished surface free from gouges, sooting, oil film,
and other imperfections. The completed planed surface shall have a uniform textured
appearance. The existing asphalt shall be planed to the depth specified ±1/4" with a 2% crown
unless otherwise specified.
The planing depth shall be measured at the existing outside edge of the gutter pan on both sides
of the roadway to establish a new elevation prior to overlaying. Additional planing depth may be
required near the roadway centerline to achieve the desired roadway cross section.
25.03 Stockpile of Material

Stockpiling of planed materials or cuttings will not be permitted on the project site. All planed
materials shall be delivered and stockpiled as directed by the Project Manager and shall become
the property of the City, unless otherwise specified or directed.
25.04 Equipment
A cold planing machine shall be used by the Contractor to perform the planing operation. The
equipment shall be sufficient to maintain adequate depth of cut and slope within specified
tolerance. The equipment shall be capable of accurately and automatically establishing a finish
profile grade along each edge of the machine within 1/4" of the specified depth.
The planing machine shall be equipped with an integral loading mechanism to immediately
remove the bulk of the materials being cut from the surface of the roadway and discharge into a
truck. The machine shall be equipped with a means to control the dust created by the cutting
action and shall meet all local, state, and federal air pollution laws.
The Contractor shall provide adequate backup equipment (mechanical street sweepers, loaders,
water truck, etc.) and personnel to insure that all cuttings are cleaned up and removed from the
roadway daily.
Asphalt Planing 25-1 9.2010

25.05 Construction Methods
25.05.1 The Project Manager may require that the pavement planing operation be referenced
from an independent grade control at his discretion.
25.05.2 In any area where the pavement has not been planed full width, leaving a vertical
edge greater than 1" in the longitudinal or transverse direction, this edge shall be
sloped at a maximum rate of 1" depth per 1' horizontal.
25.05.3 The planing machine shall be removed when approaching manholes, inlets, valve
boxes, and other obstructions that have not been lowered. Asphalt around these
obstructions shall be removed by other means to the required depth prior to
placement of the overlay. If overlay operations are not performed immediately after
planing, the Project Manager may require the installation and removal of a
temporary HBP transition. However, overlay must be completed within seven days
of the planing operation. Allowable transition taper shall be not greater than 1/4"
vertical rise per 1' horizontal. Such tapers shall be removed to the required depth
prior to the placement of the overlay. Where traffic must utilize the planed roadway
prior to completion of the overlay, the Project Manager may require the installation
and removal of temporary HBP transitions around appurtenances and obstructions.
25.05.4 Curbs, gutters, drainage structures, and other surfaces shall be cleaned of debris at
the completion of the project and before opening to traffic.
25.05.5 The Contractor shall prevent the spread of dust and debris during the performance
of the work. Where equipment comes into contact with tree branches or other plant
material, the Contractor shall exercise caution to avoid damage to trees, shrubs, and
other plant material. All trimming shall be performed as directed by the Project
Manager.

Planing shall be measured by the square yard for each depth specified. The Contract unit price
per square yard shall include all labor and equipment to complete the work as specified including
delivering and stockpiling or disposal of the planed material as directed.
Asphalt Planing 25-2 9.2010

27.00 SURFACE TREATMENTS
27.01 GENERAL
27.02 SLURRY SEAL
27.03 CHIP SEAL
27.04 CAPE SEAL
27.05 HOT CHIP SEAL
27.06 CRACK SEAL
27.01 GENERAL
27.01.1 PURPOSE Surface treatments referred to and used per this section are to be
applied to asphalt concrete pavements only. The purpose of these treatments is to
seal major and minor cracks in the pavement surface thereby preventing water
infiltration into the pavement structure and subgrade thus prolonging the pavement
life.
When surface treatments are applied by contract, Contractor shall be responsible for
full compliance with all portions of these specifications unless otherwise noted.
Specifications contained in this section shall supplement specifications in Section

24.00 Hot Bituminous Pavement.
27.01.2 DEFINITIONS The surface treatments referred to in this section are generally
defined below:
SLURRY SEAL – A minimal surface treatment consisting of bituminous

emulsion and fine aggregate material.
CHIP SEAL – A surface treatment consisting of bituminous emulsion and
aggregate material sized at least ¼ inch usually covered with a fog seal.
CAPE SEAL – A surface treatment consisting of a chip seal treatment covered
by a slurry seal treatment.
HOT CHIP SEAL – A surface treatment consisting of a chip seal treatment
covered by a hot chip seal application.
CRACK SEAL – A surface treatment consisting of bituminous sealant and
possibly aggregate used to fill and seal larger surface cracks.
27.01.3 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS The following construction

requirements shall apply to construction of all surface treatments within this
section, unless otherwise specified or directed by the Project Manager.
Modifications or additions to these requirements may be contained within the
specification for each treatment.
27.01.3.01 Surface Preparation

27.01.3.01.1 General Immediately prior to applying any surface treatment, the
street surface and gutters shall be cleaned of all loose material, silt spots,
oil spots, vegetation, and other objectionable material for the full width
of the area to be treated. Dust and other material in depressions or other
places not removed by mechanical sweepers shall be swept with hand
Surface Treatments 27-1 9.2010

brooms or removed by use of flushers. The Project Manager may
require washing of the pavement where other methods of cleaning do
not provide an acceptable surface. Material removed from the surface
shall not be mixed with the cover aggregate. Bituminous material shall
not be spread until the area to receive a surface treatment application has
been cleaned to the satisfaction and approval of the Project Manager.
All vegetation shall be removed from the area to receive a surface

treatment prior to placement of any surface treatment. This work shall
be performed within two weeks of the surface treatment. All dead or
remaining vegetation shall be removed prior to sweeping of the area and
application of surface treatment. Vegetation may be removed by
burning when in the opinion of the Project Manager such burning causes
no safety hazard or air pollution nuisance.
27.01.3.02 Manholes, Valve Boxes and Survey Monuments, etc.

27.01.3.02.1 Protection and Cleaning Manholes, valve boxes, survey
monuments, inlets, etc, shall be protected and covered in a suitable
manner prior to application of any surface treatment. This covering
shall be removed immediately after the surface treatment is applied or as
specified for each surface treatment or as directed by the Project
Manager. All covering material shall be disposed of in a lawful manner.
All manholes, valve boxes, survey monuments, inlets, etc, shall be
cleaned to the satisfaction of the Project Manager when work is
completed.
27.01.3.02.2 Locates All manholes, valve boxes, and survey monuments within the
project area shall be located prior to construction to the satisfaction of
the Project Manager. All appropriate utilities and representatives shall
be contacted and met as necessary to fully identify and locate all such
items within the work area. Work shall not commence until all such
items have been located to the satisfaction of the Project Manager.
When surface treatment work is performed by contract, Contractor shall
comply with this section at no additional cost to the City.
27.01.3.03 Quality Control

27.01.3.03.1 Materials Samples of the aggregate and asphalt emulsion used in
surface treatments shall be obtained at the Project Manager’s discretion.

Gradation and sand equivalent tests may be run on the aggregate and
consistency and residual asphalt content tests on the emulsion. Samples
of material may be taken directly from the mixing and/or application
unit(s). Test results will be compared to specifications. Initial tests will
be run at the expense of the City. For surface treatment work that is
performed by contract, Contractor shall assist the Project Manager in
obtaining samples of the aggregate and asphalt emulsion used in the
project at the Project Manager’s discretion.
Each load of emulsified asphalt shall be accompanied by a certification

of Analysis and Compliance. Emulsions shall show no separation after
mixing.
The Project Manager may use the recorders and measuring facilities of
the unit to determine application rates, asphalt emulsion content, mineral
filler, and additive.
27.01.3.03.2 Noncompliance If any two (2) consecutive tests fail on any stockpile
material, the job shall be stopped. If any two (2) successive tests on the
approved material from the same machine fail, the use of that machine
shall be suspended. When surface treatment work is performed by
contract, it shall be Contractor’s responsibility, at their own expense, to
prove to the Project Manager’s satisfaction that the material problems
have been corrected and that the machine is operating within
manufacturer specifications.
27.01.3.04 STORAGE SITE REQUIREMENTS Job materials and equipment may be

stockpiled and stored at locations near the job site. A list of sites to be used
for this purpose and written permission from the property owner shall be
submitted to the Project Manager for approval at least ten (10) days prior to
any use. The proposed truck route for ingress and egress to such sites shall
also be submitted to the Project Manager for approval. Using such job-site
storage requires the following:
A. Obtaining written permission from the property owner, which shall

include a brief description of the area of the property to be used, the
length of time the property will be used for this purpose, any access
restrictions (i.e. times of day), and the name and phone number of the
property owner. A copy of the written permission shall be submitted

to the Project Manager at least one week prior to delivery of material
to the site.
B. Keeping stockpiles and equipment confined to the approved area.
C. Providing security for job materials and equipment and for public
safety at the site.
D. Keeping all access roads clean and in good condition.
E. Returning site to original condition.
When surface treatment work is performed by contract, Contractor shall be

responsible for compliance with all requirements of this section. Contractor
shall hold the City of Aurora and all its employees and representatives
harmless from any injury or damage to property occurring as a result of
Contractor’s operations on property used for this purpose.
27.01.3.05 Traffic Control

27.01.3.05.1 General Traffic shall be directed through the project with signs,
barricades, flag persons or pilot cars as necessary to protect the work
and safety of the public.
Roadway traffic shall be maintained safely, adequately, and

continuously on all portions of existing roads, detours, and cross roads
affected by surface treatment work in accordance with the provisions of
Section 50.00 Traffic Control. Whenever traffic signal power lines
and/or loop detection lines are located within the limits of a proposed
construction area, the Traffic Engineer shall be contacted a minimum of
48 hours in advance to have the lines located to insure continuity of the
signal.

be responsible for all traffic control in the construction area and
compliance with all requirements of this section.
27.01.3.05.2 Street Closures Traffic may be detoured if detours are properly

erected and maintained, as approved by the Traffic Engineer. All
detours must be requested with the proper permits, as they apply to
street closures and traffic detours. This includes but is not limited to,
proper notification to all authorities that may be affected by any street
closure, such as Fire and Rescue, Law Enforcement Agencies and

Ambulance Services. A detailed Traffic Control Plan, showing the
detour route is required. When streets are approved for closing, they
shall not be closed prior to 7:00 a.m. or after 5:00 p.m. unless otherwise
approved by the Project Manager and Traffic Engineer. Residents on
streets to be closed shall be notified a minimum of two working days in
advance with written notices (English & Spanish) distributed to each
residence or business. Street signs advising of the closing shall be
placed a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the operation. When
surface treatment work is performed by contract, this shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor.
27.01.3.05.3 Temporary Pavement Markers Temporary raised pavement

markers shall be placed at the direction of the Project Observer, and
shall be placed prior to the surface treatment operation. Tabs shall be
placed at 40’ intervals on straight sections. At all turn lane tapers and
curved markings, the tabs shall be placed at 25’ intervals. After the
treatment has been placed and prior to any covering operation, the paper
over the reflective tabs shall be removed from every other tab placed.
After all cover operations are completed, all adhesive tabs shall be
exposed. Any temporary markings shall conform to the existing City
striping plans.
27.01.3.05.4 Traffic Control Devices All “Traffic Control” devices must meet the
Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD) specifications
and guidelines, and be approved by the Project Manager. Traffic control
devices shall include cones, barricades and any such means as approved
or required by the Traffic Engineer. When flaggers are required, they
shall have no other duty than to direct traffic. Sufficient flaggers for
traffic control shall be provided as directed by the Traffic Engineer.
Any and all traffic control devices shall be clean, in good working order
and properly placed according to the approved traffic control plan prior
to and during daily operations. If, in the opinion of the Project Manager
and/or the Traffic Engineer, the traffic control measures are in anyway
inadequate, operations shall be stopped until proper traffic control
measures are in place.

furnish, place and maintain all traffic control devices at Contractor’s
expense and shall be responsible for compliance with the requirements
of this section.
27.01.3.06 Notification
27.01.3.06.1 Notification Requirements All notices and signs required in this
section shall be distributed and posted at a minimum of 48 hours in
advance of the surface treatment operation. This includes, but is not
limited to, notification forms, no parking and tow away signs and other
means as deemed necessary by the Project Manager. If work does not
occur on the specified day, new notification shall be distributed 48 hours
in advance of the work. Car towing operations will only be authorized
by the City after 24 hours of the above advance notice and posting of no
parking signs.
27.01.3.06.2 Notification Forms Forms for resident and business notification shall
be submitted to the Project Manager for approval prior to the start of
construction and shall contain the following information at a minimum
in both Spanish and English:
Name, address and telephone number of the Contractor

Description of the work (chip seal, slurry seal, etc.)
Dates of the work (range of dates)
Parking and/or access alternatives
A contact person and local phone number for citizens’ questions
(24hour availability). If work is performed by contract, this contact
person shall be supplied by Contractor.
A local telephone number must be located on the flyer and this

telephone shall be manned 24/7 until the contract is completed. The
Project Manager shall approve all notices prior to distribution.
27.01.3.06.3 Signs Signage for the purpose of public notification of impending

work shall be furnished. These areas will be identified prior to the start
of construction and as designated by the Project Manager. Public
notification signs shall be affixed at locations approved by the Project

Manager at each end of the proposed construction areas. Signs shall be
posted a minimum of FIVE WORKING DAYS in advance of the
surface treatment. All signs shall be approved by the Traffic Engineer.
Signs shall be constructed of 0.100 gauge aluminum, alodine coated in

accordance with ASTM-B209, 48"x 48" minimum with black lettering
on an orange background. Signs shall be mounted and anchored using a
suitable assembly. Details of the proposed signs and mounting
apparatus shall be submitted to the Project Manager for review and
approval.
Signs shall contain the following information at a minimum, type of

operation, the scheduled week of work, and the phrase “ALTERNATE
ROUTES ARE ADVISED”.
Any missing or defaced signs shall be replaced within 24 hours.
"NO PARKING" signs shall be placed a minimum of 24 hours in

advance of any surface treatment operations on all streets to be treated.
“Fresh Oil” signs shall be posted in sufficient number and proper

locations to adequately notify the public of such fresh oil.
Any other signs as required by the Traffic Engineer shall be placed.

supply and maintain all signs at Contractor’s expense.
27.01.3.07 Limitations on Work Times Work on all arterial, collector, and cross
streets shall not be allowed between the hours of 6:00 to 8:30 a.m. and 3:30 to
7:00 p.m. with exception of weekend work, Saturday and Sunday, or as
directed by the Project Manager.
Limitations on work due to weather shall be as specified for each surface

treatment type or as directed by Project Manager.
27.02 SLURRY SEAL

27.02.1 SCOPE The bituminous slurry seal surface shall consist of properly proportioned
and mixed mineral aggregate, asphalt emulsion, and water, spread evenly on the
surface, as specified herein and as directed by the Project Manager. The slurry,

when cured, shall have a homogenous appearance, fill all cracks, adhere firmly to
the existing asphalt surface, and provide a skid-resistant texture. The scope of this
work consists of constructing a bituminous slurry seal surface on a prepared surface
in accordance with these specifications and as shown on the plans or directed by the
Project Manager.
Slurry mixes are divided into Type I, Type II, and Type III. Each type has unique
emulsion and gradation requirements. Application of each type shall be specified
by Project Manager. General uses are:
TABLE 27.02.1
SLURRY MIX TYPES AND ASSOCIATED USES
Type I Parking Areas, Rural and low volume Residential Streets
Type II Residential and Low Volume Collectors Streets
Type III High Volume Collector and Arterial Streets
27.02.2 MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS

27.02.2.01 Asphalt Emulsion CQS-1hL (Cationic Quick Setting Emulsified Asphalt
with 1% Latex Polymer). CQS-1hL shall be an emulsified blend of asphalt,
water, styrene-butadiene rubber (SBR) latex and emulsifiers. The emulsion
shall be pump able and suitable for use in slurry seal mixing and spreading
equipment and suitable for application through a distributor truck. The
emulsion shall contain a minimum of one percent (1.0%) up to three percent
(3.0%) by weight of styrene-butadiene rubber (SBR) polymer solids based on
weight of residual asphalt. The percentage of polymer used will be
determined by the type of application and traffic volume. The polymer shall
be added as SBR latex by high shear mixing by co-milling or post-milling.
The emulsified asphalt shall conform to the following requirements:
27.02.2.01.1 Tests on Emulsion
TABLE 27.02.2.01.1
SLURRY SEAL EMULSION TEST REQUIREMENTS
Min Max Test Method
Viscosity, Saybolt Furol, 77°F, s 50 ASTM D88
A
Storage stability test, 24-h, % 1 ASTM D244 (§ 82 to 88)
Particle charge test positive ASTM D244 (§ 28 to 33)
A
Sieve test, % 0.1 ASTM D244 (§ 58 to 63)
B
Distillation : 60 20
Residue, % ASTM D244 (§ 11 to 15)
Polymer Content, % (Supplier Certification)

27.02.2.01.2 Tests on Residue The following test shall be completed on emulsion
residue from oven evaporation test (ASTM D244 § 21 to 27) B:
TABLE 27.02.2.01.2
SLURRY SEAL RESIDUE TEST REQUIREMENTS
Min Max Test Method
Penetration, 77°F, 100g, 5s 40 90 ASTM D5
Penetration, 77°F, 100g, 5s 40 ASTM D113
Solubility in trichloroethylene, % 97.5 ASTM D113
Solubility in trichloroethylene, % 40 ASTM D113
A This test requirement on representative samples is waived if successful
application of the material has been achieved in the field.
B Distillation to 500°F (D244 §11 to 15) shall be the reference method for
percent distillate and percent residue. Residue by evaporation at 325°F
(D244 §21 to 27) shall be the reference method to obtain material for tests
on residue. Residue from distillation shall not be used for tests on residue
due to polymer degradation at 500°F.
27.02.2.01.3 Emulsion Storage Suitable storage facilities and containers for the
asphalt emulsion shall be provided and shall be equipped to prevent
water from entering the emulsion. If necessary, suitable heat shall be
provided to prevent freezing.
27.02.2.02 Aggregate The mineral aggregate shall be washed, hard, durable, clean rock
and free from coatings or deleterious material, and clay balls. All of the
aggregate shall be crushed gray granite with 100% fractured faces. The
aggregate shall have a loss of no greater than 20% when tested with the LA
Abrasion procedure as defined by ASTM C131, grade C or D. Only one type
of aggregate shall be used and shall conform to the following gradations. The
aggregate shall be gray in color.
Oversized granular material and or the presence of clay balls will require the
project to be stopped. The total aggregate, including mineral filler, shall be
tested and conform to the following requirements:
TABLE 27.02.2.02
AGGREGATE SPECIFICATIONS
Aggregate Sampling ASTM D75
Unit Weight of Aggregate; 0-5% moisture by
ASTM C29
Rodding Procedure
Gradation ASTM C136 & ASTM C117
Resistance to Degradation ASTM C131 20% maximum loss
Soundness of Aggregate ASTM C88 15% maximum loss

A
Sand Equivalent Value ASTM C2419 60 minimum

A. The reference method for preparation of the sample shall be as follows:
The aggregate shall be oven dried at 140°F to a constant weight and
allowed to cool to room temperature. Two percent (2.0%) of water
based on weight of the aggregate shall be mixed with the aggregate and
the aggregate-water mixture shall be sealed in a moisture proof and
water proof container for a minimum of 24 hours. Complete using
ASTM D2419 Procedure B.
27.02.2.02.1 Aggregate Gradation Requirements for target mix design based on

the Slurry Type specified.
TABLE 27.02.2.02.1
SLURRY SEAL AGGREGATE GRADATION
TYPE I TYPE II TYPE III
SIEVE SIZE % PASSING % PASSING % PASSING Stockpile Tolerances
3/8” 100 100 100 0
¼” 100 100 90-100 0
No.4 100 90-100 70-90 +/- 4%
No.8 90-100 65-90 45-70 +/- 4%
No.16 65-90 45-70 28-50 +/- 4%
No.30 40-65 30-50 19-34 +/- 4%
No.50 25-42 18-36 12-25 +/- 4%
No.100 15-30 10-24 7-18 +/- 3%
No.200* 10-20 5-15 5-15 +/- 2%
*Materials finer than No. 200 sieve will be determined by washing.
Aggregates used on the job site shall be within the specifications and
within the stockpile tolerance of the aggregate used in the mix design.
27.02.2.02.2 Mineral Filler Mineral fillers, such as Portland cement, limestone dust,
lime, and fly ash shall be considered as part of the blended aggregate,
and shall be used in the amount required. They shall meet the gradation
requirements of ASTM D242. Mineral fillers shall be used for one or
more of the following reasons only: to improve the gradation of the
aggregate; to control the time of break of the emulsion; to provide
improved stability and workability of the slurry; or to increase the
durability of the cured slurry. (Use only materials as specified in the
mix design)
27.02.2.02.3 Stockpiling of Aggregate Precautions shall be taken to insure that

stockpiles are carefully mixed just prior to use to insure uniform
distribution of the moisture, and that they do not become contaminated
with over-sized seed rock, clay, silt, or excessive amounts of moisture.
The stockpile shall be kept in areas that drain readily. Segregation of the
aggregate will not be permitted. If oversize material is present,

screening through a ¼” screen will be required prior to delivery to the
slurry machine.
27.02.2.03 Water All water used in making the slurry shall be potable and free of
dissolved materials that may affect the mix characteristics or finished
characteristics of the product. The effect of moisture content on the
specific weight of the aggregate, and the moisture content of the
aggregate being used, shall be taken into account in calibrating the
machine to deliver asphalt in the correct proportion.
27.02.2.04 Additives Additives may be used to accelerate or retard the break-set of the
slurry seal or to improve the resulting finished surface. The use of the
additives in the slurry mix (or individual materials) shall be made initially in
quantities predetermined by the mix design with adjustments if required, after
approval by the Engineer.
27.02.2.05 Laboratory Testing Sources of all materials shall be selected and

identified. All materials shall be pre-tested by a qualified laboratory as to
their suitability for use in slurry and conformance with project specifications.
For materials placed by contract, Contractor shall be responsible for
compliance with this section at Contractor’s expense.
27.02.2.06 Laboratory Report The laboratory report shall show the results of tests
performed on the individual materials, comparing their values to those
required by this specification. The report shall provide the following
information:
TABLE 27.02.2.06
REQUIRED LABORATORY REPORT INFORMATION
Wet Track Abrasion Test - 6 day soak* 75g/ft² max ISSA T100
Sand Adhesion by Loaded Wheel Tester 50g/ft² max ISSA T109
Asphalt Content (based on dry aggregate) 7.5% - 13.5% ISSA A105
Determination of Emulsion Content by Graphical Method ISSA T111
*1 hour soak test not allowed as a substitute
27.02.2.07 Mix Design Submittals

27.02.2.07.1 General Before work commences, a mix design, signed and stamped
by a Professional Engineer licensed to practice Civil Engineering,
covering the specific materials to be used shall be submitted to the
Project Manager. This design shall be prepared by an independent

laboratory qualified in slurry seal mix design and testing. Once the
materials are selected, no substitution will be permitted unless first
tested and approved by the laboratory preparing the mix design. The
report shall include the laboratory testing results and laboratory reports
per Sections 27.02.5 and 27.02.6.
27.02.2.07.2 Mix Design The qualified laboratory shall develop the job mix design
and present certified test results to the Project Manager. Compatibility
of the aggregate and emulsion shall be verified by the mix design. All
component materials used in the mix design shall be representative of
the material proposed for use on the project.
27.02.2.07.2.01 Specifications The Project Manager shall review the design

mix and all materials and methods prior to use. The component
materials shall be within the following limits.
TABLE 27.02.2.07.2.01
COMPONENT MATERIAL MIX LIMITS
Type I: 10 - 16%
Type II: 7. 5 - 13.5%
Residual Asphalt
Type III: 6.5 - 12%
(Based on dry weight of aggregate)
Mineral Filler 0% to 3% by dry weight of aggregate
Additive As required to provide the specified properties
As required to produce proper mix consistency.
Water (Total mix liquids should not exceed the loose aggregate voids.
ISSA T106 shall be used to check optimum liquids.)
27.02.2.07.2.02 Trial Mix Characteristics A sufficient number of variations

of the mix design shall be shown to provide the applicator with
an indication of the effects of changing filler rate, additive rate,
etc.
TABLE 27.02.2.07.2.02
TRIAL MIX CHARACTERISTICS
Mix Characteristics No excess free liquids in mix
ISSA T113/3.5
No excessively dry or stiff mix
Mix Time at 77°F 180 seconds minimum ISSA T113/3.6
Mix Time at 100°F 120 seconds minimum ISSA T113/3.6
Set Time at 77°F
Displacement 30 minutes maximum ISSA T113/3.7
Clear blot 30 minutes maximum ISSA T113/3.8

Cured Trial Mix Evaluation (24hr-77°F cured mix from ISSA T113/3.6 -
30 second mix)
A sufficient number of variations shall be shown to provide the
applicator with an indication of the effects of changing filler rate,
additive rate, etc.
TABLE 27.02.2.07.2.02.1
CURED TRIAL MIX EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS
No tackiness
Surface Examination ISSA T113/4.1
No shininess
Fines Flotation No fines flotation ISSA T113/4.2
95% minimum coating, all size particles securely
Internal Adhesion ISSA T113/4.3
held in mix, asphalt/aggregate segregation
Wet Stripping Test modified to a 10 minute boiling period

(ISSA T114) (24hr 77°F cured mix from ISSA T113/3.6 - 30
second mix)
A sufficient number of variations shall be shown to provide the
applicator with an indication of the effects of changing filler rate,
additive rate, etc.
TABLE 27.02.2.07.2.02.2
WET STRIPPING REQUIREMENTS
Coated aggregate ISSA T114 95% minimum coating
Integrity report: solid, broken, crumbly, etc.

Cohesion Values at 77°F ISSA T139 30 min
12 minimum
60 min (report this value)
2 hr (report this value)
4 hr (report this value)
24 hr solid spin (26 in-lb)
27.02.2.07.3 Job Mix Recommendation and Comments The laboratory shall

calculate the minimum slurry application rate for large stone embedment
based on measured maximum aggregate size retained on #4 sieve and
bulk dry density by rodding procedure.
The laboratory shall report the quantitative effects of moisture content

on the unit weight of the aggregate (bulking effect). The laboratory
report must clearly show the proportions of aggregate, mineral filler
(min. and max.), water (min. and max.), additive(s) (usage), and asphalt
based on the dry aggregate weight.

A complete laboratory analysis and test report accompanied by abraded
and unabraded slurry test samples shall be submitted to the Project
Manager a minimum of two weeks prior to use. The Project Manager
shall be allowed to observe all testing.
27.02.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS

27.02.3.01 Public Notice Public notification shall comply with Section 27.01. When
slurry seal work is performed by contract, Contractor shall be responsible for
compliance with all requirements for public notification.
27.02.3.02 Work Limitations In addition to the limitations in Section 27.01, slurry

shall not be applied when any of the following weather conditions exist:
When there is any danger the finished product will freeze before it
cures completely.
When the pavement and/or air temperature is 55 F or below.
When precipitation is possible prior to complete cure of the mix.
In the period following precipitation while puddles of water remain on
the surface to be coated.
Slurries that cure by evaporation shall not be placed during periods of

abnormally high humidity, or when precipitation may fall within a few
hours of placement.
27.02.3.03 Equipment
27.02.3.03.1 General All equipment, tools, and machines used in the performance
of this work shall be maintained in satisfactory working order at all
times. Any equipment found to be defective and potentially affecting
the quality of the slurry application shall be replaced.
27.02.3.03.2 Slurry Mixing Equipment The slurry mixing machine shall be a

double shafted continuous flow mixing unit, capable of delivering
accurate predetermined proportions of aggregate, water, and asphalt
emulsion to a revolving spiraled multi-blade mixer tank, and of
discharging the thoroughly-mixed product on a continuous basis. The
aggregate shall be pre-wetted immediately prior to mixing with the
emulsion. The mixing unit shall be capable of thoroughly blending all
ingredients together without violent action. The mixing machine shall

be equipped with suitable means of accurately metering each individual
material being fed into the mixer. The units shall be equipped with
approved devices so that the machine can be accurately calibrated and
the quantities of materials used during any one period estimated. The
mixing machine shall be equipped with a water pressure system, and fog
type spray bar adequate for completely fogging the surface with up to
0.055 gallons per square yard (depending on conditions and as directed
by the Project Manager), immediately ahead of the spreading equipment.
The machine shall be capable of mixing materials at preset proportions
regardless of the speed of the machine engine, and without changing
machine settings.
27.02.3.03.3 Proportioning Devices Individual volume or weight controls for

proportioning each material to be added to the mix, i.e., aggregate,
mineral filler, emulsified asphalt, and water shall be provided and
properly marked. These proportioning devices are usually revolution
counters, gate valves, or similar devices and are used in material
calibration and regulating of materials output.
27.02.3.03.4 Slurry Spreading Equipment The spreader box shall be equipped

to prevent loss of slurry seal from all sides and with a flexible rear
strike-off. It shall have mechanical mixing augers in both the front and
rear of the box. It shall be capable of producing a uniform surface along
its full width. It shall have suitable means for side tracking to
compensate for deviations in pavement geometry. Any type of drag
used shall be approved by the Engineer and kept in a completely flexible
condition at all times. The box shall be kept clean and buildup of
asphalt and aggregate shall not be permitted.
27.02.3.03.5 Surface Preparation Equipment Suitable Power brooms, power

blowers, air compressors, and hand brooms for cleaning the base surface
and cracks therein shall be supplied.
27.02.3.03.6 Auxiliary Equipment Hand squeegees, shovels, and other equipment

necessary to perform this work shall be provided in suitable condition.

27.02.3.04 Surface Preparation
27.02.3.04.1 Tack Coat A tack coat will be required when the surface is extremely
dry and raveled, concrete, brick, or as otherwise determined by the
Project Manager.
When a tack coat is required, the tack coat shall consist of two part
emulsion, to two parts water. The emulsion to be used shall be the same
emulsion used for the specific surface treatment. Tack coat emulsion
shall be applied with an asphalt distributor capable of applying the tack
coat evenly across the pavement surface at a rate of 0.05 to 0.10 gallons
per square yard. The application rate shall range between 0.05 and 0.10
gallons of the diluted emulsion per square yard of surface area. Tack
shall be evenly distributed across the pavement surface. The tack coat
shall be allowed to break prior to application of the surface treatment.
The distributor, when not spreading, shall be parked so that the spray bar
or mechanism will not drip bituminous materials onto the surface of the
street, gutters or private property. During all applications, the surface of
adjacent structures shall be protected in such a manner as to prevent
their being spattered or marred. Any areas inaccessible to the distributor
shall be sprayed by hand. All sidewalks, gutters or other surfaces where
spatter is excessive, in the opinion of the Project Manager, shall be
immediately cleaned to the satisfaction of the Project Manager.
27.02.3.05 Application of Materials

27.02.3.05.1 Composition The amount of asphalt emulsion to be blended with the
aggregate shall be determined in the laboratory, subject to final
adjustment in the field to allow for absorption by the existing surface.
The amount of water added must be controlled accurately to insure
production of product that can be readily applied, yet remain a
completely stable slurry.

TABLE 27.02.3.05.1
MATERIAL APPLICATION RATES
SLURRY MIX TYPE LOCATION APPLICATION RATE
Parking Areas, Rural and low volume 2
Type I 8-12 lb/yd
Residential Streets
Residential and Low Volume Collector 2
Type II 16-20 lb/yd
Streets
2
Type III High Volume Collector and Arterial Streets 20-30 lb/yd
Proper water content shall be determined by an appropriate consistency

test on freshly made slurry using ISSA T 106 procedures.
27.02.3.05.1.01 Mix Stability The slurry mixture shall be sufficiently stable

during the entire mixing/spreading period so that premature
breaking of the material in the spreader box does not occur. The
mixture shall be homogenous during and following mixing and
spreading; it shall be free of excess water or emulsion and free of
segregation of the emulsion and aggregate fines from the coarse
aggregate. Total time of mixing, from introduction of emulsion
to spreading shall be two minutes or less.
27.02.3.05.1.02 Quantities For estimating purposes, the following proportions

and application rates are assumed:
Dry Aggregate Spread Rate 18 - 20 lb./SY

% Mineral Filler * 1.00%
% Asphalt Content * 8.0%
* By dry weight of aggregate
A test strip of 60 square yards shall be placed in the area

designated by the Project Manager. The test section shall be
placed using the same equipment and methods to be used on the
job. Slurry mixtures placed in test strips shall conform to design
mix with minor variations to obtain crack filling, bond to
pavement, and desired skid resistant texture. In the event the
materials do not meet the requirements for fluidity, non-
segregation, or surface texture, a new job mix shall be
formulated and tested. Work shall not proceed before approval
of a design mix, application rates, and acceptance of the test
strip.

27.02.3.05.2 Application of Slurry Mix
27.02.3.05.2.01 General The surface shall be fogged with water directly
preceding the spreader if required. The slurry mixture shall be of
the desired consistency as it leaves the mixer, and no additional
elements shall be added. A sufficient amount of slurry shall be
carried in all parts of the spreader at all times so that complete
coverage is obtained. No lumping, balling, or unmixed
aggregates shall be permitted. No segregation of the emulsion
and aggregate fines from the coarse aggregate will be permitted.
If the coarse aggregate settles to the bottom of the mix, the slurry
will be removed from the surface. No excessive breaking of the
emulsion will be allowed in the spreader box. No streaks, as
caused by oversized aggregate, will be left in the finished
pavement. Rippling of the finished surface is undesirable and
shall be minimized.
27.02.3.05.2.02 Joints No excessive build-up or unsightly appearance shall be

permitted on longitudinal or transverse joints. Burlap drags or
other type drags may be required at the discretion of the Project
Manager. When drags are used, they must be kept relatively
clean and free of excessive build-up. Joints shall be straight and
have a neat appearance.
27.02.3.05.2.03 Hand Work Approved squeegees shall be used to spread slurry

in areas not accessible to the slurry mixer. Every effort shall be
made to minimize segregation during hand work. Material shall
be placed as close to final position as practicable to reduce the
amount of hand work. Care shall be exercised as to leave a
pleasing appearance.
27.02.3.05.2.04 Lines Care shall be taken to insure straight lines along curbs,
shoulders, and joints. No runoff on these areas will be permitted.
Lines at intersections will be kept straight to provide a good
appearance. At no point shall the limits of the slurry mix be
spread greater than two inches beyond the lip of curb.
27.02.3.05.2.05 Curing Slurry surfacing shall be completed within a time frame

to allow opening of the roadway, parking lot, or other resurfaced

area within normal working hours, while providing sufficient
cure time. The goal is a 4 hour break time for traffic.
27.02.3.05.2.06 Machine Speed In order to minimize rippling, slurry

machines shall not be permitted to travel in excess of 220 ft/min.
This speed may be further reduced by the Project Manager if
excessive rippling of the surface, due to machine speed, occurs.
27.02.3.05.2.07 Rolling Slurry Seal shall be rolled by a self propelled, 10-ton

pneumatic roller with a tire pressure of 50 PSI (3.4 ATMS),
equipped with a water spray system. The surface areas shall be
subjected to a minimum of two (2) full coverage passes by the
roller. Rolling shall not commence until the slurry has cured
enough so that it will not pick up on the tires of the roller.
27.02.3.06 Manholes, Valve Boxes and Survey Monuments All shall be

protected as specified in Section 27.01
27.02.3.07 Quality Control In addition to the requirements of Section 27.01, samples

of materials and of the finished slurry surface shall be furnished as directed by
the Project Manager during progress of the work at no expense to the City.
Test reports shall be required as additional materials arrive. The Project
Manager will conduct testing as required during the project.
27.02.3.08 Storage Site Requirements On or near job site storage may be approved
by the Project Manager. Selected sites and permissions to use said sites shall
comply with Section 27.01.
27.02.3.09 Traffic Control All traffic control shall conform to Section 27.01.
27.02.4 BASIS OF PAYMENT The accepted quantities of slurry seal will be paid for at
the contract prices for the slurry seal mix used, which includes all material
components of the mix, including additives, and required testing for design, minus
any reduction for noncompliance with approved aggregate and emulsion application
rates. There will be no separate payment for additional additives used. Payment
shall include all equipment, labor, materials, overhead, incidentals, mobilization,
and traffic control required to complete the work as described in the specifications.
Application rates shall be set to match the approved mix design. The range of
acceptable aggregate, and emulsion rates are shown in Section 27.02.3.05 of this

specification. These ranges may be modified by the Project Manager but in no case
shall the ranges exceed plus or minus 10% of the application rates of the approved
mix design. At the conclusion of the project, emulsion, mineral filler and aggregate
tickets will be compared with the area of slurry seal placed to determine the average
coverage rates for the project. Any material delivery tickets in excess of the
maximum application rates will be subject to nonpayment. If the material delivery
tickets indicate that the average application rates were below the minimum
application rates, the final payment will be reduced as shown below:
TABLE 27.02.4
Amount Below Minimum Application Rate, Percentage Reduction in Final Payment
Aggregate or Emulsion for Aggregate or Emulsion
1–3% 10%
3 – 5% 15%
5 - 7% 20%
7 – 10% To be negotiated
10%+ No pay
Quantity run sheets of placed material shall be supplied to the Project Manager
daily.
Weight tickets for cover coat aggregate and gallons of CQS-1hL actually used on
the project shall be furnished to the Project Manager. Such tickets shall serve as a
check on the application rate. The Project Manager shall be notified prior to
delivery of materials so that a representative may be present to collect delivery
receipts. In lieu of the weight tickets for aggregate application rate verification,
Contractor may submit verified spread rates by calibration of equipment used. This
calibration shall be done at the start of the job and on a monthly basis or as directed
by the Project Manager.
Contractor is solely responsible for assuring proper spread rates by

means of equipment calibration submitted.
Quantities for payment will be calculated based on length and width of

roadway and approved application rate. Payment will be made under:
PAY ITEMS PAY UNIT

Slurry Seal Square Yard

27.03 CHIP SEAL
27.03.1 SCOPE This item shall consist of furnishing all labor, materials, and equipment
necessary to complete, in place, the application of polymerized emulsified asphalt
and a cover coat of aggregate to street surfaces.

27.03.2.01 Asphalt Emulsion Polymerized cationic rapid set emulsified asphalt
(CRS-2P), or equivalent, shall be an emulsified blend of polymerized asphalt,
water, emulsifiers, and polymer. The asphalt cement shall be polymer
modified prior to emulsification and shall contain a minimum of 3% styrene-
butadiene-styrene (SBS) block copolymer by weight of asphalt cement. The
emulsion, standing undisturbed for a minimum of 24 hours, shall show no
milky white separation, but shall be smooth and homogeneous throughout.
The emulsion shall be pump able and suitable for application through a
distributor truck. The CRS-2P shall conform to the following specifications.
27.03.2.01.1 Tests on Emulsion

TABLE 27.03.2.01.1
CHIP SEAL EMULSION TEST REQUIREMENTS
Emulsion Test Minimum Maximum Test Method
Viscosity, Saybolt Furol, 122 F,s 80 400 ASTM D88
Storage Stability Test, 24-h,%(a) 1 ASTM D244
Demulsibility, 36 ML, 0.8% dioctyl sodium
40 ASTM D244
Sulfosuccinate, % (c)
Particle Charge Test Positive ASTM D244
Sieve Test, %(a) 0.1 ASTM D244
Distillation: (b) ASTM D244
Oil Distillate, by Volume of Emulsion, % 3 ASTM D244
Residue, % 60 ASTM D244
a) This test requirement on representative samples is waived if successful
b) Residue by evaporation at 325 F shall be the reference method to obtain
material for tests on reside. Residue from distillation shall not be used for
tests on residue due to polymer degradation at 500 F.

27.03.2.01.2 Tests on Residue
TABLE 27.03.2.01.2
CHIP SEAL RESIDUE TEST REQUIREMENTS
Residue Test
Penetration, 77 F, 100g, 5s 70 150 ASTM D5
Ductility, 77 F, 5 cm/min, cm 75 ASTM D113
Ductility, 39.5 F, 5 cm/min, cm 25 ASTM D113
Solubility in Trichloroethylene, % 97.5 ASTM D2042
Toughness, in-lb 70 ASTM D5801
Tenacity, in-lb 45 ASTM D5801
Elastic Recovery, 77 F, 10cm,1h,% 80 ASTM D5976
c) This test requirement on representative samples is waived if successful
d) Residue by evaporation at 325 F shall be the reference method to obtain
material for tests on reside. Residue from distillation shall not be used for
tests on residue due to polymer degradation at 500 F.
e) The Demulsibility test shall be made within 30 days from the date of
shipment
f) Distillation shall be determined by AASHTO test T 59, oven evaporation
method.
g) The asphalt cement shall be polymerized prior to emulsification.
h) Contractor shall supply samples for testing upon request of the City.
i) The material shall be accepted at the distributor.
A one-quart sample of the final emulsion shall be submitted upon

request. The source of the base asphalt, polymer, additives, and supplier
shall be stated on the sample and shall not change during the course of
construction.
27.03.2.01.3 Emulsion Storage Suitable storage facilities and containers for the
asphalt emulsion shall be provided and shall be equipped to prevent
water from entering the emulsion. If necessary, suitable heat shall be
provided to prevent freezing.
27.03.2.02 Aggregate Cover Coat Material (Chip Seal) The chip, or aggregate
cover coat, shall be washed, hard, durable, clean rock and free from coatings
or deleterious material and clay balls. The presence of oversized material
and/or clay balls shall be grounds for the project to be stopped. All of the
aggregate shall be crushed gray granite with 100% fractured faces. The
of aggregate shall be used and shall conform to the following gradations. The
aggregate shall be gray in color.

27.03.2.02.1 Gradation The total cover aggregate shall be tested and conform to the
following gradation:
TABLE 27.03.2.02.1
CHIP SEAL AGGREGATE GRADATION
Sieve Size ½” Chip Seal 3/8” Chip Seal ¼” Chip Seal
¾” 100 100 100
5/8” 100 100 100
½” 95-100 100 100
3/8” 0-60 95-100 100
¼” 0-10 0-35 95-100
No. 8 0-3 0-3 0-3
No. 200 0-1.2 0-1.2 0-1.2
27.03.2.02.2 Bituminous Film When tested in accordance with (ASTM D 1664),

the aggregate shall have a retained bituminous film above 95%.
Aggregates that do not meet this requirement may be used for surface
treatments and seal coats provided a satisfactory chemical additive or
wetting agent is used to provide a water-resistant film. Use of chemical
additives or wetting agents is subject to prior approval by the Project
Manager.
27.03.2.02.3 Moisture Content The cover coat material shall be moistened with
water to eliminate or reduce any dust coating of the aggregate. This will
eliminate surface tension between the aggregate and the emulsified oil
which improves the bond. The moisture content of the cover aggregate
at the time of application shall not exceed 2% of the weight of dry
aggregate.
27.03.2.02.4 Stockpiling of Aggregate Precautions shall be taken to insure that

stockpiles are carefully mixed just prior to use to insure uniform
distribution of the moisture, and that they do not become contaminated
with over-sized seed rock, clay, silt, or excessive amounts of moisture.
The stockpile shall be kept in areas that drain readily. If oversize
material is present, screening will be required prior to delivery to the
spreader.
27.03.2.03 Laboratory Testing Sources of all materials shall be selected and

identified. All materials shall be pre-tested by a qualified laboratory as to
their suitability for use in chip seal and conformance with project

specifications. For materials placed by contract, Contractor shall be
responsible for compliance with this section at Contractor’s expense.
27.03.2.04 Laboratory Report The laboratory report shall show the results of tests
performed on the individual materials, comparing their values to those
required by this specification.

27.03.3.01 Public Notice Public notification shall comply with Section 27.01. When
chip seal work is performed by contract, Contractor shall be responsible for
compliance with all requirements for public notification.
27.03.3.02 Work Limitations In addition to the work limitations specified in Section

27.01, no construction of a chip seal application shall occur when either the
ambient or pavement surface temperature fall below the table below or when
the pavement is moist or when the weather is or may be detrimental.
Detrimental weather is defined as rain showers, cool temperatures, moist
pavements, threat of rain showers, or other environmental factors which could
affect the performance of the chip seal. Emulsion application rate shall be
adjusted accordingly, depending on current temperatures within the material
application specifications.
TABLE 27.03.3.02
CHIP SEAL TEMPERATURE LIMITATIONS
TEMPERATURE 1/2” Chipseal 3/8” Chipseal ¼” Chipseal
Surface Temperature (minimum) >65 F >65 F >60 F
Ambient Temperature (daily high) >70 F >70 F >65 F
27.03.3.03 EQUIPMENT
27.03.3.03.1 General The size and condition of all equipment shall be approved
prior to construction. Should any equipment be unsatisfactory for
whatever cause, the equipment shall be removed and replaced without
delay or cost. The equipment shall conform to the following minimum
requirements.
27.03.3.03.2 Bituminous Distributor: A minimum of two (2) like distributors

shall be used. The distributors shall be self-powered and capable of
providing a uniform application rate of emulsion varying from .05-1.00
gallons per square yard over a variable width up to twenty feet in a

single pass. The uniformity of the distributors shall not vary by more
than two-hundredths (0.02) gallons per square yard. The distributors
shall be equipped with a variable power unit for the pump and full
circulation spray bars, which are adjustable laterally and vertically. The
nozzle angle and bar height shall be set to provide one hundred percent
of double coverage in a single pass. Where multiple passes are required
to complete the full width, the four inches adjacent to the second pass
may be left with fifty percent coverage so that the next pass will
complete the full application rate specified. Distributors shall be self-
powered and include computerized application controls, a tachometer,
pressure gauges, accurate volume devices, calibrated tank, and a
thermometer for measuring temperatures of the emulsion in the tank.
Necessary precautionary measures shall be taken to prevent diesel fuel
or other cleaning solvents from contaminating bituminous material.
27.03.3.03.3 Aggregate Spreader The aggregate spreader shall be self-propelled

and supported by at least four tires on two axles capable of providing a
uniform application rate of aggregate from five to fifty pounds per
square yard over a variable width up to twenty feet in a single pass. The
uniformity of this machine shall not vary by more than one pound per
square yard. The aggregate spreader shall be equipped with the means
of applying the cover coat material to the surface with computerized
application controls so that the required amount of material will be
deposited uniformly over the full width of the bituminous material. A
computerized rate control aggregate spreader shall be required. Other
types of aggregate spreaders may be used provided they accomplish
equivalent results and are previously approved.
27.03.3.03.4 Rollers A minimum of two (2) rubber-tired rollers shall be used on the
project unless otherwise requested by the Project Manager. The
pneumatic tired rollers shall be self-propelled and the gross load
adjustable to apply 200 to 350 pounds per inch of rolling width, as
directed. Tire pressures or contact pressures may be specified for the
pneumatic tire rollers. Tire pressures on each roller shall not vary more
than plus or minus 2.0 psi. The wheels on the rollers shall be equipped
with adjustable scrapers, which shall be used when necessary to clean
the wheel surface. Depending on the speed of the chip seal operation
and the width of coverage, additional rollers may be required. At no

time shall the rollers travel more than ten miles per hour. The rollers
shall be maintained in good condition and be operated by experienced
roller operators.
27.03.3.03.5 Sweepers A rotary broom or other approved sweeping or blowing

equipment meeting applicable U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
Standards shall be used to windrow excess material to be picked up. A
minimum of two (2) vacuum designed sweepers having only negative air
pressure at the road surface capable of removing excess aggregate and
debris material shall be used on this project. The body hoppers of the
vacuum sweepers shall have a minimum capacity of ten cubic yards, and
the negative air pressure at the intake shall be rated at forty six inches of
negative water pressure. Sweepers shall meet applicable U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency Standards. No mechanical pick-up
brooms will be allowed on the project.
27.03.3.04 SURFACE PREPARATION All surface preparations and cleaning shall be

covered in Accordance with Section 27.01.
27.03.3.05 APPLICATION OF MATERIALS

27.03.3.05.1 General The specific emulsion and cover aggregate application rate
shall be determined using factors such as surface temperature, traffic
volume, existing road condition, and time of year. The application rate
may be modified at any time during the course of the construction upon
approval by the Project Manager. The following table provides general
application rates.
TABLE 27.03.3.05.1
CHIP SEAL MATERIAL APPLICATION RATES
Material ½” Chip 3/8” Chip ¼” Chip
CRS-2P-Chipseal 0.40-0.45 Gal/SY 0.35-0.40 Gal/SY 0.29-0.33 Gal/SY
CRS-2P-Fogseal 0.12 Gal/SY min 0.11 Gal/SY min 0.10 Gal/SY min
Aggregate 24lbs./SY min 22lbs/SY min 20lbs/SY min
Test Section - A 200 square yard test section shall be placed to

determine actual application rates of aggregates and emulsion.
27.03.3.05.2 Emulsion Application Bituminous material shall be applied by

means of a pressure distributor in a uniform, continuous spread over the
section to be treated and within the temperature range of 125 -185º F.
The quantity of bituminous material to be used per square yard shall be

as specified. The distributor shall be moving forward at the proper
application speed at the time the spray bar is opened. If the cut-off is not
positive, the use of paper may be required at the end of each spread. The
paper shall be disposed of in a lawful manner. Any skipped areas or
deficiencies shall be corrected. Junctions of spreads shall be carefully
made to assure a smooth riding surface.
The length of spread of bituminous material shall not be in excess of that

which trucks loaded with cover coat material can immediately cover.
The spread of bituminous material shall not be more than four (4) inches
wider than the width covered with aggregate from the spreading device
and shall not spread onto the concrete gutter pan. Under no
circumstances shall operations proceed in such a manner that the
bituminous material be allowed to chill, set up, dry or otherwise impair
retention of the cover coat. Application rate shall be sufficient to
prevent streaked appearance in the final surface.
The distributor, when not spreading, shall be parked so that the spray bar
or mechanism does not drip bituminous materials onto the surface of the
street, gutters or private property. During all applications, the surface of
adjacent structures shall be protected in such a manner as to prevent
their being spattered or marred. Any areas inaccessible to the distributor
shall be sprayed by hand. All sidewalks, gutters or other surfaces where
spatter is excessive, in the opinion of the Project Manager, shall be
immediately cleaned to the satisfaction of the Project Manager.
27.03.3.05.3 Aggregate Application Immediately following the application of

bituminous material, aggregate cover material shall be spread in
quantities as designated. Spreading shall be accomplished in such a
manner that the tires of the trucks or aggregate spreader at no time
contact the uncovered and newly applied bituminous material. The
aggregate shall not be applied in such a thickness as to cause blanketing.
If directed by the Project Manager, the cover coat material shall be

moistened with water, not to exceed 2% by weight, to eliminate or
reduce the dust coating of the aggregate; however, excess dust will be a
cause for rejection of the aggregate. Immediately after the cover coat is
spread, any deficient areas shall be covered by additional material.

27.03.3.05.4 Armor Coat (Fog Seal) Application Three days after the
application of the chip seal, or as directed by the Project Manager, all
excess aggregate shall be swept from the roadway and adjacent areas
and then a fog seal of diluted CRS-2P applied to all areas chip sealed.
The CRS-2P emulsion shall be diluted 40 percent with water. The
application rate shall comply with the minimums in the table above or as
deemed necessary by the Project Manager.
27.03.3.06 Rolling Rolling shall begin with a minimum of two self-propelled,

pneumatic-tired rollers. Rolling shall proceed in a longitudinal direction,
beginning at the outer edges of application and working toward the center.
Each pass shall overlap the previous pass by one-half of the width of the front
wheel or roll. There shall be a minimum of three (3) passes with the
pneumatic-tired rollers over the entire surface prior to moving ahead. One
pass will be considered the number of trips to cover the entire surface from
one side of the street to the other and for the length being worked. The first
rolling of the aggregate shall be made before the asphalt emulsion breaks
(roller shall complete the first rolling within approximately two and one-half
(2 ½) minutes of the emulsion spray application). In no event shall traffic be
allowed on the treated surface until all rolling has been completed.
27.03.3.07 Sweeping After the application of the cover coat material excess material
shall be removed from the entire surface, sidewalks and adjacent streets by
means of approved brooms and or street sweepers within 24 hours. Excess
aggregate that is clean may be stockpiled and re-used in subsequent locations
at the discretion of the Project Manager. The Project Manager may reject
aggregate that has been previously applied by visual observation of the
stockpile.
27.03.3.08 Manholes, Valve Boxes and Survey Monuments Locating, protecting

and cleaning for manholes, valve boxes, survey monuments, etc. shall
conform to Section 27.01.
27.03.3.09 Quality Control In addition to the requirements of Section 27.01, samples

of materials and of the finished chip seal surface shall be furnished as directed
by the Project Manager during progress of the work at no expense to the City.
Test reports shall be required as additional materials arrive. The Project
Manager will conduct testing as required during the project.

27.03.3.10 STORAGE SITE REQUIREMENTS On or near job site storage may be
approved by the Project Manager. Selected sites and permissions to use said
sites shall comply with Section 27.01.
27.03.3.11 TRAFFIC CONTROL In addition to the requirements of Section 27.01, 4x4

warning signs shall be provided, posted and maintained for a period of seven
(7) days at the beginning of chip sealed streets and at 1,500 foot intervals in
both directions. The signs shall warn drivers to slow down, loose gravel and
shall be lighted. Temporary Raised Pavement Markers shall be installed as
needed and shall conform to the requirements in Section 27.01.
27.03.4 BASIS OF PAYMENT Chip seal will be measured and paid for by the square
yard of street surface properly sealed and accepted by the Project Manager. The
area for payment will be the measured width of the street from lip to lip of gutters
multiplied by the length of chip seal coat applied.
The unit price bid per square yard shall include furnishing, storing, weighing,
heating, hauling, distributing, rolling, maintaining the bituminous, cover coat
materials, all labor, equipment, tools, materials, and incidentals necessary to
complete the work in accordance with the plans and specifications, as directed by
the Project Manager.
The range of acceptable aggregate, and emulsion rates are shown in Section
27.03.3.06.1 of this specification. At the conclusion of the project, emulsion and
aggregate tickets will be compared with the area of chip seal placed to determine
the average coverage rates for the project. If the material delivery tickets indicate
that the average application rates were below the minimum application rates, the
final payment will be reduced as shown below:
TABLE 27.03.4
Amount Below Minimum Application Rate, Percentage Reduction in Final Payment
Aggregate or Emulsion for Aggregate or Emulsion
1–5% 10%
5 – 10% 20%
10%+ To be negotiated
Weight tickets for cover coat aggregate and gallons of CRS-2P actually used on the
project shall be furnished to the Project Manager. Such tickets shall serve as a

receipts. In lieu of the weight tickets for aggregate application rate verification
calibration is to be done at the start of the job and on a monthly basis or as directed
Contractor is solely responsible for assuring proper spread rates by means of

equipment calibration submitted.
PAY ITEMS PAY UNIT

Chip Seal Square Yard
27.04 CAPE SEAL

27.04.1 SCOPE This item shall consist of all labor, equipment, material, supplies, raised
markers, signage, traffic control, and other incidentals necessary to provide a Cape
Seal satisfactory to the Project Manager. The work shall consist of placing a
standard chip seal followed by an application of an additional cover coat of standard
slurry seal.
Chip seal and slurry seal layers of a cape seal application shall be paired as
indicated in the following table, unless otherwise approved by the Project Manager.
TABLE 27.04.1
CHIP SEAL AND SLURRY SEAL LAYERS
for
CAPE SEAL APPLICATION
Chip Seal Type Slurry Seal Type
¼” Aggregate Type I
3/8” Aggregate Type I or Type II
½” Aggregate Type II or Type III

27.04.2.01 Tack Coat A tack coat may be required by the Project Manager between the
existing surface and the chip seal layer or between the chip seal layer and the
slurry seal layer, or both. If a tack coat is required, the material, equipment
and application shall conform to Section 27.01.
27.04.2.02 Chip Seal Layer Materials used in the chip seal layer of a cape seal
application shall comply with all requirements of Section 27.03.2.

27.04.2.03 Slurry Seal Layer Materials used in the slurry seal layer of a cape seal
application shall comply with all requirements for Section 27.02.2.

27.01, no construction of a cape seal application shall occur when either the
affect the performance of the cape seal. Emulsion application rate shall be
adjusted accordingly depending on current temperatures within the material
TABLE 27.04.3.01
CAPE SEAL TEMPERATURE LIMITATIONS
TEMPERATURE 1/2” Cape Seal 3/8” Cape Seal ¼” Cape Seal
Surface Temperature (minimum) > 65 F > 65 F > 60 F
Ambient Temperature (daily high) > 70 F > 70 F > 65 F
27.04.3.02 Chip Seal Layer Construction of the chip seal layer of a cape seal
application shall comply with all requirements of Section 27.03.3 with the
following exceptions:
FOG SEAL – Application of a fog seal coat to the chip seal layer of a
cape seal application is not required.
MATERIAL APPLICATION RATES – Material application rates shall
be as specified below in Section 27.04.3.04.
27.04.3.03 Slurry Seal Layer Construction of the slurry seal layer of a cape seal
APPLICATION OF SLURRY MIX – In addition to the requirements of

Section 27.02.3, the slurry seal layer shall be applied within two weeks of
completion of the chip seal layer application. The chip seal surface shall
be broomed prior to application of the slurry seal layer in accordance with
Section 27.03.3.
MATERIAL APPLICATION RATES – Material application rates shall
be as specified below in Section 27.04.3.04.
WEATHER LIMITATIONS – Weather limitations shall be as specified
in Section 27.04.3.01.

27.04.3.04 Material Application Rates Specific emulsion an aggregate application
rates shall be determined using factors such as surface temperature, traffic
volume, existing road and weather conditions, and time of year. Application
rates may be altered at any time during the course of the work with approval
of the Project Manager. General application rates are as follows:
TABLE 27.04.3.04
CAPE SEAL MATERIAL APPLICATION RATES
Material 1/2" Chipseal 3/8" Chipseal 1/4" Chipseal
CRS-2P Chip seal Emulsion 0.40-0.45 Gal/SY 0.35-0.40 Gal/SY 0.29-0.33 Gal/SY
Cover Aggregate 24lbs./SY min 22lbs/SY min 20lbs/SY min
Type I Slurry N/A 8-12 lb/SY 8-12 lb/SY
Type II Slurry 16-20 lb/SY 16-20 lb/SY N/A
Type III Slurry 20-30 lb/SY N/A N/A
27.04.4 BASIS OF PAYMENT Cape seal will be measured and paid for by the square
multiplied by the length of cape seal applied.
27.04.3.04 of this specification. At the conclusion of the project, emulsion and
aggregate tickets will be compared with the area of cape seal placed to determine
the average coverage rates for the project. If the material delivery tickets indicate
that the average application rates were below the minimum application rates, the
final payment will be reduced as shown below:
TABLE 27.04.4
CAPE SEAL TABLE OF PRICE REDUCTION FACTORS
Amount Below Minimum Application Percentage Reduction in Final Payment
Rate, Aggregate or Emulsion for Aggregate or Emulsion
1–5% 10%
5 – 10% 20%

Weight tickets for cover coat aggregate and gallons of emulsion actually used on
receipts. In lieu of the weight tickets for aggregate application rate verification

PAY ITEMS PAY UNIT

Cape Seal Square Yard
27.05 HOT CHIP SEAL

27.05.1 SCOPE This work shall furnish all labor, equipment, material, supplies, raised
markers, signage, traffic control, and other incidentals necessary to provide a Hot
Chip Seal satisfactory to the Project Manager. The work shall consist of placing a
standard chip seal followed by an application of an additional cover coat material
(hot chip) placed by an asphalt paver.

27.05.2.01 Chip Seal Layer Materials used in the chip seal layer of a hot chip seal
27.05.2.02 Fog Seal A fog seal will be required by the Project Manager between the
chip seal layer and the hot chip seal layer.
27.05.2.03 Hot Chip Layer The aggregate of the hot chip seal layer of a hot chip
application shall consist of washed, hard, durable, clean rock and free from
coatings or deleterious material and clay balls. The presence of oversized
material and/or clay balls shall be grounds for the project to be stopped. All
of the aggregate shall be crushed gray granite with 100% fractured faces. The
of aggregate shall be used and shall conform to the gradations below.

The hot chip seal layer shall conform to the following gradations based on
percent passing. A mix design shall be submitted for approval that conforms
to the following:
TABLE 27.05.2.03
HOT CHIP SEAL AGGREAGATE GRADATION
Sieve Size ½” Cover Coat Material 3/8” Cover Coat Material
¾” 100 % 100 %
½” 90-100 % 100 %
3/8” 60-90 % 100 %
¼” N/A 25-60 %
No. 4 25-35 % 25-35 %
No. 8 15-25 % 15.25 %
No. 200 3-8 % 3-8 %
Asphalt Content (PG 64-22) 5.0 % to 5.5% 5.5% to 6.0%
Mix Design submittals shall conform to Section 24.04 of City of Aurora Roadway
Design & Construction Specifications.

27.01, no construction of a hot seal application shall occur when either the
affect the performance of the hot chip seal. Emulsion application rate shall be
adjusted accordingly depending on current temperatures within the material
TABLE 27.05.3.01
HOT CHIP SEAL TEMPERATURE LIMITATIONS
TEMPERATURE 1/2” Hot Chip 3/8” Hot Chip
Surface Temperature (minimum) 50 F 50 F
Ambient Temperature (daily high) 60 F 60 F
27.05.3.02 Chip Seal Layer Construction of the chip seal layer of a hot chip
application shall comply with all requirements of Section 27.03.3 with the
following exceptions:
MATERIAL APPLICATION RATES – Material application rates shall be as

specified below in Section 27.05.3.03.

WEATHER LIMITATIONS – Weather limitations shall be as specified in Section
27.05.3.01.
27.05.3.03 Hot Chip Seal Layer

27.05.3.03.1 Public Notice All notification measures shall comply with Section
27.01.
27.05.3.03.2 Quantities of Materials Application rates of hot chip layer materials

used in a hot chip seal application shall be as specified below in Section
27.05.3.04.
27.05.3.03.3 Work Limitations In addition to the requirements of Section 27.01,

hot chip layer material shall not be applied on a wet surface, or when the
air temperature is below 50º F or the pavement temperature is below 50º
F, unless otherwise specified, or when weather conditions would prevent
the proper construction of the hot chip layer.
27.05.3.03.4 EQUIPMENT
27.05.3.03.4.01 General The size and condition of all equipment shall be
approved prior to construction. All equipment deemed
unsatisfactory by the Project Manager, for whatever cause, shall
be removed and replaced without delay or cost. The equipment
shall conform to the following minimum requirements.
27.05.3.03.4.02 Asphalt Paver The hot chip seal shall be placed by a type of
paver used for the placement of hot asphalt material. The paver
shall be self-contained, power propelled units provided with an
adjustable activated screed, heated and capable of spreading and
finishing course material on variable widths of surface up to 18
feet.
27.05.3.03.4.03 Rollers A minimum of two steel wheel rollers will be used to

seat the Hot Chipseal. The steel drum rollers shall be double
drum rollers with a loaded rate of five tons. At no time shall the
rollers travel more than ten miles per hour.
27.05.3.03.4.04 Sweepers A minimum of two vacuum designed sweepers

having only negative air pressure at the road surface capable of
removing excess aggregate and debris material shall be used on

this project. The body hoppers of the vacuum sweepers shall be
a minimum capacity of ten cubic yards, and the negative air
pressure at the intake shall be rated at forty six inches of negative
water pressure. Sweepers shall meet applicable U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency Standards. No mechanical
pick-up brooms will be allowed on the project.
27.05.3.03.5 Surface Preparation The street shall be swept and cleaned before
hot chip seal applications. The surface and gutter shall be cleaned and
all debris removed for the full width to be treated immediately prior to
application of the bituminous material. Dust and other material in
depressions or other places not removed by mechanical sweepers shall
be swept with hand brooms or removed by use of flushers. The Project
Manager may require washing of the pavement where other methods of
cleaning do not provide an acceptable surface. Material removed from
the surface shall not be mixed with the cover aggregate. Bituminous
material shall not be spread until the area to receive chip seal application
has been cleaned to the satisfaction and approval of the Project Manager.
All vegetation shall be removed from the surface to be sealed prior to

any hot chip seal placement. Vegetation shall be removed no earlier
than two weeks prior to application of the hot chip seal layer. Any dead
or remaining vegetation shall be removed before sweeping and applying
the hot chip seal layer. Vegetation may be removed by burning when in
the opinion of the Project Manager such burning causes no safety hazard
or air pollution nuisance.
27.05.3.03.6 Application of Hot Chip Seal Layer The hot chip seal layer shall
be applied within two weeks of the chip seal layer application and after
the loose material has been swept up. The hot chip seal material shall
have a minimum temperature of 275 F. The hot chip seal shall be
applied over the entire chip seal surface and struck off to the established
grade and proper elevation. Application rate of this material shall be as
specified in Section 27.05.3.04
A minimum of two steel wheel rollers making two or more passes shall
follow immediately to seat and cool the material.

27.05.3.03.7 QUALITY CONTROL The hot chip seal layer of a hot chip seal
application shall conform to testing and inspection requirements of
Section 24.15 of City of Aurora Roadway Specifications.
27.05.3.03.8 MANHOLES, VALVE BOXES AND SURVEY MONUMENTS

Manholes, valve boxes and survey monuments in the area of the hot chip
seal layer shall be protected and cleaned in Accordance with Section
27.01.
27.05.3.03.9 TRAFFIC CONTROL All traffic control for application of the hot
chip seal layer of a hot chip seal application shall comply with Section
27.01.
27.05.3.04 Application of Materials Specific emulsion and aggregate application

rates shall be determined using factors such as surface temperature, traffic
volume, existing road and weather conditions, and time of year. Application
rates may be altered at any time during the course of the work with approval
of the Project Manager. General application rates are as follows:
TABLE 27.05.3.04
HOT CHIP SEAL MATERIAL APPLICATION RATES
Material 1/2" Chipseal 3/8" Chipseal
CRS-2P Chipseal .30-.40 Gal/SY .28-.34 Gal/SY
Cover Coat Aggregate 22 – 28 lbs/SY 20 - 26 lbs/SY
Hot Chip seal 85 lbs/SY Minimum 75 lbs/SY Minimum
27.05.4 BASIS OF PAYMENT Hot chip seal will be measured and paid for by the square
multiplied by the length of hot chip seal applied.
27.05.3.04 of this specification. These ranges may be modified by the Project
Manager but in no case shall the ranges exceed plus or minus 10% of the
application rates of the approved mix design. At the conclusion of the project,

emulsion and aggregate tickets will be compared with the area of hot chip seal
placed to determine the average coverage rates for the project. If the material
delivery tickets indicate that the average application rates were below the minimum
application rates, the final payment will be reduced as shown below:
TABLE 27.05.4
HOT CHIP SEAL TABLE OF PRICE REDUCTION FACTORS
Amount Below Minimum Application Percentage Reduction in Final
Rate, Aggregate or Emulsion Payment for Aggregate or Emulsion
1–5% 10%
5 – 10% 20%
Weight tickets for cover coat aggregate and gallons of emulsion actually used on
receipts. In lieu of the weight tickets for aggregate application rate verification,
by the Project Manager. Weight tickets for hot chip material placement are
required for payment.

PAY ITEMS PAY UNIT

Chip Seal Layer Square Yard
Hot Chip Seal Layer Square Yard
27.06 CRACK SEAL

27.06.1 SCOPE The intent of this specification is to specify materials and methods used
for crack filling existing pavement surfaces throughout the City of Aurora. This
work shall furnish all labor, equipment, material, supplies, raised markers, signage,
traffic control, and other incidentals necessary to provide and place crack seal
material satisfactory to the Project Manager. All work and materials shall be in
accordance with the requirements of these specifications.

27.06.2 MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS Hot poured crack sealant shall conform to the
requirements of ASTM D3405. Crack sealant material shall be supplied pre-
blended, pre-reacted, and prepackaged. If supplied in solid form the sealant
material shall be cast in a plastic or other dissolvable liner having the capability of
becoming part of the crack sealing liquid. The sealant shall be delivered in the
manufacturer’s original sealed container. Each container shall be legibly marked
with the manufacturer’s name, the trade name of the sealer, the manufacturer’s
batch or lot number, the application temperature range, the recommended
application temperature, and the safe heating temperature. Each container or
portion of shall be saved and matched to the daily check-out log. These records
will be used as basis of payment.

27.06.3.01 Public Notice Signage for the purpose of public notification of impending
work shall be furnished at all entrances to the work area the morning in
advance of crack seal operations. Signs shall remain in place until removal is
approved by the Project Manager. All signs shall conform to Section 27.01.
27.06.3.02 Work Limitations Crack fill materials shall not be placed during periods of
adverse weather conditions or at times when the materials will not adhere to
the cracked surface as directed by the manufacturer. Crack fill materials shall
not be placed during such times or when directed by the Project Manager.
27.06.3.03 Equipment The equipment for heating the material shall be an indirect
heating type double boiler using oil or other heat transfer medium and shall be
capable of constant agitation. The heating equipment shall be capable of
controlling the sealant material temperature within the manufacturer’s
recommended temperature range and shall be equipped with a calibrated
thermometer capable of ±5 ºF accuracy from 200 F to 600 ºF. This
thermometer shall be located so the Project Observer can safely check the
temperature of the sealant material. The machine shall be equipped with level
indicators or other device that can accurately measure the quantity of material
in the crack filling machine at any one time. All crack filling equipment shall
be maintained in safe and working condition at all times. If, in the opinion of
the Project Observer, the crack filling machine is not suitable for use and the
above indicators are not operational, the Project Observer may require the
equipment be removed from the jobsite and replaced with fully operational
equipment.

27.06.3.04 Surface Preparation Cracks shall be cleaned and dried for the entire crack
depth as much as practicable using such methods as brushing and air-blowing
as required to provide a crack free from all debris, dust, loose material and
moisture.
27.06.3.05 Application of Material

27.06.3.05.1 General Crack fill material shall be heated and placed in accordance
with manufacturer’s recommendations. All cracks greater than one-
quarter inch including transverse and longitudinal cracks shall be filled.
These Cracks shall be filled with hot poured joint and crack sealant flush
with the pavement surface. Immediately following the filling of the
crack, excess sealant shall be leveled off at the wearing surface by
squeegee, a shoe attached to the applicator wand, or other suitable means
approved by the Project Manager. The squeegeed material shall be
centered on the cracks and shall not exceed 3 inches in width or 1/16
inch in depth. Areas of alligator cracking shall not be sealed.
27.06.3.05.2 Application of Crack Fill Material Cleaned cracks shall be filled

with sealant from the bottom to the surface and level in a manner, which
does not result in sealant bridging or entrapped air pockets. With deep
cracks, settlement of the sealant may occur and a second layer of sealant
material shall be applied. Crack filler shall be placed in such a manner
as to minimize overfilling of the cracks. Suitable equipment, such as
squeegees, shall be used to remove excess crack filling material from the
roadway surface.
A liquid specifically designed to prevent tracking of freshly applied

crack seal material, such as “Glenzoil 20 Plus” or other suitable surface
treatment as approved by the Project Manager, shall be applied to all
cracks filled.
27.06.3.06 TRAFFIC CONTROL All necessary precautions shall be observed when

placing crack filler material. All necessary traffic control devices and warning
signs shall be supplied as required by the Traffic Engineer. Minimum
requirements shall include, but not be limited to, an arrow board mounted on a
truck or other approved vehicle following the material placement personnel
and a chase vehicle following no greater than 50 feet behind the arrow board.
Proper safety clothing for all of their employees on the project shall be

provided in accordance with the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices,
including, but not limited to, safety vests, warning signs and barricades.
Materials shall not be placed until these requirements are met.
Arrow boards pulled behind a mobile vehicle are required on all arterial
streets in conjunction with a flagger walking with the sealing unit. Flaggers
shall have no other duty than to direct traffic. Sufficient flaggers for traffic
control shall be provided as directed by the Traffic Engineer.
27.06.4 BASIS OF PAYMENT Crack sealant shall be paid for as installed at the unit
price per pound of product, including a tracking prevention liquid, such as Glenzoil
20 plus or equal and traffic control. Each crack sealant container or portion of shall
be saved and matched to the daily check-out log. These records will be used as
basis of payment
PAY ITEMS PAY UNIT

Crack Fill Pound

29.00 DESCRIPTION
29.01 MATERIALS
29.02 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
29.03 APPLICATION
29.00 Description:
This work shall consist of furnishing and installing thermoplastic pavement markings to
specified street segments after all designated street resurfacing is completed.
29.01 Material:
The material manufacturer shall have the option of formulating the material according to
their own specifications; however, the solid resin shall comprise a minimum of 8% by
weight of the entire material formulation which shall only consist of 100% percent
maleic-modified glycerol ester of resin. The physical and chemical properties contained
in this specification shall apply regardless of the type of formulation used. The material
upon heating to the application temperature shall not exude fumes that are toxic, or
injurious to persons or property.
Glass beads (Pre-Mix) shall be free from air inclusions:

Refractive Index 1.50 Minimum
Spheres, % 80 Minimum
AASHTO M247 Type I
The beads used in the formulation shall be smooth, clear and free from air inclusions and
scratches that might affect their function as a reflecting media.
29.02 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES:

29.02.1 Specific Gravity The specific gravity of the thermoplastic traffic line
material shall not be less than 1.95 nor more than 2.15.
29.02.2 Composition The pigment, beads and filler shall be uniformly dispersed
in the resin. The material shall be free from all skins, dirt and foreign
objects and shall comply with requirements according to Table 1.
TABLE 1 COMPOSITION
COMPONENT BY WEIGHT
Binder 18.0% Min.
Glass Beads 35.0% Min.
Titanium Dioxide 8.0% Min.
Calcium Carbonate & Inert Filler SEE NOTE
NOTE: Amount of calcium carbonate and inert fillers shall be at the option of the
manufacturer, providing all other requirements of the specification are met. The
Thermoplastic Pavement Markings 29 - 1 9.2010

total silica used in the formulation shall be in the form of spherical glass traffic
beads.
The binder shall consist of a mixture of synthetic resins, at least one of

which is solid at room temperature, and high boiling point plasticizers. At
least one-third of the binder composition shall be the solid maleic-modified
glycerol ester of resin and shall be no less than 8% by weight of the entire
material formulation. The binder shall not contain petroleum based
hydrocarbon resins or similar derivatives.
29.02.3 Other Ingredients The other ingredients shall meet the following
requirements:
29.02.3.1 Titanium Dioxide: ASTM D 476-Type 2
29.02.3.2 Color - The thermoplastic material after heating for four hours at 218
C (425 F) and cooled to 25 C (77 F) shall meet the following:
29.02.3.2.1 White: Daylight reflectance (45 to 0 deg.).. 75% Min.
29.02.3.2.2 Drying Time - When applied at a temperature range of 211 +/-

7 C (412 +/- 12.5 F) and thickness of 2.28mm (.090 in.) the
material shall set to bear traffic in not more than two minutes
when the air temperature is 10 C (50 F) and not more than 15
minutes when the air temperature is 32 C (90 F).
29.02.3.2.3 Bond Strength - After heating the thermoplastic material for

four hours at 218C (425 F), the bond strength to Portland
concrete shall exceed 180 psi (1.24 MPa).
29.02.3.2.4 Impact Resistance - After heating the thermoplastic material

for four hours at 218 C (425 F) and tested, the impact resistance
shall be a minimum of 10 inch pounds.
29.02.3.2.5 Softening Point - After heating the thermoplastic material for
four hours at 218 C (425 F) and testing in accordance with
ASTM D36, the materials shall have a softening point of 102.5
+/- 9.5 C (215 +/- 15 F).
29.02.3.2.6 Yellowness Index - The white thermoplastic material shall not

exceed a yellowness index of 0.15.

29.03 Application:
The thermoplastic material shall be applied to the pavement by an extrusion method.
The finished lines shall have well defined edges and be free of waviness. All of the
equipment necessary to the preheating and application of the material shall be so
designed that the temperature of the material can be controlled within the limits defined
by the material manufacturer.
The minimum thickness of thermoplastic lines as viewed from a lateral cross section shall
be not less than .080 inch at the edges nor more than .100 inch at the center.
The pavement surface shall be clean and dry (no moisture within 48 hours) and at a
minimum temperature of 50 degrees F.
Drop on flotation type glass beads shall be applied to the thermoplastic line immediately
after extrusion at a rate consistent with manufacturer recommendations.
29.04 Measurement and Payment:

Payment shall be based on linear foot of 4" wide striping, to include all labor, equipment,
materials and traffic control required to complete striping at each location as directed. A
listing of streets for thermoplastic striping will be furnished to the Contractor prior to
June 1, 2002.

30.00 CONCRETE WORK
30.01 SCOPE
30.02 MATERIALS
30.03 CONCRETE PROPORTIONING
30.04 MIXING CONCRETE
30.05 READY-MIXED CONCRETE
30.06 PLACING CONCRETE
30.07 FORMS
30.08 REINFORCING STEEL
30.09 JOINTS
30.10 PUMPING CONCRETE
30.11 COLD WEATHER PROTECTION
30.12 HOT WEATHER CONCRETING
30.13 CURING CONCRETE
30.14 FINISHING
30.15 MISCELLANEOUS
SECTION 30.00 CONCRETE WORK
30.01 Scope
This section covers all concrete work to include, but not limited to, footings, structure walls,
slab, beams, thrust blocks, curb and gutter, sidewalk, inlets, manhole, drainage works and
structures.
30.02 Materials
30.02.1 Cement All cement used in concrete work shall be Portland cement
conforming to all requirements of AASHTO M 85. Portland cement shall be
Type II "low alkali" or cement and shall conform to ASTM C 150 and ASTM C
595, respectively. Type II or Type IIA shall be used except that high-early
strength, Type III (or IIIA), may be used in concrete for anchors and thrust blocks
at the Contractor's option. Use of other types requires the approval of the Project
Manager.
30.02.2 Admixtures The use of calcium chloride in the production of Portland cement
concrete is prohibited. Air-entraining admixtures shall conform to AASHTO M
154, latest edition. Water-reducing and set-controlling admixtures shall conform
to AASHTO M 194 according to the following types: Type A, Water Reducing;
Type B, Retarding; Type D, Water Reducing and Retarding; and Type E, Water
Reducing and Accelerating. Written approval of the Project Manager shall be
obtained prior to the use of any admixture except air-entrained admixtures.
Application of admixtures shall be as per manufacturer's specifications.
30.02.3 Water The water used for concrete shall be clean and free from sand, oil, acid,
alkali, organic matter, or other deleterious substances. Water from public
supplies, or which has been proven to be suitable for drinking, is satisfactory.
30.02.4 Fine Aggregate
30.02.4.01 Composition Fine aggregate shall be washed, hard, durable and uncoated
particles of natural or manufactured sand or a combination thereof. It shall be
free from frozen material, salt, alkali, vegetable matter, or other objectionable
material.
Fine aggregate for Portland cement concrete (PCC) shall conform to the
requirements of AASHTO M 6. The minimum sand equivalent, as tested in
Concrete Work 30-1 9.2010

accordance with AASHTO T 176 shall be 80 unless otherwise specified. The
fineness modulus shall not be less than 2.3 nor greater than 3.1 unless
otherwise approved.
30.02.4.02 Deleterious Substances The maximum percentage of deleterious

substances shall not exceed the following values.
TABLE 30.1
FINE AGGREGATE DELETERIOUS SUBSTANCES
AASHTO Specification
Material finer than 200 mesh sieve T 11 3% by weight

a
Shale Petrographic 1% by weight
analyses
a
Coal and lignite T 113 0.25% by weight
Clay lumps and friables particles T 112 3% by weight
Alkali reactivity ASTM C 1260 < 0.1% @ 16 days

Using Water bath
a
If the aggregate has a specific gravity less than 2.40
The sum of the percentages of the above deleterious substances shall not
exceed 5% by weight.
Sodium sulfate soundness T 104 10% loss by weight
All fine aggregate shall be free from injurious amounts of alkali and organic
impurities.
30.02.4.03 Grading Fine aggregate shall be well graded and conform to the following:
Percent by Weight
Passing 3/8" 100

Passing No. 4 sieve 95-100

30.02.5 Coarse Aggregate
30.02.5.01 Composition Coarse aggregate shall be washed and shall consist of
crushed limestone, trap rock, granite, washed gravel, or other approved inert
materials or combinations thereof having clean, hard, strong, durable pieces,
free from frozen material, salt, alkali, vegetable matter, or other objectionable
material either free or as an adherent coating (AASHTO M 80).
30.02.5.02 Deleterious Substances The maximum percentage of deleterious

substances shall not exceed the following values.
TABLE 30.2
COARSE AGGREGATE DELETERIOUS SUBSTANCES
AASHTO Specification
Material finer than 200 mesh sieve T 11 1% by weight
Lightweight fragments T 113 3% by weight
(specific gravity < 2.4)
Coal and lignite T 113 0.5% by weight
(specific gravity < 2.4)
Clay lumps and friables particles T 112 3% by weight
Alkali reactivity ASTM C 1260 < 0.1% @ 16 days

Using Water bath
The sum of the percentages of the above deleterious substances shall not exceed 5% by
weight.
Sodium sulfate soundness T 104 12% loss by weight
30.02.5.03 Grading Coarse aggregate shall be well graded between the limits specified
and shall conform to the following requirements.
TABLE 30.3
GRADING COARSE AGGREGATE
Nominal Percentages by weight Passing Standard Laboratory
Maximum Size Sieve Having Square Openings
of Aggregate
(in inches)/No.
1 ½" 1" ¾" ½" 3/8" No. 4 No. 8
1 ½" No. 467 95 to 100 -- 35 to 70 -- 10 to 30 0 to 5 --
1" No. 57 -- 95 to 100 -- 25 to 60 -- 0 to 10 0 to 5
¾" No. 67 -- 100 90 to 100 -- 20 to 55 0 to 10 0 to 5

30.02.5.04 Other Requirements When tested in accordance with AASHTO T 96, the
percentage of wear shall not be more than 45%.
30.02.6 Reinforcing Steel

30.02.6.01 Bars Reinforcing steel bars shall conform to the requirements of the
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR DEFORMED AND PLAIN BILLET-
STEEL BARS FOR CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT of the ASTM. Bars
shall be new billet steel conforming to AASHTO M 31 of the grade shown on
the plans.
30.02.6.02 Welded Wire Fabric Wire fabric for concrete reinforcement shall
conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 55. The use of wire mesh from
"rolls" is not allowed.
30.02.7 Joint Materials Joint materials shall conform to AASHTO specifications

according to type as follows.
Concrete joint sealer, hot-poured elastic M 301

Preformed expansion joint fillers (bituminous type) M 213
Preformed sponge rubber and cork expansion joint fillers M 153
Preformed expansion joint fillers - nonextruding and resilient bituminous M 33
30.02.8 Curing Compound White-pigmented, liquid, membrane-forming compounds

shall conform to AASHTO M 148, Type 2, Class B.
30.02.9 Fly Ash Fly ash may be substituted for cement in all classes of concrete up to an
amount not exceeding 20% by weight. The fly ash shall conform to AASHTO M
295, Class C or Class F except as modified below.
Loss on ignition 2.5% maximum

Strength activity index with Portland cement, at 28 days, percent of
control 85% minimum
Autoclave expansion or contraction 0.5% maximum
Class C fly ash will not be permitted where sulfate resistant cement is required. Fly
ash shall not be used with Type IP cement.
The use of fly ash will not be an excuse for deviating from air content requirements
of the specifications.

30.03 Concrete Proportioning
30.03.1 The proportions of materials to be used shall produce a workable concrete having a
slump of 1" to 4", with air content and minimum 28-day compressive strength as
indicated in Section 30.03.3. Minimum cement content shall be 550 lbs. (six sacks)
per cubic yard with a maximum water/cement ratio = 0.45. Where "Water Tight"
concrete is specified, the water/cement ratio shall not exceed 0.40.
30.03.2 An approved air-entraining agent (AASHTO M 154) shall be used in all concrete
except Class III.
30.03.3 The class of concrete specified shall conform to the following:
TABLE 30.4
CLASS OF CONCRETE SPECIFICATIONS
Maximum Size (f 'cr) Laboratory Field Minimum Entrained Air, %
Coarse Aggregate Minimum 28-day 28-day Strength
Strength (PSI) (PSI)
Class I 3/4" 5200 4,000 6% ± 1.5
Class IA 1" 5200 4,000 6% ± 1.5
Class IB 1 1/2" 5200 4000 5.5% ± 1.5
Class II 1 1/2" 3600 2,400 5% ± 1
Class III 1" 2800 1,600
30.03.4 Minimum Class of Concrete Written approval of the Project Manager is

required prior to using Class II or Class III concrete. Class I or Class 1A will be
used in sidewalk, curb and gutter, slope paving, curb cuts, cross pans, driveways,
retaining walls, storm drainage structures, slabs, and structural members. For
sections greater than 6" thick, Class IB concrete may be used.
30.03.5 Mix Design The Contractor shall submit design mix proportions, laboratory trial
mix, and aggregate data for each class of concrete being placed on the project. The
test data shall show the mix design proportions, slump, air content, unit weight,
water/cement ratio, and 28-day compressive strength results, as tested under
laboratory conditions. The design mix proportions must produce at least 100% of
the required 28-day laboratory compressive strengths. Each design shall establish

the mix proportions and sources of all ingredients. Aggregate test data shall include
gradations - #200, sand equivalent, fineness modulus, specific gravities,
absorptions, and LA Abrasion test results. The Contractor shall be responsible for
the design mix proportions and all subsequent adjustments necessary to produce the
specified concrete.
The Contractor shall submit a new design mix based on the above requirements
when a change occurs in the mix proportions, source or type of cement, fly ash, or
aggregate, or failure of field tests to meet specifications.
Review of the design mix by the Project Manager does not constitute acceptance of
the concrete. In accordance with ACI 301 and 318, standard supplier design mixes
may be approved in lieu of the above. Submittal of appropriate test data will be
required. Acceptance will be based solely on test results of the concrete placed on
the project.
30.03.6 Enforcement of Strength Requirements Strength requirements shall be in

accordance with ACI 214, Section 4.2. The strength level of the concrete will be
considered satisfactory so long as the averages of all sets of three consecutive
strength test results equal or exceed the specified strength, f 'c, and no individual
strength test result falls below the specified strength f 'c by more than 500 psi.
Should the strength level be unsatisfactory, the Project Manager shall have the right
to require changes in mix proportions to apply on the remainder of the work. In the
event of failure of test specimens for any portion of the work, the Project Manager
may require that portion of the structure be removed and replaced at the
Contractor's expense.
30.04 Mixing Concrete

All concrete shall be thoroughly mixed in a batch mixer of an approved type and capacity for a
period of not less than two minutes after all the materials, including water, have been placed in
the drum. During the period of mixing, the drum shall be operated at the speed specified by the
manufacturer of the equipment. The entire contents of the mixer shall be discharged before
recharge, and the mixer shall be cleaned frequently. The concrete shall be mixed only in such
quantities as are required for immediate use. No retempering of concrete shall be permitted.
Hand-mixed concrete shall not be permitted except by written approval of the Project Manager.

30.05 Ready-Mixed Concrete
At the option of the Contractor, ready-mixed concrete may be used in lieu of concrete mixed at
the job. The use of ready-mix concrete in no way relieves the Contractor of sole responsibility
for proportioning, mixing, delivering, or placing concrete as specified. Ready-mixed concrete
shall conform to all the requirements of these specifications and AASHTO M 157. The Project
Manager shall have free access to the mixing plant at all times. Ready-mixed concrete shall be
continuously mixed or agitated from the time the water is added until the time of use. The
concrete shall be completely discharged from the truck mixer or truck agitator within 90 minutes
after the cement comes in contact with the mixing water, or with the aggregates (retempered
concrete shall not be allowed). The organization supplying ready-mixed concrete shall have
sufficient plant and transportation facilities to assure continuous delivery of concrete at the
required rate. When requested by the Project Manager, the Contractor shall collect delivery or
batch tickets from the ready-mix driver for all concrete used on the project and turn them over to
the Project Manager. Batch tickets shall provide the following information: weight and type of
cement, weights of fine and coarse aggregates, weight (or gallons) of water, including surface
water on aggregates, quantity (cu. yds.) of batch, times of batching and discharging of the
concrete, name of batch plant, name of Contractor, type, name and amount of admixture, date,
and truck number.
30.06 Placing Concrete

30.06.1 Placing Before depositing concrete, debris shall be removed from the space to be
occupied by the concrete, and the forms including any existing concrete surfaces
shall be thoroughly wetted. Concrete shall not be placed until all forms and
reinforcing steel have been observed by the Project Manager. Concrete shall be
handled from the mixer to the place of final deposit as rapidly as possible by
methods which prevent separation or loss of ingredients. To avoid rehandling, it
shall be deposited in the forms as nearly as practical in its final position. It shall be
deposited in continuous layers, the thickness of which generally shall not exceed
12". Concrete shall be placed in a manner that will avoid segregation and shall not
be dropped freely more than 5'. If segregation occurs, the Project Manager may
require the concrete to be removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense.
Concrete shall be placed in one continuous operation, except where keyed
construction joints are shown on the plans or as approved by the Project Manager.
Delays in excess of 45 minutes may require removal and replacement of that pour,
as determined by the Project Manager. Concrete will not be placed until the
subgrade compaction requirements have been met.

30.06.2 Vibrating Concrete shall be thoroughly compacted or vibrated. All concrete shall
be compacted by internal vibration using mechanical vibrating equipment, with the
exception that concrete in floor slabs, sidewalks, or curb and gutter, not poured
against a form, shall be either tamped or vibrated. Care shall be taken in vibrating
concrete to vibrate only enough to bring a continuous film of mortar to the surface.
Vibration shall stop before any segregation of the concrete occurs. Mechanical
vibrators shall be an approved type as specified in ACI 309, Chapter 3. Vibrators
shall not be used to move or spread the concrete. Any evidence of lack of
consolidation or over consolidation shall be regarded as sufficient reason for
requiring the removal of the section involved and its replacement with new concrete
at the Contractor's expense. The Contractor shall be responsible for any defects in
the quality and appearance of completed work.
The rate of vibration shall be not less than 5,000 vibrations per minute for surface
vibrators and 9,000 vibrations per minute for internal vibrators. The amplitude of
vibration shall be sufficient to be perceptible on the surface of the concrete more
than 1 foot from the vibrating element. The Contractor shall furnish a tachometer
or other suitable device for measuring and indicating the actual frequency of
vibrations.
Vibrators shall not rest on new pavements or side forms. Power to the vibrators
shall be so connected that vibration will cease when the forward or backward
motion of the machine is stopped.
30.06.3 Workability The consistency of concrete shall be kept uniform for each class of
work and shall be checked by means of slump tests or Kelly ball tests. Concrete
shall at all times be of such consistency that it can be worked into corners and
angles of the forms and around joints, dowels, and tie-bars, by the construction
methods used without excessive spading, segregation, or undue accumulation of
water or laitance on the surface. If by accident, intention, or error in mixing, any
concrete fails to conform to the proportions of the approved mix design; such
concrete shall not be incorporated in the work, but shall be discarded off the project
site as waste material at the Contractor's expense. NO WATER MAY BE ADDED
AT THE JOB SITE WITHOUT THE PERMISSION OF THE PROJECT
MANAGER. If permission is obtained and water is added at the job site, slump
tests shall be run and test cylinders cast following the addition of the water.

30.07 Forms
Forms shall conform to the shape, lines, and dimensions, as shown on the plans. Approved
flexible forms shall be used for construction where the radius is 150' or less. Unexposed surfaces
shall have forms of No. 2 common (or better) lumber. Forms shall not be disturbed until the
concrete has adequately hardened. The Contractor or his superintendent shall be present at the
time forms are removed and shall be responsible for the safety of this operation at all times. In
no case shall the minimum time between placing concrete and removal of forms be less than the
following.
TABLE 30.5
TIME BETWEEN PLACING CONCRETE AND REMOVAL OF FORMS

Time
Curb and gutter 4 hours
Side forms for footings and slabs 12 hours
Side forms for walls, beams, and 24 hours
Columns
Forms under structural beams and slabs 7 days or when concrete has reached 2/3 of 28-
requiring shoring day field design strength as indicated by
compressive strength tests on field-cured
specimens
30.08 Reinforcing Steel

30.08.1 Shop Drawings Before fabrication of the reinforcement, the Contractor shall
prepare or have prepared complete bending, fabrication, and setting drawings and
bar lists covering all required reinforcement steel. Such drawings and bar lists shall
be submitted to the Project Manager for his review of general conformity to
specified requirements. The review of the shop drawings by the Project Manager in
no way relieves the Contractor of sole responsibility for correct placement of
reinforcing steel.
30.08.2 Placing Reinforcing steel, before being placed, shall be thoroughly cleaned of
coatings that will destroy or reduce bond. A light coating of rust may be allowed by
the Project Manager. Reinforcement shall be carefully formed to the dimensions
indicated on the plans. It shall not be bent or straightened in a manner that will
injure the material. THE USE OF HEAT IN BENDING BARS SHALL NOT BE
PERMITTED. Bars with kinks or bends not shown on the plans shall not be used.

Reinforcing steel shall be accurately placed and secured against displacement by
using annealed iron wire of not less than No. 18 gauge, or suitable clips, at
intersections, and where necessary, reinforcing steel shall be supported by metal
chairs or spacers, precast mortar blocks, or metal hangers. Reinforcing bars shall
not be spliced at points of maximum stress. Splices, where permitted, shall be as
specified in ACI 318. All reinforcing steel shall be placed in the position and at the
spacings shown on the plans with the tolerances specified in ACI 301, Section 3.3.
30.08.3 Cover The minimum clear cover for reinforcing steel shall be as specified in ACI
301, Section 3.3, and as shown below, unless otherwise shown on the plans.
TABLE 30.6
MINIMUM COVER FOR REINFORCING STEEL
Bottom bars on soil-bearing foundations and slabs 3 inches
Bars adjacent to surfaces exposed to weather on earth backfill

Bars 3/4" in diameter or larger 2 inches
Bars 5/8" in diameter or smaller 1 1/2 inches
Interior surfaces: slabs, walls, joists with 1 3/8" diameter or 3/4 inches
smaller bars
30.08.4 Placing Welded Wire Fabric Wire fabric in cross pans and curb cuts shall be
placed as shown in the plans and details. The fabric shall be fully supported on
precast mortar blocks or other approved supports prior to placing the concrete. The
use of welded-wire fabric from "rolls" is not allowed.
30.09 Joints
30.09.1 Expansion Joints Expansion joints in combination curb and walk, vertical curb
and gutter, channels, or any other place that is designed or can be expected to carry
water shall be recessed 1/2" and shall be sealed with an approved one-component,
moisture-curing, non-priming, gun-grade, elastomeric polyurethane joint sealant
meeting the requirements of ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT
and M. It shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions
within seven days of the placement of the concrete. Expansion joints shall be
provided at the following locations:

at each end of curb return
at both edges of the driveway
between back of sidewalk and driveway slab or service walk
between new concrete and existing masonry buildings
as shown on the drawings
as directed by the Project Manager
between new and existing concrete
1/2" joints every 200' in sidewalk
30.09.2 Contraction Joints Transverse joints shall be placed at maximum intervals of

10' to control random cracking. The joints shall be formed, sawed, or tooled to a
minimum depth of 1/4 of the total thickness. If divider plates are used, the
maximum depth of plates shall not be greater than 1/2 the total thickness. The
joints shall be finished with a jointer having a width no greater than 5/16" and depth
not less than 3/4". A maximum joint width at the finished surface shall be no
greater than 5/16".
30.09.3 Tool Joints Tool joints shall be spaced as follows:
Not more than 10' nor less than 5' apart in curb and gutter
Not more than 5' nor less than 3' apart in sidewalk
In driveways at least two joints equally spaced at not greater than 10'
intervals, as applicable
Joints will be placed at 10' intervals for the 8' and 10' bike paths unless
otherwise authorized by the Project Manager
As directed by the Project Manager
30.10 Pumping Concrete

Methods, materials, and equipment to be used in placing concrete by pumping shall conform to
ACI 304. A separate mix design will be required in accordance with paragraph 30.03.5.
30.11 Cold Weather Protection

When concrete is placed with ambient temperatures below 40°F, the Contractor shall provide
satisfactory methods and means to protect the mix from injury by freezing. The aggregates, or
water, or both, shall be heated in order to place the concrete at temperatures between 50°F and
90°F. Placing of concrete may be started in the morning if the Contractor desires, but shall be
discontinued at 3:00 p.m. of the same day if freezing weather threatens. The concrete or

aggregates shall be protected during transit, mixing, and before and after placing, as directed by
the Project Manager, to retain all heat possible in the concrete mix. After the concrete has been
placed, the Contractor shall provide sufficient protection such as blankets, canvas, framework,
heating apparatus, etc., to enclose and protect the structure and maintain the temperature of the
concrete at not less than 50°F until at least 60% of the 28-day field strength has been attained.
Except as provided above, cold weather concreting shall be in accordance with ACI 306. If in
the opinion of the Project Manager, the protection provided is inadequate, concreting shall cease
until conditions or procedures are satisfactory to the Project Manager.
30.12 Hot Weather Concreting

Except by written authorization, concrete shall not be placed if the temperature of the plastic
concrete cannot be maintained at 90°F or lower. The placement of concrete in hot weather shall
comply with ACI 305.
30.13 Curing Concrete

White-pigmented curing compound conforming to Section 30.02.8 shall be used unless another
method conforming to ACI 308, Chapter 2, is approved by the Project Manager in writing. All
concrete, regardless of temperature, weather, or season, shall be protected from premature drying
for a period of not less than seven days. Where concrete is being protected from freezing, the
time period for water curing shall be one day less than that of the frost protection. The
application rate of curing compound shall be as per manufacturer's recommendation (not greater
than 150 sq. ft./gal.). Curing will not be required longer than 72 hours if high-early strength
concrete is used. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to protect the concrete being cured
from the elements, traffic, and vandalism. Those surfaces covered by forms shall be similarly
treated after the forms are removed. Inadequate protection by the Contractor shall be cause for
suspension of concreting operations and replacement of the affected concrete at no expense to
the City.
30.14 Finishing
30.14.1 General Exposed faces of curbs and sidewalks shall be finished to true line and
grade as shown on the plans. The surface shall be floated to a smooth but not
slippery finish. Sidewalk and curb shall be broomed and edged, unless otherwise
directed by the Project Manager. The use of steel trowels is not recommended in
the finishing processes unless approved by the Project Manager. After completion
of brooming and before concrete has taken its initial set, all edges in contact with
the forms shall be tooled with an edger having a 3/8" radius.

No dusting or topping of the surface, or sprinkling with water, to facilitate finishing
shall be permitted. Finishing agents may be used as directed by the manufacturer to
aid in finishing.
30.14.2 Types of Finish

30.14.2.01 Class 1 - Ordinary Surface Finish. Immediately following the removal of the
forms, all fins and irregular projections shall be removed from all surfaces
except from those which are not to be exposed. On all surfaces, the cavities
produced by form ties honeycomb spots, broken corners or edges, and other
defects, shall be thoroughly cleaned, moistened with water, and carefully
pointed and trued with a mortar consisting of cement and fine aggregate, and
the surface left sound, smooth, even, and uniform in color. Mortar used in
pointing shall be not more than 30 minutes old. All construction and
expansion joints in the completed work shall be left carefully tooled and free
of all mortar and concrete. The joint filler shall be left exposed for its full
length with clean and true edges. All concrete surfaces shall be given a Class
1 finish. Additional finish classes may be specified by the plans for
designated surfaces.
30.14.2.02 Class 2 - Broom Finish. All curb and gutter, sidewalk, and cross pan unless
otherwise specified.
30.14.2.03 Class 3 - CDOT Class 5, Masonry Coating Finish.
30.14.2.04 Class 4 - Special. See plans and special provisions.
30.14.3 Markings Concrete used in curb and gutter, sidewalk, curb cuts, driveways,
inlets, bicycle paths, retaining walls, and slope paving, shall have the name of the
Contractor and the year of construction impressed therein using letters not less than
1" high and 3/8" deep. Impressions shall be made in concrete at the beginning and
end of each pour and in each driveway. Structures shall have the year constructed
impressed therein using letters 3" high and 1/2" deep. The Contractor shall place
the date stamp at the end of his work at the point where it joins existing work. If
only a portion of sidewalk, or curb & gutter is being constructed, the new slab shall
be marked at one end.
30.14.4 Final Surface Test All work shall be true to line and grade as established by
the Project Manager. Prior to acceptance of the work, the Contractor shall test the
surfaces with a 10-foot straightedge. Any areas higher than 1/4", but not higher

than 1/2", above the correct surface thus indicated, shall be ground to the correct
surface by the Contractor at his expense. When the deviation exceeds the foregoing
limits, the Contractor shall remove and replace that portion of the work at his
expense, as directed by the Project Manager. Protection of freshly poured concrete
shall be provided by the Contractor. The Contractor shall erect and maintain
suitable barricades and employ watchmen as may be necessary to exclude
(pedestrian or vehicular) traffic from the newly constructed concrete until it has
sufficiently cured and will not be affected by the traffic. The Contractor shall have
sufficient materials available to protect the unhardened concrete against damage by
rain or hail. When rain is imminent, the unhardened concrete shall be immediately
covered with tarps, plastic sheeting, or other suitable material, and planks or forms
shall be placed along the edge of the work to hold the protective materials in place.
Concrete pavement damaged by rail or hail will be removed and replaced as
directed, at no additional cost, by the Project Manager.
30.14.5 Repairs If, after stripping of forms, any concrete is found to be not formed as
shown on the drawings, or is out of alignment or level, or shows a defective surface,
it shall be considered as not conforming with these specifications. The defective
area shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at his expense unless the
Project Manager gives written permission to patch the defective area. Patching, if
allowed, shall be done as described in the following paragraphs.
Ridges and bulges shall be removed by grinding. Honeycombed and other

defective concrete that does not affect the integrity of the structure shall be chipped
out and the vacated areas shall be filled in a manner acceptable to the Project
Manager. The repaired area shall be patched with a non-shrink, nonmetallic grout,
with a minimum compressive strength of 4,000 psi in 28 days. All repair areas shall
be treated with an epoxy bonding agent before the repair filling is placed.
Bolt-holes, tie-rod holes, and minor imperfections as approved by the Project

Manager shall be filled with dry-patching mortar composed of one part Portland
cement to two parts of regular concrete sand (volume measurement), and only
enough water so that after the ingredients are mixed thoroughly the mortar will stick
together upon being molded. Mortar repairs shall be placed in layers and
thoroughly compacted by suitable tools. Care shall be taken in filling rod and bolt
holes so that the entire depth of the hole is completely filled with compacted mortar.
The mortar mix proportions described above are approximate.

An approved mix shall be prepared to insure that the grout has a 28-day
compressive strength equal to that of the area to which it is placed. All costs for
mix design and testing shall be paid by the Contractor. Those areas with excessive
deficiencies, as determined by the Project Manager, shall be removed and replaced
at the Contractor's expense.
30.15 Miscellaneous
30.15.1 Backfilling When side forms are removed and the concrete has gained sufficient
strength (minimum compressive strength of 2,500 psi), the space adjoining the
concrete shall be promptly backfilled with suitable material, properly compacted,
and brought flush with the surface of the concrete and adjoining ground surface. In
embankments the backfill shall be level with the top of the concrete for at least 2'
and then sloped as shown on the drawings or as directed by the Project Manager.
30.15.2 Repairing Existing Pavement Existing pavement which is damaged or

removed during construction shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Project
Manager by the Contractor at his expense.
30.15.3 Repairs of Existing Sidewalks Where repairs are made in existing sidewalks,
all edges of the old sidewalk allowed to remain shall be saw cut to a minimum
depth of 2". No rough edges will be permitted where new construction joins old.
Unless directed by the Project Manager, no section less than 5' in length shall be
placed or left in place. Where new sidewalk construction abuts existing sidewalks,
the work shall be accomplished so that no abrupt change in grade results.
30.15.4 Removal of Existing Concrete Removal and replacement of existing concrete

features (curb and gutter, sidewalk, curb cuts, cross pans, etc.) beyond the limits
shown on the plans, or required by the Project Manager, shall be at the Contractor's
expense.
30.15.5 Opening to Traffic Walks shall not be opened to pedestrian traffic for at least
24 hours after placement. Curb cuts, curb and gutter, and cross pans shall not be
opened to vehicular traffic for at least seven days after placement or until concrete
has attained 2/3 of 28-day field strength. The Contractor shall maintain suitable
barricades and signage in accordance with MUTCD.

Measurement for concrete work is determined by the type of work performed. Curb and gutter
are to be measured per linear foot not to include curb cuts, inlets, or cross pans. Detached
sidewalks shall be measured per linear foot, not to include curb cuts or inlets.
Combination curb, gutter, and sidewalks are to be measured per linear foot not to include curb
cuts, inlets, and curb ramps. Curb cuts are to be measured on a square foot basis from the front
lip of the gutter to the back of the curb cut and to the outside of the flares. Curb ramps are to be
measured per each to include all work behind back of curb and from P.C.R. to P.C.R. Mid-block
curb ramps are to be measured per each to include all work from edge to edge and behind the
back of curb. Median noses are to be measured as a median curb and gutter with no additional
measurement for the concrete required in the nose itself. Cross pans shall be measured on a
square footage basis to include curb and gutter in the returns. Slope paving shall be measured by
the square foot of exposed concrete surface, including the horizontal top.
Payment for slope paving will include toe wall, weep holes, and redwood headers. Foundation
walls, interior and exterior, and structural slabs shall be measured by the cubic yard or the square
yard as specified in the contract.
Concrete work shall be paid for at the contract unit price as bid in the contract. The contract
price shall include the cost of furnishing all labor, equipment, and materials necessary to
complete the work.
Exclusion Thrust blocks and kickers required in the installation of pressure lines shall be
considered part of that work and their cost included in the unit price of the pressure lines.
Unless indicated otherwise in the Contract, the cost of furnishing and installing reinforcing steel,
welded wire fabric, joints and joint filler, dowels, and curing materials shall be included in the
price of the concrete.

31.00 CONCRETE PAVEMENT
31.01 SCOPE
31.02 MATERIALS
31.03 BATCHING
31.04 MEASURING AIR CONTENT
31.05 FORMS
31.06 PLACING CONCRETE
31.07 CONSOLIDATING AND FINISHING
31.08 INTEGRAL CURB
31.09 CURING
31.10 JOINTS
31.11 STRUCTURES
31.12 PROTECTION AND OPENING TO TRAFFIC
31.13 SLIP FORM PAVING
31.14 SUBGRADE PREPARATION
31.15 TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE
31.16 PAY REDUCTION FACTORS
9.2010
SECTION 31.00 CONCRETE PAVEMENT
31.01 Scope
The work covered by this section consists of furnishing all labor, equipment, and materials and
in performing all operations in connection with the construction of air-entrained Portland cement
concrete pavement for streets, alleys, and parking lots. Section 30.00, CONCRETE WORK shall
apply, except where a conflict between CONCRETE WORK and CONCRETE PAVEMENT
exists. In such a case, the specifications for CONCRETE PAVEMENT shall govern.
31.02 Materials
Concrete shall be composed of Portland cement, air-entraining agent, aggregates, and water.
Other admixtures to be used shall first be reviewed by the Project Manager prior to use. These
materials shall be furnished only from sources of supply reviewed by the Project Manager before
shipments are started. Such sources shall be able to produce materials of the quality and in the
quantity required.
31.02.1 Portland Cement The use of other than Type II cement shall be reviewed by
the Project Manager prior to use. Cement shall conform to the requirements of
AASHTO M 85 for Portland cement Type I, Type II, Type III, Type IV, or Type V,
or for air-entraining Portland cement Type IA, Type IIA, or Type IIIA. Cement
which for any reason has become partially set or which contains lumps of caked
cement shall be rejected. Either packaged or bulk cement may be used. Fly ash
may be used as specified in Section 30.00, CONCRETE WORK.
31.02.2 Aggregates All aggregates for concrete shall meet the ASTM C-33. Aggregates
shall be so handled that moisture content and gradation are reasonably uniform and
do not change appreciably from batch to batch or hour to hour. No aggregates shall
be used which have become contaminated or intermixed. Frozen aggregates or
aggregates containing frozen lumps shall be thawed before use.
31.02.3 Joints
31.02.3.01 Expansion Joints See Section 30.02.7 and S19.1 et seq.
31.02.3.02 Pre-Molded Joint Material Pre-molded parting strips, when called for on
the plans, shall be 1/16" to 3/16" thick and of the width shown on the plans.
They shall consist of strips which have been formed from layers of felt or
shredded felt, cane, wood, or other suitable fibers, securely bound together
Concrete Pavement 31-1 3/2010

and uniformly impregnated with a suitable binder. They shall not
permanently deform by ordinary handling during hot weather, or become hard
and brittle in cold weather.
31.02.3.02 Joint Sealant All joints shall be sealed with an approved one-component,
moisture-curing, non-priming, gun-grade, elastomeric polyurethane joint
sealant meeting the requirements of ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class
25, Use NT and M. It shall be applied in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions within seven days of the placement of the
concrete and Standard Detail S19.1 et seq.
31.02.4 Curing
31.02.4.01 Sheeting Materials Waterproof paper, polyethylene film, and white

burlap-polyethylene sheeting shall conform to AASHTO M 171.
31.02.4.02 Membrane Curing Compound Membrane curing compounds shall be

the white-pigmented type and conform to AASHTO M 148, Type 2, Class B.
31.03 Batching
Measurement and batching of cement, fine and coarse aggregates shall be by weight on scales
accurate to within 0.5%. Bulk cement and cement from fractional sacks shall be weighed.
31.03.1 Proportioning Concrete The concrete shall have a minimum 28-day

compressive laboratory strength of 5,200 psi (4,000 psi field) and a laboratory
modulus of rupture of 700 psi in 28 days (550 psi field). Proportions of cement,
water, and aggregate shall be determined in accordance with ACI Standard 211.1.
Mixes shall comply with the following table.
Table 31.1
PROPORTIONS FOR NORMAL WEIGHT CONCRETE
Nominal Size of Coarse Minimum Cement Water/Cement Ratio Total Air Content
Aggregate Content (lb./lb. maximum) (% by volume)
(inches) (lb./cu. yds.)
1½ 610 0.45 5% ± 1
1 610 0.45 6% ± 1

The entrained air shall be obtained either by using air-entraining cement or an air-
entraining agent. Mix design, including lab test results showing compliance with
compressive strength and modulus of rupture requirements, shall be submitted to
the Project Manager for review ten days before paving begins. The maximum size
of aggregate shall not exceed 1/4 of the slab thickness. The maximum water
content shall include the surface water on the aggregate.
31.03.2 Consistency The slump of the concrete shall be 1/2" to 2" (internal vibration)
and 1 1/2" to 3" (surface vibration).
31.03.3 Ready-Mixed Concrete Ready-mixed concrete shall be proportioned, mixed,

and transported in accordance with AASHTO M 157. Concrete shall be placed in
accordance with Section 30.00, CONCRETE WORK.
31.03.4 Job-Mixed Concrete Job-mixed concrete shall be mixed in a drum mixer

capable of combining the aggregates, cement, and water into a thoroughly mixed
and uniform mass within the specified time, and capable of discharging the material
without segregation. The entire contents of the drum shall be discharged before
recharging. Each mixer shall have attached in a prominent place, a manufacturer’s
plate showing the capacity of the drum in terms of volume of mixed concrete and
the speed of rotation of drum or mixing blades. The volume of the mixed materials
per batch shall not exceed the manufacturer’s guaranteed capacity (110% of rated
capacity) of the mixer.
31.03.5 Time of Mixing The mixing of each batch shall continue for not less than one
minute after all materials, except water, are in the mixer. All mixing water shall be
introduced into the drum before 1/4 of the mixing time has elapsed. The mixer
shall rotate at the rate recommended by its manufacturer. The mixer shall be
provided with a batch timing device which shall be subject to inspection and
adjustment by the Project Manager at any time.
31.04 Measuring Air Content

The air content of freshly-mixed concrete shall be checked by an independent agency as often as
necessary (at least twice daily) to insure uniform air content in conformance with ACI and
ASTM specifications. Concrete with air content above or below the amount specified in Section
31.03.1 shall be corrected by adjustments in the mix design or quantities of air-entraining
admixture being used.

31.05 Forms
31.05.1 General Forms may be made of wood or metal and shall have a depth equal to or
greater than the prescribed edge thickness of the pavement. Each section of form
shall be straight and free from bends or warps.
The maximum deviation of the top surface shall not exceed 1/8" in 10', or the inside
face not more than 1/4" in 10'. The method of connection between sections shall be
such that the joint thus formed is tight and free from movement in any direction.
Forms shall be of such cross section and strength and so secured as to resist the
pressure of the concrete when placed and the impact and vibration of any equipment
which they support without springing or settlement.
Approved flexible forms shall be used for construction where the radius is 150' or
less.
All roadway paving over 50 feet in length shall be accomplished using a self-
propelled, string controlled slip form paver. Screeds or forms shall not be the
primary means of placing and controlling concrete paving, except when permitted
by the City Engineer.
31.05.2 Setting Forms The subgrade under the forms shall be compacted and shaped so
that the form when set will be uniformly supported for its entire length at the
specified elevation. The supply of forms shall be sufficient to permit their
remaining in place for at least 12 hours after the concrete has been placed. All
forms shall be cleaned and oiled each time they are used.
31.05.3 Grade and Alignment The alignment and grade elevations of the forms shall be
checked by the Contractor immediately ahead of concrete placement and necessary
corrections will be made. Any forms that have been disturbed or subgrade that has
become unstable shall be corrected, and forms reset and rechecked. Any variations
in grade and alignment shall be reviewed by the Project Manager prior to placing
the concrete.
31.06 Placing Concrete

The concrete shall be mixed in quantities required for immediate use and shall be deposited on
the subgrade to the required depth and width of the construction lane in successive batches and in
a continuous operation without the use of intermediate forms or bulkheads. The concrete shall
be placed as uniformly as possible in order to minimize segregation. While being placed, the

concrete shall be vibrated to prevent the formation of voids or honeycomb pockets. The concrete
shall be especially well consolidated against the forms and along all cold joints. Care shall be
taken in the distribution of the concrete to deposit a sufficient volume along the outside form
lines so that the curb section can be consolidated and finished simultaneously with the slab. At
the start of a day’s run, or whenever placing concrete adjacent to existing concrete, the surface of
the existing concrete shall be thoroughly wetted immediately prior to placing the new concrete.
No concrete shall be placed around manholes or other structures until they have been brought to
the required grade and alignment and expansion joints have been installed. Placement of
concrete will cease when rain is threatening. Protection of freshly poured concrete shall be
provided by the Contractor. The Contractor shall erect and maintain suitable barricades and
employ watchmen as may be necessary to exclude (pedestrian or vehicular) traffic from the
newly constructed concrete pavement until it has sufficiently cured that it will not be affected by
the traffic. The Contractor shall have sufficient materials available to protect the unhardened
concrete against damage by rain or hail. When rain is imminent, the unhardened concrete shall
be immediately covered with tarps, plastic sheeting, or other suitable material, and planks or
forms shall be placed along the edge of the work to hold the protective materials in place.
Concrete pavement damaged by rail or hail will be removed and replaced as directed, at no
additional cost, by the Project Manager.
31.06.1 Cold Weather Concreting Except by specific written authorization, concreting

shall cease when descending air temperature in the shade and away from artificial
heat falls below 40 F. It shall not be resumed until the ascending air temperature in
the shade and away from artificial heat rises to 35 F.
When concreting is permitted during cold weather, the temperature of the mix shall
be not less than 60 F, not more than 80 F, at the time of placing. Aggregates or
water or both may be heated, but the water shall not be hotter than 175 F and
aggregates shall not be hotter than 150 F. Before concreting is started, ice, snow,
and frost must be removed from forms, rebar, and subgrade.
When concrete is being placed in cold weather and the temperature may be
expected to drop below 35 F, a supply of straw, insulated curing blankets, or other
suitable material shall be provided along the line of work. Prior to any time when
the air temperature may be expected to reach the freezing point during the day or
night, the material so provided shall be spread over the concrete to a sufficient
depth to prevent freezing of the concrete. Concrete shall be protected from freezing
temperatures until it is at least five days old. Concrete injured by frost action shall
be removed and replaced at the Contractor’s expense. Additional cement, Type A

or Type E mixtures (AASHTO M 194) may be used to accelerate setting in cold
weather subject to the review of the Project Manager. The use of calcium chloride
additives shall NOT be allowed.
31.06.2 Hot Weather Concreting Concrete shall not be placed if the temperature of the
concrete exceeds 90 F. To facilitate the placement of concrete in hot weather, the
aggregates or water or both may be cooled.
31.07 Consolidating and Finishing

31.07.1 General The pavement shall be struck off and consolidated with a mechanical
finishing machine. Hand finishing will be allowed only on irregular or confined
areas when approved by the Project Manager. When a mechanical finishing
machine is used, the concrete shall be struck off at such a height that after
consolidating and final finishing, it shall be at the elevation as shown on the plans,
with not more than 1/4" variation when measured with a 10' straight-edge.
The finishing machine shall be provided with a screed which shall consolidate the
concrete by pressure and vibration. Minimum vibratory requirements are that the
eccentric diameter be 1 7/8 inch, a frequency of 7,000 to 9,000 vibrations per
minute and be spaced a maximum of 18 inches mounted longitudinally. The
concrete shall be brought to a true and even surface, free from rock pockets. The
edge of the screeds along the curb line may be notched out to allow for sufficient
concrete to form the integral curb.
Hand-finishing tools shall be kept available for use in case the finishing machine
breaks down. Paving progress shall immediately cease until the finishing machine
has been repaired. When hand finishing is used, the pavement shall be struck off
and consolidated by a hand mechanical vibrating device to the elevation as shown
on the plans, with not more than 1/4" variation when measured with a 10'
straightedge. When the forward motion of the vibrating device is stopped, the
vibrator shall be shut off; it shall not be allowed to idle on the concrete. Delays in
excess of 15 minutes in vibrating and tamping shall be cause for stopping paving
until finishing operations have caught up with the paving.
31.07.2 Scraping and Straight-Edging The pavement shall be scraped with a

straightedge 10' long (minimum), equipped with a handle to permit it to be operated
from the edge of the pavement. The straight-edge shall be operated so that any
excess water and laitance are removed from the surface of the pavement. Prior to

the concrete taking its initial set, irregularities shall be corrected by adding or
removing concrete. All disturbed places shall be floated with a wooden or metal
float not less than 3' long and not less than 6" wide and again straight-edged. The
pavement surface shall have no depression in which water will stand.
The use of the long-handled float shall be confined to a minimum. It may be used
with the straightedge to correct surface texture, but shall not be used to float the
entire surface of the pavement.
31.07.3 Edging Before final finishing is completed and before the concrete has taken its
initial set, the edges of the slab and curb shall be carefully finished with an edger,
having a 3/8" radius.
31.07.4 Final Surface Finish A burlap drag shall be used as the final finishing method
for concrete pavement. The drag shall be at least three feet in length and wide
enough to cover the entire pavement width. It shall be kept clean and saturated
during use. It shall be laid on the surface of the pavement and dragged. The curb
shall have the same final finish as the pavement. The finish surface of the concrete
pavement and curb shall have a uniform gritty texture, free from excessive
harshness, and true to the grades and cross section shown on the plans. The Project
Manager may require changes in the final surface texture.
31.08 Integral Curb

When integral curbs are required along the edges of all street paving, depressed curbs shall be
provided at all driveway entrances and at such other locations as designated by the Project
Manager.
The integral curb shall be constructed with, or immediately following, the finishing operation.
Special care shall be taken so that the curb construction does not lag the pavement construction
and form a “cold joint.”
In placing curb concrete, sufficient consolidation shall be done to secure an adequate bond with
the paving slab and eliminate all voids in the curb.
The finished surface of the curb and gutter shall be checked by the use of a 10’ straight-edge and
corrected if necessary.

31.09 Curing
31.09.1 General Concrete shall be cured by protecting it against loss of moisture, rapid
temperature change, rain, flowing water, and mechanical injury for a period of not
less than five days from the beginning of the curing operation. Curing shall
conform to Section 30.13.
31.10 Joints
31.10.1 General Longitudinal and transverse joints shall be per detail S19.1, et seq. and
the recommendations of the Portland Cement Association and the American
Concrete Paving Association. In the event of a discrepancy, the more stringent
requirements shall apply.
31.10.2 Expansion Joints Expansion joints shall be provided as shown on the plans,
around manholes, valve boxes, inlets, other structures, and as directed by the
Project Manager. Expansion joints shall conform to the specification in Section
30.02.7. They shall extend the entire width of the pavement and from the subgrade
to ½ inch below the surface of the pavement.
Under no circumstances shall any concrete be left above the expansion material or
across the joint at any point. Any concrete spanning the ends of the joint next to the
forms shall be carefully cut away after the forms are removed. Before the pavement
is opened to traffic, the groove above the filler shall be cleaned and sealed with
specified joint sealing material.
31.10.3 Sawed Joints Sawing of the joints shall begin as soon as the concrete has
hardened sufficiently to permit sawing without excessive raveling. Any procedure
for sawing joints that result in premature and uncontrolled cracking or raveling shall
be revised immediately by adjusting the time interval between the placing of the
concrete and cutting of the joints. The sawing of any joint shall be omitted if a
crack occurs at or near the joint location before the time of sawing. Sawing shall be
discontinued if a crack develops ahead of the saw. If necessary, the sawing
operations shall be carried on both day and night, regardless of weather conditions.
A standby saw shall be available in the event of breakdown.
31.10.4 Construction Joints Construction joints shall be placed whenever the placing
of concrete is suspended for more than 30 minutes.

31.10.5 Plastic-Parting Strip Joint The joint material shall be inserted with a
mechanical device that places the material in a continuous strip, except where
intervening structures break the continuity of paving. Splices in the joint material
will be permitted providing they are effective in maintaining the continuity of the
joint material.
31.10.6 Joint Sealing Joints shall be filled to a level such that, upon cooling, the sealer
shall be slightly below the concrete surface about 1/8" (1/4" maximum). Any
excess material should be removed from the pavement surface before opening to
traffic.
TABLE 31.2
SUGGESTED LOCATION OF LONGITUDINAL JOINTS
(TYPE E OR L - SEE S19.2 AND S19.3)
ROADWAY CLASSIFICATION LOCATION OF LONGITUDINAL JOINT
Local Type 1 BOC, 7’, 11’, 11’, 7’, BOC
Local Type 3 BOC, 9.5’, 11’, 11’, 9.5’, BOC
Two-Lane Collector BOC, 12.5’, 11,’ 11’, 12.5’, BOC
Four-Lane Collector BOC 6.5', 11', 11', 11', 11', 6.5', BOC
Four-Lane Arterial BOC1, 7.5’, 12’, 12’, 14’, 12’, 12’, 7.5’, BOC1
Six-Lane Arterial BOC1, 14.5’, 12’, 13.5’, BOC1
BOC1, 13.5’, 12’, 14.5’, BOC1
1
Monolithic C & G are not allowed without an approved revised joint pattern.
Note: Location of joints may vary due to local conditions, traffic, bike paths, etc.
BOC = Back of Curb
31.11 Structures
All manholes, catch basins, or structures of a permanent nature encountered in areas to be paved
shall be raised or lowered to the elevation of the surface of the new pavement and the specified
expansion material placed around each structure for the full depth of the slab.
31.12 Protection and Opening to Traffic

The Contractor shall protect the pavement against all damage prior to final acceptance of the
work. Traffic shall be excluded from the pavement by erecting and maintaining barricades and
signs until the concrete is at least 14 days old, or has attained a flexural strength of 550 psi when
tested in accordance with AASHTO T 23 or T 97. The pavement shall not be used at any time
within this period for transporting or operating equipment. As a construction expedient, the
subgrade planer, concrete finishing machine, and similar equipment may be permitted to ride

upon the edges of previously constructed slabs provided the concrete is more than 72 hours old
and the equipment have rubber-tired wheels to run on the finished slab. The pavement shall be
cleaned and tabbed for lane stripes (or painted) immediately before opening to traffic.
31.13 Slip Form Paving

31.13.1 General When the concrete pavement exceeds 50 lineal feet the Contractor shall
use a slip-form paver and the construction methods described in the preceding
section of the specifications shall not be applicable. All reference in the preceding
sections of this specification referring to forms shall be deleted. Use of a vibrating
screed is not allowed.
31.13.2 Grade After the grade or base has been placed and compacted to required
density, the grade and areas which are to support the paving machine shall be cut to
the proper elevation by means of a fine-grading machine. The fine-grading
machine shall be of sufficient weight, and shall be either self-propelled or towed by
sufficient power, to trim the compacted material without gouging or tearing the
surface. The machine shall have cutting edges or surface shavers controlled from
an independent control reference wire by means of an automatic control device.
The machine may accomplish the fine grading by means of successive passes with
each pass controlled from the independent reference line through the automatic
control. Motor graders will not be used for shaping of the base except for small
areas or areas of irregular shape where the use of a fine grade would be
impracticable. If the density of the base is disturbed by the grading operations, it
shall be corrected by additional compaction before concrete is placed. If any traffic
is allowed to use the prepared grade, the grade shall be checked and corrected
immediately ahead of the placing of the concrete.
31.13.3 Placing Concrete All concrete shall be placed with a self-propelled, string-
controlled paving machine with internal vibrators designed to spread, consolidate,
screed, and float-finish the freshly-placed concrete in one complete pass of the
machine in such manner that a minimum of hand finish will be necessary to provide
a dense and homogenous pavement in conformance with the plans and
specifications. The machine shall vibrate the concrete for the full width and depth
of the strip of pavement being placed. Such vibrations shall be accomplished with
vibrating tubes or arms working in the concrete, and vibrating pan operating on the
surface of the concrete. The sliding forms shall be rigidly held together laterally to
prevent spreading of the forms. The forms shall trail behind the paver for a distance
such that no appreciable slumping of the concrete will occur.

The concrete shall be held at a uniform consistency, having a slump of not more
than 2 inches. The slip-form paver shall be operated with as nearly a continuous
forward movement as possible, and all operations of mixing, delivering, and
spreading concrete shall be so coordinated as to provide uniform progress with
stopping and starting of the paver held to a minimum. If for any reason it is
necessary to stop the forward movement of the paver, the vibratory and tamping
elements shall also be stopped immediately. No tractive force shall be applied to
the machine, except that which is controlled from the machine.
31.14 Subgrade Preparation

The subgrade shall be in a moist condition at the time the concrete is placed. It shall be
thoroughly wetted a sufficient time in advance of the placing of the concrete to insure that there
will be no puddles or pockets of mud when the concrete is placed but shall not be allowed to dry
out before the concrete is placed.
Immediately prior to placing the concrete, the subgrade and forms shall be tested for conformity
with the cross section shown on the plans by means of an approved template or string line
method. Forms shall be checked for grade. If necessary, material shall be removed or added, as
required, to bring all portions of the subgrade to the correct elevation. It shall then be thoroughly
compacted and again tested with the template.
Concrete shall not be placed on any portion of the subgrade which has not been tested for correct
grade and cross section. The subgrade shall be cleared of any loose material. All soft and
yielding material and other portions of the subgrade which will not compact readily when rolled
or tamped shall be removed as directed and replaced with suitable material, placed and
compacted as specified.
Prior to placing concrete, the testing agency shall submit to the Project Manager a report under
the seal of a Professional Engineer stating that the forms are to proper grade, the subgrade is at
proper depth and cross slope, and the subgrade is properly prepared and compacted.
31.15 Testing and Acceptance

31.15.1 Test Specimens The Contractor shall furnish the concrete necessary for casting
test beams and cylinders. One set of 4 beams and 6 cylinders shall be made for
each 300 cubic yards, or fraction thereof, of pavement placed, but not less than two
sets of beams and cylinders for any one day’s work, plus any additional beams or
cylinders ordered by the Project Manager. The beams and cylinders shall be cured
by the method specified in AASHTO T 23. A qualified independent testing agency

shall furnish the molds and test the specimens. Each specimen shall be marked with
the date, time, location, batch, and any other pertinent information.
31.15.2 Thickness The Project Manager may require core tests for determining actual
thickness and for outlining areas of deficient thickness. Cores shall be taken as
directed. The length of the thickness deficiency will be taken as half way between
the core showing the deficiency and the nearest acceptable core. Deduction for
deficiency in thickness shall be made according to the following table.
TABLE 31.3
PAY FACTOR FOR DEFICIENCY IN THICKNESS
Deficiency in Thickness Proportional Part of Contract Price
Allowed
0.00 in. to 0.25 in. 100 percent
0.26 in. to 0.50 in. Ratio (actual thickness)2
(specified thickness)2
Greater than 0.50 in. Remove and Replace
The Contractor, at his expense, may take additional cores to further define the area
of thickness deficiency. The area so determined will not be taken as less than one
full panel, as defined by transverse joints and the width of one pass of the paver. It
will include the curb and sidewalk if poured integrally with the paving.
31.15.3 Strength Tests Unless otherwise approved by the Project Manager, beams shall
have a minimum field modulus of rupture at 28 days of 550 psi when tested in
accordance with AASHTO T 177.
31.15.4 Final Surface Test Prior to acceptance of the pavement, the Project Manager
may require the Contractor to test the surface of the finished pavement with a 10’
straight-edge. Any areas higher than 1/4", but not higher than 3/8" above the
correct surface (as indicated by such test) shall be ground to the required surface by
the Contractor at his expense. When the deviation exceeds 3/8", the pavement shall
be removed and replaced by the Contractor at his expense. Final surface testing
may be completed using a profilograph, with the written permission of the Project
Manager.

31.16 Pay Reduction Factors
The pay factors for concrete which is allowed to remain in place at a reduced price shall be
according to Table 31.4. The average 28-day compressive strength of three cylinders
representing the concrete used in the corresponding pavement area will be used to determine if
the concrete meets the required strength. The pay factor shall be applied to the unit bid price for
the quantity of concrete in that portion of the pavement area represented by the test cylinders.
The pay factor for air content shall apply to the load represented by the out-of specification test
result. Price reductions for air content, strength, and thickness deficiency shall be applied
independently.
TABLE 31.4
PAY FACTORS FOR AIR CONTENT AND STRENGTH
Air Content Strength
Deviations From Pay Factor Below Required Pay Factor
Specified % Air Compressive
Strength (psi)
0.1-0.2% 98% 1-100 98%
0.3-0.4% 96% 101-200 96%
0.5-0.6% 92% 201-300 92%
0.7-0.8% 84% 301-400 84%
0.9-1.0% 75% 401-500 75%
over 1.0% Reject Over 500 Evaluate
When concrete is more than 500 psi below the required compressive strength, it will be evaluated
to determine whether it is to be removed, corrective measures are to be taken, or it is to be
accepted at 75% pay factor. The evaluation will include performance of a structural analysis by
the City or its consultant. All costs of performing the evaluation shall be at the Contractor’s
expense.
On developer/private funded projects, the difference between the unit price cost and the pay
reduction factor cost shall be transferred to the City prior to initial acceptance of the project.

32.00 MATERIALS TESTING
32.01 SCOPE
32.02 RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE TESTING AGENCY
32.03 TESTING
32.04 RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE CONTRACTOR OR DEVELOPER
32.05 PERSONNEL QUALIFICATIONS
SECTION 32.00 MATERIALS TESTING
32.01 Scope
The requirements of this section shall apply to all testing agencies and required materials testing
services for soils, asphalt, and concrete.
32.02 Responsibilities of the Testing Agency

32.02.1 General All materials and operations shall be tested in accordance with these
specifications and as directed by the Project Manager. Agencies testing soil and
rock shall meet the requirements of ASTM D 3740. Agencies testing asphalt or
concrete shall meet the requirements of ASTM D 3666 or D 1077, respectively. All
testing agencies shall meet the requirements of ASTM E 329.
A trained and properly qualified representative of the testing agency shall observe,
sample, and test the materials and work on the project, as required by these
specifications and as directed by the Project Manager. If any materials furnished or
the work performed by the Contractor fails to fulfill the specification requirements,
such deficiencies shall be reported to the Project Manager and the Contractor
immediately. Preliminary written field reports of all tests and observation results
shall be given to the Contractor or Developer immediately after they are performed.
Field reports shall be made available to the Project Manager by the testing agency.
Final reports shall be forwarded to the Project Manager no later than one week
following the testing. Results of all tests taken, including failing tests, shall be
reported.
Reports shall bear the seal and signature of a Professional Engineer registered in the
State of Colorado and competent in the required testing practice. All test reports
shall show the location where the test was performed or where the work or batch
represented by the test was placed. Test reports shall include all information
specified in the AASHTO or ASTM test procedure used. Improperly completed
reports will not be accepted. A Certificate of Occupancy will not be issued until all
final reports indicating compliance with these specifications are reviewed and
placed on file by the City. The testing agency personnel are not authorized to stop
work, to revoke, alter, relax, enlarge, or release any requirements of the
specifications, or to approve, accept, or reject any portion of the work.
Materials Testing 32-1 9.2010

32.03 Testing
32.03.1 General All testing methods and procedures performed by the testing agency
personnel shall be in accordance with the applicable AASHTO and ASTM
requirements and procedures (see Tables 32.1-7). Test reports shall include the
AASHTO and ASTM test designations of all tests taken. All testing and retesting
services shall be at the expense of the Contractor or Developer, except on City
contracts. Initial testing on City contracts shall be at the City’s expense; all
retesting due to failing tests shall be at the Contractor’s expense.
When changes in materials or proportions are encountered during construction, or

when the work fails to pass tests or fails to meet the specifications, additional tests
shall be taken as directed by the Project Manager. Failure of the Contractor or
Developer to furnish satisfactory test data shall be sufficient cause for rejection of
the work in question.
32.03.2 Soil Testing

32.03.2.01 All testing shall be according to AASHTO or ASTM as designated in Table 32.1
and Table 32.2.
32.03.2.02 When density and moisture content are determined by a nuclear device, a sand
cone density test shall be taken daily or at the discretion of the Project
Manager or the City. If the results of the sand cone tests do not agree with the
nuclear tests, use of that nuclear device shall be immediately discontinued
until the cause of the disagreement is determined and corrected.
32.03.2.03 A moisture-density determination shall be taken for each soil type

encountered. For A-6 and A-7 soils, AASHTO T 99 shall apply. All other
soils use AASHTO T 180.

Table 32.1
SCHEDULE FOR MINIMUM MATERIALS SAMPLING AND TESTING FOR EMBANKMENT
AASHTO ASTM Minimum Frequency of Tests
SOILS
Sampling T 86 D 420 One test per soil type
Soil Classification M 145 D 3282 One test per soil type
Liquid Limit T 89 One test per soil type
Plastic Limit T 90 One test per soil type
Material Finer than 75um T 11 One test per soil type
Sieve T 88
Moisture Density T 99 D 698 One test per soil type
(Proctor) T 180 D 1557
In-Place Density
Nuclear T 238 D 2922 One test for each 200 lane feet per layer or
T 239 D 3017 every 200 cu. yds. (not less than one test per
day)
Sand Cone T 191 D 1556 One test for every tenth nuclear method in-place
density test
Table 32.2
SCHEDULE FOR MINIMUM MATERIALS SAMPLING AND TESTING FOR
AGGREGATE BASE COURSE
AASHTO ASTM Minimum Frequency Of Tests
AGGREGATE BASE COURSE
Sampling T2 D 75 One test per every 1,000 tons or
fraction thereof
Moisture Density T 180 D 1557 One test per every 1,000 tons or
fraction thereof
Atterberg limits T 89 & T 90 One test per every 1,000 tons or
fraction thereof
Gradation T 27 & T 11 One test per every 1,000 tons or
fraction thereof
In-place density T 238 & T 239 One test for each 200 lane feet per
layer or every 200 cu. yds.
Thickness One test for each 200 lane feet per
layer or every 200 cu. yds.
Resilient Modulus T 294 Upon request

Table 32.3
FOR BITUMINOUS PAVING MIXTURES
ASPHALT
Sampling T 168 D 979 One test per every 1,000 tons or fraction
D 3665 thereof (not less than one test per day)
Hveem properties T 245 D 1559 One test per every 1,000 tons or fraction
T 247 D 1561 thereof (not less than one test per day)
T 166
In-place density D 1188 One test for each 250 linear lane feet
D 2950 per layer of in-place HBP
Asphalt content T 164 D 2172 One test per every 1,000 tons or fraction
T 269 D 3203 thereof (not less than one test per day)
TP 53 PS 90
Maximum Specific Gravity T 209 D 2041 One test per every 1,000 tons or fraction
of HBP thereof (not less than one test per day)
Air voids and VMA T 269 D 3203 One test per every 1,000 tons or fraction
thereof (not less than one test per day)
Thickness D 3549 One test for each 250 linear lane feet
Aggregate Gradation T 27 C 136 One test per every 1,000 tons or fraction
thereof (not less than one test per day)
Table 32.4
FOR PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE

CONCRETE
Sampling T 141 C 172 One set per 50 cu. yds.
One set per 100 cu. yds. (paving)
Compressive strength C 39 One set per 50 cu. yds.
Temperature C 1064 One test per 50 cu. yds.
Slump T 119 C 143 One set per 25 cu. yds.
Air content T 196 C 173 One set per 25 cu. yds.
T 121 C 138 One set per 50 cu. yds. (paving)
Thickness C 174 One test per 500 linear lane feet
(paving)

Table 32.5
FOR SLURRY SEAL

Residue after distillation T 59 One test for each 5,000 sq. yds. or
fraction thereof (not less than one test
per day)
Extraction and Gradation T 164 One test for each 5,000 sq. yds. or
T 30 fraction thereof (not less than one test
per day)
Application Rate One test for each 5,000 sq. yds. or
fraction thereof (not less than one test
per day)
Table 32.6
FOR STABILIZED SUBGRADE
Test Type Test Standard Minimum Frequency of Tests
Sampling AASHTO T 87 Per 1,000 square yards

Maximum Dry Density As directed by Project Manager
ASTM D 3551
and Optimum Moisture Content (minimum one per soil type)
ASTM D 1556 ASTM D 2167
In Place Soil Density
ASTM D 2922 One test for each 200 lane feet
(not less than 1 test per day)
In Place Moisture Content ASTM D 2216 ASTM D 3017
ASTM C 110
pH One test per 1,000 square yards
ASTM C 977 APPENDIX
ASTM D 4546
Swell As directed by Project Manager
Method B
Unconfined One set of 4 cylinders per 1,000
Compressive Strength ASTM D 5102 (Procedure B) square yards. Sealed and moist
(Lime) cured at 100°F for 5 days.
One set of 4 cylinders per 1,000
Compressive Strength
ASTM D 1633 (Method A) square yards. Sealed and moist
Cementitious Agents
cured at 100°F for 5 days.
Atterberg Limits AASHTO T 89 & T 90 One test per 1,000 square yards
As directed by Project
Thickness One test every 500 feet per lane
Manager
AASHTO T 232
Percentage of Agent One test per 1,000 square yards
See Section 22.10.4
32.03.2.04 In addition to the requirements of Section 32.03, all reports shall include
elevation or depth below finish grade at which test was taken. Results shall

report densities (maximum dry and relative) to nearest 0.1 lb/cu. ft., moisture
content (optimum and in place) to nearest 0.1%, and compaction (relative and
required) to nearest 0.1%. The most recent adjusted manufacturer’s
calibration curve must be available upon request. The manufacturer’s
calibration curve shall be adjusted as required by ASTM D 2950.
32.03.3 Asphalt Testing

32.03.3.01 All testing shall be according to AASHTO or ASTM as designated in Table
32.3.
32.03.3.02 In-Place Density: A minimum of one test for each 250 linear lane feet per
layer of in-place HBP or fraction thereof.
32.03.3.03 Aggregate Gradation A minimum of one test per 1,000 tons or fraction
thereof.
32.03.3.04 In addition to the requirements of Section 32.03, all reports shall include
densities to the nearest 0.1 lb. per cu. ft. and compaction to the nearest 0.1%.
If a nuclear device is used, the report shall contain the method used (i.e., back
scatter, direct transmission, etc.)
32.03.3.05 In-place pavement thickness shall be determined as follows: The pavement

shall be cored at 500' intervals or fraction thereof, in each 12' lane (nominal),
with a minimum of three cores in any area. The Project Manager may require
additional cores to define deficient areas.
32.03.4 Concrete Tests

32.03.4.01 All testing shall be according to AASHTO or ASTM as designated in Table
32.4.
32.03.4.02 Sampling and testing shall be required on all concrete work including curb,
sidewalk, pans, pavement, slope paving, retaining walls, inlets, manholes, or
any other structures.
32.03.4.03 Maximum time between sampling and casting cylinders shall not exceed 45
minutes. If the concrete cannot be taken to the laboratory and cylinders cast
within 45 minutes, the cylinders shall be cast in the field. Cylinders shall be
transported to the laboratory within 24 hours of casting but after the concrete
has hardened (see AASHTO T 23).

32.03.4.04 Concrete cylinders shall be broken according to the following table.
Table 32.7
CONCRETE CYLINDER BREAKS
NUMBER OF CYLINDERS BREAK INTERVAL (days)
FIELD CURED SERIES
(4-Cylinders)
2 7
2 14*
LABORATORY CURED SERIES
(6 Cylinders)
2 7
2 28
2 45*
* or as directed by the Project Manager
One laboratory cured series shall be taken for each 50 cubic yards of concrete
placed or fraction thereof.
32.03.4.05 Slump AASHTO: T 119. Air: AASHTO T 196 or T 121. Test shall be taken
for each 25 cubic yards of concrete placed or fraction thereof. A minimum of
three slump and air tests shall be taken per day or as directed by the Project
Manager. Slump and air tests shall be taken with each cylinder series.
32.03.4.06 If samples of fresh concrete have not been obtained and tested, a minimum of
three cores shall be taken per AASHTO T 24 and broken. Air content, ASTM
C 451, and cement content, AASHTO T 178, shall also be determined.
Concrete in the portion of the structure from which the core was taken will be
considered adequate if the average strength of the cores is equal to a minimum
of 80% of the specified strength (f 'c) and if the strength of no single core is
less than 75% of f 'c. All core holes shall be completely filled with a concrete
meeting the same mix design criteria.
32.03.4.07 In addition to the requirements of Section 32.03, all reports shall include the
type of structure; cylinders; data on obtaining, transporting, storing, curing,
time between sampling and casting cylinders; supplier, batch ticket I.D.,
finisher and contractor.

32.04 Responsibilities of the Contractor or Developer
32.04.1 General The Contractor or Developer shall provide at his expense the required
testing services except on City contracts. Initial testing on City contracts shall be at
the City’s expense. All retesting shall be at the Contractor’s expense. The use of a
testing agency’s services does not relieve the Contractor or Developer of the
responsibility to furnish the required materials and to perform the required
construction in full compliance with specifications. Passing test results do not
constitute acceptance of the work or materials represented by the test. The
Contractor is responsible for quality control of his work.
32.04.2 Testing Agency Access and Assistance The Contractor or Developer shall
allow the testing agency access to the job site at all times; furnish any labor required
to assist the testing agency in obtaining and handling samples at the source of
material and at the project; provide and maintain, for the sole use of the testing
agency, adequate facilities for safe storage and proper curing of concrete test
specimens the project site as required by AASHTO T 23.
32.04.3 Mix Designs When requested by the Project Manager, the Contractor or
Developer shall furnish asphalt mix designs or concrete mix designs meeting the
requirements of these specifications. Concrete mix designs shall be performed
according to the provisions of ACI-211 or ACI-304. A separate mix design shall be
provided if pumped concrete is used.
32.05 Personnel Qualifications

32.05.1 The person responsible for the quality control testing shall be a Registered
Professional Engineer in the state of Colorado and practicing in this field.
32.05.2 Technician shall be certified as a Level II or higher NICET in the specific area
where they perform tests, i.e., soils, concrete, asphalt.
32.05.3 The technician taking samples and performing tests must possess one or more of the
following qualifications.
Technicians taking samples and conducting compaction tests must have a

Level IIA certification from LabCAT or equivalent.
Technicians conducting tests of asphalt content and gradation must have a
Level IIB certification from LabCAT or equivalent.
Technicians taking concrete samples and conducting field tests must have a
Field certification from ACI or equivalent.

Technicians conducting tests of Portland cement concrete for compressive
strength shall possess a certification from ACI Laboratory Grade I or
equivalent.
Technicians conducting tests of Portland cement concrete for flexural
strength and to determine mixture design characteristics shall possess a
certification from ACI Laboratory Grade II or equivalent.
Technicians determining asphalt mixture volumetric and strength
characteristics must have a Level II C certification from LabCAT or
equivalent.

33.00 FLOWABLE BACKFILL
33.01 SCOPE
33.02 MIX DESIGN
33.03 MATERIALS AND PRODUCTION
33.04 PLACEMENT
33.05 EXCESS EXCAVATION
33.06 FLASH FILL
SECTION 33.00 FLOWABLE BACKFILL
33.01 Scope
This section specifies requirements for design, materials, production, and placement of low
strength, flowable pozzolanic backfill. Flowable backfill is an alternative to conventional
compacted earth backfill. Typical applications for this type of backfill are:
Utility trenches
Bridge abutments, retaining walls, etc.
Structural fill (foundation subbase, subfooting, pipe bedding, etc.)
33.02 Mix Design

A mix design shall be prepared in a testing laboratory by a Colorado Licensed Professional
Engineer competent in the field of materials engineering. In lieu of a mix design, documentation
of field test data may be submitted. Samples of the mix, with its formula, shall be made
available to the City for testing prior to construction. City reviewed mixes may be considered
prequalified for subsequent usage. Flowability and strength requirements when tested in
accordance with ASTM D 4832 shall be as follows:
Slump: 7" minimum
28-day strength: 30-90 psi
90-day strength: 35-95 psi
33.03 Materials and Production

Flowable backfill shall be produced from a job mix formula as specified above.
When coarse aggregate is used, 100 percent shall pass the 1-inch sieve, and it shall comprise not
more than 40 percent of the total aggregate content. Other aggregate products such as aggregate
base, crushed rock, pea gravel, or reject sand which has not more than 20 percent passing the No.
200 sieve and is free of organic material and other deleterious substances, may be accepted by
the Project Manager if a flowable, workable mix can be produced without segregation of the
aggregate.
33.04 Placement
Before depositing flowable backfill, debris shall be removed from the space to be occupied by
the flowable backfill. Flowable backfill shall be held low enough from the pavement surface to
Flowable Backfill 33-1 9.2010

allow adequate trench patching depth per Detail S10.2. Vibratory or other compaction
equipment shall be used only when necessary to fill inaccessible voids.
Flowable backfill shall be allowed to cure for 24 hours before placing permanent pavement on it.
Traffic shall not be allowed on flowable backfill during the first 6 hours after placement.
Temporary pavement or fill can be used after a six hour initial set.
33.05 Excess Excavation

All excess excavation material shall be removed from the job site at the Contractor's expense and
shall become the property of the Contractor.
33.06 Flash Fill

Use of Flash fill or flow fill will only be allowed with the permission of the Materials Testing
Laboratory, or the Project Manager, or the Public Improvements Observer for backfilling of
utility trenches. In no case will Flash fill or flow fill be allowed to come in contact with or
within one foot of a metal utility line.
Flowable Backfill 33-2 9.2010

34.00 RELATED CONSTRUCTION AND SPECIFICATIONS
34.01 UTILITY CONSTRUCTION
34.02 STORM DRAINAGE SPECIFICATIONS
34.03 MINIMUM STORM DRAINAGE PIPE SIZE
34.04 TRENCHLESS TECHNOLOGY
SECTION 34.00 RELATED CONSTRUCTION AND SPECIFICATIONS
34.01 Utility Construction

All utility construction within the city shall conform to the requirements in the "City of Aurora
Public Utility Improvements Rules and Regulations Regarding Standards and Specifications,"
latest edition. The above utility standards and specifications shall by reference be a part in whole
of these standards and specifications and shall be purchased separately. Where utilities are to
cross concrete pavements, saw cuts shall be at existing joints so whole panels shall be removed,
unless otherwise approved by the City Engineer. No new joints shall be made.
34.02 Storm Drainage Specifications

All design criteria and regulations governing storm drainage and storm water within the city shall
conform to the requirements in the "City of Aurora Storm Drainage Design & Technical
Criteria," latest edition. The above storm drainage standards and specifications shall by
reference be a part in whole of these standards and specifications and shall be purchased
separately.
34.02.1 Storm sewers placed in arterial roadways within the C.O.A. right-of-way shall be
either RCP, Class III or higher or PVC, pipe stiffness of 46 psi minimum. Other
alternate pipe materials will not be considered for use in arterial roadways.
34.03 Minimum Storm Drainage Pipe Size

The minimum diameter of storm pipe allowed within public right-of-way shall be 18 inches.
34.04 Trenchless Technology

Trenchless technology refers to subsurface, horizontal excavation used as an alternative to
trenching for installation of utility lines. Pipes, conduits, sleeves, cables, and wires will be
collectively referred to as utility lines in this section. This section applies primarily to directional
boring. It also applies to pneumatic missiling, micro-tunneling, augering and pipe ramming, or
jacking. Utility companies, Contractors, and others using trenchless technology in City rights-
of-way or other City properties such as parks, drainage ways parking lots, etc., shall be licensed
and bonded with the City. A utility construction permit may also be required. For information,
refer to Section 7, CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS, and Section 36.0, ROAD CUTS.
34.04.1 Location of Existing Utilities Prior to construction, all existing underground

utilities shall be physically located. It is advised to obtain design locates when
Related Construction and Specifications 34-1 9.2010

planning bore alignments. It may not be allowable to waive clearance and depth
requirements solely due to unknown conflicts if design locates were not performed.
All underground utilities shall be marked on the surface five feet on both sides of
the proposed bore alignment by the utility owners. Contact the Utility Notification
Center of Colorado at 1-800-922-1987 for locating service and a listing of tier 2
utilities. Contact the City of Aurora Water Department for water, sanitary and
storm sewer locates; the Public Works Department for traffic signal locates; and the
Parks Department for irrigation system locates. Contact adjacent property owners
for locating private water service lines, sanitary service lines, and sprinkler systems.
Depth determination of existing utilities shall be done by carefully potholing.
34.04.2 Size and Alignment of Bores Bore hole diameter and the amount of void
space remaining around the utility line shall be minimized to prevent surface
subsidence. Alignment and depth of bores shall be designed to accommodate the
many different underground utilities which use relatively narrow corridors and
cross each other.
34.04.2.01 Size of Bores Bore hole diameter shall not exceed 1-1/2 times the utility
line diameter for smaller utilities less than seven inches in diameter. For
larger utility lines and multiple lines using the same bore hole, approval of
construction methods and bore diameter by the City Engineer shall be
required.
34.04.2.02 Alignment and Depth of Bores Bore hole alignment shall be parallel for
longitudinal street bores and perpendicular for street crossings. A bore hole
shall not meander more than one foot to either side of the approved proposed
alignment. A bore hole shall not encroach within one foot, horizontal or
vertical, of another utility facility. The minimum depth of private utility lines
(gas, electric, communication) shall be 30 inches.
34.04.3 Drilling Operations

34.04.3.01 Water Water used for the drilling operation shall not be obtained from City
fire hydrants without a meter. A meter can be obtained from the City's Water
Shop at 13645 E. Ellsworth Avenue (phone 303-326-8120) to be used on
hydrants. The Water Department personnel at the Water Shop will provide
direction on use and proper methods for filling tanks so as not to cause a cross
connection that could contaminate the City's water supply.

34.04.3.02 Emergencies The Fire Department shall be notified immediately (phone
911) whenever gas or electric lines are damaged by the drill. The utility
owner and the City observer should be notified whenever any utility line is
damaged. Failure to make these notifications may be cause to revoke license
and permit.
34.04.3.03 Mud Containment and Clean Up Drilling mud shall be ponded or

contained in a manner which does not allow it to flow onto sidewalks, into
traveled lanes, or down the gutter across driveways and cross pans. It is
prohibited to allow mud to be tracked onto City streets. It is also prohibited to
wash drilling mud into, or allow it to flow into storm sewer inlets. Citations
will be issued for these violations. The City observer may temporarily allow
the Contractor to pond mud in the gutter with the use of hay bales or sand
bags as long as it is barricaded and does not impede traffic. In the event
drilling mud should leak from the bore hole to the surface, the area shall be
barricaded from vehicular and pedestrian travel immediately before resuming
drilling operation. Complete clean up of drilling mud with hydro-vacuuming
equipment is required at the end of each day.
34.04.4 Restoration and Miscellaneous Pavement, sidewalk, other items of

infrastructure, and landscaping that are damaged during construction shall be
replaced or repaired.
34.04.4.01 Surface improvements that are undermined from adjacent bore/splice pits
more than one foot horizontally shall be replaced or repaired.
34.04.4.02 Structures that are raised by more than 1/4 inch due to pressure from drilling
mud, e.g., humped pavement or faulted sidewalk stones, shall be replaced or
repaired.
34.04.4.03 Bore holes that are greater than three inches in diameter that are abandoned
without conduit shall be filled with an approved grout or flowable backfill
material.
34.04.4.04 Conduit that is wasted between the bore hole collar at grade and the splice pit
at depth shall be removed, not abandoned in place.

34.04.4.05 Lids and covers on hand holes, pull/splice/junction boxes, and other below-
grade utility vaults shall be adjusted to grade prior to backfilling. Buried
facilities with concealed covers are prohibited.
34.04.4.06 Asphalt Pavement Repairs See Section 36.00 for requirements.

35.00 RIPRAP AND FILTER BLANKET
35.01 RIPRAP
SECTION 35.00 RIPRAP AND FILTER BLANKET
35.01 Riprap
All materials and construction methods shall conform to Urban Storm Drainage Criteria Manual
(USDCM), Volume 1, "Major Drainage." Per USDCM, Table MD-7 – “Classification and
Gradation of Ordinary Riprap”, riprap shall be designated as follows.
TABLE 35.1
CLASSIFICATION AND GRADATION OF ORDINARY RIPRAP
% Smaller Than Intermediate Rock
Riprap Designation Given Size by Weight Dimensions (Inches) d50*(Inches)
70-100 12
50-70 9
Type VL 6**
35-50 6
2-10 2
70-100 15
50-70 12
Type L 9**
35-50 9
2-10 3
70-100 21
50-70 18
Type M 12**
35-50 12
2-10 4
100 30
50-70 24
Type H 18
35-50 18
2-10 6
100 42
50-70 33
Type VH 24
35-50 24
2-10 9
*d50 = Mean particle size (intermediate size) by weight.

** Mix VL, L and M riprap with 35% topsoil (by volume) and bury it with 4 to 6 inches
of topsoil, all vibration compacted, and revegetate.
35.02 Construction Requirements

Slopes to be protected by riprap shall be free of brush, trees, stumps, and other objectionable
material and be dressed to a smooth surface. All soft or spongy material shall be removed to the
depth shown on the plans, or as directed by the Project Manager, and replaced with approved
Riprap and Filter Blanket 35-1 9.2010

material. All slopes and embankments not in the right-of-way of roadways shall be compacted at
optimum moisture to a minimum 90% of the maximum density as determined by AASHTO Test
T 180. All slopes and embankments in the right-of-way of roadways shall be compacted in
accordance with the latest revision of Section 20.06, EARTHWORK.
35.02.1 Dumped Riprap Stone for riprap shall be placed on the prepared slope or area
in a manner which will produce a reasonably well-graded mass of stone with the
minimum practicable percentage of voids. The entire mass of stone shall be placed
so as to be in conformance with the lines, grades, and thickness shown on the plans.
Riprap shall be placed to its full course thickness at one operation and in such a
manner as to avoid displacing the underlying material. Placing of riprap in layers,
or by dumping into chutes, or by similar methods likely to cause segregation will
not be permitted.
The larger stones shall be well distributed and the entire mass of stone shall
conform to the gradation specified in Section 35.01, RIPRAP. All material going
into riprap protection shall be so placed and distributed that there will be no large
accumulations of either the larger or smaller sizes of stones.
Unless otherwise authorized by the Project Manager, the riprap protection shall be
placed in conjunction with the construction of the embankment with only sufficient
lag in construction of the riprap protection as may be necessary to allow for proper
construction of the portion of the embankment protected, and to prevent mixture of
embankment and riprap. The Contractor shall maintain the riprap protection until
accepted; any material displaced by any cause shall be replaced to the lines and
grades shown on the plans at no additional cost to the City.
35.02.2 Hand-Placed Riprap Hand-placed riprap shall conform to all the requirements
of Section 35.02.1, DUMPED RIPRAP. Hand-placed riprap shall be required when
the depth of riprap is less than two times the nominal stone size, or when required in
the special conditions.
After the riprap has been dumped, hand placing or rearranging of individual stones
by mechanical equipment shall be required to the extent necessary to secure a
uniform surface and the specified depth of riprap.

35.02.3 Wire-Enclosed Riprap The drawings and special conditions will show
details of wire-enclosed riprap and specify the construction materials and
procedures to be used.
35.02.4 Grouted Riprap Grouted riprap shall not be used.
35.02.5 Grouted Boulders Grouted boulders shall conform to the requirements of Urban
Drainage and Flood Control District’s requirements under Major Drainage, Section
4.4.1.2. The boulders shall be placed on the prepared grade to the dimensions
shown on the plans. The boulders shall be thoroughly moistened before grouting.
Grout shall not be placed when the temperature is below 35 F or at 35 F and

falling. It shall be protected from freezing and cured as specified in Section 30.00,
CONCRETE WORK.
35.02.6 Filter Blanket Filter fabric is not a complete substitute for granular bedding. Per
USDCM Table MD-12, granular bedding shall be required as follows.
TABLE 35.2
THICKNESS REQUIREMENTS FOR GRANULAR BEDDING
Minimum Bedding Thickness (Inches)
Riprap Designation Fine Grained Soils* Course Grained Soils**
Type I Type II Type II
VL, L 4 4 6
M 4 4 6
H 4 6 8
VH 4 6 8
* May substitute one 12-inch layer of Type II bedding. Substitution of one layer of Type II
bedding shall not be permitted at drop structures. Use of a combination of filter fabric and Type
II bedding at drop structures is acceptable, see Section 4.4.4.1 of the USDCM, Volume I, Major
Drainage, for use of filter fabric at drop structures.
** 50% or more by weight retained on the #40 sieve
When required, a filter blanket shall be placed on the prepared slope or area to the full specified
thickness of each layer in one operation, using methods which will not cause segregation. The
surface of the finished layer should be reasonably even and free from mounds or windows.
Additional layers of filter material, when required, shall be placed in the same manner, using
methods which will not cause mixture of the material in the different layers.

Measurement of riprap shall be on a square-foot basis of the specified thickness as shown on the
plans.
In the event the riprap is placed outside the specified limits, the Contractor may be required to
remove and dispose of the excess riprap at his expense.
Rip rap shall be paid for at the contract unit price per square foot. The contract price per square
foot for the riprap shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, and
equipment necessary to complete the work.

36.00 ROAD CUTS
36.01 SCOPE 1
36.02 LICENSE 1
36.03 PERMITS 1
36.04 NOTIFICATION AND INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS 1
36.05 ROAD CUT DEFINITION 2
36.06 DISTURBED ROADWAY DEFINITION 2
36.07 REQUIREMENTS AND EXCEPTIONS 2
36.08 SMALL TRENCH CUT IN AN EXISTING ROADWAY 2
36.09 TRENCHES CROSSING A ROADWAY 3
36.10 TRENCHES WITHIN A ROADWAY 3
36.11 POTHOLES FOR LOCATES OR SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATIONS
IN ASPHALT PAVEMENTS 5
36.12 POTHOLES FOR LOCATES OR SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATIONS
IN CONCRETE PAVEMENTS 5
36.13 AMOUNT OF UNPAVED ROADWAY TRENCH 6
36.14 TRENCHLESS TECHNOLOGY-BORES AND MISSILES 6
36.15 TRAFFIC SIGNAL RESTORATION 6
36.16 TRAFFIC SIGNAGE AND PAVEMENT MARKINGS RESTORATION 7
36.17 PUBLIC SAFETY 7
36.18 MINIMUM PAVEMENT STANDARDS 7
36.19 SMOOTHNESS CRITERIA 7
36.20 WARRANTY PERIOD 8
36.21 LANDSCAPING and IRRIGATION WITHIN PUBLIC RIGHT OF WAY 8
SECTION 36.00 ROAD CUTS
36.01 Scope
This section is designed to help the contractor, engineer, project manager, HOA, or utility
company to understand what restorations will be required if a new or existing street, or Right-of-
Way in the City of Aurora is cut. The Public Works Director is authorized under the Aurora City
Code and the Colorado Revised Statutes (“C.R.S.”) 38-5.5-106 to set standards for public
roadways in the City of Aurora. The following standards are adopted to maintain the esthetics,
ride quality, structural integrity, safety and life cycle of new and existing City of Aurora
Roadways.
36.02 License
All contractors working in the City of Aurora’s public right-of-way are required to be licensed
and bonded by the City of Aurora.
36.03 Permits
All contractors working in the City of Aurora’s public right-of-way, including Landscapers and
HOAs (excludes work that does not require excavation or construction of above grade facilities),
are required to obtain a permit from the Public Improvement Inspections Permit Counter, Suite
2400, prior to any site construction. For all work other than city projects, the contractor doing
the work is responsible for pulling the permit, unless otherwise specified by state law, license
agreement, or franchise agreement (Comcast, Xcel Energy). Emergency repairs of utilities to
restore a service disruption may begin without a permit as long as the city is notified of the
extent of the work, and a permit is obtained the next working day. Permits for irrigation line
installation and repair shall be based on waterline trench fees for lines three-inch and larger and
on service line installation on lines less than three-inches in diameter.
36.04 Notification and Inspection Requirements

The contractor is required to notify and request inspection a minimum of 24 hours before
beginning work. Failure to call for inspection is grounds for rejection, removal and replacement
of work. Inspections are to be scheduled through the Public Improvement Inspections Permit
Counter at 303-739-7420. Inspectors’ work hours are Monday through Friday 7:30 AM to 4:00
PM. Inspection work outside of these hours, on weekends and holidays, will be billed as
overtime at the current overtime rate. When inspectors are on standby outside of normal
working hours, the Contractor will be billed at overtime rates. There is a minimum charge of 4
Road Cuts 36-1 9.2010

hours for weekends and holidays. Work on weekends or Monday holidays, must be requested by
close of business on Thursday.
36.05 Road Cut Definition

A road cut is defined as any excavation, break, removal, hole, or displacement of a roadway
surface caused by or resulting from: physical removal, mechanical removal, subsurface
investigations, or changes in subgrade moisture attributable to construction activities,
construction traffic, or utility related movement such as breaks, settlement or heaving.
36.06 Disturbed Roadway Definition

A disturbed roadway is defined as any roadway, or roadway surface that is displaced, cut,
heaved, settled, cracked, or eroded as a result of construction related activities, including but not
limited to, repairs or failures of utilities. Road surfaces include but are not limited to dirt, gravel,
millings, asphalt, and concrete.
36.07 Requirements and Exceptions

All road cuts or other roadway disturbances within the City of Aurora’s public right-of-way shall
be repaired or restored according to the standards specified in this Section 36.00. There might be
additional requirements specified elsewhere in the Roadway Design and Construction
Specifications.
Any exceptions to these standards for road cut restorations must be approved in writing by the
City Engineer or his assignee.
36.08 Small Trench Cut in an Existing Roadway

This section is generally reserved for small road cuts from utility locates, water line repairs,
sewer line repairs, electrical line repairs, gas main, phone lines, fiber optic lines, cable lines or
service line repairs with damage to asphalt pavement areas less than 500 square feet. Unless pre-
approved, all small trenches must be closed and temporarily resurfaced by the end of the
workday. Trenches in existing roadways shall be backfilled with compacted native materials or
with a pre-approved flowable fill material, and the surface restored to use by the end of the
workday through the use of hot patch asphalt, cold-mix asphalt or steel plate. (Plating is not
allowed between October 15, and April 15.)
Final surface restoration shall be completed within 48 hours of temporary surface placement
excluding curing of concrete. For roadways where concrete is involved, high early strength
concrete may be required. For damaged or disturbed concrete pavements, sidewalks, curbs,
Road Cuts 36-2 9.2010

gutters, cross pans, fillets, handicap ramps, etc., the entire panel must be removed and replaced,
unless a variance is granted by the City Engineer or his assignee.
If more than 500 square feet of existing roadway is disturbed (from single street cuts on arterial
or collector streets to multiple street cuts on local streets) within a single block, the construction
area shall be milled and overlaid by the end of the project or as directed by the City Engineer.
The mill and overlay shall encompass all of the disturbed asphalt areas in a generally rectangular
shape. See Subsection 36.10 for additional requirements. Standard trench patching shall be
required immediately following the initial road cut(s). Should the disturbed pavements be
limited to a small or single area, the City Engineer or the Public Improvement Inspections
Manager may reduce the required pavement areas.
36.09 Trenches Crossing a Roadway

Unless otherwise approved in writing by the City Engineer, all trenches crossing a roadway shall
be perpendicular to the direction of travel. The sides of the trench shall be saw cut smooth a
minimum of two-foot from the edge of the trench. The road surface shall be replaced in
accordance with Standard Detail S10.2, matching the existing pavement grade and maintaining
proper drainage. In concrete roads, the pavement thickness is the same as existing but the panel
must be doweled into the existing pavement as shown in the standard details. Unless otherwise
approved, all cuts in asphalt road surfaces that are less than 3-years old shall be milled and
overlaid with approved materials ten-feet on both sides of the trench for local roadways and a
minimum of 100-feet on both sides of the trench for collector and arterial roadways.
36.10 Trenches within a Roadway

36.10.1 Longitudinal trenches within a roadway shall be straight and will generally be a
consistent distance from either the centerline of the road or flow line, as specified.
Meandering will not be allowed. All pavements shall be saw cut with a minimum
of two-foot beyond the edge of the trench prior to patching. If the distance between
the edge of the trench and the lip of gutter, cross pan or edge of pavement is less
than 6 feet, all pavement to the lip of gutter, cross pan or edge of pavement shall be
removed and replaced. At a minimum, removed asphalt pavements shall be in
accordance with Standard Detail S10.2.
36.10.2 Pavements within arterials and collectors shall have the final repairs completed
within 24 hours of the completion of the work requiring road cut unless the City
Engineer grants an exception in writing. All permanent repairs and temporary
patches will restore the pavement to existing or better conditions than existed prior
Road Cuts 36-3 9.2010

to construction. Temporary patches in arterial and major collectors are to be
completed by the end of each working day.
36.10.3 Final repairs of pavements within local streets shall be completed within 5 days of
the completion of the work requiring road cut unless the City Engineer grants an
exception in writing. At no time, will more than 800 feet of trench be allowed to be
un-restored or temporarily patched. All patches are to restore the pavement to
existing or better condition than existed prior to construction.
36.10.4 In collector and arterial roadways whose surface is more than 3-years old, a
minimum 12-foot wide mill and overlay to a depth of 2 inches is required for the
length of the trench before the end of construction. Where the trench straddles two
or more traffic lanes, both lanes will be milled and overlaid to a depth of 2-inches
for the length of the trench before the end of construction or as specified by the City
Engineer or his assignee.
36.10.4.1 Local streets shall be patched in accordance with Standard Detail S10.1 and
S10.2. Where multiple trench cuts occur in the street, the construction area
shall be milled and overlaid by the end of the project or as directed by the City
Engineer. The mill and overlay shall encompass all of the disturbed asphalt
areas in a generally rectangular shape.
36.10.5 In collector and arterial roadways whose surface is less than 3-years old, the half
of the roadway disturbed by construction shall be milled and overlaid to a depth of
2 inches for the length of the trench before the end of construction or as specified
by the City Engineer or his assignee. This restoration section shall extend from the
centerline of the roadway to the lip of the gutter or pan. Should the road surface on
both sides of the centerline be damaged as a result of construction activities, the
entire surface of the roadway shall be milled and overlaid as directed by the City
Engineer or his assignee.
36.10.5.1 Local streets shall be patched in accordance with Standard Detail S10.1 and
S10.2. Where multiple trench cuts occur in the street, the construction area
shall be milled and overlaid by the end of the project or as directed by the City
Engineer. The mill and overlay shall encompass all of the disturbed asphalt
areas in a generally rectangular shape.
36.10.6 At no time will more than 800 feet of road be disturbed and unavailable for the
public use unless approved in writing by the City Engineer.
Road Cuts 36-4 9.2010

36.10.7 All final road restorations shall be completed within 24 hours for arterials and 4-
lane collectors, 48 hours for 2-lane collectors and 5 days for locals. Failure of the
contractor to perform the required restorations on time may result in the work being
done through the city with the project owner/contractor responsible for all costs.
Failure to remit payment for those charges within 30 days of written notice may
incur additional finance charges, project acceptance delays and collection fees.
36.11 Potholes for Locates or Subsurface Investigations in Asphalt

Pavements
Unless otherwise approved in writing by the City Engineer, potholes for utility locates shall be
done by means of a 3 to 6-inch diameter core drill through the existing roadway surface. Cuts in
asphalt roadways with a surface disturbance less than 1-square foot shall be repaired using pre-
approved pavement materials with an infrared surface treatment. Should there be more than 5
surface cuts, including any previous cuts, or a single disturbed area greater than 1-square foot, or
should the area require extensive repair, the entire disturbed area shall be milled to a depth of 2
inches and re-paved per City Standards. Paving shall be a minimum of 50 feet in length and a
minimum of 12 feet in width or as directed by the Public Improvement Inspections observer.
All small subsurface excavations are to be backfilled using a pre-approved flowable fill material.
The use of sand, soil, pea gravel, bedding material, or any other material that is not pre-approved
for this type of application by the Aurora Materials Testing Laboratory or cannot flow to fill the
entire void, will not be allowed.
36.12 Potholes For Locates or Subsurface Investigations in Concrete

Pavements
Unless otherwise approved by the City Engineer in writing, potholes for utility locates shall be
done by means of a 3 to 6 inch diameter core drill through the concrete surface. Cores larger
than 6 inches in diameter or open excavations shall be repaired as directed by the Public
Improvement Inspections observer. Cores in concrete pavement shall be plugged using a pre-
approved fast setting pavement concrete. More than 5 cuts in a concrete pavement, including
any previous cuts, or a single disturbed area greater than 1 square foot, shall require the entire
panel to be removed and replaced. For sidewalks, curbs, gutters, fillets, handicap ramps and
other small concrete placements, the Public Improvement Inspections observer shall determine
the extent of replacement if only one small core is performed. Should the concrete section/panel
have more than one core, including any previous core, the entire section/panel shall be removed
and replaced unless otherwise directed in writing by the City Engineer or his assignee.
Road Cuts 36-5 9.2010

All small subsurface excavations are to be backfilled using a pre-approved flow fill material.
The use of sand, soil, pea gravel, bedding material, or any other material that is not pre-approved
by the Aurora Materials Testing Laboratory or cannot flow to fill the entire void to prevent
settlement and provide proper load bearing character, will not be allowed.
36.13 Amount of Unpaved Roadway Trench

Unless otherwise approved by the City Engineer in writing, at no time shall more than 800-feet
of a trench or trenches be without final restoration and useable by the public. Situations other
than a temporary surface patch, approved by the Public Improvement Inspections observer, due
to weather or the need to gain access for final tie in work must be approved in writing by the City
Engineer or his assignee prior to the road surface being cut. Before paving, the contractor or the
project owner shall demonstrate passing compaction density tests by the use of written field test
notes from the Geotech doing the testing and passing a proof roll as specified in Section 20.06.9
of the City of Aurora Roadway Specifications. Official testing on the roadway surface and
subsurface conditions need to be delivered to the Aurora Materials Testing Laboratory within 7
days of installation and restoration.
36.14 Trenchless Technology – Bores and Missiles

Trenchless construction using missiles, rams, unguided bores, or any other type of limited
control device is not allowed in the City of Aurora right-of-way. Only machines with fully
controlled boring head are permitted.
The individual contractor shall warranty the work for a period of 10 years for heave or
settlement. In areas where the exact depth and location of sewer mains or services is not known,
the contractor shall pothole to determine the depth or shall have a TV video survey done of the
sewer line or service, prior to construction. The contractor shall again video survey the sewer
line or service after construction is complete to demonstrate the lines have not been damaged. A
videotape of the before and after conditions shall be submitted to the city within 30 days of
completing boring operations.
36.15 Traffic Signal Restoration

Any and all damage, to traffic signal poles, lines, and loop detectors shall be immediately
reported to the Public Improvement Inspections observer. Unless otherwise approved by the
City Engineer or City Traffic Engineer, all repairs shall be made immediately. If additional
active traffic control is required due to the damage caused by construction activity, it shall be at
the expense of the contractor who damaged the facility.
Road Cuts 36-6 9.2010

36.16 Traffic Signage and Pavement Markings Restoration
Unless otherwise specified by the City Traffic Engineer, all signage and striping shall be restored
to existing or better condition within 24 hours. Missing or damaged markings and signs that may
pose a serious risk to the traveling public shall be repaired or restored immediately.
36.17 Public Safety

The contractor is responsible for maintaining a clean, neat and safe work site at all times. The
safety of the public is the first and foremost concern of the City. The contractor shall take all
steps to protect the health, life, property and safety of the public, City staff and contracting staff.
To that end, the following shall be adhered to when working in a City roadway:
1. Traffic control plans shall be submitted to and approved by the City Traffic Engineer at
the time a permit is requested. Prior to any work in the City roadway, the approved plan
shall be implemented.
2. Any and all holes in City right-of-way will be backfilled at the end of the working day. If
the work is scheduled to extend beyond a single day, the construction area may be kept
open with approval of the City Traffic Engineer. If allowed to remain open, the
construction area shall be secured from public access through the use of construction
fences, concrete barricades, or lighted barricades (panel, barrel or sawhorse). No work
will be allowed in arterial roadways between the hours of 6:00 AM and 8:30 AM, and
3:30 PM to 6:30 PM.
3. All trenches in excess of 2-feet deep, in or adjacent to an active roadway shall be secured
from the traveling public by the use of temporary concrete barricades.
4. Work hours will be in accordance with Section 146-1802 of the City Code. Work hours
will typically be limited to 7:00 AM to 5:00 PM for heavy construction unless work is
being done on an emergency basis to restore lost utility service to existing customers or
done within a busy collector or arterial where the City Traffic Engineer has imposed
restrictions on work hours.
5. At no time will an excavation remain open over a weekend without the express written
approval of the City Engineer or City Traffic Engineer.
6. At no time will an excavation be allowed to remain open endangering the public,
contractors or City staff.
36.18 Minimum Pavement Standards

All pavement materials, construction methods, construction practices and materials testing shall
be in conformance with the Roadway Design & Construction Specifications latest edition.
36.19 Smoothness Criteria

Unless otherwise specified, surface variation of pavement repairs will not deviate by more than
3/16-inch in 10 feet. Settlement adjacent to newly repaired road cuts will be considered damage
Road Cuts 36-7 9.2010

incidental to the road cut and must be included in the approved repair. In the event the proper
smoothness or matching of existing pavement cannot be maintained due to existing roadway
wear or condition, the damaged pavement section shall be repaired or removed and replaced as
directed by the Public Improvement Inspections observer.
36.20 Warranty Period

Unless otherwise approved by the City Engineer in writing, all repairs will be warranted against
defects in material, workmanship or settlement for a minimum of one year from the date of
initial acceptance in accordance with Section 7.12 of the Roadway Design & Construction
Specifications. Repairs to property associated with utility repair, maintenance or installation
shall be for a minimum of two years per Section 138-113 of the City Code.
36.21 Landscaping and Irrigation within Public Right-of-Way

Unless otherwise specified by a franchise agreement or license agreement, all construction
related work in public right-of-way will be permitted. Damages to the right-of-way or City
owned facilities, such as, but not limited to, signs, street lights, signal lights wiring, conduits,
walkways, bike paths, retaining walls, inlets, or curb and gutters, will be the financial
responsibility of the Contractor or HOA associated with the work.
Road Cuts 36-8 9.2010

40.00 SEEDING
40.01 SCOPE
40.02 MATERIALS
40.04 PERMISSIBLE PLANTING TIMES
40.05 MAINTENANCE
40.06 SEED GERMINATION INSPECTION
SECTION 40.00 SEEDING
40.01 Scope
Seeding shall consist of furnishing and drilling-in, placing, or sowing seed at locations shown on
the plans, or as designated, in conformity with the requirements of these specifications.
40.02 Materials
40.02.1 Seed All seed shall be furnished in bags or containers clearly labeled to show the
name and address of the supplier, the seed name, the lot number, net weight, the
percent of weed seed content, and the guaranteed percentage of purity and
germination. All brands furnished shall be free from such noxious seeds as Russian
or Canadian thistle, European bindweed, Johnson grass and leafy spurge. The
Contractor shall furnish to the Project Manager signed statements certifying that the
seed furnished is from a lot that has been tested by a recognized laboratory for seed
testing within six months prior to the date of delivery. Seed which has become wet,
moldy, or otherwise damaged in transit or in storage will not be acceptable.
Seed and seed labels shall conform to all current state and federal regulations and
will be subject to the testing provision of the Association of Official Seed Analysis.
If seed available on the market does not meet the minimum purity and germination
percentages specified, the Contractor must compensate for a lesser percentage of
purity and germination by furnishing sufficient additional seed to equal the specified
product. Product comparison shall be made on the basis of pure live seed in
pounds. Seed shall conform to the mixtures indicated below, or as approved by the
Project Manager.
Pure Live Seed Per Acre Lbs./Acre % Germination
MIXTURE A
Smooth Brome Grass 12 80

Crested Wheat (Fairway Strain) 8 85
Blue Grama 4 80
Wild Flower 3 90
Seeding 40-1 9.2010

MIXTURE B
Wild Flower 3 90
Bluestem 5 90
Rye Grass 20 90
MIXTURE C
30/60 Blend Kentucky Bluegrass 100 95

Blend and Fescue
40.02.2 Fertilizer and Organic Matter Treble super phosphate (18-46-0) will be used
on all soil to be seeded. The rate of application shall be 250 lbs./acre. Organic
matter is defined as compost, peat moss, and aged manure mixtures, or any
combination of the above materials. The rate of application shall be 3 cu. yd. per
1000 sq. ft. to be seeded.

Preparatory to seeding, all irregularities in the ground surface, except the saucers for trees and
shrubs, shall be removed. The surface shall then be brought to the desired line and grade.
Fertilizer and organic matter shall be used wherever there is not any suitable topsoil that can be
moved back in place after the earthwork is complete. The organic matter and fertilizer shall be
applied uniformly to the soil and rototilled or disked 6" into the soil to be seeded. Necessary
measures shall be taken to prevent the formation of low places and pockets where water will
stand. Immediately prior to seeding, the ground surface shall be lightly tilled or hand worked
into an even and loose seed bed having no lumps or stones over 3".
Seeding may be accomplished by means of mechanical power-drawn drills followed by packer

wheels, broadcast-type seeders, or another method if approved by the Project Manager.
Mechanical power-drawn drills shall have depth bands set to maintain a planting depth of at least
1/4". All seed sown by broadcast-type seeders shall be "raked in" or otherwise covered with soil
to a depth of at least 1/4" and rolled to obtain a firm seed bed. Water shall be applied when
necessary.
Seed shall not be drilled or sown during windy weather or when the ground is frozen or
otherwise untillable. When a seed drill is used, it shall be set to space the rows not more than 7"
Seeding 40-2 9.2010

apart. Hand method of broadcasting seed will be permitted only on small areas not accessible to
the machine method.
Seed of different sizes for mixtures to be drilled shall be sown from at least two separate hoppers
adjusted or set to provide the coverage of the planted mixtures specified.
To protect newly-seeded areas mulch shall be applied. Mulch shall be applied at a rate of 2 1/2
tons per acre and shall be attached by an approved method suitable for the type of mulch used.
Mulch shall be spread uniformly, in a continuous blanket, after seeding is complete. Mulch shall
be clean, weed and seed free, long stemmed grass or hay, or long stemmed straw of oats, wheat
or rye. At least 50% of mulch, by weight, shall be ten inches or longer. Mulch shall be spread by
hand or blower-type mulch spreader. Mulching shall be started on the windward side of
relatively flat areas or on the upper part of a steep slope and continued uniformly until the area is
covered. The mulch shall not be bunched. Immediately following spreading, the mulch shall be
anchored to the soil by a v-type wheel land packer or a scalloped-disk land packer designed to
force mulch into the soil surface a minimum of 3 inches. All seeded areas shall be mulched after
seeding on the same day as the seeding.
If observation indicates that strips wider than the specified space between the planted rows have
been left, or other areas skipped, the Project Manager may require immediate resowing of seed in
such areas at the Contractor's expense.
40.04 Permissible Planting Times

Normally, grass seeding shall be accomplished in one or another of two planting seasons within a
specified time. Seeding shall be performed between September 1 and October 1, or March 1 and
June 15. Any deviation from these dates must be with written consent of the Project Manager.
40.05 Maintenance
The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining and watering seeded areas for a period of six
weeks after the time of seeding. Areas in which there is not a satisfactory stand at the expiration
of the first four weeks of this period shall be reseeded. Sprinkling of the seeded areas shall be
carefully done in such manner as to avoid standing water surface wash, or scour. Areas seeded
and so maintained shall be protected against damage by vehicle and pedestrian traffic by the use
of barriers and appropriate warning signs.
Seeding 40-3 9.2010

40.06 Seed Germination Inspection
The warranty period for the seed mix shall begin at the time of final completion and extend for
the duration of forty-five (45) days. During this time, when germination is complete and plants
are visible, the engineer will perform a germination inspection. At this time, any areas which are
thin, weak, dead, or more than five (5%) percent in weeds, shall be rototilled and reseeded. All
washouts shall be reseeded immediately after the germination inspection. No partial acceptances
shall be made.

Seeding shall be measured by the acre for the seed mixture called for on the plans.
Accepted quantities of the dimensions and seed type specified will be paid for at the contract
price per acre, complete, in place, or as specified in the contract. The contract price per acre shall
include full compensation for all furnished labor, material, and equipment necessary to complete
the work and to maintain seeded areas as specified.
Seeding 40-4 9.2010

41.00 SODDING
41.01 SCOPE
41.02 MATERIALS
41.03 CONSTRUCTION
41.04 GUARANTEE
41.05 INSPECTIONS
SECTION 41.00 SODDING
41.01 Scope
The Contractor shall provide all labor, equipment, and material necessary to furnish and install
all sod as required by the drawings and specifications.
41.02 Materials
41.02.1 Sod Sod shall be a blended bluegrass sod or a bluegrass alternate mix and shall
match existing sod. Sod shall be free from diseases and weeds, have a healthy
appearance, have a soil mat of uniform depth, and be between 1" to 2".
41.02.2 Fertilizer and Organic Matter Treble super phosphate will be used on the soil
to be sodded. The rate of application shall be 10 pounds per 1000 sq. ft.
Organic matter shall be defined as compost, peat moss, aged manures, aged
sawdust, or any combination of the above materials. The rate of application shall be
10 pounds per 1000 sq. ft.
41.03 Construction
Preparatory to sodding, the top 6" of the surface shall be tilled and brought to the desired line and
grade. Fertilizer and organic matter shall be used wherever there is not any suitable topsoil that
can be moved back in place after the earthwork is complete. Fertilizer and organic matter shall
then be applied uniformly at the rate specified and be rototilled or disked 6" into the soil. The
Contractor shall lightly sprinkle the sod bed just prior to laying the sod. Sod shall be laid
together tightly with no gaps and rolled to a smooth and even surface free of bumps and
depressions. Immediately after installation, the sod shall be thoroughly watered. Settled sod
areas shall be pulled, regraded, and relaid.
41.04 Guarantee
The Contractor shall guarantee the life and good health of the sod installed by him for a period of
45 days from the date of approval of the work. Any areas deemed by the Project Manager to be
thin, weak, or dead shall be resodded at the Contractor's expense, according to these
specifications, prior to the end of the guarantee period. During the guarantee period, the
Contractor shall be responsible for any required erosion control, mowing, weeding, and watering
of the sod bed.
Sodding 41-1 9.2010

41.05 Inspections
When the Contractor is prepared for one of the required inspections, he shall give the Project
Manager 24-hour notice for the Project Manager to visit the site and perform the inspection. This
does not preclude the right of the Project Manager to make informal construction observation at
any time during the work of this section. The required inspections for which the Contractor must
notify the Project Manager are as follows.
41.05.1 Sodding Inspection When sodding operations are complete, the Contractor
shall notify the Project Manager and request a "sodding inspection" for approval in
order to begin the guarantee period. Any areas deemed by the Project Manager to
be thin, weak, or dead shall be replaced at this time. No partial acceptances shall be
made.
41.05.2 End-of-Guarantee Inspection Three days prior to the end of the guarantee
period, the Contractor shall notify the Project Manager and request an "end-of-
guarantee inspection." The Project Manager shall inspect the sod for coverage and
health at this time. Any areas deemed by the Project Manager to be thin, weak, or
dead shall be replaced at this time. No partial acceptances shall be made.

Measurement of sod shall be by the square foot. Sod shall be paid for at the contract price per
square foot for the area properly installed and accepted, and shall include soil preparation,
fertilizer, organic matter, sod, water, and any additional material or labor that may be required for
the good and healthy growth of the sodded areas.
Sodding 41-2 9.2010

42.00 MEDIAN COVER MATERIAL
42.01 GENERAL
42.02 MATERIALS
SECTION 42.00 MEDIAN COVER MATERIAL
42.01 General
This work shall consist of furnishing the materials, site preparation and material placement
required for the installation of the median cover material specified, all in accordance with these
Specifications and in reasonably close conformity with the lines, grades, and typical cross section
shown on the plans.
42.02 Materials
42.02.1 Pre-Emergent The pre-emergent shall by Oryzalin (Surflan AS), (3,5 dinitro-N4,
N4-Dipropylsulfanilamide) at an application rate of 4 quarts per acre.
42.02.2 Weed Suppression Fabric The weed suppression fabric shall be MIRAFI
140NS fabric or an equivalent approved by the Project Manager.
42.02.3 Rock for Median Cover Rock for median cover shall consist of washed river
rock. The percentage of wear, when tested in accordance with AASHTO T96, shall
be no more than 70. The grading requirements shall be as follows:
Passing 1 1/2" sieve 100%

Passing 3/4" sieve 0-5%
42.02.4 Concrete for Median Cover Class I concrete shall be used in accordance with
Section 30.00, CONCRETE WORK. All other requirements for concrete
construction contained in CONCRETE WORK shall apply unless stated otherwise
in this Specification.

42.03.1 Median Cover Material, Rock
42.03.1.01 General Median cover operations shall not be started until the underlying
surface has been compacted and treated with pre-emergent. The fabric and
rock shall be placed immediately after the soil surface has been treated. When
completed, the median cover will be a consistent depth of 2".
42.03.1.02 Pre-Emergent Application All surface vegetation shall be removed from

the area to be treated not more than 3 days before pre-emergent application.
Prior to pre-emergent application, the median shall be leveled and compacted

to 95% density according to AASHTO T99 or T180, depending on the soil
Median Cover Material 42-1 9.2010

type. The pre-emergent shall be applied according to the methods and
precautions recommended by the manufacturer.
The Contractor shall comply with all Colorado statutes and all local
ordinances or codes pertaining to the use and application of fungicides,
insecticides, herbicides, or other agricultural chemicals.
Care shall be exercised to prevent the drift of powder, spray, or vapor which
may damage crops, gardens, shrubs, or trees in the vicinity of the areas being
treated. Chemicals shall not be used where they may contaminate water used
for irrigation or drinking purposes.
The Contractor will be held responsible for any damage to plant growth
outside treatment areas attributable to carelessness or improper application of
the pre-emergent.
42.03.2 Median Cover Material, Concrete

42.03.2.01 General Concrete median cover material is to be installed adjacent to the
median turn bay as shown on Standard Detail S2.1 or as specified on the
plans. Prior to installation, the median shall be graded and compacted to 95%
density according to AASHTO T99 or T180, depending on the soil type.

Rock median cover material shall be measured by the square yard. Work shall include removal
of surface vegetation, compaction, weed suppression fabric, and pre-emergent.
Rock median cover material shall be paid for at the contract price per square yard, for material in
place, in an area properly treated in accordance with the foregoing requirements and upon
acceptance of the work performed.
The contract price per square yard shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor,
Concrete median cover material shall be measured by the square foot. Work shall include fine
grading, compaction, furnishing, installation, and finishing the concrete all in accordance to
specifications. Concrete median cover material shall be paid for at the contract price bid per
square foot. The contract price per square foot shall include full compensation for all labor,
Median Cover Material 42-2 9.2010

43.00 CHAIN LINK FENCE
43.01 SCOPE
43.02 MATERIALS
43.03 WORKMANSHIP
SECTION 43.00 CHAIN LINK FENCE
43.01 Scope
This section covers all work necessary for complete installation of the chain link fence, in-place
and ready for use.
43.02 Materials
43.02.1 General All materials shall be products of recognized, reputable manufacture
conforming to these Specifications. Materials shall carry a tag identifying the
manufacturer and, in the case of fabric and barbed wire, the class of zinc coating.
Used or rerolled materials, materials with a regalvanized finish, and open-seam
posts are not allowed. After fabrication, all materials shall be hot-dip galvanized to
a minimum zinc coating of 2.0 ounces per square foot of surface.
43.02.2 Fabric No. 9 gauge wire conforming to ASTM A-392, woven in a 2" diamond
mesh pattern, selvages twisted and barged. Galvanizing shall be Class 2. Fabric
shall also be polyvinyl chloride (PVC) coated in accordance with ASTM F-668.
Colors for PVC coatings shall be in accordance with ASTM F-934. See City Code
Section 146-1731, 146-1741 – 1743 for additional requirements.
43.02.3 Posts Standard lengths for setting in concrete in the ground unless Special
Conditions indicate otherwise.
43.02.3.01 Line Post: 2-inch Inside Diameter Standard Pipe, 3.65 pounds per linear
foot.
43.02.3.02 End, Corner, Line Brace Post and Line Post, and Line Post
Sleeve: 2 1/2" I.D. Standard Pipe, 5.79 pounds per linear foot.
43.02.3.03 Gate Posts: Up to 6 feet wide, 2 1/2" I.D. Standard Pipe, 5.79 pounds per
linear foot. 6 to 13 feet wide, 3 1/2" I.D., 9.11 pounds per linear foot.
43.02.4 Top Rail 1 1/4" I.D. Standard Pipe, 2.27 pounds per linear foot.
43.02.5 Bottom Reinforcing Wire Coil spring wire 0.177" minimum diameter. Tied to
fabric at a maximum spacing of 24" with approved tie clips.
Chain Link Fence 43-1 9.2010

43.02.6 Fabric Ties No. 9 gauge wire ties at a maximum spacing of one per foot of post
height.
43.02.7 Fittings Malleable steel, cast iron, or pressed steel to include extension arms for
barbed wire, stretcher bars and clamps, clips, tension rods, brace rods, hardware,
fabric bands, and fastenings. 45° bracket-type supports for the barbed wire.
Bracket supports for line posts shall be of pressed steel attached to malleable iron
bases with rivets; those for corner posts shall be malleable iron throughout.
43.02.8 Gates Fabricate frames of standard weight pipe 1 1/2 " inside diameter, weight
2.72 pounds per linear foot. Provide gates with all necessary malleable iron fittings,
braces, sag rods, hinges, and single or plunger-bar-type latches as required, and
semi-automatic outer latches to secure gates in open position. Arrange latches and
plunger bars for locking with padlocks. Brace gate diagonally with adjustable rods
to prevent sagging in conformance with the manufacturer's standard practice and as
approved.
43.03 Workmanship
43.03.1 Installation Erect fencing in straight lines between angle points by competent
workmen experienced in this type of construction. Erect in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations as approved and in accordance with these
Specifications. Post holes shall be a minimum depth of 3' below finished grade and
shall be 10" in diameter. Space posts not more than 10' on centers and in true lines.
Set posts plumb and to a depth of 2' - 9". Fill remainder of hole with concrete to
extend around the posts to a point 2" above finished grade. The top surface shall
have a crown watershed finish. Concrete shall be City of Aurora Class III. After
concrete has set, install accessories; fasten chain link fabric to end posts with
stretcher bars and clamps and line posts and top rail with wire or bands at
approximately 14" centers. Brace gate posts diagonally to adjacent line posts to
insure stability. Hang gates and adjust all hardware so that gates operate
satisfactorily from open or closed position.
43.03.2 Cleanup Upon completion of the fence installation, clean up all waste material
resulting from the construction. Spread excavated earth from post holes on the
adjacent area and grade smooth.

Fence installation shall be measured by the number of linear feet installed.
Fence installation or resetting shall be paid for at the contract unit price per linear foot. The
contract price per linear foot shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials,
and equipment necessary to remove, install, or reset specified fences.

44.00 UTILITY LOCATION GUIDELINES
44.01 GUIDELINES
SECTION 44.00 UTILITY LOCATION GUIDELINES
44.01 Guidelines
Proposed streetscapes shown in Figures 44.1 and 44.2 are conceptual only and are
recommendations for planning purposes. Exact locations should be coordinated with the
appropriate utility owners.
Utility Location Guidelines 44-1 9.2010

50.00 TRAFFIC CONTROL
50.01 DESCRIPTION
50.02 PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION
50.03 DURING CONSTRUCTION
50.04 AFTER CONSTRUCTION
50.05 TRAFFIC SIGNALS
SECTION 50.00 TRAFFIC CONTROL
50.01 Description
Traffic Control shall consist of furnishing and maintaining all barricades, signs, traffic control
devices, detours, temporary pavement, or personnel to conduct traffic safely through the
construction site, the conformity with these specifications and the Manual on Uniform Traffic
Control Devices (MUTCD) and the Colorado Supplement thereto. Traffic control shall include
accommodating the needs of pedestrians at sites.
50.02 Prior to Construction

50.02.1 The Contractor shall contact Traffic Operations Division at least 48 hours before
starting work on any arterial street, or within 400 ft. of a traffic signal, to secure
locations of any underground facilities. The Contractor shall be responsible for
the cost of repair to any such facilities damaged by his construction. Phone
Numbers are: Traffic Operations Division 303-739-7319, Signal Locates 303-
326-8200, Fax 303-739-7485.
50.02.2 Unless provided in the plans, the Contractor shall submit a traffic control plan to
Traffic Operations Division for approval at least 48 hours before the start of work.
Failure to provide a traffic control plan or obtain permission from Traffic
Operations Division may result in immediate work stoppage. If the Contractor
desires to revise an approved traffic control plan, the revision proposal shall be
submitted to Traffic Operations Division for review.
50.02.3 Unless otherwise indicated on the plans, when construction is likely to interfere
with or damage an official traffic control sign or device, the Contractor shall
notify Traffic Operations Division 48 hours in advance to have the sign or device
retrieved or relocated. Once construction has been completed, Traffic Operations
Division shall require two working days notice for resetting the signs or devices
prior to opening the project to traffic. The Contractor will be responsible for any
repairs or replacement of any sign or device missing or damaged.
50.03 During Construction

50.03.1 The Contractor shall not interfere with traffic between the hours of 7:00 a.m. to
8:30 a.m. and 3:30 p.m. to 6:00 p.m. on weekdays or at any time on weekends or
holidays without permission from Traffic Operations Division.
50.03.2 The Contractor shall provide a traffic control person, other than the Project
Superintendent, when called for in the plans or in the special conditions, or when
Traffic Control 50-1 9.2010

determined necessary by Traffic Operations Division. The Traffic Control Person
shall
Have traffic control as their primary duty;

Carry a valid Traffic Control Supervisor certificate and a valid Flagging
certificate (recognized by the Colorado Department of Transportation);
Be on the job site at all times during working hours. Check all traffic
control devices before and after the a.m. and p.m. rush hours, and
periodically throughout the remainder of the day and night;
Verify that all traffic control devices are in accordance with the Manual on
Uniform Traffic Control Devices, including the Colorado Supplement, and
that all traffic control devices are properly positioned and operating
according to the approved traffic control plans, or as directed by Traffic
Operations Division;
Maintain two-way traffic on existing pavement unless otherwise specified
by Traffic Operations Division;
Be on call 24 hours per day and provide home and emergency phone
numbers to Traffic Operations Division;
50.03.3 When traffic control is required within a signalized intersection involving an

arterial, there shall be a minimum of two off-duty uniformed City of Aurora
police officers required. On all other signalized intersections, only one off-duty
uniformed City of Aurora police officer will be required, unless otherwise
specified by Traffic Operations Division. Requests for officers may be made
through the Secondary Employment Office of the Aurora Police Department at
303-739-6269 or 303-739-6268, at least five days before needed. The Contractor
is to specify dates, hours, and the number of officers required. Cost of officers
will be at the Contractor's expense.
50.03.4 The Contractor shall not allow construction equipment, personal vehicles, or
construction materials to remain on or near the traveled lanes or at any location
that may interfere with the safe movement of traffic.
50.03.5 The cut or fill resulting from construction adjacent to traffic lanes shall be
temporarily sloped and shall have vertical hazard panel delineators with steady-
burn lights at the intervals specified on the traffic control plan, immediately
behind grading and removal operations, in order to safeguard the traveling public.
Any cut or fill 2" or greater in depth within 5' of a travel lane will require vertical
panels for edge-line delineation.

50.03.6 The Contractor shall provide access, acceptable to the property owners, to
existing driveways of businesses and homes in the project area.
50.03.7 The Contractor shall remove all dirt, mud, and debris from the travel lanes daily.
50.03.8 Construction traffic control signs or devices not in use shall be removed from the
pedestrian walkway (sidewalk). Laying the sign down in a horizontal position or
turning the sign parallel is not permitted on the sidewalk. For locations that do
not have sufficient right-of-way available to store the sign(s) or device(s), they
must be picked up or moved to an approved storage area. Signs that are placed in
the medians must be dismantled or laid down. Turning of the sign(s) is not
permitted. Sign(s) or device(s) left out facing traffic after work hours will be
confiscated. The Contractor will be responsible for the cost of removing the
sign(s) or device(s), at a minimum charge of $35.00 per sign or device, and will
be responsible for picking up the confiscated material.
50.03.9 Directional Arrow Boards Any four or six-lane arterial street lane closure
that exceeds one hour will require one directional arrow board per direction
closed. Requirements on all other streets will be determined by Traffic
Operations Division.
50.03.10 Open Pits and Trenches Open pits and trenches will not be allowed on city
streets or sidewalks without advance approval from Traffic Operations Division.
They will be backfilled daily or they may be covered with steel plates. Note:
steel plates (3/4 inch thick minimum) may not be used once the temperature
reaches the freezing zone or any time in the winter.
50.03.11 Installation and removal of temporary signing and striping shall be the
50.04 After Construction

The Developer/Contractor shall be responsible for all final street marking and signing as shown
on the signing and striping plans. The signing and striping shall be in place prior to opening the
project area to traffic. The Developer/Contractor shall notify Traffic Operations Division at least
two business days prior to opening the project area to traffic to inspect the signing and striping
for completeness. Any deficiencies shall be corrected before opening the project area to traffic.
Installation and removal of any existing or temporary striping and signing shall be the

50.05 Traffic Signals
When a construction project includes the relocation of any traffic signal equipment or
construction of a new signalized intersection, the work will be done by a qualified signal
contractor to the specifications of Traffic Operations Division.

INDEX
SECTION
AGGREGATE
Asphalt ...................................................................................................................................................... 24.02
Base .............................................................................................................................................. See GRAVEL
Cape Seal .................................................................................................................................................. 27.04.2
Chip Seal .................................................................................................................................................. 27.03.2
Hot Chip Seal ........................................................................................................................................... 27.05.2
Portland Cement Concrete ......................................................................................................................... 30.02
Shoulders ................................................................................................................................................... S13.1
Slurry Seal ............................................................................................................................................... 27.02.2
APPROVAL BLOCK ..................................................................................................................................... 2.03.4.02
ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVEMENT

Design .......................................................................................................................................................... 5.00
Design Mix ................................................................................................................................................. 24.03
Materials .................................................................................................................................................... 24.02
Minimum Depths .......................................................................................................................................... 5.07
Placement ................................................................................................................................................... 24.08
Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement ..................................................................................................................... 24.02
BASE COURSE ....................................................................................................................................... See GRAVEL
BEDDING, PIPE................................................................................................................................................... 34.01
BENCH MARKS ............................................................................................................................................. 2.03.4.07
CLEARING & GRUBBING ................................................................................................................................ 20.02
CONCRETE, PORTLAND CEMENT

Admixtures .............................................................................................................................................. 30.02.2
Curing ............................................................ 30.02.8, 30.11, 30.12, 30.13, & 31.02.4, 31.06.1, 31.06.2, 31.09
Elastic Modulus .................................................................................................................................... 5.09.4.04
Finishing ....................................................................................................................................... 30.14.2, 31.07
Joints ............................................................................................................................. 30.09, 31.02.3, & 31.10
Materials ......................................................................................................................................... 30.02, 31.02
Median Cover .......................................................................................................................................... 42.02.4
Minimum Depths .......................................................................................................................................... 5.07
Pavement Design .......................................................................................................................................... 5.00
Placing Concrete ............................................................................................................................. 30.06, 31.06
Pumping Concrete ...................................................................................................................................... 30.10
Vibrating ................................................................................................................................................. 30.06.2
CONNECTION WITH EXISTING ROADWAYS ............................................................................................. 4.05.8
CURB CUTS FOR DRIVEWAYS ................................................................................................... 4.02.4, S7.4 et seq
S13.1 refers to Standard Detail S13.1. This is similarly used throughout the Index.
-1-
INDEX
SECTION
CURB & GUTTER ........................................................................................................................... 4.02.2, S7.1 et seq
CURB RAMPS .................................................................................................................................. 4.02.3, S9.1 et seq
CURB RETURN SLOPES................................................................................................................................... 4.05.7
DRAFTING STANDARDS
Color .......................................................................................................................................................... 3.02.3
Lettering ....................................................................................................................................................... 3.02
Indexing ........................................................................................................................................................ 3.03
Mylar Submittal Acceptance ........................................................................................................................ 3.00
Photography............................................................................................................................................... 3.02.4
Plan Requirements ....................................................................................................................................... 3.01
Scale ............................................................................................ 2.03.2, 2.03.3, 2.03.4.03, 2.10.1.02, 2.11.1.06
Shading ..................................................................................................................................................... 3.02.3
DRAINAGE
Chases ....................................................................................................................................................... 4.03.6
Cross pans .................................................................................................................................................. 4.03.2
Drainage Reports ................................................................................................................ 2.02.6, 2.04.2, 2.04.3
Erosion Control ......................................................................................................................................... 4.03.5
Inlets .......................................................................................................................................................... 4.03.3
Manholes ......................... 2.05, 2.06, 25.05.3, 27.01.3.02, 27.02.3.06, 27.03.3.08, 27.05.3.03.8, 31.06, 31.10.2
Master Drainage Study ............................................................................................................................. 2.04.1,
DRAWING REQUIREMENTS .............................................................................................................................. 2.00
DRAWING SUBMITTALS .......................................................................................... See SUBMITTALS, Drawings
DRIVEWAYS
Arterial Curb Cuts ......................................................................................................................................... S7.5
Residential Curb Cuts ................................................................................................................................... S7.4
Commercial Curb Cuts ........................................................................................................... 4.02.4, S7.4 et seq
Profiles ..................................................................................................................................................... 4.05.2
EMBANKMENT
Benching .................................................................................................................................................. 20.06.7
Clearing and Grubbing ............................................................................................................................ 20.02.2
Embankment ............................................................................................................................................ 20.06.6
Material ................................................................................................................................................... 20.06.3
Compaction ............................................................................................................................................ 20.06.8
EMULSION
Cape Seal .................................................................................................................................................... 27.04
Chip Seal .................................................................................................................................................... 27.03
Hot Chip Seal ............................................................................................................................................. 27.05
Material ........................................................................................................................................... 27.01.3.03.1
Slurry Seal .................................................................................................................................................. 27.02
-2-
INDEX
SECTION
FABRIC
Weed Suppression ................................................................................................................................... 42.02.2
Filter Blanket ........................................................................................................................................... 35.02.5
FENCE, CHAIN LINK ......................................................................................................................................... 43.00
FERTILIZER
Seeding ....................................................................................................................................................... 40.00
Sodding ...................................................................................................................................................... 41.00
FILL ........................................................................................................................................... See EMBANKMENT
FILTER MATERIAL.. see FABRIC; see PUBLIC UTILITIES IMPROVEMENTS, RULES AND REGULATIONS
..................................................................................... REGARDING STANDARDS & SPECIFICATIONS
FLOWABLE BACKFILL .................................................................................................................................... 33.00
FLY ASH ........................................................................................................................................................... 30.02.9
FORMS ...................................................................................................................................................... 30.07, 31.05
GRAVEL
Construction (Base Course) ........................................................................................................................ 23.03
Materials (Base Course) ............................................................................................................................. 23.02
HORIZONTAL ALIGNMENT .............................................................................................................................. 4.04
HOT MIX ASPHALT PAVEMENT (HMAP ...................................................................................................... 24.00
INSPECTIONS
Testing .................................................................................................................... See MATERIAL TESTING
INTERSECTIONS .............................................................................................................................................. 4.05.6
JOINTING .......................................................................................................................................... See CONCRETE
LICENSES .............................................................................................................................................................. 7.02
MAPS
-3-
INDEX
SECTION
Key Map .................................................................................................................................................... 2.03.3

Vicinity Map ............................................................................................................................................. 2.03.2
MATERIAL TESTING
Agency ...................................................................................................................................................... 32.02
Asphalt ..................................................................................................................................................... 32.03.3
Concrete ................................................................................................................................................. 32.03.4
Concrete Pavement ..................................................................................................................................... 31.15
Contractor / Developer ................................................................................................................................ 32.04
Embankment-Compaction/Moisture........................................................................................................ 32.03.2
HBP ......................................................................................................................................................... 32.03.3
Personnel Qualifications .............................................................................................................................. 32.05
Soil ........................................................................................................................................................... 32.03.2
MEDIANS
Design Requirements................................................................................................ 4.04, 4.05, 4.08, S2.1 et seq
Pre-Emergent .......................................................................................................................................... 42.02.1
Weed Suppression Fabric ............................................................................................................... See FABRIC
MEDIAN COVER MATERIAL .......................................................................................................................... 42.02
MINIMUM PAVEMENT SECTIONS .................................................................................................................. 5.07
MODULUS OF SUBGRADE REACTION ........................................................................................................... 5.03
PARKING LOTS ................................................................................................................................................ 5.00.2
PAVEMENT WIDENING .............................................................................................................................. 4.04.3.03
PIPE
Steel, RCP, PVC, NRCP ................ See PUBLIC UTILITY IMPROVEMENTS, RULES & REGULATIONS
......................................................................................... REGARDING STANDARDS & SPECIFICATIONS
PRICE REDUCTION PROVISIONS

Cape Seal ................................................................................................................................................. 27.04.4
Chip Seal ................................................................................................................................................. 27.03.4
Concrete .................................................................................................................................................... 31.16
Hot Chip Seal .......................................................................................................................................... 27.05.4
Hot Mix Asphalt Pavement ........................................................................................................................ 24.14
Slurry Seal ............................................................................................................................................... 27.02.4
PRIVATE DRIVES .................................................................................................................................... 4.05.2, 4.07
PROFILES
Curb Return .......................................................................................................................................... 2.05.2.10
Design .......................................................................................................................................................... 4.05
Horizontal Curves, “Bubbles”, Cul-de-sacs .......................................................................................... 2.05.2.11
Intersection .................................................................................................................................... 4.05.4, 4.05.6
Offsite Design................................................................................................................................ 2.05.2, 4.05.9
Sanitary Sewer .......................................................................................................................... 2.05.2.12, 2.06.3
Storm Sewer ............................................................................................................................. 2.05.2.12, 2.06.3
Superelevated Street ............................................................................................................................. 4.04.4.05
Water Line ................................................................................................................................ 2.05.2.12, 2.06.3
-4-
INDEX
SECTION
PROOF ROLLING ............................................................................................................................................ 20.06.9
RAILINGS ............................................................................................................................................... 4.02.6, 4.02.7
REINFORCING STEEL ........................................................................................................................ 30.02.6, 30.08
RELATED CONSTRUCTION & SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................................................ 34.00
REMOVALS ........................................................................................................................................................ 20.05
RESET STRUCTURES ....................................................................................................................................... 20.07
RESILIENT MODULUS ........................................................................................................................ 5.00.6, 5.05.2
RETAINING WALLS ...................................................................... 2.07.1.09, 2.07.2.08, 2.07.2.10, 2.07.2.11, 4.02.7
RIPRAP ................................................................................................................................................................ 35.00
ROAD CUTS ......................................................................................................................................................... 36.00
SAMPLING ...................................................................................................................... See MATERIAL TESTING
SEALANT ................................................................................................................................................. 30.09, 31.10
SEEDING.............................................................................................................................................................. 40.00
SIDEWALKS ......................................................... 2.03.4.09, 2.05.1, 2.11.1.03, 4.02.8, 4.02.9.1, 30.01, 30.03.4, S7.3
Expansion Joints ....................................................................................................................................... 30.09.1
Finishing ...................................................................................................................................................... 30.14
Repairs ...................................................................................................................................................... 30.15.3
Tool Joints ................................................................................................................................................ 30.09.3
SIDEWALK CHASES .......................................................................................................................................... 4.03.6
SIGNING ......................................................................................................................................... 2.09, 4.04.8, 50.00
SLOPE PAVING .................................................................................................................................................. S16.1
SLURRY SEAL .................................................................................................................................................... 27.02
SODDING ............................................................................................................................................................. 41.00
STABILIZED SUBGRADE ................................................................................................................................. 22.00
STREET LIGHTING PLAN .................................................................................................................................... 2.11
STREET LIGHT POLICY ...................................................................................................................................... 4.09
STRENGTH COEFFICIENT-PAVING MATERIALS ......................................................................................... 5.09
-5-
INDEX
SECTION
STRIPING ......................................................................................................................... 2.06.1.09, 2.09, 4.04.8 50.00

Thermoplastic Pavement Markings ............................................................................................................. 29.00
SUBMITTALS
Drawings ..................................................................................................................................................... 2.00
Drainage Reports ................................................................................................................ 2.02.6, 2.04.2, 2.04.3
Pavement Design Reports ................................................................................................................... 5.01, 5.02
SUPERELEVATION ........................................................................................................................................... 4.04.4

Inlets ........................................................................................................................................................... 4.03.3
TACK COAT ....................................................................................................................................................... 24.07
THERMOPLASTIC PAVEMENT MARKINGS .................................................................................................. 29.00
TOLERANCES, PAVING ................................................................................................................................... 24.13
TOPSOIL .............................................................................................................................................................. 20.03
TRAFFIC .............................................................................................................................................................. 50.00
TRENCH PATCHING .................................................................................................................... 36.08, S10.1, S10.2
TRENCHLESS TECHNOLOGY ......................................................................................................................... 34.04
VALVE BOXES 2.06.1.06, 20.07.2, 20.06.4.01, 20.06.8, 24.13.1, 25.05.3, 27.01.3.02, 27.02.3.06, 27.03.3.08, 31.10.2
VERTICAL ALIGNMENT .................................................................................................................................... 4.05
-6-
LIST OF STANDARD DETAILS
No. of
Sheets Page
ROADWAY CLASSIFICATIONS AND TYPICAL CROSS-SECTIONS 18 S1
RAISED MEDIAN AND TURN LANES 11 S2
SIDEWALK CHASE 2 S3
CROSS PAN TYPE I 2 S4
CROSS PAN TYPE 2 2 S5
CROSS PAN TYPE 3 2 S6
CURB, GUTTER, SIDEWALK, CURB CUTS, PRIVATE CONCRETE PAN 6 S7
PEDESTRIAN WALKWAY 2 S8
CURB RAMPS, URBAN CENTER & TOD CURB RAMPS 13 S9
ASPHALT TRENCH PATCHING 2 S10
MANHOLE RING AND COVER ADJUSTMENT 1 S11
CURB OPENING INLET (TYPE R MODIFIED) 11 S12
RURAL LOW DENSITY ROADWAY 5 S13
INTERSECTION TYPE 1 LOCAL AND ARTERIAL, URBAN CENTER
& TOD INTERSECTION – TYPICAL 3 S14
SLOPE PAVING 1 S16
CONCRETE DRAINAGE PAN 1 S17
PEDESTRIAN / BICYCLE RAILING 4 S18
CONCRETE PAVEMENT JOINT DETAILS 4 S19
CONCRETE PAVEMENT TRANSITION TO ASPHALT PAVEMENT 1 S20
RANGE BOX SPECIFICATIONS 1 S21
PROJECT SIGN 1 S22
URBAN CENTER & TOD MIDBLOCK EMERGENCY SETUP 1 S23
BUS STOP INTERACTION WHERE REQUIRED IN TODs 1 S24

. . . . . . - - - - - - - STANDARD - - - - - - -.....
1. IN ACCORDANCE WITH CRS43-2-107(2) AND THE UNIFORM FEDERAL ACCESSIBILITY

STANDARDS, RAMPS SHALL BE PROVIDED AT ALL CORNERS OF STREET INTERSECTIONS
WHERE THERE IS EXISTING OR PROPOSED SIDEWALK AND CURB RAMPS SHALL ALSO BE
PROVIDED AT WALK LOCATIONS AT MID-BLOCK IN THE VICINITY OF HOSPITALS, MEDICAL
CENTERS, ATHLETIC STADIUMS, AND AT 'I" INTERSECTIONS OF TWO-LANE STREETS.
2. ALL WORK SHALL BE DONE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE "ROADWAY DESIGN &
CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS" OF THE CITY OF AURORA.
3. SPECIAL DESIGNS ARE REQUIRED WHEN GRADES ARE OVER 4% OR WHERE THE ANGLE OF
THE INTERSECTION IS LESS THAN 75" OR MORE THAN 105", OR FOR RADII OF GREATER
THAN 25 FEET, OR WHERE TRAFFIC SIGNALS ARE REQUIRED AT AN INTERSECTION.
4. THE ENTIRE RAMP AREA SHALL BE POURED MONOLITHICALLY, 6 INCHES THICK FROM PCR
TO PCR.
5. MINIMUM WIDTH OF RAMPS SHALL BE 6 FEET AND RAMP SLOPES SHALL NOT BE STEEPER
THAN 12: 1.
6. NORMAL GUTIER FLOW LINE AND PROFILE SHALL BE MAINTAINED THROUGH THE APRON
AREA.
7. A 1/2-INCH EXPANSION JOINT SHALL BE REQUIRED WHERE THE CONCRETE RAMP JOINS
ANY STRUCTURE, AND AT BOTH PCR'S.
8. DRAINAGE STRUCTURES SHALL NOT BE PLACED IN LINE WITH RAMPS. LOCATION OF THE
RAMP SHALL TAKE PRECEDENCE OVER LOCATION OF THE DRAINAGE STRUCTURE, EXCEPT
WHERE EXISTING DRAINAGE STRUCTURES ARE BEING UTILIZED IN THE NEW CONSTRUCTION.
EXPANSION JOINT
CONCRETE PEDESTRIAN
AT P.C.R.(TYP.) CURB
GRADE BREAK
DO NOT TOOL
TRUNCATED DOME
WARNING PANELS
9. TRUNCATED DOME WARNING PANELS SHALL BE INSTALLED ON EACH CURB RAMP .
3-24"X24" "CAST-IN- TACT" DETECTABLE WARNING PANELS WITH TRUNCATED DOMES (OR
APPROVED EQUAL) SHALL BE PLACED AS SHOWN IN THE RAMP ACCORDING TO
MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDED PROCESS. COLOR OF PANELS SHALL BE "BRICK RED ."
SEAL BUTIED JOINTS BETWEEN PANELS WITH LIKE COLORED SEALANT.
CITY OF AURORA, COLORADO

CURB RAMPS S9.1
---------------STANDARD--------------~
TRANSITION FROM 10" THICK APRON

TO 6" THICK RAMP IS 24" FROM w
z
FLOWLINE TOWARD BACK OF RAMP ::J
~
AND FROM PCR TO PCR. g
lL
=[
o "
. ·t.··· '.
APRO~
3
~ ... ,» , Y},
.. . .
'(!) , ()(cs ..
~
o....,
z
I~LOWLlN~
_T - - -
-~
0
CROSSPAN _APRON -
• FL 1
~- ~I I : : I I I I I I I I I I I
FLOWLINE
151 RAmUS
I
'-...
I ~@
11/ 1/111 11
TRUNCATED DOME
WARNING PANELS
(SEE DETAIL S9.
CONCRETE PEDE CURB
g' RADIUS
RADIUS POINT
GRADE BREAK
DO NOT TOOL
+
---
- --
CORNER OF
LOCAL TYPE 1. 2 & 3 AND LOCAL TYPE 1. 2 & 3 W,/ CROSSPAN

SCALE: 1"=5'

CURB RAMPS
S9.2
---------------STANDARD--------------~
TRUNCATED DOME
WARNING PANELS
(SEE DETAIL S9.4)
FL
15' RADIUS
JIIIIII!II I III.II"
ll) , II I
III11II 1I 111 1
EXPANSION JOINT
@ INLET
CONCRETE PEDESTRIAN CURB
~
yK { ~I
"
'"
+
RADIUS POINT
_ - '\ I 1/2" EXPANSION JOINT

@ PCR (TYP.)
CORNER OF
LOCAL TYPE 1. 2 &3 AND LOCAL TYPE 1. 2 & 3
SCALE: 1"=5'

CURB RAMPS
S9.3
~-------------STANDARD--------------~
<~
LOCAL lYPE 1,2
~J 11111 11 11111: iii :11111 111111 11 ~1

~~ 1111111111111:111 :1111111111 11 N
..... I"T "MuIUS
* 3-24"X24" CAST IN TACT

DETECTABLE WARNING
PANELS WITH TRUNCATED
DOMES . (OR APPROVED
EQUAL)
n:::
o
'''It x c~v 'kYe +
I
o
W - " 'i 1/2" EXPANSION JOINT
--.J
--.J
o
- -
- ---- -
- @ PCR (TYP .) CORNER OF
o
COLLECTOR AND LOCAL TYPE 1.2 & 3
SCALE: 1"=5'
CONCRETE PEDESTRIAN CURB '"\
~ ~2 ' -0"--" I~ 14
1 _
1-· I
6' - 0"
~2%
.. 1 1/2"
T
6" [
·:.·:. .
·· ....:.. oj ... 1 ,.~ . .
..•.:·.,
-:I.... : :~·.:. •
i ~ £/0
I ., .• .' . . . . • . . _.· .• 6!.
, ... (.i··;·.:
• .', . :.
,.:.-:··.-::-< ..,.,.,..
. .'. , ..., ..
.< ....jt
..:
SECTION A-A 16"

*TRUNCATED DOME WARNING PANELS NO SCALE
£J l
TOP OF PEDESTRIAN CURB
fit 12;JMAX~ I ' I ~121 M~

SECTION B-B
NO SCALE

CURB RAMPS S9.4
ID
---------------STANDARD--------------~
THREE #4 REBARS SHALL BE USED IN ALL CURB COLLECTOR

RETURNS WITH 25' OR LARGER RADII,
REBAR SHALL BE FROM PCR TO PCR
(SEE DETAIL S7.1)
TRUNCATED DOME
WARNING PANELS
(SEE DETAIL S9 .4) " 1111111111
FL
20' RADIUS
11 .5' RADIUS
NCRETE PEDESTRIAN CURB
/:;
n:: 8'-0" "2
o
I
U
I +
W
~
~ ~~~~ I '-----1/2 " EXPANSION JOINT
o @ PCR (TYP.)
u
CORNER OF
COLLECTOR AND COLLECTOR
SCALE: 1"=5'

CURB RAMPS S9.5
STANDARD---------------
THREE #4 REBARS SHALL BE USED IN ALL CURB
RETURNS WITH 25' OR LARGER RADII,
REBAR SHALL BE FROM PCR TO PCR COLLECTOR
(SEE DETAIL S7.1)
TRUNCATED DOME
WARNING PANELS
(SEE DETAIL S9.4)
FL
25' RADIUS
0,-('
--?~
14.5' RADIUS V--?"V~

-- -- 1/2" EXPANSION JOINT
@ PCR (TYP.)
x
(f)
CORNER OF
6 LANE ARTERIAL AND COLLECTOR
SCALE: 1"=5'
6 OF 10
CITY OF AURORA
CURB RAMPS S9.6
---------------STANDARD--------------~
CONCRETE PEDESTRIAN CURB)

EXPANSION JOINT~ GRADE BREAK
DO NOT TOOL (JYP)
(/11'5\
~ = -\ I
~~gHE~gj ~r; ~~~B - - =-= I IIIIII I I~

f~pS\D::'ALK ELEV ~~=;~
~~ _ _
+- I 'f~~; Iii"
-l
i
in
1 '----=+_ _. L . . . . . - - _
.-1111_1
i::i:::::::::i:i:;::iiiiiU:: .;
!mm!mmmm:::!l!!!!. ! EXPANSION JOINT
~i!j'Ij'I!i:lmil:Wmgmm
:;I!: ; II t::::!IIIIII::::::::
j:ij:;;:••• ;::;;itU. i .:::::;;:
~
I V--EXPANSION JOINT (1YP .)
J
TRUNCATED DOME
WARNING PANELS
(SEE DETAIL S9.4)
L 6'
MID-BLOCK RAMP

CURB RAMPS S9.7
DATE
---~~-
LOCAL TYPE 1,2 & 3 a..
STANDARD COLLECTOR ~
- 39' RAMP DEPTH
15'R@FL
48'
17'
20'R@FL
8' 8'
R.O.W. ~
5' t') 5' t')
.:0 " ~
C'!,
C'!,
w
w a..
a.. ~
~ --l
--l «
« u
o
u
g g
If)
o
If)
5' .. II .. I .. 8'.. I
fr:
U
a..
62'
20'
6 LANE ARTERIAL
25' RADIUS
10'
10'
R.O.W.~ t')
.:0
1. RAMP DEPTH SHALL BE BASED ON THE WIDTH OF THE WIDEST SIDEWALK

" w
COMING INTO THE CORNER. FIVE FOOT WALKS SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM RAMP a..
DEPTH OF 6'. WHEREVER 6" VERTICAL CURB & GUTIER IS USED, THIS ~
--l
RAMP DEPTH SHALL BE A MINIMUM OF 8.5'. ALL 8' AND 10' WALKS SHALL «
u
HAVE MINIMUM RAMP DEPTHS OF 8.5' AND 10.5' RESPECTIVELY. g
2. THE BACK OF THE RAMP SHALL BE CONCENTRIC WITH THE FLOWLINE RADIUS o
z
FROM PCR TO PCR. «
fr:
3. SIDEWALK RADII SHALL BE 100' FOR ARTERIALS, 75' FOR COLLECTORS, AND I
o
.fr: U
50' FOR LOCAL STREETS. If) W
f' --l
--l
4. THERE ARE OTHER STREET COMBINATIONS THAT ARE NOT SHOWN WHICH o
U
SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED TO THE ABOVE CRITERIA.
5' .. II .. I ....
8' II
LAYOUT OF DETACHED SIDEWALKS
TO RAMPS AT STREET CORNERS
NO SCALE

CURB RAMPS S9.8
---------------STANDARD--------------~
PRIVATE STREET OR ENTRANCE
1/2" EXPANSION JOINT --~

TRUNCATED DOME
WARNING PANELS
(SEE DETAIL S9.4)
"------ VERTICAL OR MOUNTABLE CURB
FL "
GRADE BREAK
DO NOT TOOL
tJ
w
'0.."'
0 "'''''-'''''
2%
''
6
0::: "2
I
(f)
- '" / +
()
:::i -- I"-----1/2"
CO
:J
0..
11 - @
EXPANSION JOINT
PCR (TYP.)
CORNER OF
PUBLIC STREET TO PRIVATE STREET OR ENTRANCE
SCALE: 1"=5'

CURB RAMPS S9.9
~-------------STANDARD--------------~
SEE TE -14 FOR LOCATION
OF ZEBRA CROSS-WALKS
INTERSECTION OF ZEBRA
CROSS- WALK AND FLOWLINE
(TYPICAL)-
TYPICAL 2'X10'
ZEBRA CROSSWALK
STRIPING
1/2" EXPANSION
JOINT @ PCR (TYP)
~
9:-~
~ ~
~
/ eJ.
~i'~
~'V«' TRUNCA TED DOME
/
WARNING PANELS
(SEE DETAIL S9.4)
CONCRETE PEDESTRIAN CUR
DIRECTIONAL RAMPS SHALL BE USED FOR
ALL RETURNS WITH RADII 25' OR GREATER.
DIRECTIONAL RAMP

CURB RAMPS S9.10
---------------STANDARD--------------~
NOTE:
REFER TO CITY OF AURORA DETAIL S9.4
FOR TRUNCATED DOME DETAILS AND
SECTION INFORMATION
VERTICAL
CURB & GUTTER----+--l
SEE sm. S7.1

ROW
HARDSCAPE
~
12' SIGNAL POLE PRIMARY LOCATION
OPTIONS (TWO POLES REQUIRED IF
SIGNAL POLE IS LOCATED ON THE
6' WING & BOC PCR. 2nd POLE IS FOR SIGNAL HEAD
TRANSITION AND/OR PEDESTRIAN CROSSING LIGHT)
SEE NOTE 1
GENERAL TRAFFIC
~I BOX LOCATION
ALTERNATE SIGNAL POLE

LOCATIONS IF PRIMARY~
LOCATIONS UNAVAILABLE
SEE NOTE 1 IF CONCRETE
IS IN THIS AREA.
d
LANDSCAPE/HARDSCAPE
NON-PEDESTRIAN AREA
SURFACE TREATMENT SHALL
BE DETERMINED DURING THE
SITE PLAN/CSP REVIEW
PROCESS AND IDENTIFIED ON 6' WING &
THE CIVL PLANS. ALSO BOC TRANSITION
TRUNCATED DOME (TYP)
LANDSCAPE/HARDSCAPE
SEE LIP DETAIL ON
NON-PEDESTRIAN AREA
FL DETAIL S9.4 "
~ 12' ~ 'J~~ . ~:2\t

I .._..:..: i : . :,~ : •.~; d
112'
~ >; " "' . I
8.7· ~8.8·-
[
IT
6"
2"6"£J ··· ·· f
SECTION A-A SECTION 8-8
1. PLACE SIGNAL POLE IN
BOX-OUT WITH 1/2" EXPANSION
JOINT
CITY OF AURORA, COLORADO URBAN CENTER & TOO

CURB RAMPS I S9.11
ATTACHED/DETACHED WALKS
~-------------STANDARD--------------~
NOTES:
1. IF COLORED PAVING IS NOT USED, THEN CONTINENTAL STRIPING
MUST BE USED, SEE TE-14
2. STRIPING AND STOP SIGN LOCATION SHALL MEET CURRENT MUTCD
STANDARDS.
3. PLACE SIGN POST WITHIN 4"0X12", SCH. 40, PVC PIPE WITHIN
SIDEWALK. PLACE PIPE FLUSH WITH TOP OF CONCRETE WALK.
ANGLED PARKING (TYP)
20' MIN. - J
l SEE NOTE 1
8'
f
T
~" EXPANSION JOINT
7'
R4' GENERAL TRAFFIC BOX LOCATION
I• TYPICAL INLET LOCATON
VERTICAL CURB & GUTTER ~ II

SEE SID. S7.1
~.. EXPANSION JOINT
7' I \ . ~ II · 1~'
PARALLEL PARKING (Ty?) I--l-- 6' SIDEWALK
II • • I 8' LANDSCAPE/
23' PLANT BED
MIN.
5' BIKE LANE

CURB EXTENSION S9.12
ANGLED/PARALLEL PARKING
~-------------STANDARD--------------~
8' /:.'
J2" EXPANSION JOINT t AI' M~N. "I ~" EXPANSION JOINT
lLJ
a..
«
•to)g
I()
a::
«
::c
to
lLJ
HARDSCAPE
a..
« TRUNCATED DOME I(TYP '0
rol~
o
z
«
-'
6 6
SECTION A-A
NOTE:
REFER TO CITY OF AURORA DETAIL S9.4
FOR TRUNCATED DOME DETAILS AND
SECTION INFORMATION

CURB RAMPS S9.13
MIDBLOCK RAMP
LIST OF TRAFFIC DETAILS
No. of
Sheets Page
TRAFFIC SIGNAL CONSTRUCTION STANDARD NOTES 1 TE-0
19 CONDUCTOR CABLE WIRING AND COLOR CODE 1 TE-CO
FOUNDATION FOR SIGNAL POLE WITH BOLT DOWN BASE 1 TE-1
FOUNDATION FOR EMBEDDED SIGNAL POLE 1 TE-2
PEDESTAL POLE FOUNDATION 1 TE-3
M-I CABINET FOUNDATION WITH FOOT PAD 1 TE-4
P-I CABINET FOUNDATION WITH FOOT PAD 1 TE-5
MAST ARM DESIGN DETAILS 5 TE-6
STRAIN POLE (WOOD OR STEEL) AND SPAN WIRE AND TETHER 1 TE-7
DETAILS
STRAIN POLE WITH DOWN GUYS 1 TE-8
POLE MOUNTED VEHICULAR & PEDESTRIAN SIGNAL HEADS 4 TE-9
CONDUIT PLACEMENT 4 TE-10
LOOP DETECTORS, STOP LINE, LEFT AND RIGHT TURNS 5 TE-11
SIGNING FOR SCHOOL CROSSWALKS & REDUCED SPEED 2 TE-12

LIMITS THROUGH SCHOOL AND SAFETY ZONES
STEEL SIGN TUBING INSTALLATION 1 TE-13
"ZEBRA" CROSSWALKS, CROSSWALK DETAILS, STRIPING 3 TE-14

SPACING & OTHER MARKINGS
SIGHT DISTANCE REQUIREMENTS 3 TE-15
TYPICAL STREET LIGHT PLACEMENT INTERSECTION, STREET 4 TE-18

LIGHT POLE LOCATIONS, TOD – URBAN CENTERS PEDESTRIAN
WALKWAY LIGHTING PLAN, PEDESTRIAN LIGHTING POLES

ASV Specene

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ASV Specene

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

ASV Specene

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SEPTEMBER 2010

Roadway Design and Construction Specifications

SECTION 1.00 INTRODUCTION

SECTION 2.00 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS AND PROCEDURES

SECTION 3.00 PLAN AND DRAFTING STANDARDS

SECTION 4.00 ROADWAY DESIGN AND TECHNICAL CRITERIA

Added Urban Center and TODs criteria and standards.

SECTION 5.00 PAVEMENT DESIGN

Added Urban Center and TODs criteria for pavement design.

SECTION 22.00 STABILIZED SUBGRADE (formerly LIME STABILIZED SUBGRADE)

SECTION 23.00 STREET CONSTRUCTION AGGREGATES

Added Measurement and Payment section.

SECTION 24.00 HOT MIX ASPHALT PAVEMENT

Surface tolerances were changed to be in conformance with the Colorado Department of

SECTION 25.00 ASPHALT PLANING

Added Measurement and Payment section.

SECTION 27.00 SURFACE TREATMENTS

This section is a total rewrite.

SECTION 30.00 CONCRETE WORK

Added Measurement and Payment section.

SECTION 31.00 CONCRETE PAVEMENT

Clarified the use of screeds.

SECTION 35.00 RIPRAP AND FILTER BLANKET

SECTION 40.00 SEEDING

Added Measurement and Payment section.

SECTION 41.00 SODDING

Added Measurement and Payment section.

SECTION 42.00 MEDIAN COVER MATERIAL

Added Measurement and Payment section.

SECTION 43.00 CHAIN LINK FENCE

Added Measurement and Payment section.

SECTION 45.00 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL ASSOCIATED WITH

SECTION 50.00 TRAFFIC CONTROL

Updated telephone numbers.

TABLE OF CONTENTS, LIST OF TABLES, LIST OF FIGURES, LIST OF NOMOGRAPHS,

Updated all of the data contained in the above references.

2.00 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS AND PROCEDURES

3.00 PLAN AND DRAFTING STANDARDS

4.00 ROADWAY DESIGN AND TECHNICAL CRITERIA

5.00 PAVEMENT DESIGN

7.00 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS

8.00 THROUGH 19.00 RESERVED

22.00 STABILIZED SUBGRADE

23.00 STREET CONSTRUCTION AGGREGATES

24.00 HOT MIX ASPHALT PAVEMENT

25.00 ASPHALT PLANING

27.00 SURFACE TREATMENTS

29.00 THERMOPLASTIC PAVEMENT MARKINGS

30.00 CONCRETE WORK

32.00 MATERIALS TESTING

33.00 FLOWABLE BACKFILL

34.00 RELATED CONSTRUCTION AND SPECIFICATIONS

35.00 RIPRAP AND FILTER BLANKET

36.00 ROAD CUTS

37.00 THROUGH 39.00 RESERVED

42.00 MEDIAN COVER MATERIAL

44.00 UTILITY LOCATION GUIDELINES

45.00 THROUGH 49.00 RESERVED

50.00 TRAFFIC CONTROL